DGC-2020HD

Digital Genset Controller

Configuration Instruction Manual

12570 Route 143 • Highland, Illinois 62249-1074 USA Publication

Tel +1 618.654.2341 • Fax +1 618.654.2351 9469300995, Rev E
www.basler.com • [email protected]
October 2019
 WARNING: California's Proposition 65 requires special warnings for
products that may contain chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Please note that
by posting this Proposition 65 warning, we are notifying you that one or
more of the Proposition 65 listed chemicals may be present in products
we sell to you. For more information about the specific chemicals found
in this product, please visit https://www.basler.com/Prop65.
9469300995 i

Preface
This instruction manual provides information about the configuration of the DGC-2020HD Digital Genset
Controller. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
• Device information and security settings
• Configuration via BESTCOMSPlus® and the front panel
• Communication settings
• Timekeeping
• Inputs and outputs
• Breaker management, synchronizer, bias control, and multiple generator management
• Alarm configuration
• Protection settings
• BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic
• Troubleshooting

Conventions Used in this Manual

Important safety and procedural information is emphasized and presented in this manual through
Warning, Caution, and Note boxes. Each type is illustrated and defined as follows.

Warning!

Warning boxes call attention to conditions or actions that may cause

personal injury or death.

Caution
Caution boxes call attention to operating conditions that may lead to
equipment or property damage.

Note
Note boxes emphasize important information pertaining to Digital
Genset Controller installation or operation.

DGC-2020HD Instruction Manual Catalog

Available instruction manuals for the DGC-2020HD are listed in Table 1.
Table 1. Instruction Manuals
Part Number Description
9469300993 Quick Start
9469300994 Installation
9469300995 Configuration (this manual)
9469300996 Operation
9469300997 Accessories
9469300998 Modbus® Protocol

DGC-2020HD Preface
ii 9469300995

12570 State Route 143

Highland IL 62249-1074 USA
www.basler.com
[email protected]
Tel: +1 618.654.2341
Fax: +1 618.654.2351

© 2019 by Basler Electric

All rights reserved
First printing: October 2016

Warning!

READ THIS MANUAL. Read this manual before installing, operating, or maintaining the DGC-2020HD.
Note all warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual as well as on the product. Keep this manual with
the product for reference. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, or service this system.
Failure to follow warning and cautionary labels may result in personal injury or property damage.
Exercise caution at all times.

Basler Electric does not assume any responsibility to compliance or noncompliance with national code, local code,
or any other applicable code. This manual serves as reference material that must be well understood prior to
installation, operation, or maintenance.

For terms of service relating to this product and software, see the Commercial Terms of Products and Services
document available at www.basler.com/terms.
This publication contains confidential information of Basler Electric Company, an Illinois corporation. It is loaned for
confidential use, subject to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in any
manner detrimental to the interests of Basler Electric Company and used strictly for the purpose intended.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual provide
data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design of all features
and options are subject to modification without notice. Over time, improvements and revisions may be made to this
publication. Before performing any of the following procedures, contact Basler Electric for the latest revision of this
manual.
The English-language version of this manual serves as the only approved manual version.

Preface DGC-2020HD
9469300995 iii

This product contains, in part, open source software (software licensed in a way that ensures freedom to run,
copy, distribute, study, change, and improve the software) and you are granted a license to that software under the
terms of either the GNU General Public License or GNU Lesser General Public License. The licenses, at the time
of sale of the product, allow you to freely copy, modify, and redistribute that software and no other statement or
documentation from us, including our End User License Agreement, places any additional restrictions on what you
may do with that software.
For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of this product, a machine-readable copy of the complete
corresponding source code for the version of the programs distributed to you will be sent upon request (contact
information is provided above). A fee of no more than our cost of physically performing the source code distribution
is charged.
The source code is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY REPRESENTATION or
WARRANTY or even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Refer to the source code distribution for additional restrictions regarding warranty and copyrights.
For a complete copy of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 or GNU LESSER GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 refer to www.gnu.org or contact Basler Electric. You, as a Basler
Electric Company customer, agree to abide by the terms and conditions of GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991 or GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999, and as such
hold Basler Electric Company harmless related to any open source software incorporated in this product. Basler
Electric Company disclaims any and all liability associated with the open source software and the user agrees to
defend and indemnify Basler Electric Company, its directors, officers, and employees from and against any and all
losses, claims, attorneys' fees, and expenses arising from the use, sharing, or redistribution of the software.
Review the software website for the latest version of the software documentation.
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
The following statement applies only to the fontconfig library:

fontconfig/COPYING

Copyright © 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007 Keith Packard

Copyright © 2005 Patrick Lam
Copyright © 2009 Roozbeh Pournader
Copyright © 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright © 2008 Danilo Šegan
Copyright © 2012 Google, Inc.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of the author(s) not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.
The authors make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
without express or implied warranty.

THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

DGC-2020HD Preface
iv 9469300995

Preface DGC-2020HD
9469300995 v

Revision History
A historical summary of the changes made to this instruction manual is provided below. Revisions are
listed in reverse chronological order.
Visit www.basler.com to download the latest hardware, firmware, and BESTCOMSPlus® revision
histories.
Instruction Manual Revision History
Manual
Change
Revision and Date
E, Oct-19 • Added support for BESTCOMSPlus version 4.00.00
• Removed Rev Letter from all pages
• Changed sequential numbering to sectional numbering
• Moved Instruction Manual Revision History into Preface
• Removed standalone Revision History chapter
D2, Apr-19 • Updated Proposition 65 statement
D1, Oct-18 • Added Proposition 65 statement
D, Jul-18 • Added style options for DIN Rail and Rear Panel mounting configurations.
• Added “RPM Checksum” setting.
• Added description for “Voltage Sensing Fail” function.
• Corrected descriptions for Dead Gen Close Enable settings. Dead bus close
is not required for dead gen close.
• Corrected descriptions for Mains fail status inputs: Power from Gens,
Transferring to Mains, and Power from Mains.
• Removed “LCD is blank and all LEDs are flashing…” from Troubleshooting
chapter.
C, May-18 • Maintenance release
B, May-17 • Added support for firmware version 2.04.00 and BESTCOMSPlus version
3.17.00
• Improved description of email setup
A, Dec-16 • Added Group Start and Group Stop Requests to the Troubleshooting chapter
• Expanded coverage of the Emergency Stop Programmable Function
• Added caution statement about nonvolatile memory
—, Oct-16 • Initial release

DGC-2020HD Preface
vi 9469300995

Preface DGC-2020HD
9469300995 vii

Contents
Device Information ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Configuration through the Front Panel ....................................................................................................... 3-1
BESTCOMSPlus® Software ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Communication .......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Device Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Timekeeping ............................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Engine Sender Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
Contact Inputs ............................................................................................................................................ 9-1
Analog Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 10-1
Contact Outputs ....................................................................................................................................... 11-1
Breaker Management............................................................................................................................... 12-1
Synchronizer ............................................................................................................................................ 13-1
Bias Control .............................................................................................................................................. 14-1
Multiple Generator Management ............................................................................................................. 15-1
Alarm Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 16-1
Protection ................................................................................................................................................. 17-1
Time Curve Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 18-1
Configurable Protection............................................................................................................................ 19-1
Configurable J1939 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detection .............................................................. 20-1
BESTlogic™Plus ...................................................................................................................................... 21-1
Tuning PID Settings ................................................................................................................................. 22-1
Exhaust Treatment ................................................................................................................................... 23-1
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 24-1
BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool .................................................................................................. 25-1

DGC-2020HD Preface
viii 9469300995

Preface DGC-2020HD
9469300995 1-1

1 • Device Information
DGC-2020HD identification labels, firmware version, serial number, and style number are found on the
Device Info screen in BESTCOMSPlus®.

Style Number
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Style Number
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through front panel
The model number, together with the style number, describes the options included in a specific device.
The style number of the DGC-2020HD is displayed on the BESTCOMSPlus Style Number screen after
downloading settings from the device. When configuring DGC-2020HD settings off-line, the style number
for the unit to be configured can be entered into BESTCOMSPlus to enable configuration of the required
settings. The BESTCOMSPlus Style Number screen is illustrated in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1. Style Number Screen

Device Info
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Device Info
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > General Settings > Device Information
Information about a DGC-2020HD communicating with BESTCOMSPlus can be obtained on the Device
Info screen of BESTCOMSPlus after downloading settings from the device.
The application version must be selected when configuring DGC-2020HD settings off-line. When on-line,
read-only information includes the application version, application part number, application build date,
boot code version, model number, style number, and serial number.
DGC-2020HD Device Information
1-2 9469300995

DGC-2020HDs have three device identification fields: Device ID, Station ID, and User ID. These fields are
used in the header information lines of the Fault Reports, Oscillograph Records, and Sequence of Events
Records. Each ID can be up to 64 characters long.
The BESTCOMSPlus Device Info screen is illustrated in Figure 1-2.

Figure 1-2. Device Info Screen

Firmware Updates
Future enhancements to the DGC-2020HD functionality will make a firmware update desirable. Because
default settings are loaded when DGC-2020HD firmware is updated, your settings should be saved in a
file prior to upgrading firmware.

Note
The latest version of BESTCOMSPlus software should be downloaded
from the Basler Electric website and installed before performing a
firmware upgrade.

A device package contains firmware for the DGC-2020HD, the optional Contact Expansion Module (CEM-
2020), the optional Analog Expansion Module (AEM-2020), and the optional Voltage Regulation Module
(VRM-2020). Embedded firmware is the operating program that controls the actions of the DGC-2020HD.
The DGC-2020HD stores firmware in nonvolatile flash memory that can be reprogrammed through the
communication ports. It is not necessary to replace EPROM chips when updating the firmware with a
newer version.
The DGC-2020HD can be used in conjunction with multiple CEM-2020 or AEM-2020 expansion modules
and a single VRM-2020 module, which expand the DGC-2020HD capabilities. When upgrading the
firmware in any component of this system, the firmware in ALL of the components of the system should
be upgraded to ensure compatibility of communications between the components.

Device Information DGC-2020HD

9469300995 1-3

Caution
The order in which the components are upgraded is critical. Assuming
a system of a DGC-2020HD and expansion module(s) is in a state
where the DGC-2020HD is communicating with the system expansion
module(s), the expansion module must be upgraded before the
DGC-2020HD. This is necessary because the DGC-2020HD must be
able to communicate with the expansion module(s) before the DGC-
2020HD can send firmware to it. If the DGC-2020HD were upgraded
first, and the new firmware included a change to the expansion
module communication protocol, it is possible that the expansion
module(s) could no longer communicate with the upgraded DGC-
2020HD. Without communications between the DGC-2020HD and the
expansion module(s), upgrading the expansion module(s) is not
possible.

Note
If power is lost or communication is interrupted during file transfer to
the DGC-2020HD, the firmware upload will fail. The device will
continue to use the previous firmware. Once communication has been
restored, the user must start the firmware upload again. Select Upload
Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu and proceed
normally.

Upgrading Firmware in Expansion Modules

The following procedure is used to upgrade firmware in the expansion modules. This must be completed
before upgrading firmware in the DGC-2020HD. If no expansion module is present, proceed to Upgrading
Firmware in the DGC-2020HD.
1. Place the DGC-2020HD in OFF mode. This can be accomplished by clicking the Off button on the
Control screen inside the Metering Explorer or by pressing the Off button on the DGC-2020HD
front panel.
2. Enable the expansion module that is present in the system. If it has not already been enabled,
enable the expansion module on the Settings > System Parameters > Remote Module Setup
screen.
3. Verify that the DGC-2020HD and the associated expansion module are communicating. This can
be verified by examining the pre-alarm status using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus or
from the front panel by navigating to Metering > Alarms. There should be no Loss of Comms pre-
alarms in the pre-alarm status when communications are functioning properly.
4. Connect to the DGC-2020HD through the USB or Ethernet port if not already connected.
5. Select Upload Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu.
6. You will be asked to save the current settings file. Select Yes or No.
7. When the Basler Electric Device Package Uploader screen (Figure 1-3) appears, click on the
Open button to browse for the device package you have received from Basler Electric. The
Package Files along with File Details are listed. Place a check in the boxes next to the individual
files you want to upload.

DGC-2020HD Device Information

1-4 9469300995

Figure 1-3. Basler Electric Device Package Uploader

8. Click on the Upload button and the Proceed with Device Upload screen will appear. Select Yes or
No.
9. After selecting Yes, the DGC-2020HD Selection screen will appear. Select either USB or
Ethernet.
10. After file(s) have been uploaded, click the Close button on the Basler Electric Device Package
Uploader screen and disconnect communication to the DGC-2020HD.

Upgrading Firmware in the DGC-2020HD

Upgrade DGC-2020HD firmware and then load a saved settings file.
1. Upgrade the DGC-2020HD firmware.
a. Connect to the DGC-2020HD with BESTCOMSPlus. Check the firmware Application
Version on the General Settings > Device Info screen.
b. Select Upload Device Files from the Communication pull-down menu. You do not have to
be connected to the DGC-2020HD at this time. Save settings when prompted, if desired.
c. Open the desired device package file (dgc-2020hd.bef).
d. Check the box for DGC-2020HD Firmware. Note the version number of the DGC-2020HD
firmware; this is the version that will be used to set the Application Version in the settings
file in a later step.
e. Click the Upload button and follow the instructions that appear to begin the upgrade
process.
f. After the upload is complete, disconnect communication to the DGC-2020HD.
2. Load the saved settings file into the DGC-2020HD.
a. Close all settings files.
b. From the File pull-down menu, select New, DGC-2020HD.
c. Connect to the DGC-2020HD.

Device Information DGC-2020HD

9469300995 1-5

d. Once all settings have been read from the DGC-2020HD, open the saved settings file by
clicking the Open File button in the BESTCOMSPlus lower menu bar (adjacent to the
Connect/Disconnect button). Then browse for the file to upload.
e. When BESTCOMSPlus asks if you wish to upload settings and logic to the device, click
Yes.
f. If you are receiving upload failures and indications that the logic is incompatible with the
firmware version, check that the DGC-2020HD style number in the saved file matches
that of the DGC-2020HD into which the file is being uploaded. The style number in the
settings file is found under General Settings > Style Number in BESTCOMSPlus.
g. If the style number of the settings file does not match that of the DGC-2020HD into which
it is to be loaded, disconnect from the DGC-2020HD, then modify the style number in the
settings file. Then repeat the steps titled Load the Saved Settings File into the
DGC-2020HD.

DGC-2020HD Device Information

1-6 9469300995

Device Information DGC-2020HD

9469300995 2-1

2 • Security
Multiple levels of DGC-2020HD security give personnel the level of access appropriate for the tasks they
routinely perform while securing critical settings from unauthorized access.

Access Levels
Passwords provide access security for six distinct functional access areas: Read, Control, Operator,
Settings, Design, and Administrator (Admin). Each functional area can be assigned a unique password or
one password can be assigned to multiple areas. Functional areas are not independent of one another.
For example, an Admin password is used to access levels 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1; a Design password is used
to access levels 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Table 2-1 lists the access levels and descriptions.
Table 2-1. Access Levels and Descriptions
Access
Description
Level
6 - Admin Users and channel authorizations can be created, edited, or deleted. Communication
(highest) settings can be adjusted. Software upgrades can be performed. The event log can be
reset.
5 - Design Programmable logic can be created or changed.
4 - Settings Values of all settings can be adjusted, but logic equations cannot be entered or edited.
3 - Operator User can set date and time, clear and trigger logs, change LCD settings, control
breakers, reset run statistics, start and stop engine, and change operating mode
(run/off/auto).
2 - Control Real time controls can be operated.
1 - Read All system parameters can be read, but no changes or operation is allowed.
0 - None All access is denied.
Additional security is provided by controlling the functional areas that can be accessed through a
particular communication port. For example, security can be configured so that front panel access is
permitted at a lower access level than BESTCOMSPlus® or Modbus® access.
The communication ports and password parameters act as a two-dimensional control to limit changes.
The entered password must be correct and the command must be entered through a valid port. Only one
port at a time can be in use with higher than Read access. For example, if a user gains Settings access at
the USB port, users at other ports (Ethernet, front panel, or RS-232) will not be able to gain higher than
Read access. Only after the user with Settings access at the USB port logs out from the device, can other
users gain higher than Read access. One exception to this, however, is with Modbus communication.
When a connection is established via Modbus protocol with an unsecured access level of Control or
Operator, the connection is maintained even if a user gains higher than Read access through another
port.
If a port holding higher than Read access sees no activity for the duration of the Access Timeout setting,
access privileges will automatically be lowered to Read access. This feature ensures that password
protection cannot be accidentally left in a state where access privileges are enabled for one area and
other areas locked out for an indefinite period.

User Name Setup

1. Use the Settings Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus to select User Name Setup under General Settings,
Device Security Setup. The Login dialog box appears. See Figure 2-1. An administrator access level
is required to set up usernames and passwords.

DGC-2020HD Security
2-2 9469300995

Figure 2-1. Login Screen

2. Enter the username and password of the administrator and then click the Log In button. The default
administrator username is “A” and the default password is “A”.
3. Only the administrator can modify usernames and passwords on the User Name Setup screen
(Figure 2-2). Usernames and passwords can be as many as 16 characters in length and consist of
upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters.

Figure 2-2. User Name Setup Screen

4. In the left-hand column, highlight any user name labeled UNASSIGNED or highlight a specific user
name to change it.
5. On the right side of the screen, enter a User Name.
6. Enter a password for the user.
7. Re-enter the password to verify it.
8. Using Table 2-1 as a reference, enter the maximum access level allowed for the user.
9. Enter the number of days to expiration of the password or leave at default (0) for no expiration.
10. Click the Save User button to save to the settings to BESTCOMSPlus memory.
11. Pull down the Communication menu and select Upload Security to Device. The Login dialog box
appears. An administrator level is required to upload security settings to the device.
12. Enter the username and password of the administrator and then click the Log In button. The default
administrator username is “A” and the default password is “A”. BESTCOMSPlus notifies you when
the upload is successful.

Security DGC-2020HD
9469300995 2-3

Port Access Setup

1. Use the Settings Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus to select Port Access Setup under General Settings,
Device Security Setup. The Port List screen is shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3. Port List Screen

2. The Login dialog box pops up. See Figure 2-1. An administrator access level is required to set up port
access. Enter the username and password of the administrator and then click the Log In button. The
default administrator username is “A” and the default password is “A”.
3. In the side column, highlight a port to change.
4. On the right side of the screen, use the drop-down menus to select the Unsecured Access Level and
Secured Access Level for the highlighted port. The Unsecured Access Level setting sets the max
level of access which can be gained without entering a username/password. The Secured Access
Level setting sets the max level of access which can be gained with a password.
5. Click the Save Port button to save to the settings to BESTCOMSPlus memory.
6. Pull down the Communication menu and select Upload Security to Device. The Login dialog box
appears. An administrator level is required to upload security to the device.
7. Enter the username and password of the administrator and then click the Log In button. The default
administrator username is “A” and the default password is “A”. BESTCOMSPlus notifies you when
the upload is successful.

Access Control
The Access Timeout setting defines the amount of time before access expires. The timer resets every
time a setting is changed. If a password is entered incorrectly more than x times (Login Attempts) in y
seconds (Login Time Window), then access is prohibited for z seconds (Login Lockout Time).
The BESTCOMSPlus Access Control screen is illustrated in Figure 2-4.

DGC-2020HD Security
2-4 9469300995

Figure 2-4. Access Control Screen

1. Use the Settings Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus to select Access Control under General Settings,
Device Security Setup. The Access Control screen is shown in Figure 2-4.
2. Configure the Access Timeout and Login Failure settings.
3. Pull down the Communication menu and select Upload Security to Device. The Login dialog box pops
up. An administrator level is required to upload security to the device.
4. Enter the username and password of the administrator and then click the Log In button. The default
administrator username is “A” and the default password is “A”. BESTCOMSPlus notifies you when
the upload is successful.

Security DGC-2020HD
9469300995 3-1

3 • Configuration through the Front

Panel
This chapter provides information on configuring DGC-2020HD settings through the front panel.

Display Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Front Panel HMI
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > General Settings > Front Panel HMI
The DGC-2020HD LCD can be customized to fit the needs of your specific application. Most of the
options can be adjusted using the front-panel buttons while all options can be adjusted within
BESTCOMSPlus. The display options are described below. Figure 3-1 shows the BESTCOMSPlus Front
Panel HMI settings screen.

LCD Contrast
Adjust this setting to compensate for your LCD viewing angle, the available ambient light, or the ambient
temperature. This setting accepts values from 0 to 100, in increments of 1 percent.

Invert Display
When enabled, the LCD background is dark with light text.

Engine Hours Display

When enabled, engine run-time hours are displayed on the front-panel Overview screen. The display of
engine run time hours is alternated with the Coolant Temperature and Battery Voltage readings on the
front-panel Overview screen.

Display Fuel Level Below

Adjust this setting to display fuel level on the front-panel Overview screen only when the fuel level is
below the desired value. This applies only when the DEF level is received from the engine ECU. If the
DEF level is not received from the engine ECU, fuel level is displayed continuously regardless of the
Display Fuel Level Below setting.

Pre-Alarm Silence
When enabled, pressing the Alarm Silence front-panel pushbutton disables the display of active alarms,
pre-alarms, and MTU fault codes. When a new alarm, pre-alarm, or MTU fault code becomes active, the
display is re-enabled. Refer to the Reporting and Alarms chapter in the Operation manual for more
information.

Battery Charger Display

When enabled, battery charger output voltage and current are displayed on the front-panel Overview
screen.

DEF Display Screen

Select Overview Screen to show the DEF level on only the Overview screen or select All Operating
Screens to show the DEF level on all screens that automatically appear during normal operation.

Sleep Mode
Select Enabled to send the DGC-2020HD into sleep mode during periods of inactivity to minimize battery
drain.

DGC-2020HD Configuration through the Front Panel

3-2 9469300995

LCD Backlight Timeout

When Sleep Mode is enabled, this setting dictates the amount of time that must elapse before the
DGC-2020HD enters sleep mode. This setting accepts values from 1 to 120, in increments of 1 minute.

Language Selection
Front panel text is displayed in the selected language. Select English, French, Spanish, or German.

Screen Scrolling Setup

When scrolled metering is enabled, user-selected metering values are displayed on the overview screen.
Any number of the available values can be displayed. Up to nine values are displayed on the screen at
one time, after the scroll time delay has elapsed, the next set of values is displayed and so on.

Initializing Messages
Two custom initializing messages are displayed on the boot screen of the DGC-2020HD.

Touchscreen Disable
When checked, the touch screen controls are disabled.

Configuration through the Front Panel DGC-2020HD

9469300995 3-3

Figure 3-1. Front Panel Settings Screen

Splash Screen
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Splash Screen
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through front panel
A splash screen, which is displayed for a few seconds upon powering up the DGC-2020HD, can be
customized. The image must be exactly 480 pixels wide and 272 pixels high. Acceptable image formats
are BMP, JPG, GIF, and PNG. This is only available to units with the optional color touch screen (style
xTxxxxxxx).

DGC-2020HD Configuration through the Front Panel

3-4 9469300995

Connect to the unit using BESTCOMSPlus. Click the Browse button on the Splash Screen, navigate to
the desired image, select it, and click Open. If successful, the image appears in the Splash Screen in
BESTCOMSPlus. Upload settings to the DGC-2020HD to transfer the image.

Figure 3-2. Settings Explorer, General Settings, Splash Screen

Settings Menu
The display structure of the Settings menu on the front panel is provided below. Refer to the Controls and
Indicators chapter in the Operation manual for a full description of DGC-2020HD controls and indicators.
•General Settings
o Front Panel HMI
o Device Information
o Access Control
o Clock Setup
o Display Units
• Communication
o Ethernet
o Ethernet 2 (Visible when redundant Ethernet is disabled.)
o Redundant Ethernet
o CAN Bus 1 (I/O) Setup
o CAN Bus 2 (ECU) Setup
o Modem Setup
o RS485 Setup
o RS232 Setup
o Modbus® Setup
o Email Setup
• System Parameters
o System Settings
o Group Settings
o Rated Data
o Sensing Transformers
o Remote Module Setup
o Crank Settings
o Auto Restart
o Exercise Timer
o Relay Control
o Auto Config Detect
Configuration through the Front Panel DGC-2020HD
9469300995 3-5

o Engine Statistics
o Seven Day Timer
• Report Configuration
o Data Log
o Trending
o Sequence of Events Setup
o Configurable Log Params
• Programmable Inputs
o Contact Inputs
o Analog Inputs
o Programmable Functions
o Remote Contact Inputs
o Remote Analog Inputs
o Remote RTD Inputs
o Remote Thermocouple Inputs
o Remote Sys Manager Inputs
• Programmable Outputs
o Output Contacts
o Configurable Elements
o Remote Contact Outputs
o Remote Analog Outputs
• Alarm Configuration
o Horn Configuration
o Pre-Alarms
o Alarms
o Sender Fail
o Prog Alarms
• Protection
o Settings Group 0
o Settings Group 1
o Settings Group 2
o Settings Group 3
o Configurable Protection
o Field Protection
• Breaker Management
o Breaker Management
o Breaker Hardware
o Bus Condition
o Synchronizer
o Breaker Power Sum
• Bias Control
o AVR Bias Control
o GOV Bias Control
o Mains Power Control
• VRM Control Settings
o Field Rated Data
o Startup
o AVR
o FCR
o Limiters
o Auto Tracking
• Multigen Management
o AVR Output
o GOV Output
o LS (Load Share) Output
o Demand Start/Stop
o Sequencing
o Network Configuration

DGC-2020HD Configuration through the Front Panel

3-6 9469300995

o Load Shedding
• Logic
o Logic Timers (1-8)
o Logic Timers (9-16)
o Logic Timers (17-24)
o Logic Timers (25-32)
o Logic Counters
o Logic Input Counters
o Broadcast Logic

Configuration through the Front Panel DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-1

4 • BESTCOMSPlus® Software
BESTCOMSPlus is a Windows®-based, PC application that provides a user-friendly, graphical user
interface (GUI) for use with Basler Electric communicating products. The name BESTCOMSPlus is an
acronym that stands for Basler Electric Software Tool for Communications, Operations, Maintenance, and
Settings.
BESTCOMSPlus provides the user with a point-and-click means to set and monitor the DGC-2020HD.
The capabilities of BESTCOMSPlus make the configuration of one or several DGC-2020HD controllers
fast and efficient. A primary advantage of BESTCOMSPlus is that a settings scheme can be created,
saved as a file, and then uploaded to the DGC-2020HD at the user’s convenience.
BESTCOMSPlus uses plugins, allowing the user to manage several different Basler Electric products.
The DGC-2020HD plugin must be activated before use. The plugin can be activated automatically by
connecting to a DGC-2020HD, or manually by requesting an activation key from Basler Electric.
The DGC-2020HD plugin opens inside the BESTCOMSPlus main shell. The same default logic scheme
that is shipped with the DGC-2020HD is brought into BESTCOMSPlus by downloading settings and logic
from the DGC-2020HD. This gives the user the option of developing a custom setting file by modifying the
default logic scheme or by building a unique scheme from scratch.
BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic is used to program DGC-2020HD logic for protection elements,
inputs, outputs, alarms, etc. This is accomplished by drag-and-drop method. The user can drag elements,
components, inputs, and outputs onto the program grid and make connections between them to create
the desired logic scheme.
BESTCOMSPlus also allows for downloading industry-standard COMTRADE files for analysis of stored
oscillography data. Detailed analysis of the oscillography files can be accomplished using BESTwave™
software.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the typical user interface components of the DGC-2020HD plugin with
BESTCOMSPlus.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-2 9469300995

Figure 4-1. Typical User Interface Components

Table 4-1. Definitions for Locators in Figure 4-1

Locator Component
A Upper Menu Bar
B Lower Menu Bar
C Metering Explorer
D Settings Explorer
E Status Bar

System Recommendations
BESTCOMSPlus software is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs
BESTCOMSPlus on your PC also installs the DGC-2020HD plugin and the required version of .NET
Framework (if not already installed). BESTCOMSPlus operates with systems using Windows® 7 SP1,
Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 version 1607 (Anniversary Update) or later. Microsoft Internet Explorer
5.01 or later must be installed on your PC before installing BESTCOMSPlus. System recommendations
for the .NET Framework and BESTCOMSPlus are listed in Table 4-2.
BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD
9469300995 4-3

Table 4-2. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPlus and the .NET Framework
System Type Component Recommendation
32/64 bit Processor 2.0 GHz
32/64 bit RAM 1 GB (minimum), 2 GB (recommended)
32 bit Hard Drive 200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC.)
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC.)
64 bit Hard Drive 200 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC.)
4.5 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC.)
To install and run BESTCOMSPlus, a Windows user must have Administrator rights.

Installation

Note
Do not connect a USB cable until setup completes successfully.
Connecting a USB cable before setup is complete may result in errors.

Download BESTCOMSPlus
DGC-2020HD controllers are delivered with a CD-ROM that contains BESTCOMSPlus software and
instruction manuals. If a CD-ROM is not available, use the following procedure to download
BESTCOMSPlus from the Basler Electric website.
1. Navigate to https://www.basler.com/Downloads.
2. Select DGC-2020HD from the model drop down menu.
3. Under the Software heading, click the download link for BESTCOMSPlus.
4. Sign in or create an account to continue with the download.

Install BESTCOMSPlus from CD

1. Insert the BESTCOMSPlus CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.
2. When the BESTCOMSPlus Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button for
the BESTCOMSPlus application. The setup utility installs BESTCOMSPlus, the .NET Framework (if
not already installed), the USB driver, and the DGC-2020HD plugin for BESTCOMSPlus on your PC.
When BESTCOMSPlus installation is complete, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows
programs menu. This folder is accessed by clicking the Windows Start button and then accessing the
Basler Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts
BESTCOMSPlus when clicked.

Activate the DGC-2020HD Plugin for BESTCOMSPlus®

The DGC-2020HD plugin is a module that runs inside the BESTCOMSPlus shell. The DGC-2020HD
plugin contains specific operational and logic settings for only the DGC-2020HD. Uploading settings to
the DGC-2020HD is possible only after activating the DGC-2020HD plugin.
The DGC-2020HD plugin can be activated automatically or manually. Automatic activation is achieved by
using a USB cable to establish communication between the DGC-2020HD and BESTCOMSPlus. Manual
activation is initiated by contacting Basler Electric for an activation key and entering the key into
BESTCOMSPlus. Manual activation is useful if you want to create a settings file prior to receiving your
DGC-2020HD. Note that if a DGC-2020HD is not connected, you will not be able to configure certain
Ethernet settings. Ethernet settings can be changed only when an active USB or Ethernet connection is
present. Refer to Manual Activation of the DGC-2020HD Plugin.
DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software
4-4 9469300995

Connect a USB Cable

The USB driver was copied to your PC during BESTCOMSPlus installation and is installed automatically
after powering the DGC-2020HD. USB driver installation progress is shown in the Windows taskbar area.
Windows will notify you when installation is complete.
Connect a USB cable between the PC and your DGC-2020HD. Apply control power to the DGC-2020HD.
Wait until the boot sequence is complete.

Note
In some instances, the Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you
for the USB driver. If this happens, direct the wizard to the following
folder: C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\USB Device Drivers\

If the USB driver does not install properly, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter.

Start BESTCOMSPlus® and Activate the DGC-2020HD Plugin Automatically

To start BESTCOMSPlus, click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, Basler Electric, and then
click the BESTCOMSPlus icon. During initial startup, the BESTCOMSPlus Select Language screen is
displayed (Figure 4-2). You can choose to have this screen displayed each time BESTCOMSPlus is
started, or you can select a preferred language and this screen will be bypassed in the future. Click OK to
continue. This screen can be accessed later by selecting Tools and Select Language from the menu bar.

Figure 4-2. BESTCOMSPlus Language Selection Dialog

The BESTCOMSPlus platform window opens. Select New Connection from the Communication pull-down
menu and select DGC-2020HD. See Figure 4-3. The DGC-2020HD plugin is activated automatically after
connecting to a DGC-2020HD.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-5

Figure 4-3. Communication Pull-Down Menu

The DGC-2020HD Connection screen, shown in Figure 4-4 appears. Select USB Connection and then
click the Connect button.

Figure 4-4. DGC-2020HD Connection Dialog

Manual Activation of the DGC-2020HD Plugin

Manual activation of the DGC-2020HD plugin is required only if your initial use of BESTCOMSPlus will be
on a PC that is not connected to a DGC-2020HD. Manual activation is described in the following
paragraphs.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-6 9469300995

Requesting an Activation Key

When initially running the DGC-2020HD plugin, the Activate Device Plugin pop-up appears. You must
contact Basler Electric for an activation key before you can activate the DGC-2020HD plugin. You can
request an activation key through email or the Basler Electric website. Click either the Website or Email
button. Click the Activate button when you are ready to enter the activation key you received from Basler
Electric. The Activate Device Plugin pop-up appears. Refer to Figure 4-5.

Entering an Activation Key

Select DGC-2020HD from the Device pull-down menu. Enter your Email Address and Activation Key
provided by Basler Electric. If you received an email containing the Activation Key, you can select all of
the text in the email and copy it to the Windows clipboard using normal Windows techniques. The Get
Data button will extract the Device, Email Address, and Activation Key from the Windows clipboard and
paste it into the appropriate fields. Click the Activate button to continue. The Activate Device Plugin
screen is also found by selecting Activate Device from the Tools pull-down menu of the BESTCOMSPlus
main screen.

Figure 4-5. Activate Device Plugin

Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMSPlus and the DGC-2020HD is established by clicking on the
Connect button on the DGC-2020HD Connection screen (see Figure 4-4) or by clicking on the Connect
button on the lower menu bar of the main BESTCOMSPlus screen (Figure 4-1). If you receive an “Unable
to Connect to Device” error message, verify that communications are configured properly. Only one
Ethernet connection is allowed at one time. Download all settings and logic from the DGC-2020HD by
selecting Download Settings and Logic from the Communication pull-down menu. BESTCOMSPlus will
read all settings and logic from the DGC-2020HD and load them into BESTCOMSPlus memory. See
Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6. Processing, Please Wait…

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-7

Advanced Properties
Click the Advanced button on the Connection screen to display the Advanced Properties dialog. Default
settings are shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7. Advanced Properties Dialog

Menu Bars
The menu bars are located near the top of the BESTCOMSPlus window (see Figure 4-1). The upper
menu bar has five pull-down menus. With the upper menu bar, it is possible to manage settings files,
configure communication settings, upload and download settings/security files, and compare settings
files. The lower menu bar consists of clickable icons. These icons are used to change BESTCOMSPlus
views, save or load a BESTspace™ workspace, open a settings file, connect/disconnect, preview
metering printout, export metering, switch to live mode, and send settings after a change is made when
not in live mode.

Upper Menu Bar (BESTCOMSPlus® Shell)

Upper menu bar functions are listed and described in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Upper Menu Bar (BESTCOMSPlus Shell)
Menu Item Description
File
New Create a new settings file
Open Open an existing settings file
Open File As Text Generic file viewer for *.csv, *,txt, etc. files
Close Close settings file
Save Save settings file
Save As Save settings file with a different name
Export To File Save settings as a *.csv file
Print Print, export, or send a settings file
Properties View properties of a settings file
History View history of a settings file
Recent Files Open a previously opened file
Exit Close BESTCOMSPlus program

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-8 9469300995

Menu Item Description

Communication
New Connection Choose new device or DGC-2020HD
Close Connection Close communication between BESTCOMSPlus and DGC-
2020HD
Download Settings and Logic from Download operational and logic settings from the device
Device
Upload Settings and Logic to Device Upload operational and logic settings to the device
Upload Settings to Device Upload operational settings to the device
Upload Logic to Device Upload logic settings to the device
Download Security from Device Download security settings from the device
Upload Security to Device Upload security settings to the device
Configure Ethernet settings
Upload Device Files Upload firmware to the device
Tools
Select Language Select BESTCOMSPlus language
Activate Device Activate the DGC-2020HD plugin
Set File Password Password protect a settings file
Compare Settings Files Compare two settings files
Auto Export Metering Exports metering data on a user-defined interval
Event Log - View View the BESTCOMSPlus event log
Event Log - Verbose Logging Enable/disable verbose logging
Event Log - Verbose Communication Enable/disable verbose communication logging
Logging
Generate Certificate Generate a Certificate
Accepted Devices View and delete accepted certificates
Window
Cascade All Cascade all windows
Tile Tile horizontally or vertically
Maximize All Maximize all windows
Help
Check for Updates Check for BESTCOMSPlus updates via the internet
Check for Update Settings Enable or change automatic checking for updates
About View general, detailed build, and system information

Lower Menu Bar (DGC-2020HD Plugin)

The lower menu bar functions are listed and described in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4. Lower Menu Bar (DGC-2020HD Plugin)
Menu Button Description
Enables you to show/hide the Metering Panel, Settings Panel, or
Settings Info Panel.
Opens and saves BESTspace™ workspaces. Customized workspaces
make switching between tasks easier and more efficient.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-9

Menu Button Description

Opens a saved settings file.

Connect: Opens the DGC-2020HD Connection screen which enables

you to connect to the DGC-2020HD via USB, modem, or Ethernet. This
button only appears when a DGC-2020HD is not connected.
Disconnect: Used to disconnect a connected DGC-2020HD. This button
only appears when a DGC-2020HD is connected.
Displays the Print Preview screen where a preview of the Metering
printout is shown. Click on the printer button to send to a printer.
Enables all metering values to be exported into a *.csv file.

A pull-down menu allowing group selection is available when making

protection settings. The settings can be applied to Group 0, 1, 2, or 3. If
a global setting is being changed, Global will appear in place of the drop-
down menu.
Displays a drop-down list entitled Live Mode Settings which enables Live
mode where settings are automatically sent to the device in real time as
they are changed.
Sends settings to the DGC-2020HD when BESTCOMSPlus is not
operating in Live Mode. Click this button after making a setting change
to send the modified setting to the DGC-2020HD.

Settings Explorer
The Settings Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPlus used to navigate through the various
settings screens of the DGC-2020HD plugin.
These screens allow the user to edit general settings, communications, system parameters,
programmable inputs, programmable outputs, alarm configuration, Protection, breaker management,
programmable senders, and BESTlogicPlus programmable logic.
Logic setup will be necessary after making certain setting changes. For more information, refer to the
BESTlogicPlus chapter.

Settings Entry
When entering settings in BESTCOMSPlus, each setting is validated against prescribed limits. Entered
settings that do not conform with the prescribed limits are accepted but flagged as noncompliant. Figure
4-8 illustrates an example of flagged, noncompliant settings (locator A) and the Setting Validation window
(locator B) used to diagnose faulty settings.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-10 9469300995

Figure 4-8. Flagged, Noncompliant Settings and the Seting Validation Window
The Setting Validation window, viewed by selecting the Setting Validation tab (locator C), displays three
types of annunciations: errors, warnings, and messages. An error describes a problem such as a setting
that is out of range. A warning describes a condition where supporting settings are invalid, causing other
settings to be noncompliant with the prescribed limits. A message describes a minor setting issue that
was automatically resolved by BESTCOMSPlus. An example of a condition triggering a message is entry
of a settings value with a resolution that exceeds the limit imposed by BESTCOMSPlus. In this situation,
the value is automatically rounded and a message is triggered. Each annunciation lists a hyperlinked
name for the noncompliant setting and an error message describing the issue. Clicking the hyperlinked
setting name takes you to the setting screen with the offending setting. Right-clicking the hyperlinked
setting name will restore the setting to its default value.

Note
It is possible to save a DGC-2020HD settings file in BESTCOMSPlus
with noncompliant settings. However, it is not possible to upload
noncompliant settings to the DGC-2020HD.

Metering Explorer
The Metering Explorer is a convenient tool within BESTCOMSPlus used to navigate through the various
metering screens of the DGC-2020HD plugin.
These screens allow the user to view real-time system data including generator voltages and currents,
input/output status, alarms, reports, and other parameters. Refer to the Metering chapter in the Operation
manual for more information on the Metering Explorer.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-11

BESTspace™
BESTspace provides the ability to manage customized workspaces. A workspace consists of the position
and size of all open screens within BESTCOMSPlus. Pre-saved workspaces can be quickly loaded to fit
the specific task at hand. Any number of different workspaces can be saved including a default
workspace which loads when the DGC-2020HD plug-in is started. Metering Explorer screens and
Settings Explorer screens can be saved independently into the workspace file. A Comments box is
provided for writing a description or leaving notes for each saved workspace. To access BESTspace, click
View (on the lower menu bar) and hover over BESTspace. Figure 4-9 illustrates the BESTspace options
found under the View pull-down menu. Figure 4-10 illustrates the options included in the Load/Save
Workspace File screen.

Figure 4-9. View Menu, BESTspace™ Options

Figure 4-10. View Menu, BESTspace™, Save Workspace Screen

Settings File Management

A settings file contains all DGC-2020HD settings including logic.
A settings file created in BESTCOMSPlus will have one of two file extensions. Settings files created in
version 4.00.00 and later are given an extension of “bst4”. Settings files created in versions prior to
4.00.00 will have an extension of “bstx”.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-12 9469300995

It is possible to save only the DGC-2020HD logic displayed on the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic
screen as a separate logic library file. This ability is helpful when similar logic is required for several DGC-
2020HD systems. The file extension of a logic file created in BESTCOMSPlus will be either “bsl4” (version
4.00.00 and later) or “bslx” (versions prior to 4.00.00).
It is important to note that settings and logic can be uploaded to the device separately or together, but are
always downloaded together. For more information on logic files, refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter.

Opening a Settings File

To open a DGC-2020HD settings file with BESTCOMSPlus, pull down the File menu and choose Open.
The Open dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to use normal Windows techniques to select
the file that you want to open. Select the file and choose Open. You can also open a file by clicking on the
Open File button on the lower menu bar. If connected to a device, you will be asked to upload the settings
and logic from the file to the current device. If you choose Yes, the settings displayed in BESTCOMSPlus
will be overwritten with the settings of the opened file.

Saving a Settings File

Select Save or Save As from the File pull-down menu. A dialog box appears allowing you to enter a
filename and location to save the file. Select the Save button to complete the save.

Upload Settings and/or Logic to Device

To upload a settings file to the DGC-2020HD, open the file through BESTCOMSPlus or create the file
using BESTCOMSPlus. Then pull down the Communication menu and select Upload Settings and Logic
to Device. If you want to upload operational settings without logic, select Upload Settings to Device. If you
want to upload logic without operational settings, select Upload Logic to Device. You are prompted to
enter the password. The default username is “A” and the default password is “A”. If the username and
password are correct, the upload begins and the progress bar is shown.

Download Settings and Logic from Device

To download settings and logic from the DGC-2020HD, pull down the Communication menu and select
Download Settings and Logic from Device. If the settings in BESTCOMSPlus have changed, a dialog box
will open prompting you to save or discard the current settings changes. After the choice is made,
downloading begins. BESTCOMSPlus will read all settings and logic from the DGC-2020HD and load
them into BESTCOMSPlus memory.

Print a Settings File

To preview the settings printout, select Print Preview from the File pull-down menu. To print the settings,
select the printer icon in the upper left corner of the Print Preview screen.
You can skip the print preview and go directly to print by pulling down the File menu and selecting Print. A
dialog box opens containing the typical Windows options for setting the properties of the printer.
Configure these settings as necessary and then select Print.

Compare Settings Files

BESTCOMSPlus has the ability to compare two settings files. To compare files, pull down the Tools menu
and select Compare Settings Files. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Compare Setup dialog box appears
(Figure 4-11). Select the location of the first file under Left Settings Source and select the location of the
second file under Right Settings Source. If you are comparing a settings file located on your PC hard
drive or portable media, click the folder button and navigate to the file. If you want to compare settings
downloaded from a unit, click the Select Unit button to set up the communication port. Click the Compare
button to compare the selected settings files.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-13

Figure 4-11. Tools, Compare Settings Files Screen

A dialog box appears, displaying the results of the comparison. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Compare
dialog box (Figure 4-12) is displayed where you can view all settings (Show All Settings), view only the
differences (Show Settings Differences), view all logic (Show All Logic Paths), or view only logic
differences (Show Logic Path Differences). Select Close when finished.

Figure 4-12. Settings Comparison Results Screen

Copy Settings Group

The Copy Settings Group tool allows the contents of one settings group to be copied into another.
Select the active settings group, which is the one that will be copied, by opening a protection screen in
BESTCOMSPlus. The settings group selection drop-down menu is at top of screen in lower menu bar.
Click Tools > Copy Settings Group and select the group to be the destination of the copied settings.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-14 9469300995

Figure 4-13. Copy Settings Group

Auto Export Metering

The auto export metering function automatically exports metering data over a user-defined period. The
user specifies the Number of Exports and the Interval between each export. Enter a filename for the
metering data and a folder in which to save. The first export is performed immediately after clicking the
Start button. Click the Filter button to select specific metering screens. Figure 4-14 illustrates the Auto
Export Metering screen.

Figure 4-14. Auto Export Metering

BESTCOMSPlus® Updates
Ongoing DGC-2020HD functionality enhancements may make future DGC-2020HD firmware updates
desirable. Enhancements to DGC-2020HD firmware typically coincide with enhancements to the DGC-
2020HD plugin for BESTCOMSPlus. When a DGC-2020HD is updated with the latest version of firmware,
the latest version of BESTCOMSPlus should also be obtained.

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 4-15

• If you obtained a CD-ROM containing a firmware update from Basler Electric, then that CD-ROM
will also contain the corresponding version of BESTCOMSPlus software.
• You can check for BESTCOMSPlus updates by visiting www.basler.com.
• You can use the manual “check for updates” function in BESTCOMSPlus to ensure that the latest
version is installed by selecting Check for Updates in the Help drop-down menu. (An internet
connection is required.)

Firmware Updates
For information on updating firmware, refer to the Device Information chapter.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus® Software

4-16 9469300995

BESTCOMSPlus® Software DGC-2020HD

9469300995 5-1

5 • Communication
DGC-2020HD communication ports include a mini-B USB port, two RJ-45 Ethernet jacks or an ST fiber
optic port, Controller Area Network (CAN) terminals, RS-232 port, RS-485 terminals, and provisions for an
optional Remote Display Panel. The following paragraphs describe the DGC-2020HD communication
ports in detail.

Caution

This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices.

Nonvolatile memory is used to store information (such as settings) that
needs to be preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise
restarted. Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a
physical limit on the number of times they can be erased and written.
In this product, the limit is 100,000 erase/write cycles. During product
application, consideration should be given to communications, logic,
and other factors that may cause frequent/repeated writes of settings
or other information that is retained by the product. Applications that
result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce the useable
product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

USB
The rear-panel, mini-B USB port enables local communication with a PC running BESTCOMSPlus®
software. The DGC-2020HD is connected to a PC using a standard USB cable. BESTCOMSPlus is a
Windows®-based communication software package that is supplied with the DGC-2020HD. A detailed
description of BESTCOMSPlus is provided in the BESTCOMSPlus Software chapter.

Ethernet
Depending on style number, each DGC-2020HD is equipped with either dual copper (100Base-T)
Ethernet communication ports (style xxxxDxxxx) or a fiber optic (100Base-FX) Ethernet communication
port (style xxxxFxxxx). The ST type fiber optic port uses a 1300 nanometer, near-infrared (NIR) light
wavelength transmitted via two strands of multimode optical fiber, one for receive (RX) and the other for
transmit (TX).
Ethernet ports provide communications between the DGC-2020HD and a PC via BESTCOMSPlus or
other DGC-2020HDs in a network. An Ethernet connection to a PC running BESTCOMSPlus provides
remote metering, setting, annunciation, and control of the DGC-2020HD. Ethernet communication
between DGC-2020HDs allows for generator sequencing on an islanded system.
DGC-2020HD controllers can be monitored and controlled via Ethernet using the Modbus® TCP/IP. Up to
six TCP/IP Modbus masters are supported. In addition, Modbus TCP/IP and RS-485 can be used
simultaneously.

Ethernet Port Designations

Ethernet ports have different designations depending on style:
Dual copper (style xxxxDxxxx) – The RJ-45 jack nearest to the mini-B USB port is designated as Ethernet
port 1 and is reserved for intergenset communications (load sharing). The other RJ-45 jack is designated
as Ethernet port 2 and can be configured for redundant intergenset communications or for an
independent network connection.
Fiber optic (style xxxxFxxxx) – The fiber optic port is designated as Ethernet port 1.
See the Terminals and Connectors chapter for a diagram showing the Ethernet port locations.
DGC-2020HD Communication
5-2 9469300995

Ethernet Setup through BESTCOMSPlus®

To configure Ethernet through BESTCOMSPlus, first establish a connection via USB, Modem, or Ethernet
(if already configured). See the BESTCOMSPlus chapter for instructions for connecting via USB. See
RS-232, below, for details on connecting via modem.
Click Communication in the top menu, mouse-over Configure, and click Ethernet. The Configure Ethernet
Port screen appears. Settings on this screen differ depending on the Ethernet port style of the connected
DGC-2020HD. Figure 5-1 illustrates the settings provided for dual copper Ethernet ports (style
xxxxDxxxx). Figure 5-2 illustrates the settings for a fiber optic Ethernet port (style xxxxFxxxx).
Retrieve current Ethernet settings from the DGC-2020HD using the Download button. This is helpful
when it is desired to make minor changes to the current settings.

Figure 5-1. Dual Copper Ethernet Port Configuration

Figure 5-2. Fiber Optic Ethernet Port Configuration

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-3

Configurable options include:

IP Address: Internet Protocol Address to be used by the DGC-2020HD
Default Gateway: Default host to send data destined for a host not on the network subnet.
Subnet Mask: Mask used to determine the range of the current network subnet.
Use DHCP: Automatically configures IP Address, Default Gateway, and Subnet Mask via
DHCP. This can be used only if the Ethernet network has a properly configured
DHCP server running. The DGC-2020HD does not act as a DHCP server. If no
DHCP server is available, the DGC-2020HD will automatically obtain a link local
IP address in the range of 169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255 as described in IETF
publication RFC 3927. DHCP and link local addresses are subject to change. It is
recommended to use a unique device label other than IP address to identify units
on the network when DHCP is enabled.
Redundant Ethernet: Available with dual copper Ethernet ports only. Checking this box disables the
settings for Ethernet port 2 and designating it as a redundant port.
The values for these options should be obtained from the site administrator if the DGC-2020HD is
intended to share the network with other devices. If the DGC-2020HD is operating on an islanded
network, the IP address may be chosen from one of the following ranges as listed in IETF publication
RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Networks.
• 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
If the DGC-2020HD is operating on an isolated network, the Subnet Mask can be left at 0.0.0.0 and the
Default Gateway can be chosen as any valid IP address from the same range as the DGC-2020HD IP
address.
Click the Send to Device button located on the Configure Ethernet Port screen. A confirmation popup is
displayed notifying the user that the DGC-2020HD will reboot after settings are sent. Click the Yes button
to allow settings to be sent. After the unit has rebooted and the power-up sequence is complete, the
DGC-2020HD is ready to be used on a network.
If desired, DGC-2020HD settings can be verified by selecting Download Settings and Logic from the
Communication pull-down menu. Active settings are downloaded from the DGC-2020HD. Verify that the
downloaded settings match the previously sent settings.

Note
The PC running BESTCOMSPlus software must be configured
correctly to communicate with the DGC-2020HD. It must have an IP
address in the same subnet range as the DGC-2020HD if operating on
a private local network. Otherwise, the PC must have a valid IP
address with access to the internet and the DGC-2020HD must be
connected to a properly configured router. The network settings of the
PC depend on the operating system installed. Refer to the operating
system manual for instructions. On most Microsoft® Windows®-based
PCs, the network settings can be accessed through the Network
Connections icon located inside the Control Panel.

Redundant Ethernet Setup

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Redundant Ethernet Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communications > Redundant Ethernet
A redundant Ethernet configuration provides an automatic failover in case of a link or switch failure. When
a network failure is detected, the redundant Ethernet port becomes active, attempting to maintain a
healthy connection to the network.
DGC-2020HD Communication
5-4 9469300995

To utilize a redundant Ethernet configuration, the DGC-2020HD must have dual copper Ethernet ports
(style xxxxDxxxx) and the Redundant Ethernet setting must be checked on the Ethernet Port
Configuration screen (Figure 5-1, above).

Settings
Redundant Ethernet settings are described in the following paragraphs. The Redundant Ethernet Setup
screen is illustrated in Figure 5-3.
Primary Interface settings consist of None, Ethernet 1, and Ethernet 2. If None is selected, the active port
remains active until a network failure causes a failover. Selecting Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 designates the
corresponding port as the primary port. The active port switches back to the primary port as soon as its
link becomes healthy.
Redundant Mode settings consist of Link Monitor and ARP Ping. These are different methods for
determining a healthy network. The Link Monitor method checks the active port for active link status,
which means the active port is physically connected to the external device. ARP Ping mode is available
only in DGC-2020HD units with application (firmware) version 1.02.00 or greater. To check your
application (firmware) version, refer to the Device Information chapter. This method queries the user-
defined list of IP hosts at a fixed interval. Upon receiving the proper amount of replies as determined by
the Ping Mode setting below, the network is deemed healthy.
Ping Mode (ARP Ping mode only) settings consist of Any and All. With Any selected, only one of the
queried IP hosts must reply to confirm a healthy network. With All selected, all of the queried IP hosts
must reply to confirm a healthy network.
Ping IP 1 through Ping IP 16 (ARP Ping mode only) specify the IP hosts which are to be queried to
confirm healthy network status. IP hosts with an address of "0.0.0.0" are not queried.

ARP Ping Fail Pre-Alarm

In certain network configurations where at least one device is not reachable from either Ethernet link, the
ARP Ping Fail pre-alarm is annunciated. For example, another DGC-2020HD on the network is one of the
queried IP hosts, but it is removed from the network for maintenance. The querying DGC-2020HD does
not receive a reply from the offline DGC-2020HD and determines that both of its Ethernet links have
failed, thus disconnecting it from the network completely. However, the DGC-2020HD recognizes this
occurrence and automatically switches to Link Monitor mode to prevent disconnection from the network
and annunciates the ARP Ping Fail pre-alarm. This pre-alarm can be cleared by pressing the front-panel
Reset button, but will return if the fault is still present. Another way to clear the pre-alarm is to set the
Redundant Mode to Link Monitor.

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-5

Figure 5-3. Settings Explorer, Communications, Redundant Ethernet Setup

Establishing Ethernet Communication

Communication between BESTCOMSPlus and the DGC-2020HD is established by clicking the Connect
button on the DGC-2020HD Connection screen, see Figure 5-4. This screen is found under the
Communication pull-down menu, New Connection, DGC-2020HD or by clicking the Connect button
located on the lower menu bar. If an “Unable to Connect to Device” error message is received, verify that
communications are configured properly.

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-6 9469300995

Figure 5-4. DGC-2020HD Connection Screen

When communication is established, BESTCOMSPlus reads all settings and logic from the DGC-2020HD
and loads them into BESTCOMSPlus memory by default. This feature may be disabled in the Advanced
Properties.

Advanced Properties
Click the Advanced… button on the Connections screen to display the Advanced Properties dialog.
Default settings are shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5. Advanced Properties Dialog

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-7

CAN
A CAN is a standard interface that enables communication between multiple controllers on a common
network using a standard message protocol. DGC-2020HD controllers have a CAN interface that
supports the SAE J1939 protocol and the MTU protocol.

Caution
DGC-2020HD controllers have two separate CAN ports: CAN 1 and
CAN 2. CAN 1 consists of terminals 51 (CAN L), 52 (CAN H), and 53
(SHIELD) and communicates solely with Basler Electric expansion
modules. This port accommodates one VRM-2020, up to four CEM-
2020s, and up to four AEM-2020s simultaneously. CAN 2 consists of
terminals 54 (CAN L), 55 (CAN H), and 53 (SHIELD) and is dedicated
for communication with Engine Control Units (ECU) and related
devices.

Applications using an engine-driven generator set controlled by a DGC-2020HD may also have an ECU.
The CAN interface allows the ECU and DGC-2020HD to communicate. The ECU reports operating
information to the DGC-2020HD through the CAN interface. Operating parameters and diagnostic
information, if supported by the ECU, are decoded and displayed for monitoring.
The primary use of the CAN interface is to obtain engine operating parameters for monitoring speed,
coolant temperature, oil pressure, coolant level, and engine hours without the need for direct connection
to individual senders. Table 5-1 lists the ECU parameters and Table 5-2 lists the engine configuration
parameters supported by the DGC-2020HD CAN interface. These parameters are transmitted via the
CAN interface at preset intervals. See the column labeled Update Rate in Table 5-1 for transmission
rates.
Table 5-1. ECU Parameters Obtained from CAN Interface
Metric English
ECU Parameter Update Rate SPN∗
Units Units
Actual Engine Percent Torque % % Engine Speed 513
Dependent
Air Filter Differential Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 107
Air Inlet Temperature °C °F 1s 172
Alarm Reset Feedback Binary Binary 1s 2815
Ambient Air Temperature °C °F 1s 171
Auxiliary Pressure 1 kPa psi On Request 1387
Auxiliary Pressure 2 kPa psi On Request 1388
Barometric Pressure kPa psi 1s 108
Battery Voltage Vdc Vdc 1s 168
Boost Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 102
Charge Air Temperature °C °F 1s 2629
Coolant Level % % 500 ms 111
Coolant Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 109
Crankcase Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 101
DEF Inducement Level - Level of Inducement % % 1,000 ms 5246
Not to Run the Engine
DEF Severity Level - Severity of Tank Low % % 1,000 ms 5245
Level

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-8 9469300995

Metric English
ECU Parameter Update Rate SPN∗
Units Units
DEF Tank 1 Level % % 1,000 ms 1761
DEF Tank 2 Level % % 1,000 ms 4367
ECU Temperature °C °F 1s 1136
Engine Coolant Preheated State - - 500 ms 3552
Engine Coolant Temperature °C °F 1s 110
Engine Desired Operating Speed rpm rpm 250 ms 515
Engine Intake Manifold #1 Absolute Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 3563
Engine Intercooler Coolant Level % % 500 ms 3668
Engine Intercooler Temperature °C °F 1s 52
Engine Oil Level % % 500 ms 98
Engine Oil Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 100
Engine Oil Temperature °C °F 1s 175
Engine Speed rpm rpm Engine Speed 190
Dependent
Exhaust Gas Temperature °C °F 500 ms 173
Exhaust Temperature A °C °F 500 ms 2433
Exhaust Temperature B °C °F 500 ms 2434
Fuel Delivery Pressure kPa psi 500 ms 94
Fuel Filter Differential Pressure kPa psi 1s 95
Fuel Leak Filter 1 Binary Binary 1s 1239
Fuel Leak Filter 2 Binary Binary 1s 1240
Fuel Rate liter/hr gal/hr 100 ms 183
Fuel Temperature °C °F 1s 174
High Exhaust System Temp (HEST) - - 500 ms 3698
Lamp/Indicator
Injection Control Pressure MPa psi 500 ms 164
Injector Metering Rail Pressure MPa psi 500 ms 157
Intake Manifold Temperature °C °F 500 ms 105
Oil Filter Differential Pressure kPa psi 1s 99
Particulate Filter (DPF) Lamp/Indicator - - 500 ms 3697
Percent Load at Current rpm % % 50 ms 92
Rated Power watts watts On Request 166
Rated rpm rpm rpm On Request 189
Regeneration Disabled (Inhibit) Lamp/Indicator - - 500 ms 3703
Shutdown from ECU Binary Binary 1s 1110
Switched Battery Voltage (at ECU) Vdc Vdc 1s 158
Throttle (Accelerator Pedal) Position % % 50 ms 91
Total Engine Hours hours hours Requested 1.5 s 247
Total Fuel Used liters gallons Requested 1.5 s 250

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-9

Metric English
ECU Parameter Update Rate SPN∗
Units Units
Transmission Oil Pressure kPa psi 1s 127
Transmission Oil Temperature °C °F 1s 177
Trip Average Fuel Rate liters/hr gallons/hr On Request 1029
Trip Fuel liters gallons Requested 1.5 s 182
Winding 1 Temperature °C °F 1s 1124
Winding 2 Temperature °C °F 1s 1125
Winding 3 Temperature °C °F 1s 1126

∗ SPN: Suspect Parameter Number

Table 5-2. Engine Configuration Parameters Obtained from CAN Interface
Metric English
ECU Parameter Update Rate SPN∗
Units Units
Engine Speed at High Idle Point 6 rpm rpm 5s 532
Engine Speed at Idle Point 1 rpm rpm 5s 188
Engine Speed at Point 2 rpm rpm 5s 528
Engine Speed at Point 3 rpm rpm 5s 529
Engine Speed at Point 4 rpm rpm 5s 530
Engine Speed at Point 5 rpm rpm 5s 531
Gain (Kp) of End Speed Governor %/rpm %/rpm 5s 533
Maximum Momentary Engine Override Speed Point 7 rpm rpm 5s 534
Maximum Momentary Engine Override Time Limit seconds seconds 5s 539
Percent Torque at Idle Point 1 % % 5s 540
Percent Torque at Point 2 % % 5s 541
Percent Torque at Point 3 % % 5s 542
Percent Torque at Point 4 % % 5s 542
Percent Torque at Point 5 % % 5s 543
Reference Engine Torque N•m ft-lb 5s 544
Requested Speed Control Range Lower Limit rpm rpm 5s 535
Requested Speed Control Range Upper Limit rpm rpm 5s 536
Requested Torque Control Range Lower Limit % % 5s 537
Requested Torque Control Range Upper Limit % % 5s 538

∗ SPN: Suspect Parameter Number

Caution
When CAN is enabled, the DGC-2020HD ignores the following sender
inputs: oil pressure, coolant temperature, and magnetic pickup.

Under certain circumstances, the following strings may be displayed on the front panel and in the
Metering Explorer of BESTCOMSPlus:
• NC (Not Connected) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the engine ECU is not connected
to the DGC-2020HD.

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-10 9469300995

• SF (Sender Fail) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the engine ECU sends a special
code indicating a measurement failure for the parameter. For example, if oil sender is determined to
be bad by the ECU, it sends a special code in place of the J1939 oil pressure data indicating a sender
fail condition.
• NS (Not Sent) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the J1939 parameter has not been sent
to the DGC-2020HD by the engine ECU.
• NA (Not Applicable) - String displayed for a J1939 parameter when the engine ECU sends a special
code for the parameter indicating that the parameter is not implemented or not applicable in the ECU.
• UF (Unknown Failure) - String displayed when the J1939 parameter data received by the ECU is not
within the valid J1939 data range for the parameter but is not one of the special codes above.
Table 5-3 lists the J1939 data transmitted from the DGC-2020HD.
Table 5-3. J1939 Data Transmitted from the DGC-2020HD
ECU Parameter Update Rate SPN∗
Address Claim Request† Once on power-up and any time a Global n/a
Request for Address Claim (GRAC) PGN is
received
Auxiliary Analog Information 1.5 s n/a
Battle Override Switch 100 ms 1237
Clear Currently Active Diagnostic Trouble Whenever a request to reset Currently Active n/a
Request† Diagnostic Trouble Code Request is made
Clear Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Whenever a request to reset Previously Active n/a
Codes Request† Diagnostic Trouble Code Request is made
Electronic Engine Controller #4 (Rated 1.5 s n/a
Speed and Power) Request
Engine Hours/Revolutions Request 1.5 s n/a
Fuel Consumption Request 1.5 s n/a
Generator Frequency Selection 100 ms 4080
(0000-50 Hz, 0001-60 Hz)
Generator Governing Speed Command 100 ms 4079
(00-rated, 01-idle)
Governor Droop 100 ms 5568
Governor Gain Adjust 100 ms 5567
Liquid Fuel Information 1.5 s n/a
Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble 1.5 s n/a
Codes Request
Speed Request 10 ms 898
Trip Fuel Reset 100 ms 988

∗ SPN: Suspect Parameter Number

† Requests from the DGC-2020HD to the ECU for various parameters are made by issuing the request.

ECU Limitations
For some ECUs, an external source cannot stop the engine without removing power from the ECU.
Turning off power to the ECU is the only way to remove fuel from the engine and shut it down. Different
ECU manufacturers have their own rpm setpoints for reapplying fuel to an engine. If the ECU is powered
up and the engine is still spinning above 60 rpm, then the ECU will automatically turn the fuel on. Detroit
Diesel J1939 ECUs, for example, have a setpoint of 60 rpm.

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-11

Not being able to stop the engine without removing ECU power causes two problems. The first problem is
that the only way to stop the engine is to turn the ECU off and wait for the engine speed to decrease
below 60 rpm before powering the ECU back on. Otherwise, the engine will take off running. The second
problem is that while the ECU is off, you can no longer meter and update coolant level, coolant
temperature alarm/pre-alarm, and crank control.

CAN Bus Setup

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > CAN Bus 1 (I/O) Setup and CAN Bus 2
(ECU) Setup
The following paragraphs describe the settings found on the CAN Bus Setup screen. Figure 5-6 illustrates
the BESTCOMSPlus CAN Bus Setup screen.

Enable ECU Support

Set to Enabled for the DGC-2020HD to communicate with the ECU.

Enable DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Support

If the ECU is a J1939 ECU, enable DTC support. If the ECU does not support it, no diagnostic trouble
codes will be logged by the DGC-2020HD.
There are 16 configurable DGC detection elements that can be utilized for handling of proprietary DTCs
that may not be stored in the DGC-2020HD. For more information, refer to the Configurable J1939
Diagnostics Trouble Code (DTC) Detection chapter.

SPN Conversion Method

Early versions of the J1939 specifications were unclear about how the 19 bits of the SPN were arranged
within their allocated places in the data. While it was clear which bytes and bits contained the 19 bits of
SPN data, it was not clear whether the data within the bytes was arranged with the most significant bit
first or least significant bit first. It was also unclear which byte was most significant and which was least
significant. The ambiguity led to various engine manufacturers adopting three different methods of
converting the data into SPN numbers.
This was remedied in the J1939 specs, and the SPN Conversion Method bit was added. When this bit is
a zero, the conversion method is indicated as version 4.
The most common SPN conversion method is 4 and is the default for the DGC-2020HD. Refer to ECU
manufacturer documentation to determine the correct SPN conversion method of the ECU and set the
SPN Conversion Method setting in the DGC-2020HD accordingly.

CAN Bus 2 Address

This parameter sets a unique address number for the DGC-2020HD operating on CAN 2 (ECU). The
CAN Address is set internally by the DGC-2020HD when certain types of ECUs are selected on the ECU
Setup screen, and in this case, the user-entered value does not apply. See Table 5-4.
Table 5-4. CAN Bus Address per ECU Type
ECU Type CAN Bus Address
Cummins 220
GM/Doosan User-selectable
Isuzu User-selectable
John Deere User-selectable
MTU ADEC 1
MTU ECU7/ECU8 6
MTU MDEC 6
MTU Smart Connect 234

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-12 9469300995

ECU Type CAN Bus Address

Scania 39
Standard User-selectable
Volvo Penta 17
Daimler User-selectable
For more information on J1939 address handling, see J1939 Addresses below.

Engine ECU Address

Set this parameter to the address claimed by the Engine ECU operating on CAN 2 (ECU). In certain
cases, there is more than one ECU transmitting data on the J1939 network. This setting specifies the
ECU on the network to which the DGC should transmit data. For more information on J1939 address
handling, see J1939 Addresses below. When GM/Doosan is selected as the ECU type, the value of this
setting is ignored and the Engine ECU Address value is always 0.

Generator Parameter Transmit

When the Generator Parameter Transmit setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD broadcasts generator
metered parameters over CAN as listed in Table 5-5. The Generator Parameter Transmit setting is not
used when ECU Type is set for MTU MDEC, MTU ECU7/ECU8, or MTU Smart Connect.
Table 5-5. Transmitted Generator Parameters

Bytes
PGN Scaling / Within
PGN Name SPN Parameter Units
(Hex) Offset PGN
Data

Generator 65018 2468 Generator Total kW Hours Export kWH n/a 1 to 4

Total AC
(FDFA)
Energy 2469 Generator Total kW Hours Import kWH n/a 5 to 8

Generator 65028 2456 Generator Total Reactive Power vars n/a 1 to 4

Total AC
(FE04)
Reactive 2464 Generator Overall Power Factor PF ∗ -1 offset 5 to 6
Power 16,384
00=leading
2518 Generator Overall Power Factor n/a 7, bits
01=lagging
Lagging 1&2
10=error
11=not
available

Generator 65029 2452 Generator Total Real Power Watts n/a 1 to 4

Total AC
(FE05)
Power 2460 Generator Total Apparent Power VA n/a 5 to 8

Generator 65030 2440 Generator Average L-L AC RMS Volts n/a 1 to 2

Average Voltage
(FE06)
Basic AC
Quantities 2444 Generator Average L-N AC RMS Volts n/a 3 to 4
Voltage

2436 Generator Average AC Frequency Hz ∗ n/a 5 to 6

128

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-13

Bytes
PGN Scaling / Within
PGN Name SPN Parameter Units
(Hex) Offset PGN
Data

2448 Generator Average AC RMS Amps n/a 7 to 8

Current

Engine 65262 110 Engine Coolant Temperature (Not °C -40°C 1

Temperature sent when CAN is enabled) offset
(FEEE)
174 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

175 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

52 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

Engine Fluid 65263 100 Engine Oil Pressure (Not sent kPa ∗ n/a 4
Level / when CAN is enabled) 4
(FEEF)
Pressure
94 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

98 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

109 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

111 0xFF n/a n/a n/a

Dash Display 65276 96 Fuel Level %∗ n/a 2

2.5
(FEFC)

Engine Control Parameter Transmit

When the Engine Control Parameter Transmit setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD sends engine control
commands such as Requested RPM, Start Request, Stop Request, and some proprietary control
parameters over CAN Bus to the engine ECU. When the Engine Control Parameter Transmit setting is
disabled, transmission of engine control commands from the DGC-2020HD to the engine ECU are
disabled, but the J1939 parameter communication from the engine ECU to the DGC-2020HD still occurs.

Coolant Temperature Source

With From ECU selected, the DGC-2020HD accepts coolant temperature data from the ECU on CAN 2
(ECU). With From DGC Input selected, the DGC-2020HD accepts coolant temperature data from the
coolant temperature engine sender input.

Oil Pressure Source

With From ECU selected, the DGC-2020HD accepts oil pressure data from the ECU on CAN 2 (ECU).
With From DGC Input selected, the DGC-2020HD accepts oil pressure data from the oil pressure engine
sender input.

ECU Contact Control - Output Select

Select whether the RUN output relay or the PRE (Prestart) output relay closes to give the ECU its
“energize to run” signal. In some implementations, this relay may actually be providing ECU power.
If the PRE contact is selected, the RUN output still closes during cranking and genset operation to
provide separate indication that the genset is cranking or running.

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-14 9469300995

ECU Contact Control - Pulsing Enable

In applications where the ECU is not continuously powered, the DGC-2020HD can apply power to the
ECU and pulse the ECU to update its engine monitoring data. For applications where pulsing of the ECU
is not desired, the pulsing feature can be disabled.
Select if the ECU is not to be on line at all times. Often ECUs are allowed to go “off line” to conserve
battery drain when the engine is not running. The DGC-2020HD will “pulse” it periodically to force it to be
active to allow the DGC-2020HD to read data such as coolant temperature and coolant level. This is
required if the DGC-2020HD is to report low coolant temperature conditions (which may indicate a failure
of a block heater), or low coolant level conditions (if a leak occurs while the machine is not running).
Pulsing is also used to check the integrity of CAN communications when the machine is not running.

ECU Related Time Values - Engine Shut Down

Set this parameter for a value longer than the duration required to stop the engine after being shut down.
The ECU is pulsed after this time expires. If the time is too short, the pulse may occur while the engine is
still turning which could cause a brief re-start and possibly damage the flywheel and starter system.

ECU Related Time Values - Pulse Cycle Time

Set this parameter for the desired time between ECU pulse cycles.

ECU Related Time Values - Settling Time

This parameter is the duration of the “on line” time of the pulse cycle during which the DGC-2020HD
reads data from the ECU. The settling time should be set long enough so that any ECU parameters that
require time to “settle down” after the ECU is on line can do so. Since the DGC-2020HD may use some of
the ECU data for alarm or pre-alarm annunciation, it is important that the data have time to settle.

ECU Related Time Values - Response Timeout

This setting defines the amount of time that the DGC-2020HD will wait to receive data from the ECU
during a pulse cycle or start attempt. If no data is received during this time in a pulse cycle, a LOSS OF
ECU COMMS pre-alarm is annunciated. If no data is received in this time during an engine starting
attempt, a LOSS OF ECU COMMS alarm is annunciated.

CAN Bus 1 Address

This parameter sets a unique address number for the DGC-2020HD operating on CAN 1 (Remote
Modules).

Baud Rate
This setting dictates the rate at which the DGC-2020HD communicates with CAN 1. The selected baud
rate must match the baud rate of the other nodes on the CAN. The AEM-2020, CEM-2020, and
VRM-2020 detect the baud rate used by the DGC-2020HD on CAN1 and are automatically configured to
match that baud rate.
When the baud rate is set to 125 kbps and a VRM-2020 is enabled, a maximum of two AEM-2020s and
four CEM-2020s can also be enabled on CAN1. At 125 kbps with no VRM-2020, a maximum of four
AEM-2020s and four CEM-2020s can be enabled on CAN1. At 250 kbps, a maximum of one VRM-2020,
four AEM-2020s, and four CEM-2020s can be enabled on CAN1.

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-15

Figure 5-6. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup

J1939 Addresses
Each device on a J1939 network must have a unique address. On power-up, each device issues an
address claim request over the network. If there is no competing claim from another device, the claimed
address becomes the address the unit uses for all J1939 communications. If there are competing
requests, an arbitration process occurs. When complete, all devices that broadcast on the network will
have a unique address. Once an address has been successfully claimed, all broadcast communications
from the device use that address as the source address for all its broadcast communications. In addition,
the device monitors all communications on the network and responds to address specific communications
directed only to its address; communications to other addresses are ignored.
The address is also important for J1939 request communications. Certain J1939 parameters are
broadcast by an engine ECU only when requested. Fuel Rate, Engine Run Time Hours, and Previously
Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes are examples of request-only parameters. Thus, a device must request
these from the ECU and the requests are address specific. System operating characteristics may also be
requested via J1939 communications. Engine RPM is such an example; it is requested through the
Torque/Speed Request 1 (TSC1) J1939 PGN.
Some engine ECUs respond to requests from a certain J1939 address, typically that of the system
controller. This may be programmed into the ECU as a parameter using an ECU specific service tool, a
fixed set of addresses, or one particular address depending on the manufacturer and model of the ECU.
Address 0 is specified by the J1939 committee as the default address for an engine ECU. Address 234 is
specified by the J1939 committee as the default address for a genset controller. In a system where RPM
control over CAN Bus is taking place, the genset controller (typically at address 234) sends RPM requests
in the form of the Torque/Speed Request 1 (TSC1) J1939 PGN to the engine ECU (typically at address
0). If the requests are received from the wrong controller address, or sent to the wrong ECU address,
RPM control over CAN Bus may not be achievable.
The DGC-2020HD determines the ECU address to be the source address of all engine operating RPM
communications. All requests from the DGC-2020HD to the ECU will use this as the ECU address.
However, some engines have multiple ECUs, each sending engine RPM to the DGC-2020HD. Therefore,
the DGC-2020HD cannot determine which ECU to use as the destination address for RPM and data

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-16 9469300995

requests from the ECU. The source address of the update of engine RPM that is received first by the
DGC-2020HD is the address the DGC-2020HD determines to be the ECU address.
The Engine ECU Address setting addresses this situation. If an RPM update is received from an address
equal to the Engine ECU Address setting, that address is used as the ECU source address for all
subsequent communications intended to be sent to the engine ECU.
If J1939 RPM control does not function as intended, verify that the Engine ECU Address setting is correct
and consult the ECU Manufacturers document to determine if the ECU will respond only to
communications from a specific J1939 address. If the ECU will respond only to communications from a
specific address, the CAN Bus Address setting for the DGC-2020HD must be set to that address. The
CAN Bus Address under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU) settings is the Address the DGC-2020HD claims on the
J1939 network. The Engine ECU Address setting under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU) settings should be set to
the address the engine ECU claims on the J1939 network.

ECU Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, ECU Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > CAN Bus 2 (ECU) Setup > ECU Setup
The following paragraphs describe the settings on the ECU Setup screen. Refer to Figure 5-7.

ECU Type
The DGC-2020HD can be configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU MDEC, MTU ADEC, MTU
ECU7/ECU8, GM/Doosan, Cummins, MTU Smart Connect, Scania, John Deere, Isuzu, or Daimler CPC4.
Scania Engine ECU Communications
The majority of CAN bus parameters are sent from Scania Engine ECUs via standard J1939
communications. However, some additional proprietary parameters are sent via Scania proprietary J1939
communications. Proprietary Start, Stop, and Emergency Stop commands are sent from the
DGC-2020HD to the Scania ECU. The ECU communicates Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Levels, as well as
DEF Fluid Low, DEF Low Severe, DEF Inducement, and DEF Severe Inducement Pre-Alarms to the
DGC-2020HD through Proprietary Scania parameters. Additional information on DEF related parameters
can be found in the Exhaust Treatment chapter.
Isuzu
When the ECU type is set for Isuzu, the Clear ECU Memory and Escape Mode Request buttons are
operational. When the Clear ECU Memory button is clicked, it will remain on for five seconds and then
turn off, sending a five-second long memory clear request to the engine ECU. When the Escape Mode
Request button is clicked, a temporary override of inducement to not operate the engine is sent to the
ECU.
Daimler CPC4
When the ECU type is set for Daimler CPC4, the DGC-2020HD monitors the Torque Limit (LIM) Lamp
Status broadcast via proprietary J1939 communications from the Daimler engine ECU to the DGC-
2020HD. When the monitored LIM Lamp status indicates the lamp is on solid, the DGC-2020HD
annunciates a pre-alarm displaying the LIM symbol and text “Torque Limit”. When the monitored LIM
Lamp status indicates the lamp is flashing, the DGC-2020HD annunciates a pre-alarm displaying the LIM
symbol and text “Torque Limit Severe”.

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

The diesel particulate filter settings are used when the ECU is configured for Standard, Volvo Penta, MTU
ADEC, GM/Doosan, Cummins, MTU Smart Connect, Scania, John Deere, Isuzu, or Daimler CPC4. The
DGC-2020HD supports the CAN parameters that are related to the diesel particulate filter implemented
on certain engines to meet Tier 4 emission requirements.
Two parameters are provided to initiate or disable DPF regeneration. The first, Manual Regeneration, is
transmitted to the engine via CAN to initiate DPF regeneration. The second, Disable Regeneration, is
transmitted to the engine via CAN to disable DPF regeneration. Extended operation with regeneration
disabled is not recommended.

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-17

Figure 5-7. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, ECU Setup

Speed Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus Setup, Speed Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > CAN Bus 2 (ECU) Setup > ECU Setup >
Speed Setup
Speed control over J1939 and ECU7/ECU8 is implemented over CAN when the CAN bus RPM Request
setting is enabled. This is implemented for all ECUs. The Engine RPM setting defines the nominal
requested engine rpm. The Idle RPM setting is the requested rpm when the IDLE REQUEST logic
element is true.
A Remember Speed Adjustments setting is provided to establish how RPM adjustments by raise/lower
commands are saved. When Yes is selected, adjustments to RPM by raise/lower commands are saved to
memory and used for all subsequent run sessions. This is true even when power is cycled to the
DGC-2020HD. When No is selected, adjustments to RPM by raise/lower commands are retained for the
duration of only the current run session. The adjustments are discarded the next time the engine is run or
the DGC-2020HD is power cycled.
The Idle RPM setting is the requested rpm when the IDLE REQUEST logic element is true.
The RPM Bandwidth setting defines the range of rpm in which the DGC-2020 will use to accomplish load
sharing. For example, if the Engine rpm setting is 1800 and the RPM Bandwidth is set to 100, the rpm
request can go from 1750 to 1850 rpm when load sharing is in effect.
The RPM Checksum setting enables or disables the Message Counter and RPM Checksum. Some newer
engine ECUs will not respond to TSC1 speed request when the speed is a constant value unless a
Message Counter and Checksum are implemented.
Figure 5-8 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Speed Setup screen.

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-18 9469300995

Figure 5-8. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, Speed Setup

Voltage Regulator Setup

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus Setup, Voltage
Regulator Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings, Communication > CAN Bus 2 (ECU) Setup > Volt Reg Setup
The DGC-2020HD transmits voltage setpoint and underfrequency compensation parameters to a
connected voltage regulator. Select the appropriate CAN Bus type being used: None, Marathon, Basler,
or J1939. The Primary Voltage Setpoint value represents the normal desired system voltage setpoint.
Alternate Voltage Setpoint becomes the active system voltage setpoint when low line override is true. The
range in which the DGC-2020HD biases voltage regulator var sharing and voltage trim is dictated by the
Voltage Adjust Bandwidth setting. When the voltage regulator is in Field Current Regulation (FCR) mode,
the normal desired field current setpoint is set using the Field Current Setting for Field Current Regulation
Mode. The Primary Underfrequency Knee setting allows adjustment of the normal desired
underfrequency knee-point. When low line override is true, the Alternate Underfrequency Knee becomes
the active underfrequency knee-point. The desired Underfrequency slope can also be specified.
Figure 5-9 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Voltage Regulator Setup screen.

Figure 5-9. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, Voltage Regulator Setup

Battery Charger Setup

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus Setup, Battery
Charger Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings, Communication > CAN Bus 2 (ECU) Setup > Batt Charger Setup
Battery charger output voltage and current can be displayed on the front-panel overview screen and in
BESTCOMSPlus. To enable battery charger display on the front-panel overview screen, navigate to

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-19

Settings Explorer, General Settings > Front Panel HMI in BESTCOMSPlus and set Battery Charger
Display to Enabled.
The CAN Bus Type can be set for Standard or Sens. Status and pre-alarm logic blocks are available in
BESTlogicPlus. Different pre-alarms for each CAN Bus type are available.
Figures 5-10 through 5-12 illustrate the BESTCOMSPlus Battery Charger Setup screens.

Figure 5-10. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, Battery Charger Setup

Figure 5-11. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, Battery Charger Pre-Alarms

Figure 5-12. Settings Explorer, Communications, CAN Bus, Sens Battery Charger Pre-Alarms

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-20 9469300995

RS-232
DGC-2020HD controllers are equipped with an RS-232 port which communicates with an external user-
supplied telephone modem with dial-in and dial-out capability.

RS-232 Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, RS232 Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > RS232 Setup
The RS-232 port supports a user-selectable baud rate of 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, or 115,200.
Seven or eight data bits per character can be selected. Odd, even, or no parity is supported. One or two
stop bits are selectable.
A Flow Control setting enables hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control. One device is often capable of sending
data much faster than the other can receive. Flow Control allows the slower device to signal the faster
device to pause and resume data transmission. The modem, connected to the PC, must also be
configured to use flow control. This is configured using the Modem Initialization String setting on the New
Connection screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The command to enable flow control to the modem is specific to
the modem manufacturer. Refer to Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13. Settings Explorer, Communications, RS232 Setup

External Modem
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Modem Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > Modem Setup
A connection with an external, user-supplied modem provides communications between the DGC-
2020HD and a PC via BESTCOMSPlus. Modem connection to a PC running BESTCOMSPlus provides
remote metering, setting, annunciation, and control of the DGC-2020HD. Dial-out capability allows the
DGC-2020HD to dial up to four telephone numbers and annunciate user-selected conditions to specified
pagers.

Modem Setup
Dial-Out
An external modem gives the DGC-2020HD the ability to dial up to four telephone numbers and
annunciate user-selected conditions to specified pager IDs. These user-selectable conditions are found in
the following categories:
• Alarms • Vector Jump Protection
• Undervoltage Protection • Loss of Excitation Protection
• Generator Overvoltage Protection • Configurable Elements

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-21

• Phase Voltage Imbalance Protection • Contact Inputs

• Generator Frequency Protection • Status Change
• Generator Overcurrent Protection • Contact Expansion Modules 1 through 4
• Power Protection
The DGC-2020HD uses telelocator alphanumeric protocol (TAP) version 1.7 when communicating with
paging companies. This data format specifies seven data bits with even parity. If required, eight data bits
with no parity can be specified.
Message strings sent by the DGC-2020HD can be limited to a length supported by the receiving pagers.
If a message to be transmitted by the DGC-2020HD exceeds the pager message length limit, it will make
multiple calls to transmit the complete message.
Dial-out messages are sent by the DGC-2020HD at a user-defined interval determined by the Inter
Dialout Activation Delay. This interval gives an operator the opportunity to dial into the DGC-2020HD. A
second user-defined interval, Modem Offline Delay, determines how frequently dial-out attempts are
made following a dial-out failure.
A prefix of ‘1’, the area code, or both may need to be included. This can be tested by dialing the number
on a telephone. If the modem “handshake” is heard, then the prefixes used are correct.
Dial-In
When the external modem shares a line used for voice communication, the number of rings required for
the modem to answer can be adjusted to allow time for an operator to answer an incoming telephone call.
Additional settings can be adjusted by use of modem initialization string commands. Modem initialization
strings (AT commands) of up to 50 characters are accepted. Refer to the manufacturer documentation
included with your modem for compatible initialization strings.
The Modem Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 5-14.

Figure 5-14. Settings Explorer, Communications, Modem Setup

Establishing Modem Communication

Prior to establishing modem communication, the baud rate used by the PC must match the baud rate
used by the DGC-2020HD.
The baud rate used by the DGC-2020HD can be set directly through the front panel interface or through
BESTCOMSPlus via USB (local) or Ethernet (remote) connection. If using the front panel, navigate to
Settings > Communication > RS-232 Setup. If using BESTCOMSPlus, navigate to Settings Explorer,
DGC-2020HD Communication
5-22 9469300995

Communications, RS-232 Setup (Figure 5-13). Set the baud rate to the desired value and send the
settings, if using BESTCOMSPlus.
Open the Connection screen by clicking the Connect button located on the lower menu bar. On the
Connection screen, select SerialRS-232 / Modem Connection and click the Properties button. The
Advanced Serial Port Properties dialog box appears. Set the baud rate to match the value found on the
RS-232 screen. Figure 5-15 illustrates the Advanced Serial Port Properties dialog box.

Figure 5-15. Advanced Serial Port Properties

On the Connection screen, select SerialRS-232 / Modem Connection, and enter the phone number of the
modem connected to the DGC-2020HD. To select the correct COM Port, open Windows® Device
Manager and expand the Modems branch. Right-click on the modem name and choose Properties. Open
the Advanced tab to view the COM port. Click Connect.
Ensure that successful modem communication is achieved prior to installation at the application site as
some modems are incapable of communicating with each other.
It is recommended that the fastest possible baud rate is chosen while still maintaining reliable
communications.
When connected to the DGC-2020HD via modem, the BESTCOMSPlus Analysis metering screen is
disabled.

RS-485
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, RS485 Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > RS485 Setup
DGC-2020HD controllers can be monitored and controlled via a polled network using the Modbus
protocol. The RS-485 port supports a user-selectable baud rate of 1,200; 2,400; 4,800; 9,600; 19,200;
38,400; 57,600; or 115,200. Seven or eight data bits per character can be selected. Odd, even, or no
parity is supported. One or two stop bits are selectable.
The RS485 Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 5-16.

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-23

Figure 5-16. Settings Explorer, Communications, RS485 Setup

Modbus® Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Modbus Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > Modbus Setup
The DGC-2020HD employs the Modbus communication protocol over the Ethernet and RS-485 ports
simultaneously. Up to six TCP/IP Modbus masters are supported. A list of Modbus registers can be found
in Basler Electric publication 9469300998, Modbus Protocol Instruction Manual.
When Auto Save is enabled, settings are automatically saved to nonvolatile memory after Modbus writes.
Alternately, when Auto Save is disabled, you must write to the Save All Settings Modbus register to save
settings.
The Modbus Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17. Settings Explorer, Communications, Modbus Setup

Email Setup
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Email Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > Email Setup
The DGC-2020HD is capable of sending email alerts when triggered by user-selected events. Setup of
email notifications is made on the BESTCOMSPlus Email Setup screen (Settings Explorer,
Communications, Email Setup) illustrated in Figure 5-18.

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-24 9469300995

A notification is configured by entering the SMTP email server address and the email addresses of the
intended recipients. The DGC-2020HD supports only unauthenticated SMTP mail servers with static IP
addresses.
Multiple email addresses can be entered in the “To” and “CC” fields. Email addresses must be separated
by commas. The maximum number of email addresses per field is limited to a total of 650 characters,
including commas.
The “mail from” address is a concatenation of the DGC-2020HD’s device ID and Station Name
([email protected]). This address is displayed in the From field when an email alert is
received. The default Mail From Domain is noreply.com. This setting can be modified if necessary to
prevent spam filtering from the mail server.
The Subject field accepts up to 64 characters. This string is displayed in the Subject field of an email
alert.

Figure 5-18. Settings Explorer, Communications, Email Setup

Remote Display Panel (optional)

Applications that require remote annunciation can use Basler Electric’s Remote Display Panel. This
device provides remote indication of many pre-alarm and alarm conditions.
Remote Display Panel connections are made at 62 (RDP TxD–), 61 (RDP TxD+), 49 (BATT–), and 48
(BATT+).
The following pre-alarm conditions are indicated by LEDs on the Remote Display Panel when enabled in
the DGC-2020HD:
• High coolant temperature
• Low coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• Low fuel level
• Weak battery
• Battery overvoltage‡
• Battery charger failure∗‡
The following alarm conditions are indicated by LEDs and an audible alarm on the Remote Display Panel
when enabled in the DGC-2020HD. The Overcrank, Emergency Stop, Fuel Leak/Sender Failure, and
Sender Failure alarms are always enabled.
Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 5-25

• Low coolant level∗

• High coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• Overcrank
• Overspeed
• Emergency stop activated†
• Fuel leak/Sender failure∗‡
• Sender failure‡
∗ The LED on the Remote Display Panel illuminates when the input that is assigned to this programmable
function is closed. This programmable function must be enabled in the DGC-2020HD.
† The LED on the Remote Display Panel illuminates when the input that is assigned to this programmable
function is closed.
‡ This LED can be reprogrammed in the DGC-2020HD to suit the needs of a particular application. The
condition listed above is annunciated by default. See the BESTlogicPlus chapter for information about
configuring the RDP Programmable Alarm and Pre-Alarm logic blocks.
Additionally, the Remote Display Panel indicates when the DGC-2020HD is not operating in Auto mode
and when the generator is supplying load. The Switch Not In Auto LED illuminates when the DGC-
2020HD is in an alarm state not listed above.
See the Terminals and Connectors chapter in the Installation manual for more information on connecting
the Remote Display Panel to the DGC-2020HD. Refer to Basler Publication 9318100990 for more
information on the Remote Display Panel.

DGC-2020HD Communication
5-26 9469300995

Communication DGC-2020HD
9469300995 6-1

6 • Device Configuration
System parameters configure the DGC-2020HD for operation with a specific application. This chapter lists
items to consider when configuring the DGC-2020HD. These items consist of system settings, rated data,
remote module setup, crank settings, automatic restart settings, exercise timer settings, sensing
transformer ratings, differential transformer settings, relay control settings, and system configuration
detection settings.

System Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > System Settings
The System Settings parameters consist of number of fly wheel teeth, speed signal source, power-up
delay, fuel level function, NFPA compliance level, EPS supplying load, system units, and metric pressure
units. Figure 6-1 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings screen.

System Type
Select whether the system is a Single Generator or Multiple Generator system.

Number Flywheel Teeth

Number Fly Wheel Teeth is used when calculating engine rpm.

Speed Signal Source

The DGC-2020HD can be configured to detect engine speed from a magnetic pickup (MPU), the genset
frequency, or both MPU and genset frequency. On engines with CAN-compatible ECUs, if MPU or MPU
Freq is selected as the Speed Signal Source, the DGC-2020HD uses the CAN interface as the speed
source when CAN is enabled. If Gen Freq is set as the Speed Signal Source, the DGC-2020HD uses the
generator frequency.
When engine speed is obtained from the genset frequency, the DGC-2020HD uses the rated (nominal)
genset frequency and nominal rpm rating when calculating engine rpm.
When engine speed is obtained from an MPU, the DGC-2020HD uses the number of flywheel teeth when
calculating engine rpm.
The speed signal from the MPU takes priority when both the genset frequency and MPU are selected as
the engine speed source. If both MPU and genset frequency are selected and the MPU fails, the
DGC-2020HD automatically switches to the genset frequency as the engine speed source. Also, a pre-
alarm is issued to indicate the failure of the MPU.

Power-Up Delay
In some cases, the ECU may take longer than the DGC-2020HD to power up. To counteract this, the
power up delay setting can be used to delay the initial pulsing of the ECU for data on DGC-2020HD
power up.

Fuel Level Function

This setting determines whether the fuel level indications and the related alarm and pre-alarm are
enabled or disabled. Setting selections include, Fuel Level, Natural Gas, Liquid Propane, or Disabled.
Selecting a fuel type other than Fuel Level disables any fuel level indication, alarm, or pre-alarm. This
includes the Fuel Level value on the Metering Explorer, Engine screen in BESTCOMSPlus.

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-2 9469300995

Note
If using an analog input or resistive sender input for fuel level, coolant
temperature, or oil pressure source, the sender characteristic curves
must be configured using the instructions in the Engine Sender Inputs
chapter. If the curves are not configured properly, the parameters will
not display correctly on the front panel or in BESTCOMSPlus.

Fuel Level Source

If using a resistive fuel level sender, select the Resistive Sender option. In cases where a fuel level
transducer with a 4 to 20 mA or -10 to 10 Vdc signal is used, select the appropriate analog input. Analog
inputs 1 and 2 can always be selected. Analog inputs 3 and 4 are available to DGC-2020HD units with
the analog sender inputs option (style number xxxxxxxxA).

Coolant Temperature Source

If using a resistive coolant temperature sender, select the Resistive Sender option. This option is only
available to DGC-2020HD units with resistive sender inputs (style number xxxxxxxxR). If using a coolant
temperature transducer with a 4 to 20 mA or -10 to 10 Vdc signal, select the appropriate analog input.
Analog inputs 1 and 2 can always be selected. Analog inputs 3 and 4 are available to DGC-2020HD units
with the analog sender inputs option (style number xxxxxxxxA).

Oil Pressure Source

If using a resistive oil pressure sender, select the Resistive Sender option. This option is only available to
DGC-2020HD units with resistive sender inputs (style number xxxxxxxxR). If using an oil pressure
transducer with a 4 to 20 mA or -10 to 10 Vdc signal, select the appropriate analog input. Analog inputs 1
and 2 can always be selected. Analog inputs 3 and 4 are available to DGC-2020HD units with the analog
sender inputs option (style number xxxxxxxxA).

NFPA Compliance Level

The DGC-2020HD can be used in an application requiring compliance with NFPA Standard 110. Levels 1
and 2 of Standard 110 are supported. Selecting level 1 or 2 affects DGC-2020HD operation in the
following ways:
• Number of crank cycles is fixed at 3
• Crank cycle time is fixed at 15 seconds
• Continuous crank time is fixed at 45 seconds
• Low coolant temperature pre-alarm setting is fixed at 70°F
• Off Mode Cooldown is disabled
• Not In Auto Horn Enable setting is Enabled
• Horn setting is Enabled

EPS Supplying Load

EPS Supplying Load options are Low-line Scale Factor and EPS Threshold. These settings are described
in the following paragraphs.

Low-line Scale Factor

Low-line Scale Factor automatically adjusts the EPS threshold setting in applications utilizing more than
one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is implemented when the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration. If the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact
input via the Programmable Functions screen, the state of the contact input and the detected
configuration are ORed. This means, if one or both are true, then the system is determined to be
configured for low-line. The value of the scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the threshold
setting. For example, if a scale factor contact input is received by the DGC-2020HD and the scale factor
setting is 2.000, the threshold setting is doubled (2.000 x Threshold setting).

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-3

EPS Threshold
Indication that the emergency power system is supplying load is determined by a user-adjustable
threshold setting. This setting is expressed as a percentage of the genset CT (nominal) primary rating.
This setting accepts values from 3 to 10, in increments of 1%.

System Units
Engine oil pressure and coolant temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units of measure.

Metric Pressure Units

When system units are displayed in Metric, this setting allows engine oil pressure to be displayed in either
bar or kPa/MPa.

System Breaker Configuration

Select the appropriate breaker control configuration using the System Breaker Configuration setting. In
BESTCOMSPlus, a one-line diagram is provided for each breaker configuration to aid in proper selection.
Refer to the Breaker Management chapter for details on system breaker configurations.
A Swap Bus 1 with Bus 2 check box is provided to allow the metering of the bus VTs to be swapped
internal to the DGC-2020HD, eliminating the need for physical swapping of the VT connections.

Generator, Bus 1, and Bus 2 Labels

Each bus can be programmed with a text label describing its use. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters are
accepted. This label appears in BESTCOMSPlus to aid in ease of configuration and programming.

Figure 6-1. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-4 9469300995

Rated Data
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Paths:
Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data, Generator Rated Data
Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data, Bus 1 Rated Data
Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data, Bus 2 Rated Data (optional)
Front Panel Navigation Paths:
Settings > System Parameters > Rated Data, Gen
Settings > System Parameters > Rated Data, Bus 1
Settings > System Parameters > Rated Data, Bus 2 (optional)
Rated Data parameters consist of sensing transformer ratings, voltage ratings, current ratings, power
ratings, and sensing configuration. These ratings can be viewed on the following read-only screens:
Generator (Figure 6-2), Bus 1(Figure 6-3), and optional Bus 2 (identical to Figure 6-3). To edit rated data
settings for the generator, bus 1, or optional bus 2, click the Edit button found on any of these screens.
Upon clicking the Edit button, the floating Rated Data screen appears. All rated data settings for
generator, bus 1, and optional bus 2 can be configured here. Figure 6-4 illustrates the floating Rated Data
screen.

Sensing Transformer Ratings

Generator
Generator PT settings establish the nominal primary (generator side) and secondary (DGC-2020HD side)
voltage levels at the generator voltage-sensing transformer.
Generator CT settings establish the nominal, primary (generator side) current level at the generator
current sensing transformer. The secondary value of the generator CT is dictated by the style number of
the controller. A DGC-2020HD with a style number of 1xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 1
Aac. A DGC-2020HD with a style number of 5xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 5 Aac.
Gen CT Low-line Scale Factor is used to automatically adjust the Gen CT Primary Amps setting in
applications that may utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD senses a contact closure at a contact input programmed to activate
scaling of the settings. Scale factor serves as a multiplier for the Gen CT Primary Amps setting. For
example, if a scale factor contact input is received by the DGC-2020HD and the scale factor setting is
2.000, the Gen CT Primary Amps setting is doubled (2.000 x Gen CT Primary Amps).

Bus 1 and Bus 2

Primary and secondary bus transformer ratings are used by the optional automatic transfer switch
function. This function monitors a three-phase bus input to detect mains failure. The primary setting
establishes the nominal voltage present at phases A, B, and, C of the bus. The secondary setting
establishes the nominal voltage detected at the bus voltage input of the DGC-2020HD.
Bus CT settings establish the nominal, primary (bus side) current level at the bus current sensing
transformer. The secondary value of the bus CT is dictated by the style number of the controller. A DGC-
2020HD with a style number of 1xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 1 Aac. A DGC-2020HD
with a style number of 5xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 5 Aac.

Voltage Ratings
Rated Volts accepts a value from 1 to 500,000, in increments of 1 volt.
Rated Volts Low-Line Scale Factor: Rated Volts Low-line Scale Factor is used to automatically adjust the
Rated Volts setting in applications that may utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale
factor setting is implemented when the DGC-2020HD senses a contact closure at a contact input which
drives the Low Line Override programmable function or the Low Line Override logic element in
BESTlogic™Plus. When Low Line Override is active the DGC-2020HD activates scaling of the settings.
The Scale Factor setting serves as a multiplier for the Rated Volts setting.

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-5

Rated Secondary Volts is calculated using the following equation:

 Gen PT Secondary Volts 
Rated Secondary Volts = Rated Volts  
 Gen PT Primary Volts 
Equation 6-1. Rated Secondary Volts

Current Ratings
Rated Phase Amps is calculated using the following equations:
Rated kVA
Rated Phase Amps (3 − phase machine) =
Rated L − L Volts 3
Equation 6-2. Rated Phase Amps for Three-Phase Connections

Rated kVA
Rated Phase Amps (1 − phase machine) =
Rated L − L Volts
Equation 6-3. Rated Phase Amps for Single-Phase Connections

Rated Secondary Phase Amps is calculated using the following equation:

 CT Secondary Amps 
Rated Secondary Phase Amps = Rated Phase Amps  
 CT Primary Amps 
Equation 6-4. Rated Secondary Phase Amps

Power Ratings
Rated Power Factor accepts a value from -1 to 1, in increments of 0.01.
Rated kW accepts a value from 0 to 1,000,000, in increments of 0.01.
Rated kVA is calculated using the following equation:
Rated kW
Rated kVA =
Rated PF
Equation 6-5. Rated kVA
Rated kvar is calculated using the following equation:

Rated kvar = Rated kVA 1 − Rated PF 2

Equation 6-6. Rated kvar

Sensing Configuration
Phase Rotation
Select either ABC (clockwise rotation) or ACB (counterclockwise rotation).

Voltage Sensing Connection Type

This setting provides selections for the voltage sensing connection type. Select Delta, Wye, Single-phase
A-B, Single-phase A-C, or Grounded Delta.

Current Sensing Connection Type

Selectable current sensing connections types are A, B, C, AB, BC, CA, or CT ABC.

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-6 9469300995

Frequency
The frequency settings allow selection of the rated frequency of the generator and an alternate frequency.

Rated Frequency of the Unit

Rated frequency options are 50 and 60 Hz.

Alternate Frequency
This setting accepts values from 10 to 90, in increments of 0.01.

Battery Volts
Nominal voltage of the starter battery is used by the DGC-2020HD to detect and annunciate high, low, or
weak battery voltage. Battery Volts options are 12 V and 24 V.

Rated Engine RPM

This field accepts values from 25 to 3,600, in increments of 1.

Ground Current Primary Amps

Ground Current Auxiliary CT settings establish the nominal, primary (bus side) current level at the ground
current sensing transformer. This setting accepts values from 1 to 9,999, in increments of 1. The
secondary value of the ground current sensing CT is determined by the style number of the controller. A
DGC-2020HD with a style number of 1xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 1 Aac. A DGC-
2020HD with a style number of 5xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 5 Aac.

Figure 6-2. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data, Generator Rated Data Screen (Read Only)

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-7

Figure 6-3. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Rated Data, Bus Rated Data Screen (Read Only)

Figure 6-4. Floating Rated Data Screen

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-8 9469300995

Remote Module Setup

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Remote Module Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Settings > Remote Module Setup
DGC-2020HD controllers are capable of communicating with up to four contact expansion modules
(CEM-2020s) and up to four analog expansion modules (AEM-2020s) on a single network.
To set up an optional CEM-2020, select Enable, input the appropriate J1939 address, and select the
appropriate number of outputs available to the module. The low current module (CEM-2020) provides 24
contact outputs and the high current module (CEM-2020H) provides 18 contact outputs.
For optional AEM-2020 setup, select Enable, input the appropriate J1939 address, and input the
expected serial number. Expected serial numbers are used by the DGC-2020HD to determine which
input/output points belong to a module when multiple modules are present. An AEM-2020 Not Configured
pre-alarm occurs if the expected serial number does not match the serial number detected on the General
Settings, Device Info screen.
Figure 6-5 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Remote Module Setup screen.

Figure 6-5. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Remote Module Setup

Crank Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Crank Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Crank Settings
Crank settings consist of pre-start, restart, cranking, crank disconnect, and cooldown. These settings are
described in the paragraphs below.
Figure 6-6 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Crank Settings screen.

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-9

Figure 6-6. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Crank Settings

Pre-Start
If desired, cranking can be delayed after initiating engine startup. During this delay, the Pre-Start output
closes to energize glow plugs or pre-start lubrication pumps. The Pre-crank Delay setting accepts values
from 0 to 30, in increments of 1 second.
The Pre-Start output can be configured to open upon conclusion of engine cranking or remain closed
while the engine is running.
The Pre-Start output can be configured during the resting state. If Preheat Before Crank is selected, the
Pre-Start output is closed for the duration of the Pre-crank Delay time prior to re-entering the cranking
state. If the Pre-crank delay setting is longer than the rest interval, the Pre-Start output is closed for the
entire duration of the rest time.

Restart
Attempting to start an engine after a normal shutdown but before the engine RPM has settled to zero can
stress an engine in certain situations. The Restart Delay inhibits attempts to start the engine immediately
after a normal shutdown for the duration of the Restart Delay timer. This delay should allow an engine to
properly spin down before attempting to restart. This setting accepts values from 0 to 120 seconds, in
increments of 1 second.

Cranking
The DGC-2020HD can be programmed for either cycle or continuous cranking. Cycle cranking provides
multiple engine starting attempts. Each starting attempt consists of an interval of engine cranking followed
by a rest interval. Continuous cranking provides a single, extended engine-starting attempt.

Crank Disconnect
Under normal operation, engine rpm is used to determine crank disconnect. The Crank Disconnect Limit
setting establishes the engine rpm percentage at which the starter is disconnected.
Oil Pressure Crank Disconnect provides a secondary indication that the engine is running. This ensures
that the starter is disconnected, even if no engine rpm sources are functioning. When enabled, oil
pressure is used to determine if the engine is running when no valid speed source is detected. If the
engine oil pressure is above the threshold and no valid speed source is detected, the starter is
disconnected from the engine. If a valid speed source is detected, the oil pressure crank disconnect

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-10 9469300995

function is inhibited to prevent an undesired crank disconnect when oil pressure rises above the threshold
during normal engine cranking.

Cool Down
After the load is removed from a genset, the DGC-2020HD implements a smart cool down function. This
function ensures that the engine and turbocharger properly cool down by maintaining engine operation for
a user-defined duration.
This cool down function is initiated for any one of the following conditions:
• Genset load is removed and engine shutdown is permitted while in AUTO mode
• Auto Transfer switch (ATS) opens while operating in AUTO mode
• Remote shutdown is initiated while in AUTO mode
• Off Mode Cool down is initiated
• Cool down Request logic element is initiated
• Cool and Stop Request logic element is initiated

Smart Cool Down Function

The smart cool down function reduces unnecessary fuel expenditure by considering overall cool down
time through multiple requests. For example, a new cool down request is initiated after a previous cool
down sequence has already started. The cool down timer is not simply reset with each new request.
Instead, the amount of time that the engine has spent cooling down is factored into the new request. This
saves time and fuel by running the engine no longer than necessary to achieve proper cool down.

Automatic Restart Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Automatic Restart
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Auto Restart
When enabled, the Automatic Restart clears all alarms automatically if the DGC-2020HD shuts down due
to an alarm condition. An attempt to restart the engine is made, after a predetermined time delay, if the
ATS contact input is closed. If an ATS contact is not present, the unit remains in the READY state with
alarms cleared. A restart is not attempted if a low fuel alarm or emergency stop is present. The number of
restart attempts is programmable. Automatic restart attempts are recorded in the event log.
Auto Restart Interval accepts values from 0.5 to 30 minutes, in increments of 0.5 minutes. The Auto
Restart Attempts setting accepts values from 1 to 10, in increments of 1.
The BESTCOMSPlus Automatic Restart screen is illustrated in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Automatic Restart

Exercise Timer Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Exercise Timer
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Exercise Timer
The exercise timer is used to start the genset at a predetermined time and run for a user-defined period.
The mode defines how often the genset will run. If monthly is selected, the day of the month to start must
Device Configuration DGC-2020HD
9469300995 6-11

also be selected. If weekly is selected, the day of the week to start must also be selected. If Weekday of
Month is selected, Start Day of Week and Week of Month must also be selected. Settings for Start Hour
and Start Minute can also be defined. The Run Period Hours and Minutes define how long the genset will
run each session. The Start Hour and Run Period Hours settings accept values from 0 to 23, in
increments of 1 hour. The Start Minute and Run Period Minutes settings accept values from 0 to 59, in
increments of 1. If Run with Load is enabled, the DGC-2020HD closes the generator breaker during the
run time.
Contact inputs and outputs can be assigned to this function. Refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter for more
information.
The BESTCOMSPlus Exercise Timer screen is illustrated in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Exercise Timer

Seven Day Timer

The seven day timer provides eight unique timers per day of the week (Sunday, Monday, etc) totaling 56
timers overall. Each timer is programmed with a start time and a run period. The starting time is
expressed as start hour and minutes using a 24-hour clock, which specifies the local clock time to start
the timer. The run period is expressed as hours and minutes. The total running time is Run Period Hours
plus Run Period Minutes. In order to disable a timer, the Run Period Hours and Run Period Minutes
settings must both be set to 0.
Timers may overlap into the following day. For example, a timer set to start on Sunday at 23 hours, 00
minutes with a run period of 4 hours, 00 minutes runs into the following Monday ending at 3:00 am.
Fifty-six unique status inputs are available in logic that are true when a timer is active.
Figure 6-9 illustrates the Seven Day Timer screen.

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-12 9469300995

Figure 6-9. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Seven Day Timer

Sensing Transformer Ratings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Sensing Transformers
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Sensing Transformers
Sensing transformer settings configure the DGC-2020HD for operation with a specific system. These
settings, along with the generator voltage, generator current, bus voltage, and bus current detected by the
DGC-2020HD, enable it to accurately meter system values and offer protection.
Figure 6-10 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Sensing Transformers screen. To edit rated data settings for
the generator, bus 1, or optional bus 2, click the Rated Data button found on this screen. Upon clicking
the Rated Data button, the floating Rated Data screen appears. All rated data settings for generator, bus
1, and optional bus 2 can be configured here. Figure 6-4 illustrates the floating Rated Data screen.

Aux CT Mapping
DGC-2020HD controllers with style number xxxxxxxBx have one auxiliary CT and controllers with style
number xxxxxxxEx have four. Specify the mappings for each auxiliary CT using these settings.

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-13

Figure 6-10. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Sensing Transformers

Differential Transformer Ratings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Differential Transformers
Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Sensing Transformers
Differential transformer settings are available in DGC-2020HD controllers with the Enhanced Plus
Differential option (style: xxDxxxxEx). These settings configure the differential protection.

87G Rated Volts

This value is used in the tap compensation calculation (kVn). It is the rated voltage of the non-generator
side of the protected zone. Refer to the Protection chapter for details on tap compensation settings.

87G Primary Amps

87G auxiliary CT settings establish the nominal, primary (bus side) current level at the 87G current
sensing transformer. This setting accepts values from 1 to 9,999, in increments of 1. The secondary value
of the ground current sensing CT is dictated by the style number of the controller. A DGC-2020HD with a
style number of 1xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 1 Aac. A DGC-2020HD with a style
number of 5xxxxxxxx uses a nominal CT secondary rating of 5 Aac.

Tap
Sensed current is divided by the tap value to eliminate magnitude mismatch. See the Protection chapter
for details on tap compensation settings.

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-14 9469300995

Differential Circuit
The value of this setting establishes the differential side of the protected zone. This is only used in
reporting.

Transformer Connection
For differential protection to operate, the phase angle of the measured values for each circuit must be
comparable. For example, measured current values for a transformer may be WYE on one side and delta
on the other, and therefore could not be compared directly. The Gen Differential Transformer setting
establishes the transformer connection type on the generator side of the protected zone. The 87G
Differential Transformer setting establishes the transformer connection type on the other side of the
protected zone.

Ground Compensate
When enabled, the zero-sequence value is subtracted from each phase of the circuit.

Reverse Current
When 180° Compensation is selected, the complex value of each phase is negated, simulating a 180°
shift. This is the equivalent of physically flipping the direction of the CT on the 87G side of the protected
zone.

Phase Relationship
This setting establishes the type of phase rotation compensation to be applied.
When set to A, no compensation is applied. When set to B, R2 compensation is applied. When set to C,
R1 compensation is applied.

R1 Rotation Compensation Mode Equations

𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐼𝐼𝐶𝐶
𝐼𝐼𝐵𝐵 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴
𝐼𝐼𝐶𝐶 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐼𝐼𝐵𝐵

R2 Rotation Compensation Mode Equations

𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐼𝐼𝐵𝐵
𝐼𝐼𝐵𝐵 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐼𝐼𝐶𝐶
𝐼𝐼𝐶𝐶 − 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴

CT Connection Type
For differential protection to operate, the phase angle of the measured values for each circuit must be
comparable. For example, measured current values for a transformer may be WYE on one side and delta
on the other, and therefore could not be compared directly. The Gen Differential CT Connection Type
setting establishes the CT connection type on the generator side of the protected zone. The 87G
Differential CT Connection Type setting establishes the CT connection type on the other side of the
protected zone.

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-15

Figure 6-11. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Differential Transformers Setup

Relay Control Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Relay Control
The default operational setting for the Start, Run, and Pre-start relays is Predefined or standard. Any of
these relays can be logic driven by selecting the Programmable setting. Logic driven programmable
relays must be set up using BESTlogicPlus
Figure 6-12 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Relay Control screen.

Figure 6-12. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control

System Configuration Detection Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Auto Config Detection
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Auto Config Detect

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-16 9469300995

When enabled, this feature allows the DGC-2020HD to automatically detect its sensing configuration in
relation to the generator. Upon starting the genset, the configuration of the generator is automatically
detected. Single-Phase Override and Low-Line Override statuses are set accordingly.
There is a one-second delay in the detection to prevent the DGC-2020HD from alternating between
detected configurations. When the DGC-2020HD is in the Off mode or the engine is not running, the
Automatic Configuration Detection function is disabled. The DGC-2020HD is assumed to be in the last
valid automatically detected configuration.
It is recommended that the Single-phase Override and Low-line Override programmable functions are not
assigned to contact inputs when Automatic Configuration Detection is enabled.
The BESTCOMSPlus Auto Config Detection screen is illustrated in Figure 6-13. Settings are listed in
Table 6-1.

Figure 6-13. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Auto Config Detection

Table 6-1. Settings for Auto Config Detection

Locator Setting Range Increment Unit
A Enable Disable or Enable n/a n/a
B Single-phase Detect Threshold 0 to 480 1 volts
C Low-line Detect Threshold 0 to 480 1 volts
D Single-Phase Detect Generator Connection A-B or A-C n/a n/a

Single-phase Detect Threshold

If the difference between the maximum and minimum line-to-line voltage exceeds this threshold, the unit
is determined to be in single-phase configuration. If determined to be in single-phase configuration, the
Single-phase Override programmable function forces the DGC-2020HD into single-phase mode. The
single-phase mode connection is determined by the Single-phase Detect Generator Connection, below.
If the Single-phase Override function is assigned to a contact input via the Programmable Functions
screen, the state of the contact input and the detected configuration are ORed. This means, if one or both
are true, then the system is determined to be configured as single-phase.

Low-line Detect Threshold

If the average of the valid line-to-line voltages for the detected configuration meets or exceeds this
threshold, the unit is determined to be in a high-line configuration. If the average is below this threshold, it
is determined to be in a low-line configuration. If determined to be in low-line configuration, the Low-Line
Override function forces the DGC-2020HD into the low-line configuration.
If the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the Programmable Functions screen,
the state of the contact input and the detected configuration are ORed. This means, if one or both are
true, then the system is determined to be configured for low-line.

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 6-17

Single-phase Detect Generator Connection

This setting specifies which single-phase connection to use when the system is determined to be single
phase. Single-phase A-B or Single-phase A-C can be selected.

DGC-2020HD Device Configuration

6-18 9469300995

Device Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 7-1

7 • Timekeeping
The DGC-2020HD provides a real-time clock with an internal backup battery. The battery will maintain
timekeeping for approximately five years (depending on conditions) after power is removed from the
controller.
The clock is used by the event recorder and sequence of events functions to time-stamp events and the
exercise timer to start and stop the genset when the exercise feature is utilized.
Refer to the Maintenance chapter in the Installation manual for information on replacing the backup
battery.

Clock Setup
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, General Settings, Clock Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > General Settings > Clock Setup
Clock settings are made through the communication ports using BESTCOMSPlus® or through the front-
panel interface. Write access to ports is required to program the clock.
The BESTCOMSPlus Clock Setup screen is illustrated in Figure 7-1.
The local time zone is configured on this screen. The Time Zone Offset is the local offset to UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time). The Time Zone Offset is required if NTP or IRIG-B is used for time
synchronization or when the Start/End Time Reference is set to UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The
Start/End Time Reference is set to UTC time if required by local daylight savings time rules. The
Start/End Hour/Minute settings determine the time when the DST will go into effect. The Bias setting is
the amount of time that the clock moves forward or backward. The default settings are configured for the
Central Time Zone in the United States as shown in Figure 7-1. Using these settings, the clock would
move forward 1 hour at 2:00 a.m. on the second Sunday in March and move backward 1 hour at 2:00
a.m. on the first Sunday in November. DST can also be configured for a specific day of the month by
selecting Fixed Dates under DST Configuration.

Time Priority Setup

There are two available protocols (NTP and IRIG-B), which can be assigned priorities to update the date
and time. Double-click on an available item to move it to the Enabled box. Use the arrow buttons to set
the priority of the selected item.
The NTP (Network Time Protocol) synchronizes the real-time clock to a network time server or another
DGC-2020HD on the network when an Ethernet cable is connected. The address of the NTP server must
be entered when NTP is selected in the Time Priority Setup, Enabled box.

IRIG Decoding
The IRIG Decoding signal defines whether or not to decode the year field in the IRIG signal. Refer to the
manufacturer of your equipment to determine if the year field is being sent to the DGC-2020HD.

Clock Not Set Warning

When enabled, this alarm annunciates when the DGC-2020HD has powered up and the clock has not
been set.

DGC-2020HD Timekeeping
7-2 9469300995

Figure 7-1. Settings Explorer, General Settings, Clock Setup Screen

Setting the Time and Date

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Metering Explorer, Real Time Clock
Front Panel Navigation Path: Metering > Status > Real Time Clock
Time and date settings can be made through BESTCOMSPlus on the Metering Explorer Real Time Clock
screen (Figure 7-2). Settings can also be made through the front panel.

Figure 7-2. Metering Explorer, Real Time Clock

Timekeeping DGC-2020HD
9469300995 7-3

IRIG Port
IRIG time code signal connections are located on the rear panel. When a valid time code signal is
detected at the port, it is used to synchronize the clock function. Note that the IRIG time code signal
received from older IRIG receivers does not contain year information. If this is the case, it will be
necessary to enter the date manually. Year information is stored in nonvolatile memory so that when
control power is restored after an outage and the clock is re-synchronized the current year is restored.
When the clock rolls over to a new year, the year is automatically incremented in nonvolatile memory. A
pre-alarm is annunciated for loss of IRIG signal. The pre-alarm monitors for IRIG signal loss once a valid
signal is detected at the IRIG port.

DGC-2020HD Timekeeping
7-4 9469300995

Timekeeping DGC-2020HD
9469300995 8-1

8 • Engine Sender Inputs

The DGC-2020HD has sender inputs dedicated to monitoring the engine fuel level, oil pressure, and
coolant temperature. These inputs are programmable to give the user flexibility in selecting the sender to
be used in an application. Information about programming sender inputs is provided later in this chapter.

Compatibility
The resistance ranges of the following senders are compatible with the DGC-2020HD. A compatible Fuel
Level sender is the Isspro model R8925. Oil pressure senders compatible with the DGC-2020HD include
Datcon model 02505-00, Isspro model R8919, Stewart-Warner models 279BF, 279C, 411K and 411M,
and VDO models 360025 and 360811. Compatible Coolant Temperature senders include Datcon model
02019-00, Faria model TS4042, Isspro model, R8959, and Stewart-Warner model 334P. Other senders
with matching resistance ranges may also be used.

Operation
A current is provided to each sender. The developed voltage is measured and scaled for use by the
internal circuitry. An open circuit or short circuit across the sender terminals will cause the DGC-2020HD
to indicate a failed sender.

Programmability
BESTCOMSPlus® software allows for the programming of sender characteristics. See Sender
Characteristic Curves for more information.

Characteristic Curves
Oil pressure, coolant temperature, and fuel level information can be obtained from resistive sender inputs
or analog inputs. These inputs of the DGC-2020HD must be customized to obtain maximum accuracy of
the measured data.
The characteristic curve of each input can be configured with up to 11 points. Each point can be assigned
a resistance or analog input value and a corresponding temperature (coolant temperature sender),
pressure (oil pressure sender), or percentage (fuel level sender) value. A slope setting automatically
orders the values in the input column according to whether the sender requires a negative or positive
slope. Sender curve points are automatically plotted on a curve in BESTCOMSPlus, which can be
printed.
Sender curve points configured in BESTCOMSPlus can be saved in the configuration file. The data for all
three senders is automatically saved with the DGC-2020HD configuration file.
Any changes made in BESTCOMSPlus to the sender points can be reverted to the factory-default values.
A new settings file can also be created.

Curve Configuration
If the DGC-2020HD receives engine information from an engine ECU, the programmable sender
parameters for coolant temperature and oil pressure do not require configuration because they have no
effect. Configuration of sender parameters is necessary for all analog inputs or resistive sender inputs.
Note the fuel level is not received over CAN Bus, so the sender curve for the fuel level input must always
be configured.

Fuel Level
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Percent Fuel Level
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through the front panel

DGC-2020HD Engine Sender Inputs

8-2 9469300995

Figure 8-1 illustrates the Fuel Level screen found in BESTCOMSPlus. To program the fuel level sender,
perform the following procedure:
1. Click on Load Fuel Settings File and select the appropriate sender file from the list.
2. If no sender file matches the sender being used, the individual points that correlate resistance to fuel
level may be modified. This can be achieved by setting numeric values in the table or dragging the
points of the graph to the desired characteristic. Information on sender characteristics should be
obtained from the sender manufacturer.
3. Select Positive or Negative sender slope as required for the desired sender graph.
4. Click Save Fuel Data to save the data in the current settings file.
5. If you want to save newly entered sender data as a sender library file, click Create Fuel Settings File
and enter a file name and location to save the file.
6. Click the Send Settings button in BESTCOMSPlus to send the sender settings to the DGC-2020HD.

Figure 8-1. Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Fuel Level Screen

Oil Pressure
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Oil Pressure
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through the front panel
Figure 8-2 illustrates the Oil Pressure screen found in BESTCOMSPlus®. To program the oil pressure
sender, perform the following procedure:
1. Click on Load Oil Settings File and select the appropriate sender file from the list.
2. If no sender file matches the sender being used, the individual points that correlate resistance to oil
pressure level may be modified. This can be achieved by setting numeric values in the table or
dragging the points of the graph to the desired characteristic. Information on sender characteristics
should be obtained from the sender manufacturer.
3. Select Positive or Negative sender slope as required for the desired sender graph.
4. Click Save Oil Data to save the data in the current settings file.
Engine Sender Inputs DGC-2020HD
9469300995 8-3

5. If you want to save newly entered sender data as a sender library file, click Create Oil Settings File
and enter a file name and location to save the file.
6. Click the Send Settings button in BESTCOMSPlus® to send the sender settings to the DGC-2020HD.

Figure 8-2. Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Oil Pressure Screen

Coolant Temperature
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Coolant Temperature
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through the front panel
Figure 8-3 illustrates the Coolant Temperature screen found in BESTCOMSPlus®. To program the coolant
temperature sender, perform the following procedure:
1. Click on Load Cool. Settings File and select the appropriate sender file from the list.
2. If no sender file matches the sender being used, the individual points that correlate resistance to
coolant temperature level may be modified. This can be achieved by setting numeric values in the
table or dragging the points of the graph to the desired characteristic. Information on sender
characteristics should be obtained from the sender manufacturer.
3. Select Positive or Negative sender slope as required for the desired sender graph.
4. Click Save Cool Data to save the data in the current settings file.
5. If you want to save newly entered sender data as a sender library file, click Create Cool Settings File
and enter a file name and location to save the file.
6. Click the Send Settings button in BESTCOMSPlus® to send the sender settings to the DGC-2020HD.

DGC-2020HD Engine Sender Inputs

8-4 9469300995

Figure 8-3. Settings Explorer, Programmable Senders, Coolant Temperature Screen

Sender Failure Detection

The DGC-2020HD can detect a loss of signal at the coolant temperature, oil pressure, or fuel level sender
input. Loss of signal is determined differently for resistive senders than for analog senders. When the
DGC-2020HD is equipped with resistive senders (style number xxxxxxxxR), an open or short across the
input terminals is considered to be a loss of signal. When the DGC-2020HD is equipped with analog
senders (style number xxxxxxxxA), any value outside of the user-defined range is considered a loss of
signal. Refer to the Analog Inputs chapter for details on analog sender range settings.

Alarm Configuration
This setting determines the action that is taken when a sender failure occurs. Alarm configurations are
described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Contact Recognition
The Contact Recognition setting defines whether the sender failure should be recognized always or only
while the engine is running. A selection of While Engine Running Only prevents spurious annunciation
when the engine is not running.

Minimum and Maximum Resistance

These settings define the range of valid resistance values for the sender. When the measured value
decreases below or increases above the set value, an alarm is annunciated. When the Minimum
Resistance value is set for zero (0), sender failure detection on the low end of the resistive sender range
is disabled. When the Maximum Resistance is set to the maximum allowed value, sender failure detection
is disabled for the high end of the sender range.

Engine Sender Inputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 8-5

Voltage Sensing Fail

The Voltage Sensing Fail function monitors the generator's line-to-neutral (L-N) voltages. If any of these
voltages falls below 2% of the CT secondary voltage for the duration of the Activation Delay, the condition
is annunciated.
Note

Phase Imbalance is the recommended method for detecting sensing failures in

Delta and Grounded Delta configurations. Using the Voltage Sensing Fail
function in these configurations may result in false annunciations.

Speed Sender Fail

The speed sender fail alarm is always enabled. A user-adjustable time delay is provided for each
sender/sensing alarm/pre-alarm.
Alarm and pre-alarm annunciations for loss of engine speed signals are not user-programmable and
operate as follows. If the MPU (magnetic pickup) or generator frequency is programmed as the sole
engine speed source and that signal source fails, an alarm (and shutdown) is triggered. If the engine
speed source is configured as MPU and generator frequency and a loss of one of the signal sources
occurs, a pre-alarm is annunciated. An alarm (and shutdown) is triggered if both speed signals are lost.
The BESTCOMSPlus Sender Fail screen is illustrated in Figure 8-4 and is found in the Settings Explorer
under Alarm Configuration.

Figure 8-4. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Sender Fail Screen

DGC-2020HD Engine Sender Inputs

8-6 9469300995

Engine Sender Inputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 9-1

9 • Contact Inputs
Contact inputs are available to initiate DGC-2020HD functions. The DGC-2020HD has sixteen
programmable contact sensing inputs. Additional contact inputs can be accommodated with up to four
optional CEM-2020s (Contact Expansion Module). Contact Basler Electric for availability and ordering
information.

Programmable Contact Inputs

Each programmable input (Input 1 through 16) can be independently configured to perform the following
functions. By default, each programmable input is disabled.
• Auto Transfer Switch
• Battery Charger Fail
• Battle Override
• Emergency Stop
• Fuel Leak Detect
• Grounded Delta Override
• Low Coolant Level
• Low Line Override
• Single-Phase Override
• Single-Phase A-C Sense Override (available only when an input is configured for Single-Phase
Override)
The programmable inputs accept dry contacts. A contact is connected between a programmable input
and the negative side of the battery. Through BESTCOMSPlus®, each programmable contact input can
be assigned a programmable label (16 alphanumeric characters, maximum) and configured as an alarm
input, a pre-alarm input, or status only. The default names for the inputs are INPUT_x (where x = 1 to 16).
When a programmable contact input is closed, the front panel display shows the programmable label of
the closed input if it was programmed as an alarm or pre-alarm input. Alarm inputs are annunciated
through the Normal display mode screens of the front panel. Pre-alarm inputs are annunciated through
the pre-alarm metering screen of the front panel. If neither alarm nor pre-alarm is programmed, no
indication is given. Programming an input as Status Only is useful when a programmable input is used as
an input to programmable logic.
The programmable label is also used when alarms or pre-alarms associated with an input are recorded in
the event log.
Connections for the programmable inputs are provided at terminals 31 (Input 1) through 46 (Input 16).
The negative side of the battery voltage (terminal 49) serves as the return connection for the
programmable inputs.

Contact Input Configuration

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Programmable Inputs > Contact Inputs
Figure 9-1 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Contact Inputs screen.
For each contact input, configure the following parameters:
• Alarm Configuration - When the input senses a closed contact, one of the following occurs depending
on the Alarm Configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration
chapter.
• Activation Delay - This parameter defines the duration that the input must remain closed before any
annunciation occurs.
• Label Text - Enter descriptive text that signifies the use of the input. This text appears next to the
input in BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic and in the event log if the input is configured as an
alarm or pre-alarm.
DGC-2020HD Contact Inputs
9-2 9469300995

• Contact Recognition - Select whether the contact input should be recognized always, or only while
the engine is running. For example, a switch closes when oil pressure is low. Such a switch would be
closed when the engine is not running but a low oil pressure alarm or pre-alarm should not be
annunciated unless the switch is closed while the engine is running. A selection of While Engine
Running Only prevents spurious annunciation when the engine is not running.
• Contact Type – Select whether the contact input should be normally open or normally closed.

Figure 9-1. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs Screen

Programmable Functions
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Programmable Functions
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Programmable Inputs > Programmable Functions
Any of the 16 contact inputs can be programmed to recognize any one of 10 function types:
• Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) - Start and run the generator while the ATS input is true and the
DGC-2020HD is in Auto mode.
• Grounded Delta Override - Uses Grounded Delta sensing if the generator connection is set for
Delta.
• Battle Override – When a Battle Override condition is true, the DGC-2020HD annunciates a
Battle Override Pre-Alarm and it is recorded in the event log. If an alarm occurs while a Battle
Override condition is true, the alarm is annunciated on the DGC-2020HD front panel and
recorded in the event log, but it will not stop the engine. The DGC-2020HD monitors engine rpm
during battle override. If the engine rpm drops to zero while an alarm is active during a Battle
Override condition, the DGC-2020HD proceeds to issue a normal shutdown to prevent fuel flow
while the engine is not running.
• Low-Line Override - The 51, 27, and 59 settings are scaled by the low-line scale factor setting.
• Single-Phase Override - The unit switches to single-phase sensing configuration and uses the
Single Phase Override Sensing setting (A-B or A-C).
• Single-Phase A-C Override - Indicates to the DGC-2020HD that the machine is configured for
single-phase A-C. This is to be used in conjunction with the single-phase override programmable
function.
• Emergency Stop – When an input is assigned to the Emergency Stop Programmable Function,
the input functions in a normally-closed manner. When the input is closed, no alarm is
Contact Inputs DGC-2020HD
9469300995 9-3

annunciated. When the input is open, the DGC-2020HD will open the Start, Run, and Prestart
relays and annunciate an Emergency Stop Alarm.
Once an input is assigned to this programmable input, navigate to Settings Explorer >
Programmable Inputs > Contact Inputs and configure the following settings:
° Alarm Configuration: Status Only
° Activation Delay: 0
° Label Text: Any text is acceptable.
° Contact Recognition: Always
° Contact Type: Normally Open
• Battery Charger Fail - When the selected input is invoked, a user selectable pre-alarm or alarm is
annunciated after the activation delay.
• Low Coolant Level - When the selected input is invoked, a Low Coolant Level pre-alarm or alarm
is annunciated after the activation delay.
• Fuel Leak Detect - When the selected input is invoked, a Fuel Leak pre-alarm or alarm is
annunciated after the activation delay.
Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.
The BESTCOMSPlus Programmable Functions screen is illustrated in Figure 9-2.

Figure 9-2. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Programmable Functions

DGC-2020HD Contact Inputs

9-4 9469300995

Contact Inputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 10-1

10 • Analog Inputs
Analog inputs provide metering for a variety of industrial transducers. An element can be configured to
trip when the metered input increases above or decreases below the user-defined threshold.
DGC-2020HD units with the resistive sender option (style number xxxxxxxxR) are equipped with two
analog inputs whereas units with the analog sender option (style number xxxxxxxxA) are equipped with
four. The identical analog input protection elements are designated Analog Input #1, Analog Input #2,
Analog Input #3 (optional), and Analog Input #4 (optional). Element logic connections are made on the
BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus® and element operational settings are configured on the
Analog Input #x (where x = 1 to 4 (3 and 4 optional)) settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Programmable Inputs > Analog Inputs

Input Setup
Label Text
In order to make identification of the analog inputs easier, each of the inputs can be given a user-
assigned label. The label is an alphanumeric string with a maximum of 16 characters.

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting provides a level of hysteresis between a threshold detection tripping and dropping
out. For instance, if the hysteresis is set for 5% and the threshold is set as an over threshold, once the
threshold detection trips, the measured value must drop to 95% of the threshold before the threshold
detection will drop out. This hysteresis helps prevent rapid or repeated transitions between trip and
dropout in cases where the measured input is nearly equal to the threshold level.
If the threshold is set as an under threshold with 5% hysteresis, once the threshold detection trips, the
measured value must rise to 105% of the threshold before the threshold detection will drop out.

Input Type
An analog input can be configured to monitor a voltage or current signal. Accepted ranges for the signals
are –10 to 10 Vdc and 4 to 20 mA.

Arming Delay
A user-adjustable arming delay disables analog input protection during engine startup. If the arming delay
is set to zero (0), the input protection is active at all times, including when the engine is not running. If the
arming delay is set to a non-zero value, the input protection is inactive when the engine is not running,
and does not become active until after the engine is started and the arming delay has elapsed.

Out-of-Range Alarm Type

An out-of-range alarm alerts the user of an open or damaged analog input wire. This setting determines
the action that is taken when an input becomes out-of-range. Alarm configurations are described in the
Alarm Configuration chapter.

Ranges
Ranges must be set for the selected input type. Param Min correlates to Min Input Current or Min Input
Voltage and Param Max correlates to Max Input Current or Max Input Voltage.

DGC-2020HD Analog Inputs

10-2 9469300995

Thresholds
There are four programmable thresholds for each analog input. Each threshold has a mode setting,
threshold setting, activation delay setting, and an alarm configuration setting.

Mode
Mode can be set for Over, Under, or Disabled. If Over mode is selected, an alarm is annunciated when
the metered input increases above the Threshold setting for the duration of the Activation Delay. If Under
mode is selected, an alarm is annunciated when the metered input decreases below the Threshold
setting for the duration of the Activation Delay.

Threshold
When the metered input rises above or falls below this setting, depending on the Mode setting, (picks up)
the activation delay timer begins counting.

Activation Delay
After the threshold has been exceeded for the duration of the activation delay, the selected alarm
configuration action is performed. If the threshold detection drops out before the activation delay expires,
the activation delay timer is reset.

Alarm Configuration
Each analog input threshold item can be independently configured to perform a different action depending
on the alarm configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Operational Settings
Analog input protection operational settings are configured on the Analog Input #x (where x = 1 to 4 (3
and 4 optional)) settings screen (Figure 10-1) in BESTCOMSPlus.

Analog Inputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 10-3

Figure 10-1. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Analog input #1

Remote System Manager Input

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Remote System Manager
Inputs
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Programmable Inputs > Remote Sys Manager Inputs
The selected analog input may be used as a setpoint source for var, PF, or kW control. The bias signal is
broadcast to all units on the network by the system manager. Settings are provided for minimum and
maximum input voltage, and minimum and maximum input current. All units in the network must have
identical settings for the Type and Range settings (See Figure 10-2). Configure the Aux Input setting only
for the system manager. This determines which analog input to broadcast to the other units on the
network.

DGC-2020HD Analog Inputs

10-4 9469300995

Figure 10-2. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Remote System Manager Inputs

Logic Connections
Analog input protection logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
The Analog Input 1, Threshold 1 logic block is illustrated in Figure 10-3. The output is true during a trip
condition. The alarm and pre-alarm logic blocks are similar.

Figure 10-3. Analog Input Protection Logic Block

Analog Inputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 11-1

11 • Contact Outputs
DGC-2020HD output contacts include PRE (Prestart), START, RUN, and 12 programmable outputs.
Additional output contacts can be accommodated with up to four optional CEM-2020s (Contact Expansion
Modules).
Output contact operation is controlled by the operating mode of the DGC-2020HD. The state of the
Emergency Stop contact input also affects output contact operation. When the Emergency Stop contact
input is open (emergency stop condition), the Prestart, Start, and Run outputs open and an emergency
stop alarm is annunciated. When the Emergency Stop input is closed, all output contacts operate
normally.

Prestart
This output closes to energize the engine glow plugs or run pre-lubrication pumps. The Prestart output
can be programmed to close up to 30 seconds prior to engine cranking. The Prestart output can also be
programmed to open upon engine startup or remain closed as long as the engine is operating.
During the resting state, the Prestart output can be set to Off, On, or Preheat Before Crank. If Preheat
Before Crank is selected, the Prestart output will be closed for a time equal to the Pre-crank Delay prior to
re-entering the cranking state. If the Pre-crank delay is set longer than the rest interval, the Prestart
output will be closed for the entire rest time.
Prestart output connections are made through terminals located on the Prestart relay. See the Terminals
and Connectors chapter in the Installation manual for the location of the Prestart relay on the rear panel
of the DGC-2020HD.

Start
This output closes when engine cranking is initiated by the DGC-2020HD and opens when the magnetic
pickup (MPU) or generator frequency indicates that the engine has started. Prior to engine starting, the
duration of cranking is determined by the cranking style (cycle or continuous) selected. Cycle cranking
permits up to seven crank cycles, with each crank cycle having a duration of 5 to 15 seconds. The
continuous crank time is adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds.
Start output connections are made through terminals located on the Start relay. See the Terminals and
Connectors chapter in the Installation manual for the location of the Start relay on the rear panel of the
DGC-2020HD.

Run
This output closes when engine cranking is initiated by the DGC-2020HD. The Run output remains closed
until it receives a command to stop the engine.
Run output connections are made through terminals located on the Run relay. See the Terminals and
Connectors chapter in the Installation manual for the location of the Run relay on the rear panel of the
DGC-2020HD.

Relay Control
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > System Parameters > Relay Control
In some applications, it may be beneficial to modify the standard operation of the DGC-2020HD Run,
Prestart, or Start relays. If desired, these relays can be configured to operate outside their predefined
functionality. For example, if your genset does not require starting assistance from glow plugs, the
Prestart relay may be assigned for another task. Configuring these relays as programmable makes them

DGC-2020HD Contact Outputs

11-2 9469300995

available in BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic to be used in the same manner as the other
programmable relay outputs. Predefined or programmable operation of the Run, Prestart, and Start relays
is selected on the Relay Control screen (Figure 11-1). See the BESTlogicPlus chapter for more
information about DGC-2020HD programmable logic.

Figure 11-1. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Relay Control Screen

The predefined functionality is available as an input to the logic. If Programmable is selected as the relay
control mode, connecting the corresponding predefined input function to the relay causes it to function as
if Predefined were selected as its relay control type. However, other logic can be combined with it to
create operation that is more versatile. If Programmable is selected for a relay, but it is not used in the
logic, that relay will never close.
An example logic scheme connecting the predefined inputs directly to the “programmable” relay outputs
for all three relays is shown in Figure 11-2.

Figure 11-2. Example Logic Scheme of Programmable Relays

Programmable Contact Outputs

DGC-2020HD controllers have 12 programmable output contacts (OUT 1 through 12). An additional 24
contact outputs are provided with an optional CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module). An optional CEM-
2020H (Contact Expansion Module - High Current) provides 18 contact outputs. Up to four CEM-2020s or
CEM-2020Hs, in any combination, are supported by the DGC-2020HD.

Programmable Output Configuration

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Programmable Outputs > Contact Outputs
Figure 11-3 illustrates the Contact Outputs screen found in BESTCOMSPlus.

Contact Outputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 11-3

Each output can be programmed with a text label describing its use. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
are accepted. This label appears in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic where the output is used to aid
in ease of programming and clarity.

Figure 11-3. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs

Configurable Elements
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Programmable Outputs > Configurable Elements
Configurable elements are connected to the logic scheme as outputs. The configurable elements are
incorporated into a BESTlogicPlus programmable logic scheme by selecting them from the Elements
group in BESTlogicPlus. For more details, refer to the BESTlogicPlus chapter. Alarm configurations are
described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.
A user-adjustable time delay can be set to delay recognition of an element. By default, all elements are
configured so that they do not trigger an alarm or pre-alarm. To make identifying an element easier, each
of the elements can be given a user-assigned name. If used for an alarm or pre-alarm, the user-assigned
name appears in the alarm or pre-alarm annunciation and in the DGC-2020HD event log. Elements can
be recognized always or only while the engine is running.
The BESTCOMSPlus Configurable Elements screen is illustrated in Figure 11-4.

DGC-2020HD Contact Outputs

11-4 9469300995

Figure 11-4. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements

Contact Outputs DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-1

12 • Breaker Management
DGC-2020HD breaker management features include the control of up to three, continuous- or pulse-
controlled breakers, load transfer upon detection of a mains failure, two modes of automatic genset
synchronization, and settings for stable or dead bus detection. Open transitions are implemented in load
transfers to and from the mains. The user can choose to control many combinations of up to three
breakers or none at all. Breaker management settings can be configured using BESTCOMSPlus® or
through the front panel interface.

Breaker Status
The status of the breakers is retrieved by properly setting up the breaker control logic blocks in
BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic. These logic blocks have outputs that can be configured to close an
output contact, which in turn controls a breaker. They contain inputs for breaker control and status as
well. See Breaker Setup in BESTlogic™Plus, below, for details on configuring the logic.

System Breaker Configuration

The following paragraphs describe how to properly configure DGC-2020HD system breaker control.

Initial System Setup

Connect the DGC-2020HD according to the appropriate figure in the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual for the type of generator connection desired (wye, delta, etc.). Set up the basic system
parameters that will govern engine operation and alarm and pre-alarm annunciation. Details can be found
in the Device Configuration and Alarm Configuration chapters.

System Breaker Configuration Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > System Parameters > System Settings
Select the appropriate breaker control configuration using the System Breaker Configuration setting on
the System Settings screen illustrated in Figure 12-1. Available options include, No Breaker Control;
Generator Breaker Control; Generator and Mains Breaker Control; Generator and Mains Breaker Control
with Load Bus; Generator and Group Breaker; Generator and Group Breaker with Load Bus; Generator,
Group, and Mains Breaker; Generator Breaker to Segmented System; Generator and Group Breaker to
Segmented System; Tie Breaker Control; Generator and Tie Breaker Control; and Tie Breaker and Tie
Breaker Control. System Breaker Configuration options are described in the following paragraphs. In
BESTCOMSPlus, a one-line diagram is provided for each breaker configuration to aid in proper selection.
Each bus can be programmed with a text label describing its use. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters are
accepted. This label appears in BESTCOMSPlus to aid in ease of configuration and programming.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-2 9469300995

Figure 12-1. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings

Generator Breaker Control

A system breaker configuration of Generator Breaker Control consists of a single generator breaker
controlled by the DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-2 illustrates the Generator Breaker Control system breaker
configuration. Figure 12-3 shows the Generator Breaker Control system breaker configuration with a
mains bus and externally controlled mains breaker. Figure 12-4 illustrates the one-line diagram of the
Generator Breaker Control configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings screen.
Generator
Generator Bus Breaker Load Bus
L1

L2
Generator LOAD
L3

Generator
Generator Breaker Load Bus
Bus Metering Control Output Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97
Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0071-75

Figure 12-2. System Breaker Configuration: Generator Breaker Control

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-3

LOAD
Generator Mains
Generator Bus Breaker Load Bus Breaker Mains Bus
L1
A
L2
Generator B
L3
C

Generator
Generator Breaker Load Bus
Bus Metering Control Output Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97
Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0071-78

Figure 12-3. System Breaker Configuration: Generator Breaker Control with Externally Controlled Mains
Breaker

Figure 12-4. System Breaker Configuration: Generator Breaker Control as Displayed in BESTCOMSPlus
System Settings.

Generator and Mains Breaker Control

Generator and Mains Breaker Control system breaker configurations consist of two breakers controlled by
the DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-5 illustrates a Generator and Mains Breaker Control system breaker
configuration without optional load bus metering. Figure 12-6 illustrates the one-line diagram of the
Generator and Mains Breaker Control system breaker configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus
System Settings screen. Figure 12-7 shows the same configuration with optional load bus metering.
Figure 12-8 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Generator and Mains Breaker Control system breaker
configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings screen. Optional load bus sensing
provides more precise control over breaker closures. DGC-2020HD units must be equipped with
enhanced bus sensing (style number xxxxxxxEx) in order to meter all three buses.

LOAD
Generator Mains
Generator Bus Breaker Load Bus Breaker Mains Bus
L1
A
L2
Generator B
L3
C

Generator
Generator Breaker Mains Breaker Mains Bus
Bus Metering Control Output Control Output Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97
Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0071-72

Figure 12-5. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Mains Breaker Control

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-4 9469300995

Figure 12-6. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Mains Breaker Control as Displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

LOAD
Generator Mains
Generator Bus Breaker Load Bus Breaker Mains Bus
L1
A
L2
Generator B
L3
C

Generator
Generator Breaker Load Bus Mains Breaker Mains Bus
Bus Metering Control Output Metering Control Output Metering

86 88 90 100 101 103 93 95 97

Bus 2 Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0071-76

Figure 12-7. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Mains Breaker Control with Optional Load Bus
Metering

Figure 12-8. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Mains Breaker Control with Optional Load Bus
Metering as Displayed in BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Generator and Group Breaker Control

Generator and Group Breaker Control system breaker configurations consist of two breakers controlled
by the DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-9 illustrates a Generator and Group Breaker Control system breaker
configuration without optional load bus metering. Figure 12-10 illustrates the one-line diagram of the
Generator and Group Breaker Control system breaker configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus
System Settings screen.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-5

Generator
Group
Generator Group Group
Generator Bus Breaker Bus Breaker Load Bus
L1 L
Generator
L2 O
L3
A
D
Generator
Generator Breaker Group Bus Group Breaker
Bus Metering Control Output Metering Control Output

86 88 90 93 95 97
Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0076-45

Figure 12-9. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Group Breaker Control

Figure 12-10. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Group Breaker Control as Displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Figure 12-11 illustrates a Generator and Group Breaker Control with Load Bus system breaker
configuration. Figure 12-12 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Generator and Group Breaker Control
with Load Bus system breaker configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings
screen.

Generator
Group
Generator Group Group
Generator Bus Breaker Bus Breaker Load Bus
L1 L
L2 O
Generator
L3
A
D
Generator
Generator Breaker Group Bus Group Breaker Load Bus
Bus Metering Control Output Metering Control Output Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97 100 101 103

Bus 1 Bus 2

DGC-2020HD
P0076-46

Figure 12-11. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Group Breaker Control with Load Bus

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-6 9469300995

Figure 12-12. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Group Breaker Control with Optional Load Bus
Metering as Displayed in BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Generator, Group, and Mains Breaker Control

The Generator, Group, and Mains Breaker Control system breaker configuration consists of three
breakers controlled by the DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-13 illustrates a Generator, Group, and Mains Breaker
Control system breaker configuration. Figure 12-14 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Generator,
Group, and Mains Breaker Control system breaker configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus
System Settings screen.
Generator
LOAD
Group
Generator Group Mains
Group Bus Load Bus Mains Bus
Generator Bus Breaker Breaker Breaker
L1
A
L2
Generator B
L3
C

Generator Mains
Generator Breaker Group Bus Group Breaker Mains Breaker Bus
Bus Metering Control Output Metering Control Output Control Output Metering

86 88 90 100 101 103 93 95 97

Bus 2 Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0076-47

Figure 12-13. System Breaker Configuration: Generator, Group, and Mains Breaker Control

Figure 12-14. System Breaker Configuration: Generator, Group, and Mains Breaker Control as Displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Generator Breaker to Segmented System

A system breaker configuration of Generator Breaker to Segmented System consists of a single
generator breaker controlled by the DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-15 illustrates the Generator Breaker to
Segmented System breaker configuration. Figure 12-16 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Generator
Breaker to Segmented System configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings
screen.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-7

Generator
Segmented
Generator Bus Breaker
System Bus
L1

L2 Segmented
Generator
System
L3

Generator
Generator Breaker Segmented System
Bus Metering Control Output Bus Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97
Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0076-48

Figure 12-15. System Breaker Configuration: Generator Breaker to Segmented System

Figure 12-16. System Breaker Configuration: Generator Breaker to Segmented System as Displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Generator and Group Breakers to Segmented System

The Generator and Group Breakers to Segmented System breaker configuration consists of two breakers
controlled by the DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-17 illustrates a Generator and Group Breakers to Segmented
System breaker configuration. Figure 12-18 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Generator and Group
Breakers to Segmented System breaker configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System
Settings screen.

Generator
Group
Generator Group Segmented
Generator Bus Breaker Group Bus Breaker System Bus
L1

L2 Segmented
Generator
System
L3

Generator
Generator Breaker Group Bus Group Breaker Segmented System
Bus Metering Control Output Metering Control Output Bus Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97 100 101 103

Bus 1 Bus 2

DGC-2020HD
P0076-49

Figure 12-17. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Group Breakers to Segmented System

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-8 9469300995

Figure 12-18. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Group Breakers to Segmented System as
Displayed in BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Tie Breaker Control

A system breaker configuration of Tie Breaker Control consists of a single tie breaker controlled by the
DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-19 illustrates the Tie Breaker Control system breaker configuration. Figure
12-20 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Tie Breaker Control system breaker configuration as it
appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings screen.

Segmented Tie Breaker Segmented

System A Bus System B Bus

Segmented Segmented
System A System B

Segmented
Tie Breaker Segmented System B
System A Bus
Control Output Bus Metering
Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97
Bus 1

DGC-2020HD
P0076-50

Figure 12-19. System Breaker Configuration: Tie Breaker Control

Figure 12-20. System Breaker Configuration: Tie Breaker Control as Displayed in BESTCOMSPlus System
Settings

Generator and Tie Breaker Control

The Generator and Tie Breaker configuration consists of two breakers controlled by the DGC-2020HD.
Figure 12-21 illustrates a Generator and Tie Breaker Control breaker configuration. Figure 12-22
illustrates the one-line diagram of the Generator and Tie Breaker Control breaker configuration as it
appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings screen.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-9

Segmented
System B
Generator Segmented Tie Segmented
Generator Bus Breaker Breaker 2
System Bus 1 System Bus 2
L1

L2 Segmented
Generator
System C
L3

Generator
Generator Breaker Segmented System Tie Breaker 2 Segmented System
Bus Metering Control Output Bus 1 Metering Control Output Bus 2 Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97 100 101 103

Bus 1 Bus 2

DGC-2020HD
P0076-89

Figure 12-21. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Tie Breaker Control

Figure 12-22. System Breaker Configuration: Generator and Tie Breaker Control as Displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control

The Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control breaker configuration consists of two breakers controlled by the
DGC-2020HD. Figure 12-23 illustrates a Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control breaker configuration.
Figure 12-24 illustrates the one-line diagram of the Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control breaker
configuration as it appears in the BESTCOMSPlus System Settings screen.

Segmented
System B
Tie Segmented Tie Segmented
Generator Bus Breaker Breaker 2
System Bus 1 System Bus 2
L1

Segmented L2 Segmented
System A System C
L3

Generator Tie Breaker Segmented System Tie Breaker 2 Segmented System

Bus Metering Control Output Bus 1 Metering Control Output Bus 2 Metering

86 88 90 93 95 97 100 101 103

Bus 1 Bus 2

DGC-2020HD
P0076-90

Figure 12-23. System Breaker Configuration: Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-10 9469300995

Figure 12-24. System Breaker Configuration: Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control as Displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus System Settings

Generator Breaker Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Gen
Breaker
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware > Gen
Breaker

Breaker Label
A breaker label is a short designation that signifies the use of the breaker. This label appears in reports to
provide a unique label for every breaker in the system. This label is also used to detect a lost controller
monitoring a specific breaker in the system.

Contact Type, Open Pulse Time, and Close Pulse Time

Breakers controlled by pulse or continuous inputs are supported. Separate settings for the breaker’s open
and close pulse widths are provided.

Dead Bus Close Enable

Enabling the Dead Bus Close Enable setting allows the DGC-2020HD to close the generator breaker onto
a dead bus. This can be used to ensure that only one machine closes onto a dead bus at a time, thus
preventing multiple machines simultaneously closing to the dead bus out of phase with each other. When
this setting is disabled, the DGC-2020HD can only close the generator breaker onto a stable bus.

Breaker Fail Output Configuration

The Breaker Fail Output Configuration setting dictates whether the breaker output is removed or
maintained during the breaker open fail or breaker close fail pre-alarm conditions.

External Status Change Action

When an external device changes the state of the breaker, the External Status Change Action setting
dictates how the DGC-2020HD responds to the state change. The DGC-2020HD can ignore external
breaker state changes, always follow breaker state changes, or only follow breaker state changes when
in Auto mode. When the DGC-2020HD is following external breaker state changes, it issues outputs that
correspond to the change in breaker state. If an external source opens the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker open output. Likewise, if an external source closes the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker close output.

Dead Gen Close Enable

When enabled, the Dead Gen Close Enable setting allows closure of the breaker to a dead bus when the
generator is dead.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-11

Caution
Use caution when connecting dead generators to a dead bus. Undesired
operation or system damage could occur if the bus becomes live while dead
generators are connected to it.

Breaker Closing Time

The DGC-2020HD uses the Breaker Closing Time to calculate the optimum time to close the breaker
during synchronization in Anticipatory mode.

Phase Angle Compensation

A phase angle compensation setting is provided to offset phase shift caused by transformers in the
system. The phase angle compensation value is added to the metered slip angle of the buses on either
side of the breaker. Equation 12-1 illustrates the DGC-2020HD slip angle calculation.

(𝐺𝐺 − 𝐵𝐵) + 𝐴𝐴 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴

Equation 12-1. DGC-2020HD Metered Slip Angle
Where:
G = metered generator bus angle
B = metered bus angle
A = phase angle compensation value

Breaker Open Setpoint Level and Delay

This setting prevents the breaker from opening until the power through the breaker decreases below a
user-defined level for the duration of a time delay. The level is a percentage of rated power for the bus.

Transition Delay
During the transition delay, open or close outputs are removed to allow any breaker interlocks to reset
before a new open or close output is initialized.

Open Attempts, Close Attempts, and Retry Delay

After a breaker open or close failure occurs, the DGC-2020HD can attempt to reopen or reclose the
breaker a pre-defined number of times. The number of attempts to open or close the breaker and the
duration of time between each attempt are user-programmable.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-12 9469300995

Figure 12-25. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Gen Breaker Screen

Mains Breaker Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Mains
Breaker
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware > Mains
Breaker

Breaker Label
A breaker label is a short designation that signifies the use of the breaker. This label appears in reports to
provide a unique label for every breaker in the system. This label is also used to detect a lost controller
monitoring a specific breaker in the system.

Contact Type, Open Pulse Time, and Close Pulse Time

Breakers controlled by pulse or continuous inputs are supported. Separate settings for the breaker’s open
and close pulse widths are provided.

Breaker Fail Output Configuration

The Breaker Fail Output Configuration setting dictates whether the breaker output is removed or
maintained during the breaker open fail or breaker close fail pre-alarm conditions.

External Status Change Action

When an external device changes the state of the breaker, the External Status Change Action setting
dictates how the DGC-2020HD responds to the state change. The DGC-2020HD can ignore external
breaker state changes, always follow breaker state changes, or only follow breaker state changes when
in Auto mode. When the DGC-2020HD is following external breaker state changes, it issues outputs that
correspond to the change in breaker state. If an external source opens the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker open output. Likewise, if an external source closes the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker close output.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-13

Mains to Mains Close Enable

This setting allows closing the breaker when it is determined that this will indirectly connect two mains
feed ties together, possibly through a series of additional external tie breakers and mains breakers.

Live Bus Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows closure of the mains breaker to a live bus.

Breaker Closing Time

The DGC-2020HD uses the Breaker Closing Time to calculate the optimum time to close the breaker
during synchronization in Anticipatory mode.

Phase Angle Compensation

A phase angle compensation setting is provided to offset phase shift caused by transformers in the
system. The phase angle compensation value is added to the metered slip angle of the buses on either
side of the breaker. Equation 12-2 illustrates the DGC-2020HD slip angle calculation.

(𝐵𝐵 − 𝑀𝑀) + 𝐴𝐴 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴

Equation 12-2. DGC-2020HD Metered Slip Angle
Where:
B = metered bus angle
M = metered mains bus angle
A = phase angle compensation value

Breaker Open Setpoint Level and Delay

This setting prevents the breaker from opening until the power through the breaker decreases below a
user-defined level for the duration of a time delay. The level is a percentage of rated power for the bus.

Transition Delay
During the transition delay, open or close outputs are removed to allow any breaker interlocks to reset
before a new open or close output is initialized.

Open Attempts, Close Attempts, and Retry Delay

After a breaker open or close failure occurs, the DGC-2020HD can attempt to reopen or reclose the
breaker a pre-defined number of times. The number of attempts to open or close the breaker and the
duration of time between each attempt are user-programmable.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-14 9469300995

Figure 12-26. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Mains Breaker Screen

Group Breaker Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Group
Breaker
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware > Group
Breaker

Breaker Label
A breaker label is a short designation that signifies the use of the breaker. This label appears in reports to
provide a unique label for every breaker in the system. This label is also used to detect a lost controller
monitoring a specific breaker in the system.

Contact Type, Open Pulse Time, and Close Pulse Time

Breakers controlled by pulse or continuous inputs are supported. Separate settings for the breaker’s open
and close pulse widths are provided.

Dead Group Close Enable

Enabling this setting allows closure of the group breaker when the group bus is dead.

Breaker Fail Output Configuration

The Breaker Fail Output Configuration setting dictates whether the breaker output is removed or
maintained during the breaker open fail or breaker close fail pre-alarm conditions.

External Status Change Action

When an external device changes the state of the breaker, the External Status Change Action setting
dictates how the DGC-2020HD responds to the state change. The DGC-2020HD can ignore external
breaker state changes, always follow breaker state changes, or only follow breaker state changes when

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-15

in Auto mode. When the DGC-2020HD is following external breaker state changes, it issues outputs that
correspond to the change in breaker state. If an external source opens the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker open output. Likewise, if an external source closes the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker close output.

Live Bus Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows closure of the group breaker to a live bus.

Breaker Closing Time

The DGC-2020HD uses the Breaker Closing Time to calculate the optimum time to close the breaker
during synchronization in Anticipatory mode.

Phase Angle Compensation

A phase angle compensation setting is provided to offset phase shift caused by transformers in the
system. The phase angle compensation value is added to the metered slip angle of the buses on either
side of the breaker. Equation 12-3 illustrates the DGC-2020HD slip angle calculation.

(𝐺𝐺 − 𝐵𝐵) + 𝐴𝐴 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴

Equation 12-3. DGC-2020HD Metered Slip Angle
Where:
G = metered group bus angle
B = metered bus angle
A = phase angle compensation value

Breaker Open Setpoint Level and Delay

This setting prevents the breaker from opening until the power through the breaker decreases below a
user-defined level for the duration of a time delay. The level is a percentage of rated power for the bus.

Transition Delay
During the transition delay, open or close outputs are removed to allow any breaker interlocks to reset
before a new open or close output is initialized.

Open Attempts, Close Attempts, and Retry Delay

After a breaker open or close failure occurs, the DGC-2020HD can attempt to reopen or reclose the
breaker a pre-defined number of times. The number of attempts to open or close the breaker and the
duration of time between each attempt are user-programmable.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-16 9469300995

Figure 12-27. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Group Breaker Screen

Tie Breaker Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Tie
Breaker
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware > Tie
Breaker

Breaker Label
A breaker label is a short designation that signifies the use of the breaker. This label appears in reports to
identify each breaker in the system. This label is also used to detect a lost controller monitoring a specific
breaker in the system.

Contact Type, Open Pulse Time, and Close Pulse Time

Breakers controlled by pulse or continuous inputs are supported. Separate settings for the breaker’s open
and close pulse widths are provided.

Mains to Mains Close Enable

This setting allows closing the breaker when it is determined that this will indirectly connect two mains
feed ties together, possibly through a series of additional external tie breakers and mains breakers.

Dead A to Dead B Close Enable

Enabling this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus A and Bus B are both dead.

Dead A to Live B Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus A is dead and Bus B is live.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-17

Live A to Dead B Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus A is live and Bus B is dead.

Live A to Live B Close Enable

Enabling this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus A and Bus B are both live.

Dead Gen Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows the breaker to close if both sides are dead and if generators are
detected on either side of breaker connection.

Live Load Close Enable

Enabling this setting allows synchronizing and closing the breaker to a live load bus that is not being
driven by any detected generator or mains connection in the system.

Breaker Fail Output Configuration

The Breaker Fail Output Configuration setting dictates whether the breaker output is removed or
maintained during the breaker open fail or breaker close fail pre-alarm conditions.

External Status Change Action

When an external device changes the state of the breaker, the External Status Change Action setting
dictates how the DGC-2020HD responds to the state change. The DGC-2020HD can ignore external
breaker state changes, always follow breaker state changes, or only follow breaker state changes when
in Auto mode. When the DGC-2020HD is following external breaker state changes, it issues outputs that
correspond to the change in breaker state. If an external source opens the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker open output. Likewise, if an external source closes the breaker, the DGC-2020HD
issues a breaker close output.

Breaker Closing Time

The DGC-2020HD uses the Breaker Closing Time to calculate the optimum time to close the breaker
during synchronization in Anticipatory mode.

Phase Angle Compensation

A phase angle compensation setting is provided to offset phase shift caused by transformers in the
system. The phase angle compensation value is added to the metered slip angle of the buses on either
side of the breaker. Equation 12-4 defines the DGC-2020HD slip angle calculation.

(𝑆𝑆𝐴𝐴 − 𝑆𝑆𝐵𝐵 ) + 𝐴𝐴 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴

Equation 12-4. DGC-2020HD Metered Slip Angle
Where:
SA = metered segmented system bus A angle
SB = metered segmented system bus B angle
A = phase angle compensation value

Breaker Open Setpoint Level and Delay

This setting prevents the breaker from opening until the power through the breaker decreases below a
user-defined level for the duration of a time delay. The level is a percentage of rated power for the bus.

Mains Tie Side

This setting defines the side of the breaker which may connect to the mains bus.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-18 9469300995

Sync Adjust Side

Sync Adjust Side defines the side of the breaker which is to be adjusted during synchronization. This
setting is only available when Mains Tie Side is set to None.

Positive Power Sign

This setting establishes which direction metered positive power is flowing through the controlled tie
breaker (depending on CT direction). This is used in zero power breaker open requests.

Power Measurement Side

This setting defines the side of the breaker from which power measurements are taken. These power
measurements are used by various DGC-2020HD functions. Available selections are: Side A or Side B.

Transition Delay
During the transition delay, open or close outputs are removed to allow any breaker interlocks to reset
before a new open or close output is initialized.

Open Attempts, Close Attempts, and Retry Delay

After a breaker open or close failure occurs, the DGC-2020HD can attempt to reopen or reclose the
breaker a pre-defined number of times. The number of attempts to open or close the breaker and the
duration of time between each attempt are user-programmable.

Figure 12-28. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Tie Breaker Screen

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-19

Tie Breaker 2 Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Tie
Breaker 2
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Hardware > Tie
Breaker 2
The Tie Breaker 2 Settings are identical to the Tie Breaker settings listed above, except for the following:

Dead B to Dead C Close Enable

Enabling this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus B and Bus C are both dead.

Dead B to Live C Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus B is dead and Bus C is live.

Live B to Dead C Close Enable

When enabled, this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus B is live and Bus C is dead.

Live B to Live C Close Enable

Enabling this setting allows the breaker to close when Bus B and Bus C are both live.

Mains Tie Side

This setting defines the side of the breaker which may connect to the mains bus. Available selections are:
None, Side B, or Side C.

Sync Adjust Side

Sync Adjust Side defines the side of the breaker which is to be adjusted during synchronization. This
setting is only available when Mains Tie Side is set to None. Available selections are: Side B or Side C.

Power Measurement Side

This setting defines the side of the breaker from which power measurements are taken. These power
measurements are used by various DGC-2020HD functions. Available selections are: Side B or Side C.

Start Up Synchronization
Start-up synchronizing is a means of bringing up a system of generators when the generator breakers are
closed to a dead bus and the generators are stopped. Normally, it’s not possible to close the generator
breaker when the generator is dead. To permit a closure of the generator breaker from a “dead” generator
to a “dead” bus, the Dead Gen Close Enable setting must be enabled. After all generator breakers are
closed, the gensets are started and synchronized when the AVRs are turned on. The user must develop
logic to start the generators and turn on excitation in the voltage regulators at the correct time for orderly
system startup.

Caution
Use caution when connecting “dead” generators to a “dead” bus. Undesired
operation or system damage could occur if the bus becomes “live” while
“dead” generators are connected to it.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-20 9469300995

Mains Fail Transfer

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Management
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Breaker Management >
Mains Fail Transfer
For system breaker configurations which include a mains breaker, the DGC-2020HD can automatically
transfer load power from the mains to a single genset or a group of gensets during a mains failure. This
feature also enables the DGC-2020HD to transfer the load back to the mains once mains power is
restored.
The possible generator and breaker control configurations are described in the following paragraphs.
Single Generator with Two Breaker Control: In this configuration, a single generator start command is
used to start the controlled generator upon mains fail. The transfer logic is configured in the controller
which must be configured to sense mains power and control the mains breaker.
Generator Group with Two Breaker Control: In this configuration, group start commands are used to start
multiple machines in the group simultaneously upon mains fail. The transfer logic can be configured in
any controller in the system configured to sense mains power and control the mains breaker, or it can be
on a separate tie breaker controller on the mains breaker. Every generator in the group must be large
enough to pick up the entire load in the system by itself. One machine will always close onto the bus first,
because there is no group bus and therefore must be capable of driving the load.
Generator Group with Three Breaker Control: In this configuration, group start commands are used to
start multiple machines in the group simultaneously upon mains fail. The transfer logic can be configured
in any controller in the system configured to sense mains power and control the mains breaker or it can
be on a separate tie breaker controller on the mains breaker. The group breaker can be controlled by any
controller sensing the group and load bus or by a separate tie breaker controller on the group breaker.
This mode allows paralleling multiple machines onto the group bus before closing the group breaker to
allow picking up larger load than any one machine could handle by itself.
Single Generator with Three Breaker Control: This configuration is supported, although it has little
practical purpose.

Mains Fail Transfer Type

When Mains Fail Transfer is enabled, the generators controlled by the DGC-2020HD are configured as
mains fail generators or standby power generators which take over when utility power fails. There are two
types of transitions between the generators and the utility that are set with the Mains Fail Transfer Type
setting: (1) Open transitions in which the generator and mains breakers are never closed at the same
time, and (2) Closed transitions in which the generators parallel to the utility for a short time to transfer
load to the generators from the utility (a load takeover) or transfer the load from the generators to the
utility.

Open Transition
In open transitions, when a mains failure occurs, the DGC-2020HD starts the generators after the transfer
time expires. The DGC-2020HD opens the mains breaker either before the generators start or after the
generators are stable based on the Mains Breaker Open Configuration setting. After the mains breaker is
open and the Open Transition Delay time expires, the DGC-2020HD closes its generator or group
breaker to drive the load. When the mains power returns, after the Mains Fail Return Delay time expires,
the DGC-2020HD opens its generator or group breaker. Then, after the Open Transition Delay time
expires, the mains breaker closes. If the In Phase Monitor setting is enabled and the Mains Fail Return
Delay time has expired, the DGC-2020HD waits until it detects that the phases are aligned between the
generators and the mains before performing the open transition from the generators back to the utility.
An Open Transition Delay is provided to allow a user-specified amount of time where both breakers are
open. For example, this may be used to prevent damage to large motors in the load by allowing them to
spin down completely during open transitions.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-21

Closed Transitions
In closed transitions, when a mains failure occurs, the DGC-2020HD starts the generators after the
transfer time expires. The DGC-2020HD opens the mains breaker either before the generators start or
after the generators become stable based on the Mains Breaker Open Configuration setting. After the
mains breaker is open the DGC-2020HD closes its generator or group breaker to drive the load. When
the mains power returns, after the Mains Fail Return Delay time expires, the generators are synchronized
to the utility and the mains breaker is closed, paralleling the generators to the utility. While paralleled to
the utility, the controller ramps down load until it is at or below the level of the Breaker Open Setpoint or
until the generators have been paralleled to the utility for the duration of the Max Parallel Time setting.
Then the DGC-2020HD opens its generator or group breaker, leaving the load on utility power. A cool
down cycle is performed and the generators are stopped.

Mains Fail Transfer Process

The steps taken by the DGC-2020HD during mains fail transfer and load takeover are listed below.

Single Generator with Two Breaker Control

Mains Fail Transfer
1. Mains provides power.
a. Detect Mains Fail or Mains Fail Test logic element asserted.
2. Transition to generator power after mains fail transfer delay expires.
a. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Start is enabled, open mains breaker now.
b. Start generator. Wait until generator bus is stable.
c. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Stable is enabled, open mains breaker now.
d. Close generator breaker onto now dead load bus.
3. Generator provides power.
a. Detect mains return.
4. Transition to mains after return delay.
a. Open Transition
i. Open generator breaker and close mains breaker (With In Phase Monitor or Open
Transition Delay).
b. Closed Transition
i. Sync and close mains breaker.
ii. Unload generator based on ramp rate.
iii. Open generator breaker when Generator Breaker Open Setpoint is reached or after
Max Parallel Time.
c. Machine will automatically cool down and stop if no other run requests are active.
5. Back to 1.

Load Takeover Transfer

1. Mains provides power.
a. Load Takeover is applied.
2. Transition to generator power.
a. Start generator. Wait for generator to be stable.
b. Open Transition
i. Open mains breaker and close generator breaker (With In Phase Monitor or open
transition delay).
c. Closed Transition
i. Sync and close generator breaker to load bus.
ii. Soft load based on ramp rate.
iii. Open mains breaker at Mains Breaker Open Setpoint (if mains CT is configured),
when baseload level is reached, or after max parallel time.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-22 9469300995

3. Generator provides power.

a. Load Takeover is removed.
4. Transition to mains as in Mains Fail Transfer step 4, above.
5. Back to 1.

Generator Group with Two Breaker Control

Mains Fail Transfer
1. Mains provides power.
a. Detect Mains Fail or Mains Fail Test logic element asserted.
2. Transition to generator power after mains fail transfer delay expires.
a. Start generators based on Group Start Mode. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Start is
enabled, open mains breaker now.
b. Wait until at least one generator is stable.
c. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Stable is enabled, open mains breaker now.
d. Wait until at least one generator breaker is closed onto the load bus. Each generator waits
until the local generator bus is stable before closing. The first generator to close will close
onto a dead bus, the rest will synchronize.
3. Generators provide power.
a. Detect mains return.
4. Transition to mains after return delay.
a. Open Transition
i. Request all generators in the group to immediately open generator breaker.
ii. When all generator breakers in the system are reported as open, close mains
breaker. Open transition delay applies from time all generator breakers are open. In
Phase Monitor is not supported in this configuration as each generator is
allowed to open their gen breaker independently.
b. Closed Transition
i. Synchronize and close mains breaker. This occurs with a group sync request.
ii. Group stop request is sent to all generators.
iii. Each generator unloads based on individual ramp rates, opens local generator
breaker when Generator Breaker Open Setpoint is reached, cools down and stops if
no other run requests are active.
iv. If the max parallel time expires and any generator breaker is still closed, request all
generators in the group to immediately open generator breaker.
5. Back to 1.

Load Takeover Transfer

1. Mains provides power.
a. Load Takeover is applied.
2. Transition to generator power.
a. Start generators based on Group Start Mode.
b. Open Transition
i. Wait until at least one generator is stable. Generator breaker closure is inhibited until
mains breaker is open.
ii. Open mains breaker now.
iii. Allow generator breaker closure now or after open transition delay. Wait until at least
one generator breaker is closed onto the load bus. Each generator waits until the
local generator bus is stable before closing. The first generator to close will close
onto a dead bus, the rest will synchronize. In Phase Monitor is not supported in
this configuration as each generator is allowed to close their gen breaker
independently.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-23

c. Closed Transition
i. Each generator synchronizes and closes generator breaker to load bus.
ii. Each generator soft loads based on individual ramp rates. The ramp stop level is
determined by the mains fail controller (tie breaker controller or genset controller
sensing mains power).
iii. Open mains breaker at Mains Breaker Open Setpoint or after max parallel time.
3. Generators provide power.
a. Load Takeover removed.
4. Transition to mains as in mains fail step 4, above.
5. Back to 1.

Generator Group with Three Breaker Control

Mains Fail Transfer
1. Mains provides power.
a. Detect Mains Fail or Mains Fail Test logic element is asserted.
2. Transition to generator power after mains fail transfer delay expires.
a. Start generators based on Group Start Mode. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Start is
enabled, open mains breaker now.
b. If group breaker is closed, open the group breaker now. Local generator breaker close and
sync to group bus is inhibited until group breaker is open to prevent paralleling to failed
mains.
c. All generators start and synchronize onto group bus. Wait until enough generators are
running to meet block load level demand setting.
d. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Stable is enabled, open mains breaker now.
e. Close group breaker onto now dead load bus.
3. Generators provide power.
a. Detect mains return.
4. Transition to mains after return delay.
a. Open Transition
i. Open group breaker and close mains breaker (With In Phase Monitor or open
transition delay).
b. Closed Transition
i. Sync and close mains breaker. This will occur with a group sync request.
ii. Unload request is sent to all generators. Each generator will unload based on
individual ramp rates.
iii. Open group breaker when Group Breaker Open Setpoint is reached or after max
parallel time.
c. Send group stop request to all generators. Since group breaker is already open, load on each
generator should be zero. Therefore each generator should immediately open their local
generator breakers with the stop request.
5. Back to 1.

Load Takeover Transfer

1. Mains provides power.
a. Load Takeover is applied.
2. Transition to generator power.
a. Start generators based on Group Start Mode.
b. If group breaker is closed, open the group breaker now. Local generator breaker closure and
sync to group bus is inhibited until group breaker is open. Group breaker must be open to
allow fast closed transition times and prevent possibly overloading generators on open
transitions.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-24 9469300995

c. All generators start and sync onto group bus. Wait until enough generators are closed to the
group bus to pick up the measured mains load.
d. Open Transition
i. Open mains breaker and close group breaker (With In Phase Monitor or open
transition delay).
e. Closed Transition
i. Sync and close group breaker to load bus. This occurs with a group sync request.
ii. Soft load request is sent to all generators. Each generator takes on load based on
individual ramp rates. The ramp stop level is determined by the mains fail controller
(tie breaker controller or genset controller sensing mains power).
iii. Open mains breaker at Mains Breaker Open Setpoint or after max parallel time.
3. Generators provide power.
a. Load Takeover removed.
4. Transition to mains as in mains fail step 4, above.
5. Back to 1.

Single Generator with Three Breaker Control

Mains Fail Transfer
1. Mains provides power.
a. Detect Mains Fail or Mains Fail Test logic element is asserted.
2. Transition to generator power after mains fail transfer delay expires.
a. Start generator. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Start is enabled, open mains breaker
now.
b. If group breaker is closed, open the group breaker now.
c. Wait until generator bus is stable. Sync and close generator breaker onto group bus. The
single machine rating must be greater than the block load level in this configuration
otherwise the group breaker will never close.
d. If Open Mains Breaker on Generator Stable is enabled, open mains breaker now.
e. Close group breaker onto now dead load bus.
3. Generator provides power.
a. Detect mains return.
4. Transition to Mains after return delay.
a. Open Transition
i. Open group breaker and close mains breaker (With In Phase Monitor or open
transition delay).
b. Closed Transition
i. Sync and close mains breaker.
ii. Unload generator based on ramp rate.
iii. Open group breaker when Group Breaker Open Setpoint is reached or after Max
Parallel Time.
c. Open generator breaker.
d. Machine will automatically cool down and stop if no other run requests are active.
5. Back to 1.

Load Takeover Transfer

1. Mains is providing power.
a. Load Takeover is applied.
2. Transition to generator power.
a. Start generator.
b. If group breaker is closed, open the group breaker now.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-25

c. Wait until generator bus is stable. Sync and close generator breaker onto group bus. The
single machine rating must be greater than the measured mains power in this
configuration otherwise the group breaker will never close.
d. Open Transition
i. Open mains breaker and close group breaker (With In Phase Monitor or open
transition delay).
e. Closed Transition
i. Sync and close group breaker to load bus.
ii. Soft load based on ramp rate.
iii. Open mains breaker at Mains Breaker Open Setpoint (if mains CT is configured),
when baseload level is reached, or after max parallel time.
3. Generator provides power.
a. Load Takeover is removed.
4. Transition to mains as in mains fail step 4, above.
5. Back to 1.

Logic Elements
Several logic elements are present in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic that can be used on Mains Fail
Transfer enabled machines. These logic elements are described below.

Parallel To Mains (PARTOMAINS)

The Parallel to Mains logic element must be true any time the generator is in parallel with the utility.
Parallel transitions to and from the mains will not operate properly if the Parallel to Mains logic element is
not set correctly.

Auto Breaker Operation Inhibit (AUTOBRKOPINHIBIT)

When the Auto Breaker Operation Inhibit element is set true, it prevents all automatic breaker operation.

Mains Fail Transfer Inhibit (MAINSFLTRINHIBIT)

When the Mains Fail Transfer Inhibit element is set true, it prevents automatic load transfer due to a
mains failure.

Closed Transition Override (CLOSEDTRANSITIONOVR)

When the Closed Transition Override element is set true, it forces a closed transition due to mains failure,
overriding an open Mains Fail Transfer Type setting.

Mains Fail Test

When true, the Mains Fail Test logic element causes the DGC-2020HD to react exactly as if the mains
has failed. The following sequence of events occurs:
1. Mains Fail Transfer Delay time expires
2. Generators start
3. Mains breaker is opened either before the generators start or after the generators become stable
(based on the Mains Breaker Open Configuration setting)
4. Generators become stable
5. DGC-2020HD closes its generator or group breaker to drive the load
When the Mains Fail Test logic element is false, the DGC-2020HD reacts as if the mains has returned,
the Mains Fail Return Delay time expires, and the controller transitions the load from the generators back
to the utility in an Open or Closed transition, according to the Mains Fail Transfer Type setting.

Load Take Over

The Load Take Over logic element is similar to the Mains Fail Test element, except that the machine does
not act as if the mains has failed, and the transfer and return delay timers are ignored.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-26 9469300995

If the Mains Fail Transition Type is set to Open and the Load Take Over logic element is true, the
following sequence of events occurs:
1. Generators start
2. Mains breaker is opened either before the generators start or after the generators become stable
(based on the Mains Breaker Open Configuration setting)
3. Generators become stable
4. DGC-2020HD closes its generator or group breaker to drive the load
When the Load Take Over logic element is false, the DGC-2020HD opens its generator or group breaker
and closes the mains breaker to transition the load back to the utility. If the In Phase Monitor setting is
enabled, the transition does not occur until the generator and utility phases are aligned.
If the Mains Fail Transition Type is set to Closed and the Load Take Over logic element is true, the
generators start, synchronize to the utility, and the DGC-2020HD closes the generator or group breaker.
When an auxiliary CT is configured to meter the mains bus, the mains breaker power level is measured.
In this case, the generators take on load either until the power measured at the mains breaker is less than
or equal to the Breaker Open Setpoint Level setting, or for the duration of the Max Parallel Time. Breaker
Open Setpoint Level is found in the appropriate Breaker Hardware settings. Once one of these conditions
has been reached, the mains breaker opens, leaving load on the generators. When no auxiliary CT is
configured to meter the mains bus, the generators take on load either until they are driving load at a level
equal to the Base Load Level or for the duration of the Max Parallel Time. Base Load Level settings are
found on the Governor Bias Control screen. Once the Base Load Level or Max Parallel Time has been
reached, the mains breaker will open, leaving the load on the generators.
When the Load Take Over logic element becomes false, the generators parallel to the utility. While
paralleled to the utility, the controller ramps down load until the load is at or below the Breaker Open
Setpoint or until the generators have been paralleled to the utility for the maximum allowed time as
specified by the Max Parallel Time setting. The DGC-2020HD opens its generator or group breaker,
leaving the load on utility power. A cool down cycle is performed and the generators are stopped.

Mains Fail Transfer Alarms and Pre-Alarms

The following paragraphs describe the alarms and pre-alarms associated with mains fail transfer.
If a mains failure transfer has begun, but is not completed within the Mains Fail Max Transfer Time, a
Transfer Fail Alarm is annunciated and the generators are shut down.
If the Alarm State Transfer to Mains setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD can transfer the load to a stable
utility when in the alarm state. If this setting is disabled, the DGC-2020HD will not perform any transitions
of the load to or from the utility when in the alarm state.
When enabled, Reverse Rotation Inhibit prevents automatic load transfer due to a mains failure when the
machine is determined to have reverse phase rotation.
With the Group Breaker Capacity Not Reached pre-alarm enabled, load will not be transferred to a
generator group if the online capacity is not greater than or equal to the active block load level after the
Capacity Not Reached Delay expires. When enabled, the Close Enable setting allows the group breaker
to close when the Capacity Not Reached pre-alarm activates regardless of the online capacity. If the
online capacity does not meet or exceed the active block load level within the Capacity Not Reached Fail
Delay, the group breaker close request is aborted. It will not close the group breaker after this point even
if additional generation comes online. To reset the pre-alarm, press the reset button on the front panel.
The pre-alarm will also clear if a group breaker open request is given or if the group breaker is closed
manually. See Multiple Generator Management chapter for more information on group starting.

Breaker Management and Mains Fail Transfer Settings

The BESTCOMSPlus Breaker Management settings screen is illustrated in Figure 12-29.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-27

Figure 12-29. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Management Screen

Breaker Setup in BESTlogic™Plus

Set up the generator breaker in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic under the BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Explorer. Figure 12-30 illustrates the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic screen with an example
breaker control logic scheme. The following paragraphs provide instructions for setting up the generator
and mains breakers in BESTlogicPlus. Group and Tie breakers are set up in a similar fashion.
1. Generator Breaker
a. Click and drag the Gen Breaker (GENBRK) element into the logic diagram.
b. Connect the breaker element open and close outputs to the contact outputs that will drive the
breaker.
c. Connect the physical input or remote input that has the breaker status (closed when the
breaker is closed, open when the breaker is open) to the Status input of the breaker element.
This is the only way to indicate breaker status to the DGC-2020HD.
d. If it is desired to have physical inputs that can request breaker open and close commands,
connect the desired inputs to the open and close command inputs of the breaker element.
These inputs should be pulsed. If both open and close command inputs are closed at the
same time, the breaker will open. If it is not desired to have inputs for breaker commands,
connect a “Logic 0” input object to the open and close command inputs of the breaker block.
2. Mains Breaker
a. Click and drag the Mains Breaker (MAINSBRK) element into the logic diagram.
b. Connect the breaker element open and close outputs to the contact outputs that will drive the
breaker.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-28 9469300995

c. Connect the physical input or remote input that has the breaker status (closed when the
breaker is closed, open when the breaker is open) to the Status input of the breaker element.
This is the only way to indicate breaker status to the DGC-2020HD.
d. If it is desired to have physical inputs that can request breaker open and close commands,
connect the desired inputs to the open and close command inputs of the breaker element.
These inputs should be pulsed. If both open and close command inputs are closed at the
same time, the breaker will open. If it is not desired to have inputs for breaker commands,
connect a “Logic 0” input object to the open and close command inputs of the breaker block.
3. Click the Save button when the logic setup is complete.
4. From the Communication pull-down menu, select Upload Logic to Device to load the logic into the
DGC-2020HD if connected, or save the settings file if working off line.

Figure 12-30. Settings Explorer, BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic

Bus Condition Detection Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Bus Condition Detection
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Breaker Management > Bus Condition
Bus condition thresholds determine when the generator bus, bus 1, and bus 2 are considered to be stable
or dead.
Each bus has its own settings screen. These include the Gen Condition Detection, Bus 1 Condition
Detection, and optional Bus 2 Condition Detection screens. Three-phase and single-phase threshold
settings are provided on each screen. The Gen Condition Detection screen is described, below. The Bus
1 and 2 Condition Detection screens are identical in function to the Gen Condition Detection screen.
The Gen Condition Detection screen is illustrated in Figure 12-31. The Bus 1 Condition Detection and
optional Bus 2 Condition Detection screens are also found in the Bus Condition Detection category.
When the bus voltage is below the Dead Bus Threshold for the duration of the Activation Delay, the bus is
deemed “dead” and “failed”.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-29

Four thresholds determine a stable bus. These consist of overvoltage, undervoltage, overfrequency, and
underfrequency. Each of these thresholds has an activation delay. When the bus voltage and frequency
stay within the thresholds for the duration of the corresponding activation delays, the bus is deemed
"stable". Otherwise, it is deemed "failed". A “dead” bus is also considered to be “failed”.

Caution
The bus condition parameters are critical. They determine when a
breaker can be closed.

Figure 12-31. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Gen Condition Detection

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-30 9469300995

Breaker Power Summing

Breaker Power Summing provides a way to calculate cumulative power measurements by summing the
power measured across specified breakers. Any breaker in the system can be specified as long as it is
controlled by a DGC-2020HD. Cumulative power measurements are available in metering and
configurable protection which can be used in logic. There are eight independent power summing
elements. Each element provides settings for up to 32 breakers. Elements provide cumulative kW and
kvar measurements for the specified breakers.
Up to four alphanumeric characters are accepted for breaker labels. Breaker power summing operation is
set to add by default. However, based on the CT connection, it may be desired to subtract (negate) the
power measurement of the breaker from the cumulative sum.

Figure 12-32. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Power Sum

Breaker Operation
The DGC-2020HD attempts to close a breaker only after verifying that it can be closed. If the breaker
cannot be closed, the close request is ignored. Only one breaker can be closed at a time.
Synchronization is required before closing the breaker to a live bus. Closure to a dead bus can be
performed after meeting dead bus threshold and timing requirements set by the user.

Breaker Operation Requests

Types of breaker operation requests include:
• Local Request - initiated by internal functions and based on operating modes.
• Com Request - initiated through a communication port using BESTCOMSPlus or the front panel.
• Logic Request - initiated from BESTlogicPlus.
The type of response given for a local request depends on the operating mode of the DGC-2020HD.

RUN Mode
When in RUN mode, breakers can be closed manually using contact inputs or the breaker buttons on the
BESTCOMSPlus Control screen.

OFF or AUTO Mode (Not Running)

If operating in the OFF mode or AUTO and not running, the generator breaker cannot be closed unless
the Dead Gen Close Enable setting is enabled.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-31

AUTO Mode (Running)

When in AUTO mode and running, the mains fail transfer feature automatically controls applicable
breakers. Alternatively, the external ATS (automatic transfer switch) starts the generators and controls the
breakers itself. In addition, breakers can be automatically controlled by the demand start/stop function,
the exercise timer function, or a RUNWLOAD (run with load) start from BESTlogicPlus. Breakers can be
manually controlled using contact inputs and outputs, the breaker open and close commands through the
front panel, or the breaker buttons on the BESTCOMSPlus Control screen.

Generator Breaker Closure Conditions

The conditions under which the DGC-2020HD will close the generator breaker are described in the
following paragraphs.
When a breaker closure request is received, certain conditions must be met before a breaker will close.
Table 12-1 shows the conditions under which a generator breaker will close. The column labeled System
A represents the local generator bus and System B represents the destination bus. Gen indicates a bus
powered by a generator. Mains indicates a bus powered by an infinite source such as mains or utility
power. Load indicates a bus which typically supports a load. A Dead Load Bus is currently unpowered,
but capable of being powered by generators or a mains. When a load bus is powered by a source known
to the intergenset network, it is considered to be an extension of that source, thus being labeled as Gen
or Mains. A Stable Load Bus is currently powered, but the source is unknown to the DGC-2020HD
network. This could mean that a breaker is missing from the network.
Condition A represents the condition of the System A bus as determined by bus condition settings and
likewise for Condition B and System B. A bus is considered Stable when the measured voltage and
frequency are within the bus condition detection parameters. A bus is considered Dead when the
measured voltage is below the Dead Bus Threshold.
Required Setting to Operate indicates any settings which must be enabled in order for the breaker to
close. These settings are found on the Generator Breaker screen.
Action indicates the type of action which will be taken if all other conditions are met. A Sync A to B action
indicates that the source bus (System A) will be synchronized to the destination bus (System B), then the
generator breaker will be closed. A Close action indicates that the generator breaker will simply close.
Table 12-1. Generator Breaker Closure Conditions
System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action
Operate
Gen Stable Mains Stable None Sync A to B
Gen Stable Gen Stable None Sync A to B
Gen Stable Load Dead Dead Bus Close Enable Close
Gen Stable Load Stable None Sync A to B
Gen Dead Gen Dead Dead Gen Close Enable Close
Gen Dead Load Dead Dead Gen Close Enable Close
If the generator breaker is already closed, the DGC-2020HD still attempts to close the breaker. It is
assumed that since the breaker is already closed, the closure conditions have already been met.

Mains Breaker Closure Conditions

The conditions under which the DGC-2020HD will close the mains breaker are described in the following
paragraphs.
When a breaker closure request is received, certain conditions must be met before a breaker will close.
Table 12-2 shows the conditions under which a mains breaker will close. The column labeled System A
represents the mains bus and System B represents the load bus. Gen indicates a load bus powered by a
generator. Mains indicates a load bus powered by an infinite source such as mains or utility power. Load
indicates a bus which typically supports a load. A Dead Load Bus is currently unpowered, but capable of
being powered by generators or a mains. When a load bus is powered by a source known to the
DGC-2020HD Breaker Management
12-32 9469300995

intergenset network, it is considered to be an extension of that source, thus being labeled as Gen or
Mains. A Stable Load Bus is currently powered, but the source is unknown to the DGC-2020HD network.
This could mean that a breaker is missing from the network.
Condition A represents the condition of the System A bus as determined by bus condition settings and
likewise for Condition B and System B. A bus is considered Stable when the measured voltage and
frequency are within the bus condition detection parameters. A bus is considered Dead when the
measured voltage is below the Dead Bus Threshold.
Required Setting to Operate indicates any settings which must be enabled in order for the breaker to
close. These settings are found on the Mains Breaker screen.
Action indicates the type of action which will be taken if all other conditions are met. A Sync B to A action
indicates that System B will be synchronized to System A, then the mains breaker will be closed. A Sync
Check action indicates that a sync check will be performed before closing the mains breaker. A Close
action indicates that the mains breaker will simply close.
Table 12-2. Mains Breaker Closure Conditions
System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action
Operate
Mains Stable Gen Stable None Sync B to A
Mains Stable Mains Stable Mains to Mains Close Sync check
Enable
Mains Stable Load Dead None Close
Mains Stable Load Stable Live Bus Close Enable Sync check

Group Breaker Closure Conditions

The conditions under which the DGC-2020HD will close the group breaker are described in the following
paragraphs.
When a breaker closure request is received, certain conditions must be met before a breaker will close.
Table 12-3 shows the conditions under which a group breaker will close. The column labeled System A
represents the group bus and System B represents the load bus. Gen indicates a bus powered by a
generator. Mains indicates a bus powered by an infinite source such as mains or utility power. Load
indicates a bus which typically supports a load. A Dead Load Bus is currently unpowered, but capable of
being powered by generators or a mains. When a load bus is powered by a source known to the
intergenset network, it is considered to be an extension of that source, thus being labeled as Gen or
Mains. A Stable Load Bus is currently powered, but the source is unknown to the DGC-2020HD network.
This could mean that a breaker is missing from the network.
Condition A represents the condition of the System A bus as determined by bus condition settings and
likewise for Condition B and System B. A bus is considered Stable when the measured voltage and
frequency are within the bus condition detection parameters. A bus is considered Dead when the
measured voltage is below the Dead Bus Threshold.
Required Setting to Operate indicates any settings which must be enabled in order for the breaker to
close. These settings are found on the Group Breaker screen.
Action indicates the type of action which will be taken if all other conditions are met. A Sync A to B action
indicates that the group bus (System A) will be synchronized to the load bus (System B), then the group
breaker will be closed. A Sync B to A action indicates that the load bus (System B) will be synchronized to
the group bus (System A), then the group breaker will be closed. This is for uncommon cases where
System B power can be controlled and System A cannot. A Sync Check action indicates that a sync
check will be performed before closing the group breaker. A Close action indicates that the group breaker
will simply close.
Table 12-4 shows the conditions under which a group breaker will close when at least one local generator
is already closed onto the group bus.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-33

Table 12-5 shows the conditions under which a group breaker will close when a mains is already tied
directly onto the group bus. However, this is not a typical scenario.
Table 12-3. Typical Group Breaker Closure Conditions
System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action
Operate
Load Dead Gen Stable Dead Group Close Enable Close
Load Dead Mains Stable Dead Group Close Enable Close
Load Stable Gen Stable Live Bus Close Enable Sync B to A
Load Stable Mains Stable Live Bus Close Enable Sync check
Load Stable Load Stable Live Bus Close Enable Sync check
Load Stable Load Dead Live Bus Close Enable Close
Load Dead Load Stable Live Bus Close Enable, Close
Dead Group Close Enable
Load Dead Load Dead Dead Group Close Enable Close

Table 12-4. Group Breaker Closure Conditions when a Local Generator is Tied onto System A
System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action
Operate
Gen Stable Mains Stable None Sync A to B
Gen Stable Gen Stable None Sync A to B
Gen Stable Load Dead None Close
Gen Stable Load Stable Live Bus Close Enable Sync A to B

Table 12-5. Group Breaker Closure Conditions when a Mains is Tied Directly onto System A
System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action
Operate
Mains Stable Gen Stable None Sync B to A
Mains Stable Load Dead None Close
Mains Stable Load Stable Live Bus Close Enable Sync check

Tie Breaker Closure Conditions

The conditions under which the DGC-2020HD will close the tie breaker are described in the following
paragraphs.
When a breaker closure request is received, certain conditions must be met before a breaker will close.
Table 12-6 shows the conditions under which a tie breaker will close. The columns labeled System A and
System B represent the buses which will be tied together when the breaker closes. Gen indicates a bus
powered by a generator. Mains indicates a bus powered by an infinite source such as mains or utility
power. Load indicates a bus which typically supports a load. A Dead Load Bus is currently unpowered,
but capable of being powered by generators or a mains. When a load bus is powered by a source known
to the intergenset network, it is considered to be an extension of that source, thus being labeled as Gen
or Mains. A Stable Load Bus is currently powered, but the source is unknown to the DGC-2020HD
network. This could mean that a breaker is missing from the network.
Condition A represents the condition of the System A bus as determined by bus condition settings and
likewise for Condition B and System B. A bus is considered Stable when the measured voltage and
frequency are within the bus condition detection parameters. A bus is considered Dead when the
measured voltage is below the Dead Bus Threshold.

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-34 9469300995

Required Setting to Operate indicates any settings which must be enabled in order for the breaker to
close. These settings are found on the Tie Breaker screen.
Action indicates the type of action which will be taken if all other conditions are met. A Sync A to B action
indicates that System A will be synchronized to System B, then the tie breaker will be closed. A Sync B to
A action indicates that System B) will be synchronized to System A, then the tie breaker will be closed.
This is for uncommon cases where System B power can be controlled and System A cannot. A Sync
Check action indicates that a sync check will be performed before closing the tie breaker. A sync side
based on Sync Adjust Side setting action indicates that one system, as determined by the Sync Adjust
Side setting, will be synchronized to the other before the tie breaker is closed. A Close action indicates
that the tie breaker will simply close.
These closure conditions are identical for Tie Breaker 2 except references to System A and System B
become System B and System C respectively.
Table 12-6. Tie Breaker Closure Conditions
System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action
Operate
Gen Stable Mains Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync A to B
Enable
Mains Stable Gen Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync B to A
Enable
Gen Stable Gen Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync side
Enable based on
Sync Adjust
Side setting
Mains Stable Mains Stable Mains to Mains Close Sync check
Enable
Gen Stable Load Dead Live A to Dead B Close Close
Enable
Mains Stable Load Dead Live A to Dead B Close Close
Enable
Load Dead Gen Stable Dead A to Live B Close Close
Enable
Load Dead Mains Stable Dead A to Live B Close Close
Enable
Gen Stable Load Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync A to B
Enable
Live Load Close Enable
Mains Stable Load Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync check
Enable
Live Load Close Enable
Load Stable Gen Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync B to A
Enable
Live Load Close Enable
Load Stable Mains Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync check
Enable
Live Load Close Enable
Load Stable Load Stable Live A to Live B Close Sync check
Enable
Live Load Close Enable

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 12-35

System A Condition A System B Condition B Required Setting to Action

Operate
Load Stable Load Dead Live A to Dead B Close Close
Enable
Live Load Close Enable
Load Dead Load Stable Dead A to Live B Close Close
Enable
Live Load Close Enable
Load Dead Load Dead Dead A to Dead B Close Close
Enable
Gen Dead Gen Dead Dead Gen Close Enable Close
Gen Dead Load Dead Dead Gen Close Enable Close
Load Dead Gen Dead Dead Gen Close Enable Close

General Breaker Closure Conditions

The following conditions apply to any breaker control configuration.

Command Agreement
A breaker will not change state if it receives conflicting commands. In other words, if an input is indicating
an open command at the same time another input is indicating a close command, the breaker will open.

Dead Bus Breaker Close Arbitration

Dead bus breaker close arbitration ensures that only one bus segment closes its breaker to a dead bus
segment. This prevents multiple live buses from being tied while out of synchronization, which can result
in equipment damage. After a unit issues a dead bus close request and the request is granted
permission, the unit that received the grant closes its breaker onto the dead bus segment. Now that the
bus segment is no longer dead, any other segment must synchronize to this bus segment before the
breaker tying these two segments can be closed.
The dead bus breaker close arbitration process occurs via inter-genset communication among all
DGC-2020HD controllers on the network. All controllers on the network must be configured as the same
System Type: Multiple Generator or Segmented Bus System. The System Type setting is found in
Settings > System Parameters > System Settings.
If a controller which is granted permission to close its breaker onto a dead bus fails to do so, the
permission may be passed to another controller which has issued a dead bus close request.
Individual units issue dead bus close requests when they want to close their generator breaker and a
dead bus is detected. An individual unit issues a dead bus close request when all of the following are
true:
• The generator is stable
• A dead bus is detected
• A generator breaker close request is received
An individual unit with its System Type parameter set to Multiple Generator will not close its breaker onto
the dead bus unless it receives a dead bus close grant via Ethernet inter-genset communication. The
System Type parameter is found in Settings > System Parameters > System Settings. After an individual
unit issues a dead bus close request and receives a dead bus close grant from, the unit maintains its
dead bus close request unless one of the following occurs:
• The dead bus close grant is removed
• The generator breaker encounters a breaker close fail
• A generator breaker open request is received
• The generator becomes unstable
• Breaker closure is achieved

DGC-2020HD Breaker Management

12-36 9469300995

An individual unit can close to a dead bus at any time when the System Type parameter is set to Single
Generator. This is also permitted when the System Type parameter is set to Multiple Generator and no
other generators are present on the Ethernet inter-genset communications network.
All units in the system reporting a dead bus must be visible via Ethernet inter-genset communications
before any dead bus close grant is issued. Any dead bus close grant is removed if any machine reports
the bus is not dead. A dead bus close grant is not removed unless the unit that received the grant
removes its request or another machine reports that the bus is not dead. When a dead bus close grant is
removed, a Dead Bus Control Grant Fail pre-alarm is annunciated.
For consistent operation, all units should be set up with the same demand start/stop and sequencing
criteria. This ensures that system manager functionality is transferred accordingly as the lowest numbered
nonzero sequence ID changes in the system. If multiple units have the same sequencing ID, a system
manager is chosen based on the MAC address of the DGC-2020HD.

Synchronization
Synchronization is required when closing a breaker to a live bus. Bus conditions act as a supervisory
control over the synchronizing function. If synchronization is in process and either bus goes unstable,
synchronization is suspended.
The GENBRK, MAINSBRK, GROUPBRK, TIEBRK, and TIEBRK2 logic blocks contain Open and Close
logic outputs that can be configured to energize an output contact, which would in turn operate the
breaker. The Breaker Hardware screens in BESTCOMSPlus are used to set the output contact type to
pulsed or continuous for each breaker.

Breaker Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 13-1

13 • Synchronizer
Some applications require a generator set which can operate in parallel with other generators or a utility
bus. In order to parallel the generator, the speed and the voltage of the generator must be properly
matched to the bus. This is done by adjusting the generator’s speed control governor (GOV) and
automatic voltage regulator (AVR). Synchronization can be achieved manually by an operator or
automatically by an automatic synchronizer.
The DGC-2020HD digital genset controller has an integrated automatic synchronizer as an option to
perform synchronization. The controller monitors the voltages, frequencies, and phase relationships of
both the generator and the bus. It then sends a signal to the governor to increase or decrease the speed
of the engine to match the generator frequency and phase angle to the bus frequency and phase angle. It
also sends a signal to the voltage regulator to match the voltage levels. Once all of these conditions are
met, the controller sends a breaker close signal to the generator circuit breaker.
There are two types of automatic synchronizers available: Phase Lock Loop and Anticipatory. A phase
lock loop automatic synchronizer controls the frequency of the generator and brings it into the
predetermined phase angle window. After a time delay expires while in the window, the close signal is
given to the generator circuit breaker. An anticipatory automatic synchronizer controls the slip frequency
between the generator and the bus. The synchronizer calculates the timing of the closing signal to allow
the generator breaker to be closed when the phase angle between the two sources is at 0 degrees. This
calculation takes into account the slip rate, generator breaker closing time, and the phase angle
difference.
The automatic synchronizer runs in one of three modes: Sync Active, Sync Check, or Sync Only. When in
Sync Active mode, the DGC-2020HD issues bias correction outputs and closes the breaker when the slip
values are within the programmed window. In Sync Check mode, the DGC-2020HD does not issue bias
correction outputs, but closes the breaker when the slip values are within the programmed window. In
Sync Only mode, the DGC-2020HD does not issue a breaker close pulse. It attempts to control the bias
outputs to stay in sync until an open request is issued or a sync fail occurs.
In order to minimize the effects of I/O communications delays on synchronization, it is recommended that
local I/O on the DGC-2020HD, rather than remote I/O on the CEM-2020, be used for generator breaker
open and close commands, generator breaker status, voltage raise and lower contacts, and speed raise
and lower contacts.

Operation
The synchronizer acts to align the generator voltage and frequency with that of the bus inputs when the
DGC-2020HD desires to close the generator to a live, stable bus. Several conditions must exist before
the synchronizer function begins to execute:
• The DGC-2020HD must include the synchronizer option
• The generator voltage must be stable
• The bus voltage must be stable
• The DGC-2020HD must be in the process of initiating a breaker close
Breaker close sources are:
• The DGC-2020HD itself when the Run with Load logic element receives a Start pulse in the
programmable logic.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when started from a Demand Start as part of demand start/stop and
sequencing.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when started from the Exercise Timer and the Run with Load box is
checked in the Generator Exerciser Settings.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when started from any group start request (logic, mains fail, load
takeover, or peak shaving).
• Manual Breaker Close Input Contacts applied to the Open and Close inputs on the left side of the
Generator Breaker logic element in the programmable logic.

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-2 9469300995

• Breaker Close commands from the Control Screen in BESTCOMSPlus®

• Breaker Close commands initiated through the front panel of the DGC-2020HD.
Any of the above close sources work when the DGC-2020HD is in AUTO mode. Only the Manual Breaker
Close Input Contacts can initiate a breaker closure when the DGC-2020HD is in RUN mode.
In wye, delta, grounded delta, or single-phase AB configurations, the synchronizer aligns the voltage on
the GEN VA terminal with that on the BUS VA terminal, and the voltage on the GEN VB terminal with that
on the BUS VB terminal. In other words, the DGC-2020HD aligns the generator phase AB L-L voltage
with the bus phase AB L-L voltage. In order for the synchronizer to provide correct phase alignment
across a breaker, the phase AB L-L voltages on the generator side of the breaker must be wired to the
GEN VA and GEN VB terminals on the DGC-2020HD. The phase AB L-L voltages on the bus side of the
breaker (the bus to which the generator will be connected when the breaker is closed) must be wired to
the BUS VA and BUS VB terminals on the DGC-2020HD. See the Typical Connections chapter in the
Installation manual for a three-phase wye connection for typical applications diagram.
In single-phase AC configuration, the synchronizer aligns the voltage on the GEN VA terminal with that on
the BUS VA terminal, and the voltage on the GEN VC terminal with that on the BUS VC terminal. In other
words, the DGC-2020HD aligns the generator phase CA L-L voltage with the bus phase AB L-L voltage.
In order for the synchronizer to provide correct phase alignment across a breaker, the phase CA L-L
voltages on the generator side of the breaker must be wired to the GEN VA and GEN VC terminals on the
DGC-2020HD. An optional wire jumper may also connect the GEN VB and GEN VC terminals together.
The phase CA L-L voltage on the bus side of the breaker (the bus to which the generator will be
connected when the breaker is closed) must be wired to the BUS VA and BUS VC terminals on the DGC-
2020HD. A wire jumper must also connect the BUS VB and BUS VC terminals together. See the Typical
Connections chapter in the Installation manual for a single-phase AC connection for typical applications
diagram.
Generator speed can be influenced by the speed trim function, which is active at all times if enabled, and
the synchronizer. Since the speed trim function can cause some activity on the speed bias outputs, when
performing synchronizer troubleshooting it is recommended that the speed trim function be disabled.
Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter for more information.
It is also required that phase rotation is the same on both sides of the breaker for synchronization to be
possible.
When the DGC-2020HD is performing synchronization, the Synchronizer screen is shown on the front
panel. Slip angle, slip frequency, voltage difference, synchronizer active status, and a synchronizer scope
are displayed.

Notes
When using the DGC-2020HD synchronizer, it is recommended that
local DGC-2020HD relay outputs be used for breaker closing
commands to minimize the possibility of closures outside of desired
breaker closing angles.
If remote (CEM-2020) outputs are to be used for breaker close
commands, it is recommended that the anticipatory synchronizer type
be used, and the breaker close wait time be adjusted to account for
possible CEM-2020 output delays (typically 50 ms) to achieve desired
breaker closing angles.

Sync Check Settings

The controller performs a sync check when a breaker closure request is issued and it is determined that
the generator and bus will not be electrically tied. Otherwise, the active synchronizer (option) is used. In
the following example, the System Breaker Configuration is set to Generator and Mains Breaker Control.
If both breakers are open, a mains breaker closure is requested, and the mains and load buses are
stable, a sync check is performed. In this case the sync check uses the sync check settings, which act

Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 13-3

similarly to the active sync settings. The active sync mode can be set to Sync Check, in which case the
sync check settings are always used.
Figure 13-1 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Synchronizer screen.

Figure 13-1. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Synchronizer Screen

Configuration
The following steps describe how to configure the DGC-2020HD automatic synchronizer using
BESTCOMSPlus:
1. Open the Style Number screen in the Settings Explorer, under General Settings. Verify the connected
unit has the Automatic Synchronizer option.
2. Select the appropriate system breaker configuration on the System Parameters, System Settings
screen. See the Breaker Management chapter for details. In this example, only the generator breaker
is controlled by the DGC-2020HD.
3. Open the Contact Inputs screen, in the Settings Explorer, under Programmable Inputs. Enter “Open
Generator Breaker” into the label text field of Input #9. Enter “Close Generator Breaker” into the label
text field of Input #10. Finally, enter “Generator Breaker Status” into the label text field of Input #13.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters are accepted by a label text field. See Figure 13-2.

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-4 9469300995

Figure 13-2. Settings Explorer, Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs

4. Open the Contact Outputs screen in the Settings Explorer, under Programmable Outputs. Input label
text "Generator Breaker Open" for Output #5 and "Generator Breaker Close" for Output #6.
a. If using contact outputs to control the governor and voltage regulator, label Output #9 as
"GOV Raise", Output #10 as "GOV Lower", Output #11 as "AVR Raise", and Output #12 as
"AVR Lower". See Figure 13-3.

Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 13-5

Figure 13-3. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs

5. Open the Breaker Management screen (Figure 13-4) in the Settings Explorer, under Breaker
Management. Set Breaker Fail Wait Time.
a. Breaker Fail Wait Time is the time interval in which it is expected that the breaker will
transition from open to closed or closed to open. If it does not change state within the
specified time, a breaker failure is annunciated.

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-6 9469300995

Figure 13-4. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Management

6. Open the Gen Breaker Hardware screen in the Settings Explorer, under Breaker Management,
Breaker Hardware. On this screen, enter the settings for the following parameters. See Figure 13-5.
a. Enable the Dead Bus Close Enable parameter if it is desired to close onto a dead bus.
b. If pulsed contacts are used, set Contact Type to Pulsed and set appropriate open and close
pulse times.
c. Set Breaker Closing Time. This is the time used by the anticipatory synchronizer to calculate
the advance angle before 0 degrees slip angle at which to issue the breaker close command.

Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 13-7

Figure 13-5. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware

7. Open the appropriate Condition Detection screens in the Settings Explorer, under Breaker
Management, Bus Condition Detection. This is where the parameters are set for detecting stable and
failed generator and bus conditions.

Caution
The generator and bus condition parameters are critical since a
breaker can be closed only when the generator is stable and the bus
is either stable or dead.

Bus condition thresholds determine when the generator and bus are considered to be stable or dead.
Each bus has its own settings screen. These include the Gen Condition Detection, Bus 1 Condition
Detection, and optional Bus 2 Condition Detection screens. Three-phase and single-phase threshold
settings are provided on each screen.
Only the Gen Condition Detection screen is described here, because the Gen, Bus 1 and 2 Condition
Detection screens are identical.
The Gen Condition Detection screen can be found in the Settings Explorer, under the Breaker
Management, Bus Condition Detection category and is illustrated in Figure 13-6. The Bus 1 Condition
Detection and optional Bus 2 Condition Detection screens are also found in the Bus Condition Detection
category.
Four thresholds determine a stable generator bus. These consist of overvoltage, undervoltage,
overfrequency, and underfrequency. When the generator voltage and frequency stay within the
thresholds for the duration of the Gen Stable Activation Delay, the generator bus is deemed “stable”.
When the voltage and frequency are outside the stable ranges for the duration of the Gen Failed
Activation Delay, the generator is deemed “failed”. When the generator voltage is below the Dead Gen
Threshold for the duration of the Dead Gen Activation Delay, the generator bus is deemed “Dead”.

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-8 9469300995

Figure 13-6. Settings Explorer, Breaker Management, Bus Condition Detection, Gen Condition Detection
If Phase Lock Loop synchronization is selected, the synchronizer drives the generator voltage and phase
angle to match that of the bus, until the difference is within user-defined windows.
If Anticipatory synchronization is selected, the synchronizer controls the slip frequency between the
generator and the bus. The synchronizer calculates the timing of the closing signal that allows the
generator breaker to be closed when the phase angle between the two sources is at 0 degrees. This
calculation takes into account the slip rate, the generator breaker closing time, and the phase angle
difference.
8. Open the Synchronizer screen in the Settings Explorer, under Breaker Management. See Figure
13-1.
9. Sync Type - Select either Anticipatory or Phase Lock Loop as the synchronizer type.
10. Slip Frequency - The slip frequency setting is the maximum slip frequency that is in effect for a
breaker close to occur.
Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 13-9

11. Voltage Window - The regulation offset is the maximum allowed percentage voltage difference
between the generator and the bus that is in effect for a breaker close to occur. This is sometimes
referred to as “voltage window”.
12. Min/Max Slip Control Limit - (Phase lock synchronizer only.) These settings provide continuous slip
frequency control while in phase lock synchronization.
13. Breaker Closing Angle - (Phase lock synchronizer only.) The breaker closing angle is the maximum
phase angle from the 0-degree phase angle that is in effect for a breaker close to occur. This is
sometimes referred to as the “angle window” or “phase window”.
14. Sync Activation Delay - The Sync Activation Delay is the length of time that the conditions for
synchronization must be met. Generator voltage and bus voltage must be within the acceptable range
for the duration of the sync activation delay. Additionally, the following condition must be met when in
Phase Lock mode. Generator and bus phase angles must be within the acceptable breaker closing
angle for the duration of the sync activation delay.
15. Sync Fail Delay - The sync fail delay is the maximum time allowed for synchronization to occur. If the
sync fail delay expires before the breaker closure occurs, a Sync Fail pre-alarm is annunciated, but
the synchronizer continues to run to allow the breaker to be closed manually if desired. The Sync Fail
Delay should be set to allow ample time for synchronization and breaker closure to occur.
16. Fgen > Fbus - Enabling gen frequency > bus frequency forces kW to flow out of the generator when
the breaker is closed.
17. Vgen > Vbus - Enabling gen voltage > bus voltage forces vars to flow out of the generator when the
breaker is closed.
18. Sync Speed Gain and Sync Voltage Gain – Sync speed gain and sync voltage gain settings are
provided to increase the loop gain of the automatic synchronizer. This allows the synchronizer
function to be aggressive during synchronization and stable during speed trim operation.
19. Group Speed Gain and Group Voltage Gain – When synchronizing a group of paralleled generators
to close the group breaker, the sync speed/volt error is multiplied by this gain to allow better control.
20. Open the AVR Bias Control Settings screen in the Settings Explorer, under Bias Control Settings.
Select either contact or analog as the bias control output type. See Figure 13-7.
a. Contact bias control output type. Select either Continuous or Proportional as the bias control
output type.
b. Analog bias control output type. If this is chosen, it is also required to enter gains and loop
gains of the voltage PID controller. These settings may have to be adjusted to achieve the
desired response from the voltage regulator. Controller tuning procedures may be found in
the Tuning PID Settings chapter.

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-10 9469300995

Figure 13-7. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings
21. Open the Governor Bias Control Settings screen in the Settings Explorer, under Bias Control
Settings. The parameters for the governor bias control are similar to those of the AVR bias control.
Follow the same steps as for the AVR bias control setup.
22. If controlling the voltage regulator and governor with contact outputs, skip to step 25. Otherwise,
continue with step 23.
23. Open the AVR Output screen in the Settings Explorer, under Multigen Management. On this screen,
select the bias output parameters and levels as required by the voltage regulator. See Figure 13-8.
a. Output Type - Select whether the AVR bias signal is Voltage or Current.
b. Response - Select Increasing or Decreasing. Increasing should be selected if an increase in
the output parameter results in an increase of generator output voltage.
c. Min Output Current (mA) and Max Output Current (mA) - If the Output Type is Current, these
parameters must be configured. Set the minimum and maximum current to a range equal to
the voltage bias input range for the voltage regulator. The range on these parameters is 4 mA
to 20 mA.
d. Min Output Voltage (V) and Max Output Voltage (V) - If the Output Type is Voltage, these
parameters must be configured. Set the minimum and maximum voltage to a range equal to
the voltage bias input range for the voltage regulator. The range on these parameters is
−10 V to +10 V.

Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 13-11

Figure 13-8. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, AVR Output

24. If controlling the governor with an analog signal, open the Governor Output screen in the Settings
Explorer, under Multigen Management. These parameters are identical to those of the AVR output.
25. Set up programmable logic to allow the DGC-2020HD to synchronize the generator and close the
generator breaker. In BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic, click on the Elements tab and drag the
GENBRK (Generator Breaker) element into the main logic screen. See Figure 13-9.

Figure 13-9. Synchronizer Setup in BESTlogicPlus Step 25

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-12 9469300995

26. Click on the I/O tab and drag the inputs assigned in step 3, into the main logic screen. Connect them
to the appropriate inputs of the GENBRK block. Drag the outputs assigned in step 4 into the main
logic screen and connect them to the appropriate outputs of the GENBRK block. See Figure 13-10.

Figure 13-10. Synchronizer Setup in BESTlogicPlus Step 26

27. If using analog outputs to bias the voltage regulator and governor, no further setup is necessary. If
using output contacts, they must be set up to drive these functions. In BESTlogicPlus programmable
logic, click on the Elements tab. Drag the GOVR and AVR logic blocks into the main logic screen.
See Figure 13-11.

Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 13-13

Figure 13-11. Synchronizer Setup in BESTlogicPlus Step 27

28. Click on the I/O tab and drag the outputs assigned in step 4 into the main logic screen. Connect the
GOVR and AVR blocks to the appropriate output contacts. See Figure 13-12.

DGC-2020HD Synchronizer
13-14 9469300995

Figure 13-12. Synchronizer Setup in BESTlogicPlus Step 28

This concludes the implementation of the automatic synchronizer.

Synchronizer DGC-2020HD
9469300995 14-1

14 • Bias Control
Settings are provided for AVR Bias Control and Governor Bias Control. Refer to the Tuning PID Settings
chapter for instructions on Tuning Speed PID Settings and Load Control PID Settings.

AVR Bias Control Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Bias Control > AVR Bias Control
Voltage biasing signals can be applied to an automatic voltage regulator using the analog output or
contact outputs of the DGC-2020HD. Analog outputs provide a variable voltage from -10 to +10 Vdc or a
variable current from 4 to 20 mAdc to the bias inputs of the AVR. Contact outputs provide raise and lower
commands to the bias inputs of the AVR. Use the Bias Control Output Type setting to establish the
appropriate bias control signal for your AVR.
When using the contact output type, the DGC-2020HD adjusts the generator voltage and frequency by
issuing voltage correction signals to the generator AVR (automatic voltage regulator). Correction signals
are issued in the form of DGC-2020HD output contact closures. These correction signals can be either
continuous or proportional. Proportional correction uses control pulses of varying widths and intervals.
Initially, long pulses are issued when the voltage and frequency differences are large. As the correction
pulses take effect and the voltage and frequency differences become smaller, the correction pulse widths
are proportionally decreased. Proportional correction pulses are beneficial in applications where fixed
correction pulses can result in overshooting the slip frequency and regulation offset targets.
See Contact Output Bias Control Setup in BESTlogic™Plus below for instructions on setting up AVR bias
control using DGC-2020HD contact outputs.
When using the analog output type, a PID controller controls the voltage bias from the DGC-2020HD to
the voltage regulator. The controller adjusts the bias output to drive the error between desired generator
voltage and measured generator voltage to zero.
See Analog Output Bias Control Setup below for instructions on setting up AVR bias control using
DGC-2020HD analog outputs.
The BESTCOMSPlus AVR Output Configuration screen is illustrated in Figure 14-1.

Figure 14-1. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings, Output Configuration

Voltage Control
Voltage trim is used to maintain the system voltage at the desired setpoint while the system is islanded
and operating in var-sharing mode. Voltage trim operation is configured by enable, threshold, remote
bias, and deadband settings.
A Trim Enable setting selects when voltage trim is enabled and disabled. The default selection of "Enable
When Gen Breaker Closed" enables voltage trim when the generator breaker is closed and disables
voltage trim when the generator breaker is open. Voltage trim is enabled continuously when "Enable
Always" is selected.
Settings are provided for proportional gain, integral gain, derivative gain, derivative filter constant, and
loop gain of the PID controller.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-2 9469300995

The Voltage Trim Setpoint Source setting determines the source from which the DGC-2020HD obtains
the voltage trim setpoint. "Rated Voltage" or "Trim Voltage Setting" can be selected. When Rated Voltage
is selected, the rated generator voltage is used as the voltage trim setpoint. When Trim Voltage Setting is
selected, the voltage trim setpoint properties are determined by these settings: Trim Voltage, Setpoint
Min, Setpoint Max, and Adjust Rate. The Trim Voltage setting establishes the voltage trim setpoint. The
range of adjustment is defined by Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max settings that are expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. The Adjust Rate is the rate, in percent per second, which the
generator setpoint increases or decreases in response to raise/lower requests. Each regulation mode has
five pre-position setpoints. Each pre-position setpoint can be assigned to a programmable contact input
on the DGC-2020HD. When the appropriate contact input is closed, the setpoint is driven to the
corresponding pre-position value. Each pre-position function has two settings: Setpoint and Adjust Rate.
The setting range of each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the corresponding control mode
setpoint.
The Voltage Trim setpoint can be biased externally by an analog input of the DGC-2020HD, the optional
AEM-2020, or the System Manager. The System Manager, which is the DGC-2020HD in the network with
the lowest nonzero sequencing ID, can be set up to broadcast a bias signal for var, PF, or kW control.
See the Analog Inputs chapter for more information. The source of the external bias is selected by the
Remote Trim Bias setting which also permits the bias control to be disabled. Biasing is limited by the
Remote Trim Bias setting to a range, expressed as a percentage, around the active Voltage Trim
setpoint.
When voltage trim is active, the Trim Deadband setting may be used to improve system stability and/or
kvar sharing. These improvements are implemented through the comparison of the Trim Deadband
setting with the calculated voltage trim error. The voltage trim error is calculated as the difference
between the measured voltage the voltage trim setpoint divided by the machine Rated Voltage setting. A
calculated result that is less than the Trim Deadband setting is interpreted as zero error. A calculated
result that is greater than the (nonzero) Trim Deadband setting triggers stability and/or kvar sharing
improvements. The Trim Deadband setting is expressed as a percentage of rated voltage.
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current run
session. The DGC-2020HD returns to the configured Voltage Trim value when a new run session is
started or when power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD.
When the voltage trim droop enable (VOLTTRIMDROOPENABLE) logic element input is true, the setpoint
for the voltage trim controller is reduced by an amount dictated by the Droop Percent and Droop Offset
Percent settings in Equation 14-1. A Droop Percentage setting of zero (0) disables droop operation.

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = ��𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷% × � − 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂%� × 0.01
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘

Equation 14-1. Voltage Trim Droop Mode Setpoint

When operating in droop mode, the voltage trim function is operational but the setpoint is calculated using
Equation 14-1. Thus, the machine trims output voltage to a setpoint calculated by the droop equation.
This mode of operation allows reconfigurable machines that rely on voltage trim to set their output voltage
to operate in droop mode.
The BESTCOMSPlus Voltage Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-2.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-3

Figure 14-2. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings, Voltage Control

Var/PF Control
The var/PF controller is used to implement var and Power Factor control of the generator when it is
paralleled to the utility as indicated by the Parallel to Mains logic element in BESTlogicPlus. If var/PF
control is enabled, the generator breaker is closed, the generator is stable, and the Parallel to Mains logic
element is true, the var/PF controller will become active. Whenever these conditions are not true, the
var/PF controller is disabled, and the machine will operate in voltage droop.
When the Bias Control Output Type (on the Output Configuration screen) is set to analog, a PID controller
controls the var/PF bias from the DGC-2020HD to the voltage regulator. The controller adjusts the bias
output to drive the error between desired generator var/PF and measured generator var/PF to zero.
Settings are provided for proportional gain, integral gain, derivative gain, derivative filter constant, loop
gain, sync gain, and kvar parallel to mains gain of the PID controller.
The Sync Gain value is applied to the kvar error while synchronizing the group bus to the load or across a
tie breaker. When generators are synchronizing as a group the voltage and frequency of each generator
is continuously adjusted to achieve synchronization. When load sharing, the output voltage of the
generators is continuously adjusted to share the load. If load sharing and synchronization are active
simultaneously, synchronization can take longer than desired because the generators are being adjusted
to share load in reaction to the adjustments being made to synchronize. A Sync Gain setting is provided
to adjust the responsiveness of the load share controller during group synchronization. A lower Sync Gain
value causes the DGC-2020HD to focus less on load sharing adjustments and more on synchronizing
adjustments and a higher Sync Gain value causes the DGC-2020HD to focus more on load sharing
adjustments and less on synchronizing adjustments.
The Parallel to Mains Gain value is applied to kvar error while parallel to mains.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-4 9469300995

Ramp rate is defined as the rate, in percentage of machine capacity, at which the machine will ramp up
its var/PF when loading or coming online. The machine also uses this rate to unload prior to cooling
down. If a machine is the only machine online, ramping will not be in effect.
After ramping a generator's kvar output, to bring it online or offline, overshoot may occur. The likeliness of
kvar overshoot increases as the ramp rate increases. Typically, overshoot is reduced by lowering the
ramp rate to the slowest setting. If overshoot is still a problem, the Ramp Overshoot Reduction setting
can be used. A setting of 0% overshoot reduction results in no change to the amount of overshoot. A
setting of 100% provides maximum overshoot reduction. Ramp Overshoot Reduction must be tuned to
the optimal level. Too little reduction may result in overshoot while too much reduction may result in
undershoot.
The BESTCOMSPlus Var/PF Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-3.

Figure 14-3. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings, Var/PF Control

Var Control
When control is enabled and the control mode is set to Var Control (on the Var/PF Control screen), the
following settings are enabled.
The DGC-2020HD calculates an operating kvar setpoint based on the Setpoint Source setting. When the
Setpoint Source setting is set to a DGC-2020HD analog input or an AEM-2020 input, the operating kvar
setpoint is equal to the value calculated from the analog input. Parameters are available for kvar analog
max and kvar analog min. When the Setpoint Source is set to User Setting, the Setpoint setting
establishes the operating kvar setpoint. The range of adjustment is defined by Setpoint Min and Setpoint
Max settings that are expressed as a percentage of the rated generator kvar. The Adjust Rate is the rate,
in percent per second, which the generator setpoint increases or decreases in response to raise/lower
requests. Settings are provided to allow bias adjustments of the setpoint. The Analog Bias Source setting
establishes the analog input to provide the bias signal. The range of adjustment is defined by Bias Min
and Bias Max settings that are expressed as a percentage of the kvar setpoint.
Each regulation mode has five pre-position setpoints. Each pre-position setpoint can be assigned to a
programmable contact input on the DGC-2020HD. When the appropriate contact input is closed, the
setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position value. Each pre-position function has two settings:
Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the
corresponding control mode setpoint.
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current run
session. The DGC-2020HD returns to the configured kvar setpoint value when a new run session is
started or when power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD.
The BESTCOMSPlus Var Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-4.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-5

Figure 14-4. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings, Var Control

Power Factor Control

When control is enabled and the control mode is set to Power Factor Control (on the Var/PF Control
screen), the following settings are enabled.
The DGC-2020HD calculates an operating power factor setpoint based on the Setpoint Source setting.
When the Setpoint Source setting is set to a DGC-2020HD analog input or an AEM-2020 input, the
operating power factor setpoint is equal to the value calculated from the analog input. Parameters are
available for PF analog max and PF analog min. When the Setpoint Source is set to User Setting, the
Setpoint setting establishes the operating power factor setpoint. The range of adjustment is defined by
Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max settings that are expressed as a percentage of the rated generator power
factor. The Adjust Rate is the rate, in power factor per second, which the generator setpoint increases or
decreases in response to raise/lower requests. Settings are provided to allow bias adjustments of the
setpoint. The Analog Bias Source setting establishes the analog input to provide the bias signal. The
range of adjustment is defined by Bias Min and Bias Max settings that are expressed as a portion of the
power factor setpoint.
Each regulation mode has five pre-position setpoints. Each pre-position setpoint can be assigned to a
programmable contact input on the DGC-2020HD. When the appropriate contact input is closed, the
setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position value. Each pre-position function has two settings:
Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the
corresponding control mode setpoint.
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current run

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-6 9469300995

session. The DGC-2020HD returns to the configured power factor setpoint value when a new run session
is started or when power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD.
The BESTCOMSPlus Power Factor Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-5.

Figure 14-5. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings, Power Factor Control

Voltage Droop
The percent voltage droop to be used when the unit is in droop mode is determined by the droop
percentage setting. Voltage droop mode is entered any time the generator breaker is open. Voltage droop
is also the mode when the generator breaker is closed and var/PF control is disabled, or the Parallel to
Mains logic element is not true since var/PF control is not enabled until the Parallel to Mains logic element
is true. If it is desired to disable voltage droop, set the droop percentage to 0. The voltage droop gain
setting determines the gain factor applied to the voltage droop percentage to compensate for governor
differences and achieve desired droop performance. In order to test the operation of droop, the unit must
be loaded to full load and the resulting generator voltage should be compared to the desired droop. If it is
not possible to load the unit to full load, the droop test can be performed at partial load. The expected
voltage is determined by Equation 14-2.
𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − �� �∗� � − 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜� ∗ 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 100

Equation 14-2. Expected Voltage

If the actual voltage drop does not match the expected value, calculate the error by dividing the expected
drop by the actual drop. Enter the result for the Voltage Droop Gain setting on the AVR Bias Control
Settings screen.
When operating in Voltage Droop mode, the droop curve indicates operation at rated voltage when the
machine is unloaded. The generator output voltage droops by the full Droop Percentage when fully
loaded. A Droop Offset setting is provided to shift the droop curve up or down to achieve desired
Bias Control DGC-2020HD
9469300995 14-7

generator voltage when the machine is fully loaded with reactive power. For instance, with a Droop
Percentage value of 5% and a Droop Offset value of 5%, the generator will operate 5% above rated
voltage when unloaded and at rated voltage when fully loaded. To clarify, with the Droop Offset, the
Expected voltage reduction in droop can be a negative value which results in an increase in voltage in
certain ranges of machine kvar loading. The machine will still have a drooping characteristic, but the
voltage will always be higher than or equal to rated if the Droop Offset is set equal to or greater than the
Droop Percentage setting.
The BESTCOMSPlus Voltage Droop screen is illustrated in Figure 14-6.

Figure 14-6. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, AVR Bias Control Settings, Voltage Droop

Governor Bias Control Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control
Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Bias Control > Gov Bias Control
Speed biasing signals can be applied to a governor using the analog output or contact outputs of the
DGC-2020HD. Analog outputs provide a variable voltage from -10 to +10 Vdc or a variable current from 4
to 20 mAdc to the bias inputs of the governor. Contact outputs provide raise and lower commands to the
bias inputs of the governor. Use the Bias Control Output Type setting to establish the appropriate bias
control signal for your governor.
When the bias control output type is set to contact, the DGC-2020HD adjusts the generator voltage and
frequency by issuing speed correction signals to the generator governor. Correction signals are issued in
the form of DGC-2020HD output contact closures. These correction signals can be either continuous or
proportional. Proportional correction uses control pulses of varying widths and intervals. Initially, long
pulses are issued when the voltage and frequency differences are large. As the correction pulses take
effect and the voltage and frequency differences become smaller, the correction pulse widths are
proportionally decreased. Proportional correction pulses are beneficial in applications where fixed
correction pulses can result in overshooting the slip frequency and regulation offset targets.
See Contact Output Bias Control Setup in BESTlogicPlus below for instructions on setting up governor
bias control using DGC-2020HD contact outputs.
When the bias control output type is set to analog, a PID controller sends the bias signal from the DGC-
2020HD to the speed governor. The controller adjusts the bias output to drive the error between desired
generator speed and measured generator speed to zero.
See Analog Output Bias Control Setup below for instructions on setting up governor bias control using
DGC-2020HD analog outputs.
The BESTCOMSPlus Governor Output Configuration screen is illustrated in Figure 14-7.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-8 9469300995

Figure 14-7. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, Output Configuration

Speed Control
Settings are provided for proportional gain, integral gain, derivative gain, derivative filter constant, and
loop gain of the PID controller.
When the speed trim enable setting is Enabled When Gen Breaker is Closed, the generator operates at
the speed trim setpoint when the generator breaker is closed and not paralleled to the utility. When the
speed trim enable setting is Enabled Always, the generator always operates at the speed trim setpoint,
even when the generator breaker is open. This is useful in situations where it is desired to control
machine speed from an external potentiometer or raise/lower commands for manual synchronization, for
example.
If speed trimming is enabled in all generators in an islanded system, it is ensured that the system will run
at the speed trim setpoint. If it is not enabled in any units, the islanded system may deviate from the
speed trim setpoint, depending on the initial speed settings of the isochronous governors. Speed trim
should be enabled in all units or disabled in all units of an islanded system. If it is enabled in only a subset
of the units, speed trimming and load sharing may conflict, resulting in unpredictable load sharing and
system frequency.
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current run
session. The DGC-2020HD returns to the configured Speed Trim value when a new run session is started
or when power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD.
The Speed Trim Setpoint setting establishes the operating speed trim setpoint. The range of adjustment
is defined by Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max settings that are expressed as a percentage of the rated
generator frequency. The Adjust Rate is the rate, in percent per second, which the generator setpoint
increases or decreases in response to raise/lower requests.
When speed trim is active, the Speed Trim Deadband setting may be used to improve system stability
and/or kvar sharing. These improvements are implemented through the comparison of the Speed Trim
Deadband setting with the calculated speed trim error. The speed trim error is calculated as the difference
between the measured generator frequency and the speed trim setpoint divided by the machine Rated
Frequency setting. A calculated result that is less than the Speed Trim Deadband setting is interpreted as
zero error. A calculated result that is greater than the (nonzero) Speed Trim Deadband setting triggers
stability and/or kvar sharing improvements. The Speed Trim Deadband setting is expressed as a
percentage of rated frequency.
Settings are provided to allow remote bias adjustments of the setpoint. The Remote Speed Bias setting
establishes the analog input to provide the bias signal. The range of adjustment is defined by the Remote
Speed Bias (%) setting that is expressed as a percentage above and below the remote speed bias
setpoint.
Each regulation mode has five pre-position setpoints. Each pre-position setpoint can be assigned to a
programmable contact input on the DGC-2020HD. When the appropriate contact input is closed, the
setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position value. Each pre-position function has two settings:
Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the
corresponding control mode setpoint.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-9

When the speed trim droop enable (SPEEDTRIMDROOPENABLE) logic element input is true, the
setpoint for the speed trim controller is reduced by an amount dictated by the Droop Percent and Droop
Offset Percent settings in Equation 14-3. A Droop Percentage setting of zero (0) disables droop
operation.

𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = ��𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷% × � − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂%� × 0.01
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘

Equation 14-3. Speed Trim Droop Mode Setpoint

When operating in droop mode, the speed trim function is operational but the setpoint is calculated using
Equation 14-3. Thus the machine trims machine speed to a setpoint calculated by the droop equation.
This mode of operation is necessary in situations where it is desired to control machine speed from an
external potentiometer or raise/lower commands for manual synchronization, for example. This mode is
also necessary in situations where it is desired to operate the machine in droop mode with the ability to
shift the droop curve up or down to vary machine output at a given frequency using an external
potentiometer or raise/lower commands.
The BESTCOMSPlus Speed Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-8.

Figure 14-8. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, Speed Control

Speed Droop
The percent speed droop to be used when the unit is in droop mode is determined by the droop
percentage setting. Speed droop mode is entered when the generator breaker is open or when the
generator breaker is closed with kW load sharing disabled. If it is desired to disable speed droop, set the
droop percentage to 0. The value of the speed droop gain setting is applied to the speed droop
percentage to compensate for governor differences and achieve desired droop performance. In order to
test the operation of droop, the unit must be loaded to full load and the resulting generator speed should
be compared to the desired droop. If it is not possible to load the unit to full load, the droop test can be
performed at partial load. The expected speed is determined by Equation 14-4.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-10 9469300995

𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 − �� �∗� � − 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜�
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 100
∗ 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠

Equation 14-4. Expected Speed

If the actual rpm drop does not match the expected value, calculate the error by dividing the expected
drop by the actual drop, and inputting the result as the Droop Gain setting on the Governor Bias Control
Settings screen.
When operating in Speed Droop mode, the droop curve indicates operation at rated frequency when the
machine is unloaded. The generator droops by the full Droop Percentage when fully loaded. A Droop
Offset setting is provided to shift the droop curve up or down to achieve desired generator frequency
when the machine is fully loaded. For instance, with a Droop Percentage value of 5% and a Droop Offset
value of 5%, the generator will run 5% above rated frequency when unloaded and at rated frequency
when fully loaded. To clarify, with the Droop Offset, the Expected RPM reduction in droop can be a
negative value which results in an increase in RPM at certain levels of machine load. The machine will
still have a drooping characteristic, but the speed will always be higher than or equal to rated if the Droop
Offset is set equal to or greater than the Droop Percentage setting.
The BESTCOMSPlus Speed Droop screen is illustrated in Figure 14-9.

Figure 14-9. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, Speed Droop

Load Anticipation (optional)

The optional load anticipation function (style xxxxxLxxx) improves speed recovery of a diesel genset
during load application and rejection.
This feature is available in DGC-2020HD units with style xxxxxLxxx and application (firmware) version
1.02.00 or greater. To check your application (firmware) version, please refer to the Device Information
chapter.
When a load is applied, the engine speed begins to decrease and the speed governor reacts in turn by
increasing the engine speed. However, the change in engine speed due to load application is much
slower than the change in real power. The DGC-2020HD senses the real power changes in load well
before the engine speed is affected. Thus, a feed-forward signal, proportional to the real power change, is
sent to the speed governor to make throttle adjustments in advance of the engine speed actually
decreasing. This differs from conventional approaches which change the setpoint of the voltage regulator
based on a specific underfrequency curve.

Operation
Figure 14-10 illustrates the basic operation of the load anticipation function.
Max
Lead/ Governor
Washout Power Output
PE Lag Enable
Filter
Filter
Deadband Gain Bias
Min
P0076-87

Figure 14-10. Load Anticipation Function

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-11

The following paragraph describes the load anticipation function blocks illustrated in Figure 14-10.
The Washout Filter block obtains the rate of change in generator's real power (PE) and filters out values
below a user-defined level (Tla). This ensures that load anticipation provides output only when a large
change in power occurs. Phase lag caused by the governor and actuator is compensated with the Phase
Lead/Lag Filter block by user-defined levels (Tld, Tlg). The Power Deadband block obtains the
generator’s real power level and filters out values below a user-defined level. This ensures that load
anticipation provides output only when a large load is applied. Load anticipation output is inhibited by the
Enable block when any enable condition is not met. See Enabling Load Anticipation below. The Output
Gain block applies the user-defined output gain (Kla) to the load anticipation output. Load anticipation
output is trimmed to be within the minimum and maximum limits by the Min/Max block. Finally, load
anticipation output is added to the governor bias output level which is sent to the ECU as an analog bias
signal or as a speed request over CAN Bus.

Enabling Load Anticipation

Load anticipation is enabled when all of the following conditions are true:
• Load Anticipation and Load Control are both enabled on the Governor Bias Control Settings screen.
o Settings > Bias Control Settings > Governor Bias Control Settings
• Local Generator breaker is closed
• Local Generator is not parallel to mains
• Application (firmware) version is 1.02.00 or greater
• Load Anticipate Inhibit BESTlogicPlus logic element is not receiving a true input.
The BESTlogic™Plus LDANTICIPATEINHIBIT logic element (Figure 14-11) disables load anticipation
when held true.

Figure 14-11. Load Anticipate Inhibit Logic Element

Tuning Parameters
For proper operation, load anticipation must be tuned to each system using the following parameters.
These parameters are briefly described below and are found on the Load Anticipation settings screen
(Figure 14-12). Refer to the Tuning PID Settings chapter for a load anticipation tuning procedure.
Tla Washout Filter Constant: Rate of change in real power is obtained with the washout filter (A
washout filter only responds to changes, otherwise it is zero.)
Tld Lead Filter Constant: Phase lag caused by the governor and actuator is compensated with the
phase lead filter
Tlg Lag Filter Constant: Phase lead caused by the governor and actuator is compensated with the
phase lag filter
Kla Gain: Output gain of load anticipation function. Positive output results in higher engine speed,
negative results in lower engine speed
Max Limit: Maximum output gain of load anticipation function
Min Limit: Minimum output gain of load anticipation function
Power Deadband: Minimum change in real power which will activate load anticipation

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-12 9469300995

Figure 14-12. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, Load Anticipation

Load Control Settings

KW control is accomplished with a PID controller that controls the speed bias signal from the
DGC-2020HD to the speed governor. The controller adjusts the bias output to drive the error between
desired kW generation and measured kW generation to zero. Settings are provided for proportional gain,
integral gain, derivative gain, derivative filter constant, loop gain, Sync Gain and Parallel to Mains Gain of
the PID controller.
The Sync Gain value is applied to kW error while synchronizing the group bus to the load or across a tie
breaker. When generators are synchronizing as a group the voltage and frequency of each generator is
continuously adjusted to achieve synchronization. When load sharing, the output voltage of the
generators is continuously adjusted to share the load. If load sharing and synchronization are active
simultaneously, synchronization can take longer than desired because the generators are being adjusted
to share load in reaction to the adjustments being made to synchronize. A Sync Gain setting is provided
to adjust the responsiveness of the load share controller during group synchronization. A lower Sync Gain
value causes the DGC-2020HD to focus less on load sharing adjustments and more on synchronizing
adjustments and a higher Sync Gain value causes the DGC-2020HD to focus more on load sharing
adjustments and less on synchronizing adjustments.
After ramping a generator's kW output, to bring it online or offline, overshoot may occur. The likeliness of
kW overshoot increases as the ramp rate increases. Typically, overshoot is reduced by lowering the ramp
rate to the slowest possible setting. If overshoot is still a problem, the Ramp Overshoot Reduction setting
can be used. A setting of 0% overshoot reduction results in no change to the amount of overshoot. A
setting of 100% provides maximum overshoot reduction. Ramp Overshoot Reduction must be tuned to
the optimal level. Too little reduction may result in overshoot while too much reduction may result in
undershoot.
The BESTCOMSPlus KW Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-13.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-13

Figure 14-13. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, KW Control

KW Islanded Mode
Manual Operating Mode provides a constant output at the base load level or analog input level. Automatic
Operating Mode enables kW load sharing.
KW sharing data can be transmitted via Ethernet or analog load share lines. The communication method
is determined by the Load Share Interface setting.
When the Base Load Level Source is configured for an analog input, the operating kW controller setpoint
is calculated based on the specific analog input. Parameters are available for baseload analog max and
baseload analog min.
When User Setting is selected for the Base Load Level Source, the Base Load Level setting determines
the percent of machine capacity at which the kW controller will regulate if the generator is paralleled to
the utility. If paralleled to the utility, the Parallel to Mains logic element in BESTlogicPlus must be driven
by logic or a contact input. If operating parallel to the utility and the Parallel to Mains logic element is not
implemented, the DGC-2020HD remains in kW load share and may move toward operation at either
100% of capacity or 0% of capacity possibly resulting in machine shutdown or damage to the machine or
system.
The Base Load Level range of adjustment is defined by Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max settings that are
expressed as a percentage of the rated generator kW. The Adjust Rate is the rate, in percent per second,
which the generator setpoint increases or decreases in response to raise/lower requests. Settings are
provided to allow bias adjustments of the setpoint. The Analog Bias Source setting establishes the analog
input to provide the bias signal. The range of adjustment is defined by Bias Min and Bias Max settings
that are expressed as a percentage of the kW setpoint.
Each regulation mode has five pre-position setpoints. Each pre-position setpoint can be assigned to a
programmable contact input on the DGC-2020HD. When the appropriate contact input is closed, the
setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position value. Each pre-position function has two settings:

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-14 9469300995

Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the
corresponding control mode setpoint.
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current run
session. The DGC-2020HD returns to the configured Base Load Level setting value when a new run
session is started or when power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD.
The BESTCOMSPlus KW Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-14.

Figure 14-14. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, Islanded Mode

Mains Parallel Mode

Manual Operating Mode provides a constant output at the base load level or analog input level. Automatic
Operating Mode enables peak shaving or import/export. Base load, import/export, and peak shaving are
mains power control modes and are described under the Mains Power Controller heading below.
When the Base Load Level Source is configured for an analog input, the operating kW controller setpoint
is calculated based on the specific analog input. Parameters are available for baseload analog max and
baseload analog min.
When User Setting is selected for the Base Load Level Source, the Base Load Level setting determines
the percent of machine capacity at which the kW controller will regulate if the generator is paralleled to
the utility. If paralleled to the utility, the Parallel to Mains logic element in BESTlogicPlus must be driven
by logic or a contact input. If operating parallel to the utility and the Parallel to Mains logic element is not
implemented, the DGC-2020HD remains in kW load share and may move toward operation at either
100% of capacity or 0% of capacity resulting in damage to the machine or system.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-15

The Base Load Level range of adjustment is defined by Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max settings that are
expressed as a percentage of the rated generator kW. The Adjust Rate is the rate, in percent per second,
which the generator setpoint increases or decreases in response to raise/lower requests. Settings are
provided to allow bias adjustments of the setpoint. The Analog Bias Source setting establishes the analog
input to provide the bias signal. The range of adjustment is defined by Bias Min and Bias Max settings
that are expressed as a percentage of the kW setpoint.
Each regulation mode has five pre-position setpoints. Each pre-position setpoint can be assigned to a
programmable contact input on the DGC-2020HD. When the appropriate contact input is closed, the
setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position value. Each pre-position function has two settings:
Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the
corresponding control mode setpoint.
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current run
session. The DGC-2020HD returns to the configured Base Load Level setting value when a new run
session is started or when power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD.
The BESTCOMSPlus KW Control screen is illustrated in Figure 14-15.

Figure 14-15. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings, Mains Parallel Mode

Contact Output Bias Control Setup in BESTlogic™Plus

The following steps describe how to configure DGC-2020HD contact outputs to control the voltage
regulator and/or governor:

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-16 9469300995

1. Ensure proper wiring connections are made between the DGC-2020HD and the AVR and/or
governor. In this example, contact outputs 7 through 10 are being used, however any available
contact outputs can be used.
a. Connect terminal 23 (OUT 7) to the AVR raise input.
b. Connect terminal 24 (OUT 8) to the AVR lower input.
c. Connect terminal 25 (OUT 9) to the governor raise input.
d. Connect terminal 26 (COM 7, 8, 9) to the AVR and governor common inputs.
e. Connect terminal 27 (OUT 10) to the governor lower input.
f. Connect terminal 30 (COM 10, 11, 12) to the governor common input.
Refer to the Terminals and Connectors and Typical Applications chapters in the Installation manual
for more information.
2. In BESTCOMSPlus, open the Contact Outputs screen in the Settings Explorer, under Programmable
Outputs. Label Output #7 as "AVR Raise", Output #8 as "AVR Lower", Output #9 as "GOV Raise",
and Output #10 as "GOV Lower". See Figure 14-16.

Figure 14-16. Settings Explorer, Programmable Outputs, Contact Outputs

3. In BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic, click on the Elements tab and drag the AVR and GOVR
elements into the main logic screen. See Figure 14-17.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-17

Figure 14-17. Contact Output Bias Control Setup, Step 3.

4. Click on the I/O tab and drag the outputs assigned in step 1 into the main logic screen and connect
them to the appropriate outputs of the AVR and GOVR blocks. See Figure 14-18.
5. Upload settings and logic to the DGC-2020HD.

Figure 14-18. Contact Output Bias Control Setup, Step 4.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-18 9469300995

Analog Output Bias Control Setup

The following procedures provide instructions for setting up AVR bias control and governor bias control
using analog outputs on the DGC-2020HD.

Analog AVR Bias Control Setup

1. Ensure proper wiring connections are made between the DGC-2020HD and the AVR. Use terminals
AVR+ (64) and AVR- (65). Refer to the Terminals and Connectors and Typical Applications chapters
in the Installation manual for more information.
2. In BESTCOMSPlus, open the AVR Output screen in the Settings Explorer, under Multigen
Management. Select the bias output parameters and levels as required by the voltage regulator. See
Figure 14-19.
a. Output Type - Select whether the AVR bias signal is Voltage or Current.
b. Response - Select Increasing or Decreasing. Increasing should be selected if an increase in
the output parameter results in an increase of generator output voltage. Decreasing should
be selected if an increase in the output parameter results in a decrease of generator output
voltage.
c. Min Output Current (mA) and Max Output Current (mA) - If the Output Type is Current, these
parameters must be configured. Set the minimum and maximum current to a range equal to
the current bias input range for the voltage regulator. The range on these parameters is 4 mA
to 20 mA.
d. Min Output Voltage (V) and Max Output Voltage (V) - If the Output Type is Voltage, these
parameters must be configured. Set the minimum and maximum voltage to a range equal to
the voltage bias input range for the voltage regulator. The range on these parameters is
−10 V to +10 V.
3. Upload settings to the DGC-2020HD.

Figure 14-19. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, AVR Output

Analog Governor Bias Control Setup

1. Ensure proper wiring connections are made between the DGC-2020HD and the governor. Use
terminals GOV+ (66) and GOV- (67). Refer to the Terminals and Connectors and Typical Applications
chapters in the Installation manual for more information.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-19

2. In BESTCOMSPlus, open the Governor Output screen in the Settings Explorer, under Multigen
Management. Select the bias output parameters and levels as required by the governor. See Figure
14-20.
a. Output Type - Select whether the governor bias signal is Voltage or Current.
b. Response - Select Increasing or Decreasing. Increasing should be selected if an increase in
the output parameter results in an increase in generator speed. Decreasing should be
selected if an increase in the output parameter results in a decrease in generator speed.
c. Min Output Current (mA) and Max Output Current (mA) - If the Output Type is Current, these
parameters must be configured. Set the minimum and maximum current to a range equal to
the current bias input range for the governor. The range on these parameters is 4 mA to
20 mA.
d. Min Output Voltage (V) and Max Output Voltage (V) - If the Output Type is Voltage, these
parameters must be configured. Set the minimum and maximum voltage to a range equal to
the voltage bias input range for the governor. The range on these parameters is −10 V to +10
V.
3. Upload settings to the DGC-2020HD.

Figure 14-20. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Governor Output

Mains Power Controller

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control
Settings
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Bias Control > Gov Bias Control
BESTCOMSPlus Mains Power Controller settings are illustrated in Figure 14-22.
The DGC-2020HD controls mains power in one of three modes: Base Load, Import/Export, and Peak
Shave. Base Load mode is typically used in applications where the controlled generators provide
continuous power to the load. Import/Export mode is typically used in applications where the amount of
real power imported from or exported to the mains must remain within certain limits. Peak Shaving mode
is typically used, during peak load hours, to transfer some of the load from the mains to the generators.
This is especially effective when used in conjunction with generators providing base load.
In each of these modes, the generators are driven to a common setpoint. The DGC-2020HD in the group
which controls the breaker currently tied to a mains-powered bus is chosen to broadcast the setpoint to all
participating generators. This DGC-2020HD is referred to as the Mains Power Controller.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-20 9469300995

A mains power controller operates in one of three modes: Base Load, Import/Export, or Peak Shave. In
all modes, each generator-controlling DGC-2020HD must have Mains Parallel kW Control set to
Automatic (Governor Bias Control screen) to accept the operating setpoint from the mains power
controller. Mains power control modes control real power output from generators. Reactive power output
from each individual generator is controlled by the var/PF control mode. Each mains power control mode
is controlled through logic elements in BESTlogicPlus. The Base Load Setpoint, Import/Export Setpoint,
and Peak Shave Setpoint logic elements provide five pre-position setpoints and discrete raise and lower
inputs. Active operating mode can be overridden with the Mains Power Control logic element. See the
BESTlogicPlus chapter for details.
If the mains power controller operating mode changes, either by changing the setting or through
programmable logic, each generator-controlling DGC-2020HD will ramp to the setpoint of the new
operating mode. Each generator-controllingDGC-2020HD will ramp at the programmed ramp rate of the
individual generator-controlling DGC-2020HD. The ramp rates of each generator-controlling
DGC-2020HD may be different.

Base Load Control Mode

In this mode, all paralleled generators are driven to the same base load setpoint. The setpoint is
expressed as a percentage of each machine's rated capacity. The total real power output depends on the
number of generators online and the base load setpoint. The setpoint is adjusted on the DGC-2020HD
designated as the mains power controller and all paralleled generators are driven to that setpoint.
Generators must be manually started and stopped in this mode. Each generator breaker and group
breaker must be closed manually.

Base Load Control Mode Settings

Auto Save
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current
operating session. These adjustments are discarded the next time the power is cycled to the
DGC-2020HD.

Setpoint
Participating generators run at this percentage of their individual rated capacities.

Setpoint Min and Max

Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max are the upper and lower setpoint adjustment limits.

Analog Bias Source

This setting establishes the analog input which provides setpoint bias signals.

Bias Min and Max

Bias Min and Max specify the range over which the setpoint can be biased from an analog input signal.
Bias Min establishes the lower limit of deviation from the setpoint for the lowest analog input signal. Bias
Max establishes the upper limit of deviation from the setpoint for the highest analog input signal. For
example, a 4 to 20 mA current transducer provides the signal to the analog input. The Setpoint is set to
50%. Bias Min is set to -30% and Bias Max is set to +30%. When the analog signal is 4 mA, the setpoint
drops from 50% of rated machine capacity to 20% (Bias Min). When the analog signal is 20 mA, the
setpoint increases from 50% of rated machine capacity to 80% (Bias Max).

Adjust Rate
This is the rate, in percent per second, which the generator setpoint increases or decreases in response
to raise/lower requests from the Base Load Setpoint logic element in BESTlogicPlus.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-21

Pre-position
Five pre-positions are provided to override the setpoint. These are activated through BESTlogicPlus.
When the appropriate contact input is closed, the setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position
value. Each pre-position function has two settings: Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each
pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the corresponding control mode setpoint. See the Base Load
Setpoint logic element in the BESTlogicPlus chapter for details.

Import/Export Control Mode

This mode adjusts the base load setpoint of all paralleled generators to achieve a constant real power
import or export level at the mains breaker.
Initially, at least one generator must be manually started and paralleled to the mains. Then, the Demand
Start/Stop function brings additional generators online and offline as the setpoint or system load changes.
A positive setpoint represents a level of power imported from the mains. A negative setpoint represents a
level of power exported to the mains. The metered real power level displays a positive or negative value
which matches the polarity of the setpoint. It is crucial that the sensing CTs are wired to follow this
convention.

Caution
Sensing CTs must be wired to match the following conventions.
Positive power is imported from the mains. Negative power is exported
to the mains.

Import power remains constant as long as the load is greater than the import setpoint while not exceeding
full generation capacity. If the load is less than the import power setpoint, the import power level
decreases to meet what is required by the load. If the load exceeds full generation capacity, the import
power level increases as the generators approach full capacity.
Export power remains constant as long as the load plus export power level is within full generation
capacity. If the load plus the export power level exceeds full generation capacity, the export power
decreases while still fully supporting the load. If the load alone exceeds generation capacity, power
begins to be imported.

Import/Export Control Mode Settings

Auto Save
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current
operating session. These adjustments are discarded the next time the power is cycled to the
DGC-2020HD.

Setpoint
Participating generators import or export this amount of kW.

Setpoint Min and Max

Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max are the upper and lower setpoint adjustment limits.

Analog Bias Source

This setting establishes the analog input which provides setpoint bias signals.

Bias Min and Max

Bias Min and Max specify the range over which the setpoint can be biased from an analog input signal.
Bias Min establishes the lower limit of deviation from the setpoint for the lowest analog input signal. Bias
DGC-2020HD Bias Control
14-22 9469300995

Max establishes the upper limit of deviation from the setpoint for the highest analog input signal. For
example, a 4 to 20 mA current transducer provides the signal to the analog input. The Setpoint is set to
500 kW. Bias Min is set to -200 kW and Bias Max is set to +200 kW. When the analog signal is 4 mA, the
setpoint drops from 500 kW to 300 kW (Bias Min). When the analog signal is 20 mA, the setpoint
increases from 500 kW to 700 kW (Bias Max).

Adjust Rate
This is the rate, in percent per second, which the generator setpoint increases or decreases in response
to raise/lower requests from the Import/Export Setpoint logic element in BESTlogicPlus.

Pre-position
Five pre-positions are provided to override the setpoint. These are activated through BESTlogicPlus.
When the appropriate contact input is closed, the setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position
value. Each pre-position function has two settings: Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each
pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the corresponding control mode setpoint. See the Import/Export
Setpoint logic element in the BESTlogicPlus chapter for details.

Peak Shave Control Mode

In peak shave control mode, the operating base load level of all paralleled generators is adjusted to limit
the peak imported power from mains. Once the power imported from mains reaches a predetermined
level, generators are automatically started to pick up the load. The Demand Start/Stop function brings
additional generators online and offline as the system load changes.
Figure 14-21 illustrates the generator response if system load were ramped from no load to 1,500 kW and
back down to no load. The generators are shown to take on and shed load immediately. In actual
operation, generator loading and unloading will occur.

Setpoint: 1,000 kW
Start Level: 900 kW
1600 End Level: 700 kW
1500 Minimum Load: 50 kW
1400 System Load
1300 Mains Import
1200 Generator Load
1100 Setpoint
Start Level
Real Power (kW)

1000
900
800 End Level
700
600
500 Minimum
400 Load Generator
300 Generator Stop
200 Start
100
0 P0076-72
Time
Figure 14-21. Generator Response in Peak Shave Control Mode
Peak shave control only responds to changes in load. Although the mains import power is depicted as a
flat peak in Figure 14-21, the mains import power may briefly exceed the setpoint when the system load
increases in reality. If strict power import restrictions are in place, set the setpoint low enough to allow for
large load swings.

Demand Start/Stop Function in Group Start Mode

In Single Generator mode, the generator is stopped when the system load falls below the end level.
When group start mode is used, a group stop request is issued to the generators that were started by the
peak shave function when the system load falls below the end level.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-23

Peak Shave Control Mode Settings

Minimum Load
This value is the minimum amount of kW that the generators should provide. This is used to prevent the
generators from being too lightly loaded.

Start Level
When system load exceeds this level, participating generators are started after the Start Time Delay
expires.

End Level
When system load drops below this level, participating generators are stopped after the End Time Delay
expires.

Start Mode
This setting provides selections for Single Generator and Group Start. If Single Generator is selected, the
DGC-2020HD sensing mains power starts the local generator to perform peak shaving even if there are
other generators in the group. With Group Start selected, generators in a group are started as needed.
When a remote tie breaker controller which has control over a mains breaker is running in peak shave
control mode, group start mode must be selected.

Open Group Breaker on Stop

This setting is only available when Start Mode is set to Group Start. The group breaker is automatically
closed when peak shaving starts. This setting specifies whether the group breaker is opened or left
closed when peak shaving ends.

Auto Save
When the Auto Save setting is enabled, the DGC-2020HD automatically saves the active externally-
driven raise/lower and pre-position setpoints 30 seconds after a change in value. The saved setpoint is
retained even after power is cycled to the DGC-2020HD. When Auto Save is disabled, adjustments to
setpoints by raise/lower and pre-position commands are retained only for the duration of the current
operating session. These adjustments are discarded the next time the power is cycled to the
DGC-2020HD.

Setpoint
This value is the maximum amount of kW to be imported from mains.

Setpoint Min and Max

Setpoint Min and Setpoint Max are the upper and lower setpoint adjustment limits.

Analog Bias Source

This setting establishes the analog input which provides setpoint bias signals.

Bias Min and Max

Bias Min and Max specify the range over which the setpoint can be biased from an analog input signal.
Bias Min establishes the lower limit of deviation from the setpoint for the lowest analog input signal. Bias
Max establishes the upper limit of deviation from the setpoint for the highest analog input signal. For
example, a 4 to 20 mA current transducer provides the signal to the analog input. The Setpoint is set to
500 kW. Bias Min is set to -200 kW and Bias Max is set to +200 kW. When the analog signal is 4 mA, the
setpoint drops from 500 kW to 300 kW (Bias Min). When the analog signal is 20 mA, the setpoint
increases from 500 kW to 700 kW (Bias Max).

Adjust Rate
This is the rate, in percent per second, which the generator setpoint increases or decreases in response
to raise/lower requests from the Peak Shave Setpoint logic element in BESTlogicPlus.

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-24 9469300995

Pre-position
Five pre-positions are provided to override the setpoint. These are activated through BESTlogicPlus.
When the appropriate contact input is closed, the setpoint is driven to the corresponding pre-position
value. Each pre-position function has two settings: Setpoint and Adjust Rate. The setting range of each
pre-position setpoint is identical to that of the corresponding control mode setpoint. See the Peak Shave
Setpoint logic element in the BESTlogicPlus chapter for details.

Mains Power Controller Settings

Mode
This setting allows selection of mains power control mode: Base Load, Import/Export, or Peak Shave.

Power Filter Constant

This is the time constant of the low-pass filter applied to mains power. A value of 0 represents no filter
and a value of 100 represents a heavy filter.

Mains Power Control with Tie Breakers and Multiple Mains Tie Systems
The use of peak shaving and import/export control modes are not limited to the predefined system
breaker configurations. These control modes are supported in systems with custom system breaker
configurations including tie breakers and multiple mains ties.
If there are multiple mains power controllers in the system, controlling multiple mains ties, the mains
power control settings must be configured identically on each controller. In situations where there are
multiple tie breakers or multiple mains ties, it is possible for more than one DGC-2020HD to be eligible for
Mains Power Control. When there is more than one eligible Mains Power Controller, meaning that there is
more than one breaker which is tied directly to a mains-powered bus, any one of them could become the
DGC-2020HD which broadcasts the setpoint. However, this designation is not permanent. Each of the
eligible Mains Power Controllers must have identical Mains Power Control settings. Without identical
settings, if the Mains Power Control setpoint broadcast by one DGC-2020HD is different when the control
is granted to another eligible DGC-2020HD, system behavior could become unstable.
Each mains power controller sums the total imported power from all connected mains power controllers
when calculating system load. When peak shaving, for example, the peak import is limited based on the
total import power from all connected mains.
If system breaker configuration is not known, peak shaving group starts are requested. However, no local
breaker close requests are made to parallel the generators to mains. External PLC logic must control
breaker closures paralleling to mains.

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 14-25

Figure 14-22. Settings Explorer, Bias Control Settings, Mains Power Controller Settings

DGC-2020HD Bias Control

14-26 9469300995

Bias Control DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-1

15 • Multiple Generator Management

Multiple generator management settings consist of settings for AVR output, governor output, load share
output, demand start/stop, generator sequencing, network configuration, load shedding, group start, and
group segment.

AVR Output
The AVR output of the DGC-2020HD is used to change the voltage setpoint of the generator. If the
response is set for increasing, an increased bias will raise the voltage. If the response is set for
decreasing, an increased bias will lower the voltage. Settings are provided for minimum output current,
maximum output current, minimum output voltage, and maximum output voltage.
The BESTCOMSPlus® AVR Output screen is illustrated in Figure 15-1.

Figure 15-1. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, AVR Output

∗ See Parameter Selection, below.

Governor Output
The governor output of the DGC-2020HD is used to change the speed setpoint of the generator. If the
response is set for increasing, an increased bias will increase the speed. If the response is set for
decreasing, an increased bias will decrease the speed. Settings are provided for minimum output current,
maximum output current, minimum output voltage, and maximum output voltage.
The BESTCOMSPlus Governor Output screen is illustrated in Figure 15-2.

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-2 9469300995

Figure 15-2. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Governor Output

∗ See Parameter Selection, below.

Load Share Output

The DGC-2020HD uses the measured load share output to calculate per unitized average load level, and
uses that as the setpoint for its kW controller. Settings are provided for maximum voltage and minimum
voltage.
The BESTCOMSPlus Load Share Output screen is illustrated in Figure 15-3.

Figure 15-3. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Load Share Output

Parameter Selection
When it is not necessary for the DGC-2020HD to communicate with the AVR or GOV, these outputs may
be utilized for other purposes. Selectable parameters are listed in the Configurable Protection chapter.
Param Min corresponds to the minimum output voltage or current setting. Param Max corresponds to the
maximum output voltage or current setting.

Demand Start/Stop
The demand start/stop function operates in one of two modes: Per Unit Load or Spinning Reserve. When
Per Unit Load mode is selected, the DGC-2020HD issues start and stop requests based on per unitized

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-3

system load. When Spinning Reserve mode is selected, the DGC-2020HD provides extra generating
capacity by starting an additional generator that is already connected to the system.
The primary function of Demand Start/Stop is to provide start and stop request information to the
sequencing handler. Generator sequencing must be enabled in order for Demand Start/Stop to function. If
system load is above a set level and the corresponding start level timeout has been exceeded, a
corresponding start request is issued. If system load is below the delayed stop level and the stop timeout
has been exceeded, a stop request is issued.

Spinning Reserve
The spinning reserve function is used in conjunction with generator sequencing to run the number of
generators necessary to power the existing load plus an additional power swing amount.
For example, a power station normally has a 2,300 W load throughout the day, with an occasional 500 W
power swing. Without spinning reserve, the DGC-2020HD starts only the number of generators needed to
power the 2,300 W load. When the additional 500 W load is applied, another generator is started and
when the additional load is removed, this same generator is shut down.
With a spinning reserve, the user can adjust a setting to account for the power swing. The reserve load is
added to the actual load to find the adjusted load. This adjusted load is per-unitized to determine whether
a generator needs to be started or stopped. To prevent constant starting and stopping, a hysteresis
setting is also provided. There are two reserve levels, one for normal operation, and a second to start a
unit more quickly when there is less reserve.
The BESTCOMSPlus Demand Start/Stop screen is illustrated in Figure 15-4.

Figure 15-4. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Demand Start/Stop

Generator Sequencing
Enabling sequencing on a networked group of load share units allows these units to manage load by
starting and stopping appropriate units based on a factor of load demand and available capacity. The
mode of operation is used to determine the order in which each generator in a group will contribute to the

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-4 9469300995

systems power production upon a demand start/stop request. The maximum start time setting defines the
time to wait after a start request before demand start/stop can request the next priority unit to start. The
maximum stop time defines the time to wait after a demand start/stop request before the next unit
responds to a demand start/stop request.

Caution
For generator sequencing to function properly, the Load Control
Enable setting must first be enabled. This setting is found on the
Governor Bias Control Settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus or through
the front panel interface.

By default, units first check to see if a consistent mode is present on the currently networked controllers. If
a consistent mode is found, that mode is adopted. If a consistent mode is not found, the unit enters a
mode mismatch state. If a mode mismatch occurs, verify that all machines on the network are configured
for the same generator sequencing mode.
Each DGC-2020HD maintains its own start/stop status with respect to sequencing. When there is a
change to generator sequencing mode on any one unit, this change propagates to all connected units
that are not in the disabled mode. All units on the network are notified of this mode change. A unit is
available for sequencing if it is in auto mode and its sequencing mode is any other than disabled.
If two or more units have the same sorting order parameter, the sequencing ID will be used to determine
which unit has priority. For example, if the sequencing mode is set for largest size first and both are
100-kW machines, the unit with the lower sequencing ID is given priority. In the event that both units have
the same sequencing ID, the unit with the lower unit ID (based on the Mac address) is given priority.
If a unit fails to sequence on, the next generator in the sequence will be requested. The generator that
previously failed will be requested again in the next sequence cycle.
The last machine can be shut down if there is no load on the system by enabling Allow Last Unit
Shutdown.
The BESTCOMSPlus Generator Sequencing screen is illustrated in Figure 15-5.

Figure 15-5. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Generator Sequencing

The available sequencing modes are defined in the following paragraphs.

Disabled
This is the only mode that can coexist with a different mode on a networked system. A unit configured as
disabled does not participate in sequenced starting and stopping and does not respond to demand
start/stop requests.

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-5

Staggered Service Time

If this mode is selected, units seek to sort the start priority of all non-disabled networked units in
ascending order of service hours remaining. In this configuration, a network of units will respond to a
demand start request by starting the unit with the least number of service hours remaining first. If a unit is
down to zero service hours remaining, it is moved to the lowest start priority position. In the event that two
or more units have matching service hours remaining, the unit with the lowest cumulative engine run
hours is assigned highest start priority. Units in Auto Run mode with the highest number of service hours
remaining respond to demand stop requests first. The sequencing order is re-assessed every 24 hours in
a system that is running for long periods of time.

Balanced Engine Hours

If this mode is selected, units seek to sort the start priority of all non-disabled networked units in
ascending order of cumulative engine run hours. In this configuration, a network of units will respond to a
demand start request by starting the unit with the least number of cumulative engine run hours first. The
sequencing order is re-assessed every 24 hours in a system that is running for long periods of time.

Balanced Service Time

In this mode, units seek to sort the start priority of all non-disabled networked units in descending order of
service hours remaining. In this configuration, a network of units will respond to a demand start request
by starting the unit with the greatest number of service hours remaining first. In the event that two or more
units have matching service hours remaining, the unit with the lowest cumulative engine run hours is
assigned highest start priority. Units in Auto Run mode with the lowest number of service hours remaining
respond to demand stop requests first. The sequencing order is re-assessed every 24 hours in a system
that is running for long periods of time.

Largest Size First

Units seek to sort the start priority of all non-disabled networked units in descending order of real load
capacity. In this configuration, a network of units will respond to a demand start request by starting the
unit with the largest load capacity first. In the event that two or more units have matching capacities, the
unit with the lowest sequencing ID is assigned highest start priority. The stopping order is the reverse of
the starting order.

Smallest Size First

Starting priority of all non-disabled networked units is sorted in ascending order of real load capacity. In
this configuration, a network of units responds to a demand start request by starting the unit with the
smallest load capacity first. In the event that two or more units have matching capacities, the unit with the
lowest sequencing ID is assigned highest start priority. The stopping order is the reverse of the starting
order.

Smallest Unit ID
Units seek to sort the start priority of all non-disabled networked units in ascending order according to the
sequencing ID. In this configuration, a network of units will respond to a demand start request by starting
the unit with the smallest sequencing ID. Units must have unique sequencing IDs to be part of a network.
The stopping order is the reverse of the starting order.

Network Configuration
The sequencing ID of the unit being programmed and the sequencing IDs of all other units on a
networked system should be entered in the expected sequence ID table. If the state of any unit changes
to offline and the ID Missing pre-alarm is enabled on the Pre-Alarms settings screen, an ID Missing pre-
alarm appears on the front panel and BESTCOMSPlus metering screen. If an expected sequence ID is
detected on two or more units and the ID Repeat pre-alarm is enabled on the Pre-Alarms settings screen,
an ID Repeat pre-alarm appears on the front panel and the BESTCOMSPlus metering screen.
The BESTCOMSPlus Network Configuration screen is illustrated in Figure 15-6.
DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management
15-6 9469300995

Figure 15-6. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Network Configuration

Load Shedding
The Load Shed function provides a way to manage up to 64 loads. Loads can be shed from the system,
in lowest to highest priority order, with logic commands. Loads can be added back to the system
automatically in priority order (reverse of shedding order) when sufficient online generation capacity
becomes available.

Adding Loads
As available generators are brought online, the online kW capacity increases. When the online kW
capacity becomes greater than the sum of a load priority level's Load kW value, the Add Reserve value,
and any enabled Add Reserve Bias values for the duration of the Add Delay, the corresponding logic
input (Figure 15-7) becomes true. The true input can be linked to an output which can in turn close the
breaker to the corresponding load, thus adding it to the system. Loads with lower load priority numbers
are added first, starting at one (1). A load priority with a number of zero (0) is disabled and excluded from
load adding/shedding functions. Up to 16 Add Reserve Bias values can be added cumulatively to the
default Add Reserve value by enabling the corresponding load shed bias enable
(LDSHEDBIASENABLE1-16) logic elements.

Figure 15-7. Priority 1 Load Enabled Logic Input

Figure 15-8. Load Shed Bias Enable 1 Logic Element

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-7

Shedding Loads
When the Shed Load input of the load shed (LOADSHED) logic element is true, the loads with higher load
priority numbers are shed first and their corresponding logic inputs (Figure 15-7) become false. A load
priority with a number of zero (0) is disabled and excluded from load adding/shedding functions. The first
load is immediately shed and subsequent loads are shed after the duration of the Shed Delay. Loads are
shed one at a time and the Shed Delay must elapse between iterations. The same process is followed
when the Shed Load Fast input of the load shed (LOADSHED) logic element is true, except the Shed
Fast Delay is used instead.
The BESTCOMSPlus Load Shedding screen is illustrated in Figure 15-9.

Figure 15-9. Settings Explorer, Multigen Management, Load Shedding

Group Start Settings

A group start request starts multiple generators simultaneously within a group. The subset of generators
chosen to start is determined by the start request type, demand level, and intended operating mode
(islanded vs. mains parallel). A group start request also uses the generator sequencing and demand
start/stop settings to determine the generator starting priority order. The generator group is defined by
generators that share the same Generator Group Number setting value. Multiple generator groups can
exist in the same system and each will respond only to start requests from within the same group.

Note
In order for a generator to respond to Group Start requests, the
DGC-2020HD must be in AUTO mode, the System Type must be
configured as Segmented Bus System, and Sequencing and Demand
Start/Stop must both be enabled.

There are four types of group start requests: Mains Fail, Load Takeover, Peak Shave, and Logic. The
Mains Fail, Load Takeover, and Peak Shave requests have a corresponding start mode setting in each
genset controller. The Logic start mode depends on the logic input used. The demand level source varies

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-8 9469300995

based on the group start request. This is either the block load setting or an internally calculated demand
level.
Mains Fail, Load Takeover, and Peak Shave have independent group start mode settings in each genset
controller. This allows a different subset of generators to be started for each operating mode. These
settings must be identical in each genset controller in the group to operate as intended.

Start One
When Start One is selected, the highest priority generator for the intended system type (islanded or mains
parallel) is started. Additional generators may be started by the Demand Start/Stop function.

Start All
When Start All is selected, all generators enabled for sequencing for the intended system type are
started.

Start Demand Based

When Start Demand Based is selected, only enough generators are started to pick up the expected load
level. The started generators are chosen based on expected demand level and sequencing priority.

Figure 15-10. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Settings

Group Segment Settings

Group segment settings establish generator group number, group segment number, expected number of
tie breakers in the system, and all breakers that are critical to the local DGC-2020HD.
These settings differ depending on the detected or selected system breaker configuration. When a
configuration contains a connection to an arbitrary segmented system, additional settings are made
available to allow the DGC-2020HD to properly map the entire system. Group Segment settings are
described in the following paragraphs.

Settings for All System Breaker Configurations

Figure 15-11 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Group Segment Settings screen when the system breaker
configuration is without a segmented system.

System Breaker Configuration Detection

Enabling this setting allows the DGC-2020HD to automatically detect the system breaker configuration.
The detected system breaker configuration is displayed on the BESTCOMSPlus Control Panel screen.
If the detected breaker configuration does not match one of the predefined system breaker configurations
or if this setting is disabled, the user-selected system breaker configuration is used.
For details on the system breaker configuration setting, refer to the Breaker Management chapter.

Generator Group Number

A generator group comprises all of the components controlled by a DGC-2020HD. This includes
generators, buses, and breakers.

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-9

This number assigns the DGC-2020HD and all of its associated system components to a generator
group.
This setting is not available to DGC-2020HDs configured for tie breaker control.

Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers

Input the number of all DGC-2020HDs configured as tie breaker controllers in the same network. This
allows the DGC-2020HD to detect when a tie breaker controller is available or offline. If an expected tie
breaker is not detected, the Missing System Component pre-alarm is annunciated.

Critical Breakers
These labels define critical breakers in the system for the Critical Breakers Missing pre-alarm. They may
be unique in each controller. Breaker labels are defined on the Breaker Hardware screens. See the
Breaker Management chapter for more information. If the Critical Breakers Missing pre-alarm is not being
used, the breaker labels are not required to be specified.
If communication with a critical breaker is lost, the Critical Breakers Missing pre-alarm annunciates. This
pre-alarm can be disabled on the Pre-Alarms screen. See the Alarm Configuration chapter for more
information.

Figure 15-11. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Segment Settings

Settings for System Breaker Configurations with a Segmented System on One Side
Figure 15-12 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Group Segment Settings screen when the system breaker
configuration is Generator Breaker to Segmented System or Generator and Group Breaker to Segmented
System.

Group Segment B Number

This selection labels the bus in the system for the system side of the group breaker.

Figure 15-12. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Segment Settings (Segmented System)

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-10 9469300995

Settings for Tie Breaker Controllers

Figure 15-13 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Group Segment Settings screen when the system breaker
configuration is Tie Breaker.
Generator Group A Number
This number defines the generator group connected to side A of the Tie Breaker.
Group Segment A Number
This selection labels the bus in the system for one side of the tie breaker.
If one side of the tie breaker (A or B) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker settings under the Breaker Management branch.
Generator Group B Number
This number defines the generator group connected to side B of the Tie Breaker.
Group Segment B Number
This selection labels the bus in the system for the side of the tie breaker opposite side A.
If one side of the tie breaker (A or B) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker settings under the Breaker Management branch.

Figure 15-13. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Settings (Tie Breaker Control Configuration)

Settings for Generator and Tie Breaker Controllers

Figure 15-14 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Group Segment Settings screen when the system breaker
configuration is Generator and Tie Breaker.

Group Segment B Number

This selection labels the bus in the system for one side of the tie breaker.
If one side of the tie breaker (B or C) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker 2 settings under the Breaker Management branch.

Generator Group C Number

This number defines the generator group connected to side C of the Tie Breaker.

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-11

Group Segment C Number

This selection labels the bus in the system for the side of the tie breaker opposite side B.
If one side of the tie breaker (B or C) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker 2 settings under the Breaker Management branch.

Figure 15-14. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Settings

(Generator and Tie Breaker Control Configuration)

Settings for Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Controllers

Figure 15-15 illustrates the BESTCOMSPlus Group Segment Settings screen when the system breaker
configuration is Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker.

Generator Group A Number

This number defines the generator group connected to side A of the first Tie Breaker.

Group Segment A Number

This selection labels the bus in the system for the side of the tie breaker opposite side B, but not C.
If one side of the first tie breaker (A or B) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker settings under the Breaker Management branch.

Generator Group B Number

This number defines the generator group connected to side B of both Tie Breakers.

Group Segment B Number

This selection labels the bus in the system shared by both tie breakers.
If one side of the tie breaker (A or B) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker settings under the Breaker Management branch.
If one side of the tie breaker (B or C) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker 2 settings under the Breaker Management branch.

Generator Group C Number

This number defines the generator group connected to side C of the second Tie Breaker.

Group Segment C Number

This selection labels the bus in the system for the side of the tie breaker opposite side B, but not A.
DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management
15-12 9469300995

If one side of the tie breaker (B or C) is tied directly to mains power, this can be specified in the Tie
Breaker 2 settings under the Breaker Management branch.

Figure 15-15. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Settings (Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker Control
Configuration)

Block Load Level Settings

Block Load Level is the anticipated amount of power needed to pick up the load when the generator
group bus is closed onto the load bus. This value must be as close to the actual load level as possible or
system instability may occur. One default load level, 16 override load levels, and 16 load level offsets are
provided.
Block Load Level is used to determine the number of generators to start when using the Start Demand
input of the Islanded Group Request and Mains Parallel Group Request logic elements or when
performing a group-based mains fail transfer. If a group breaker is to be used in a mains fail transfer,
Block Load Level also determines how much generator capacity must be available before the group
breaker closes to complete the transfer.
Block load level overrides and offsets are activated through BESTlogic™Plus.
When the BLKLOADLEVEL1OVRD logic element (Figure 15-16) receives a true input, the kW value
associated with the level 1 override becomes the active block load level. Only one block load level
override is active at one time, even if multiple elements are true.

Figure 15-16. Block Load Level 1 Override Element

When the BLKLOADLEVEL1OFFSET logic element (Figure 15-17) receives a true input, the kW value
associated with offset 1 is added to the currently active block load level. Multiple active block load level
offsets can be active at one time and are cumulative.

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-13

Figure 15-17. Block Load Level 1 Offset Element

The BESTCOMSPlus Block Load Level screen is illustrated in Figure 15-18.

Figure 15-18. Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Settings, Block Load Level

Group Configuration
The following information is provided to explain the group segment settings which must be made in
DGC-2020HDs in order to achieve desired operation of a segmented system.
Figure 15-19 illustrates an example network topology consisting of four generators, two mains power
sources, nine breakers, and seven DGC-2020HDs, split into two generator groups. A group tie breaker
joins the two generator groups and the two loads.
Table 15-1 lists the pertinent System and Group Segment settings needed to support this topology.

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-14 9469300995

Figure 15-19. Example Network Topology

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-15

Table 15-1. Settings for DGC-2020HDs in Example Network Topology

Setting DGC 1 DGC 2 DGC 3 DGC 4 DGC 5 DGC 6 DGC 7
Name Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings
Settings Explorer, System Parameters, System Settings
System Tie Tie Tie Generator Generator Generator Generator
Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker and Group and Group and Group and Group
Configuration Breaker to Breaker to Breaker to Breaker to
Segmented Segmented Segmented Segmented
System System System System
System Type Segmented Segmented Segmented Segmented Segmented Segmented Segmented
Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus
System System System System System System System
Settings Explorer, System Parameters, Group Settings, Group Segment Settings
Generator n/a n/a n/a 1 1 2 2
Group
Number
Generator 1 1 2 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Group A
Number
Group Mains Load Bus Mains n/a n/a n/a n/a
Segment A
Number
Generator 1 2 2 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Group B
Number
Group Load Bus Load Bus Load Bus Load Bus Load Bus Load Bus Load Bus
Segment B
Number
Expected 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Number of
Tie Breaker
Controllers
Critical TB1 MB1 TB1 MB1 MB1 MB2 MB2
Breaker 1
Critical GRP1 MB2 GRP2 TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1
Breaker 2
Critical MB2 GRP1 MB1 GEN2 GEN1 GEN4 GEN3
Breaker 3
Critical GRP2 GRP2 GRP1 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Breaker 4

DGC1 Settings
DGC-2020HD #1 is set up as a Tie Breaker controller connected to Mains on the A side. The System
Type is set to Segmented Bus System because all DGC-2020HDs in the network (segmented bus
system) must have this setting.
Generator Group A Number is set to 1 because the A-side of the tie breaker is tied to a segment within
Generator Group 1. Group Segment A Number is set to "Mains". Using the first three selections of the
Group Segment A/B Number setting (Group Bus, Load Bus, or Mains) allows the DGC-2020HD to auto-
detect the topology. However, buses can be assigned any of the selections if auto-detection is not
desired. The DGC-2020HD internally maps the network by matching assigned segment numbers and
breaker sides. Generator Group B Number is set to 1 because the B-side of the tie breaker is tied to a
segment within Generator Group 1. Group Segment B is set to "Load Bus". Expected Number of Tie
Breaker Controllers is set to three because there are three total tie breaker controllers in the network
(DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3). Critical Breakers are not required to be assigned unless the Critical Breakers

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-16 9469300995

Missing Pre-alarm is to be used. In this example, critical breakers for DGC1 are set forTB1, GRP1, MB2,
and GRP2. If communication with the DGC-2020HD controlling MB2 is lost, the pre-alarm annunciates
which can be used in logic to perform other actions. There isn't a set rule for determining critical breakers,
use discretion based on what is appropriate for the application.

DGC2 Settings
DGC-2020HD #2 is set up as a Tie Breaker controller. The System Type is set to Segmented Bus System
because all DGC-2020HDs in the network (segmented bus system) must have this setting.
Generator Group A Number is set to 1 because the A-side of the tie breaker is tied to a segment within
Generator Group 1. Group Segment A Number is set to "Load Bus". Generator Group B Number is set to
2 because the B-side of the tie breaker is tied to a segment within Generator Group 2. Group Segment B
is set to "Load Bus". Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers is set to three because there are three
total tie breaker controllers in the network (DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3). Critical breakers for DGC2 are set
for MB1, MB2, GRP1, and GRP2.

DGC3 Settings
DGC-2020HD #3 is set up as a Tie Breaker controller connected to Mains on the A side. The System
Type is set to Segmented Bus System because all DGC-2020HDs in the network (segmented bus
system) must have this setting.
Generator Group A Number is set to 2 because the A-side of the tie breaker is tied to a segment within
Generator Group 2. Group Segment A Number is set to "Mains". Generator Group B Number is set to 2
because the B-side of the tie breaker is tied to a segment within Generator Group 2. Group Segment B is
set to "Load Bus". Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers is set to three because there are three
total tie breaker controllers in the network (DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3). Critical breakers for DGC3 are set
for TB1, GRP2, MB1 and GRP1.

DGC4 Settings
DGC-2020HD #4's System Breaker Configuration is set up as Generator and Group Breaker to
Segmented System. This is because the DGC-2020HD controls a generator, the generator breaker, and
the group breaker and the group connects onto a segment which has arbitrary sources and connections.
The System Type is set to Segmented Bus System because all DGC-2020HDs in the network
(segmented bus system) must have this setting.
Generator Group Number is set to 1 because all of the components controlled by this DGC-2020HD are
in Generator Group 1. Group Segment B is set to Load Bus. Side B of the group breaker should always
be facing the system with controlled generators on side A. This is why there is no option for Group
Segment A in this System Breaker Configuration. Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers is set to
three because there are three total tie breaker controllers in the network (DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3).
Critical breakers for DGC4 are set for MB1, TB1, and GEN2. GRP1 and GEN1 are directly controlled by
DGC4 and therefore are not assigned as critical breakers because DGC4 does not rely on
communications for breaker information from the breakers it directly controls.

DGC5 Settings
DGC-2020HD #5's System Breaker Configuration is set up as Generator and Group Breaker to
Segmented System. This is because the DGC-2020HD controls a generator, the generator breaker, and
the group breaker and the group connects onto a segment which has arbitrary sources and connections.
The System Type is set to Segmented Bus System because all DGC-2020HDs in the network
(segmented bus system) must have this setting.
Generator Group Number is set to 1 because all of the components controlled by this DGC-2020HD are
in Generator Group 1. Group Segment B is set to Load Bus. Side B of the group breaker should always
be facing the system with controlled generators on side A. This is why there is no option for Group
Segment A in this System Breaker Configuration. Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers is set to
three because there are three total tie breaker controllers in the network (DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3).
Critical breakers for DGC5 are set for MB1, TB1, and GEN1. GRP1 and GEN2 are directly controlled by

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 15-17

DGC5 and therefore are not assigned as critical breakers because DGC5 does not rely on
communications for breaker information from the breakers it directly controls.

DGC6 Settings
DGC-2020HD #6's System Breaker Configuration is set up as Generator and Group Breaker to
Segmented System. This is because the DGC-2020HD controls a generator, the generator breaker, and
the group breaker and the group connects onto a segment which has arbitrary sources and connections.
The System Type is set to Segmented Bus System because all DGC-2020HDs in the network
(segmented bus system) must have this setting.
Generator Group Number is set to 2 because all of the components controlled by this DGC-2020HD are
in Generator Group 2. Group Segment B is set to Load Bus. Side B of the group breaker should always
be facing the system with controlled generators on side A. This is why there is no option for Group
Segment A in this System Breaker Configuration. Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers is set to
three because there are three total tie breaker controllers in the network (DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3).
Critical breakers for DGC6 are set for MB2, TB1, and GEN4. GRP2 and GEN3 are directly controlled by
DGC6 and therefore are not assigned as critical breakers because DGC6 does not rely on
communications for breaker information from the breakers it directly controls.

DGC7 Settings
DGC-2020HD #7's System Breaker Configuration is set up as Generator and Group Breaker to
Segmented System. This is because the DGC-2020HD controls a generator, the generator breaker, and
the group breaker and the group connects onto a segment which has arbitrary sources and connections.
The System Type is set to Segmented Bus System because all DGC-2020HDs in the network
(segmented bus system) must have this setting.
Generator Group Number is set to 2 because all of the components controlled by this DGC-2020HD are
in Generator Group 2. Group Segment B is set to Load Bus. Side B of the group breaker should always
be facing the system with controlled generators on side A. This is why there is no option for Group
Segment A in this System Breaker Configuration. Expected Number of Tie Breaker Controllers is set to
three because there are three total tie breaker controllers in the network (DGC1, DGC2, and DGC3).
Critical breakers for DGC7 are set for MB2, TB1, and GEN3. GRP2 and GEN4 are directly controlled by
DGC7 and therefore are not assigned as critical breakers because DGC7 does not rely on
communications for breaker information from the breakers it directly controls.

DGC-2020HD Multiple Generator Management

15-18 9469300995

Multiple Generator Management DGC-2020HD

9469300995 16-1

16 • Alarm Configuration
Configuration of DGC-2020HD alarms, pre-alarms, sender failure alarms, user programmable alarms, and
the audible horn is described in the following paragraphs.

Alarms
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Alarms
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Alarm Configuration > Alarms
To configure alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Alarm screen (Figure 16-1). The alarm settings are
described below.

High Coolant Temp

High coolant temperature alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an
arming delay. If enabled, a high coolant temperature alarm is triggered after a fixed four-second delay
when the engine coolant temperature exceeds the threshold setting. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as
a high coolant temperature dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. The arming delay
disables the high coolant temperature alarm function for a user-adjustable period after engine startup.
System units are configured on the System Settings screen.

Low Coolant Level

Low coolant level alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If enabled, a
low coolant level alarm is triggered when the metered coolant level drops below the threshold setting for a
fixed two-second delay. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a low coolant level dropout by preventing
rapid switching of the pickup output. ECU Support must be enabled on the Communications, CAN Bus,
CAN Bus Setup screen before this alarm can be configured.

Low Fuel Level

Low fuel level alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, an activation delay
setting, and a hysteresis setting. If enabled, a low fuel level alarm is triggered when the metered fuel level
drops below the threshold setting for the duration of the activation time delay. A user-defined hysteresis
setting functions as a low fuel level dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output.

Low Oil Pressure

Low oil pressure alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an arming
delay. If enabled, a low oil pressure alarm is triggered after a fixed two-second delay when the engine oil
pressure decreases below the threshold setting. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a low oil pressure
dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. The arming delay disables the low oil pressure
alarm function for a user-adjustable period after engine startup. System units and metric pressure units
are configured on the System Settings screen.

Overspeed
Overspeed alarm settings include an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an activation delay.
If enabled, an overspeed alarm occurs when the engine speed (in percent of rated rpm) exceeds the
threshold setting for the duration of the activation time delay. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as an
overspeed dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output.

Remote Display Panel

Remote display panel alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, the Remote
Display Panel (RDP-110) annunciates an alarm when BESTlogicPlus logic element RDPPROGALM1 or
RDPPROGALM2 receives a true input.

DGC-2020HD Alarm Configuration

16-2 9469300995

CAN Bus Low Coolant Level

CAN Bus Low Coolant Level alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. Certain ECUs send
a binary status to indicate low coolant level. If enabled, a CAN Bus Low Coolant Level alarm occurs when
any binary status for low coolant level is received. ECU Support must be enabled on the
Communications, CAN Bus, CAN Bus Setup screen before this alarm can be configured. When disabled,
all Low Coolant Level indications received over CAN Bus are reported as pre-alarms rather than alarms.
This allows the machine to remain operating while annunciating that a low coolant level indication has
been received from the ECU.
When low coolant level indications are received from the ECU, the Low Coolant Level LED indicator is lit
on the optional RDP-110 Remote Display Panel.

Figure 16-1. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Alarms

Pre-alarms
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Pre-Alarms
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Alarm Configuration > Pre-Alarms
To configure pre-alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Pre-Alarms screen (Figure 16-2). The pre-
alarm settings are described below.

Active DTC
Active DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If
CAN and DTC support are both enabled, an Active DTC pre-alarm can be enabled to announce the
presence of a condition that is causing a DTC to be sent from the ECU to the DGC-2020HD.

Alarm Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 16-3

AEM1 through AEM4 Comms Failure

AEM-2020 communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
an AEM-2020 Communication Failure pre-alarm is annunciated when communication between an
optional AEM-2020 and DGC-2020HD is lost.

Breaker Close Failure

Breaker close failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting and a monitor setting. If
enabled, a Breaker Close Failure pre-alarm is annunciated if the DGC-2020HD has issued a breaker
close output, and has not received feedback from the breaker status indicating it is closed before the
breaker close wait time has elapsed. The Monitor setting determines whether this condition is monitored
only during transitions or always.

Breaker Open Failure

Breaker open failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting and a monitor setting. If
enabled, a Breaker Open Failure pre-alarm is annunciated if the DGC-2020HD has issued a breaker
open output, and has not received feedback from the breaker status indicating it is open before the
breaker close wait time has elapsed. The Monitor setting determines whether this condition is monitored
only during transitions or always.

Bus 1 and Bus 2 Reverse Rotation

Bus 1 and Bus 2 reverse rotation pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
a Bus 1 or Bus 2 Reverse Rotation pre-alarm is annunciated if the sensed bus phase rotation differs from
the phase rotation specified on the System Parameters > System Settings screen.

CEM1 through CEM4 Comms Failure

CEM-2020 communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
a CEM-2020 Communication Failure pre-alarm is annunciated when communication between an optional
CEM-2020 and DGC-2020HD is lost.

Critical Breakers Missing

Critical breakers missing pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, a Critical
Breakers Missing pre-alarm is annunciated when expected critical breakers are not detected on the
network.

ECU Communication Failure

ECU communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, an
ECU Communication Failure pre-alarm is annunciated when the DGC-2020HD detects a communication
problem in the J1939 interface linking the DGC-2020HD with the ECU (Engine Control Unit).

Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 Link Lost

Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 link lost pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
an Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 pre-alarm is annunciated if the Ethernet link between the DGC-2020HD and
the network is lost. If Redundant Ethernet is enabled and the Redundant Mode setting is configured as
ARP Ping, the pre-alarm will also be annunciated if a configured Ping IP target is not reachable from the
Ethernet port. See Redundant Ethernet Settings in the Communication chapter for more information.

Generator Below 10 Hz
Generator Below 10 Hz pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. When enabled, a
Gen Below 10 Hz pre-alarm is annunciated if the sensed generator frequency is less than 10 Hz. Gen
Below 10 Hz pre-alarm detection is enabled only when a VRM-2020 is used and a regulator is started.

DGC-2020HD Alarm Configuration

16-4 9469300995

Generator Reverse Rotation

Generator reverse rotation pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, a
Generator Reverse Rotation pre-alarm is annunciated if the sensed generator phase rotation differs from
the phase rotation specified on the System Parameters > System Settings screen.

Group Breaker Capacity Not Reached

Group breaker Capacity Not Reached pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If
enabled, a Group Capacity Not Reached pre-alarm is annunciated when enough generation is not online
before the time delay expires. The Group Capacity Not Reached status may be used in logic to shed
loads in the system for example. If enough generation is brought online or the demand reduces during
this time, the group breaker will still close.

High Battery Voltage

High battery voltage pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a High Battery Voltage pre-alarm is annunciated when the battery voltage increases above the
threshold setting for a fixed two-second delay. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a high battery voltage
dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. The threshold setting accepts a value in
absolute volts or per unit. Per unit value is based on the nominal battery voltage found on the System
Parameters > System Settings screen. The per unit option is only available through BESTCOMSPlus. A
threshold setting of zero (0) disables the pre-alarm.

High Coolant Temperature

High coolant temperature pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting.
If enabled, a High Coolant Temperature pre-alarm is annunciated after a fixed four-second delay when
the engine coolant temperature exceeds the threshold setting. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a
high coolant temperature dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. The arming delay
disables the high coolant temperature pre-alarm function for a user-adjustable period after engine startup.
System units are configured on the System Settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.

High Fuel Level

High fuel level pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, an activation
delay, and a hysteresis setting. If enabled, a High Fuel Level pre-alarm occurs when the metered fuel
level stays above the threshold setting for the duration of the activation time delay. A user-defined
hysteresis setting functions as a high fuel level dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output.

ID Missing
ID missing pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, an ID Missing pre-
alarm is annunciated when an expected sequence ID of a DGC-2020HD is not detected on the network.

ID Repeat
ID repeat pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, an ID Repeat pre-alarm
is annunciated when two or more DGC-2020HDs report the same expected sequence ID.

Intergenset Communication Failure

Intergenset communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
an Intergenset Communication Failure pre-alarm is annunciated when the DGC-2020HD detects that an
individual generator previously connected to a generator network has lost connection.

Low Battery Voltage

Low battery voltage pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an
activation delay. If enabled, a Low Battery Voltage pre-alarm occurs when the battery voltage decreases
below the threshold setting for the duration of the activation delay. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a
low battery voltage dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. The threshold setting
Alarm Configuration DGC-2020HD
9469300995 16-5

accepts a value in absolute volts or per unit. Per unit value is based on the nominal battery voltage found
on the System Parameters > System Settings screen. The per unit option is only available through
BESTCOMSPlus. A threshold setting of zero (0) disables the pre-alarm.

Low Coolant Level

Low coolant level pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a Low Coolant Level pre-alarm occurs when the metered coolant level decreases below the
threshold setting for a fixed two-second delay. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a low coolant level
dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output.

Low Coolant Temperature

Low coolant temperature pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a Low Coolant Temperature pre-alarm occurs when the engine coolant temperature decreases
below the threshold setting for a fixed four-second delay. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a low
coolant temperature dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. System units are
configured on the System Settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.

Low Fuel Level

Low fuel level pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and a hysteresis
setting. If enabled, a Low Fuel Level pre-alarm occurs when the metered fuel level decreases below the
threshold setting for a fixed two-second delay. A user-defined hysteresis setting functions as a low fuel
level dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output.

Low Oil Pressure

Low oil pressure pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a low oil pressure pre-alarm is annunciated after a fixed two-second delay when the engine oil
pressure decreases below the threshold setting. A fixed hysteresis of 2% functions as a low oil pressure
dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output. The arming delay disables the low oil pressure
alarm function for a user-adjustable period after engine startup. System units and metric pressure units
are configured on the System Settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.

Maintenance Interval
Maintenance interval pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a threshold setting. If
enabled, a Maintenance Interval pre-alarm is annunciated when the DGC-2020HD maintenance timer
counts down to zero (0) from the threshold time setting. The maintenance interval pre-alarm can be reset
through the DGC-2020HD front panel or by using BESTCOMSPlus. See Resetting Alarms and Pre-
Alarms below.

Missing System Components

Missing System Components pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, a
Missing System Components pre-alarm is annunciated when the expected number of tie breaker
controllers is incorrect.

Open Generator Breaker on Trip

Open Generator Breaker on Trip pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
an open request is sent to the generator breaker when communication with the VRM-2020 is lost. This
may prevent equipment damage in case loss of communication with the VRM-2020 would cause loss of
excitation control.

Remote Display Panel

Remote display panel pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, the Remote
Display Panel (RDP-110) annunciates a pre-alarm when BESTlogicPlus logic element
RDPPROGPREALM1 or RDPPROGPREALM2 receives a true input.

DGC-2020HD Alarm Configuration

16-6 9469300995

Synchronizer Failure
Synchronizer failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, a
Synchronizer Failure pre-alarm is annunciated if the DGC-2020HD is running the auto-synchronizer to
align the generator voltage and bus voltage to close a breaker, and the DGC-2020HD does not receive
feedback from the breaker status indicating it is closed before the Sync Fail Activation delay time has
expired. The Sync Fail Activation delay setting is found on the Settings > Breaker Management >
Synchronizer screen.

System Segments Unreachable

System Segments Unreachable pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled, a
System Segments Unreachable pre-alarm is annunciated when it is determined that a segment would not
be connected to the system if all of the breakers were to be closed. This may indicate incorrect system
settings or breaker loss.

Weak Battery Voltage

Weak battery voltage pre-alarm settings consist of an enable/disable setting, a threshold setting, and an
activation delay. If enabled, a Weak Battery Voltage pre-alarm latches during engine cranking when the
battery voltage decreases below the threshold setting for the duration of the activation delay. A fixed
hysteresis of 2% functions as a weak battery voltage dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output. The threshold setting accepts a value in absolute volts or per unit. Per unit value is based on the
nominal battery voltage found on the System Parameters > System Settings screen. The per unit option is
only available through BESTCOMSPlus. A threshold setting of zero (0) disables the pre-alarm.
A weak battery pre-alarm condition is reset through the front panel by navigating to the Status > Pre-
Alarms screen, scrolling through the list of pre-alarms until “Weak Battery” is displayed, and pressing the
Reset key. This pre-alarm resets automatically if a crank cycle occurs and the battery has recovered.

Rated Data and Per Unit Values

Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either native units or in per unit values. When
a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based on the native
unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen) associated
with it. When a per unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the native value
based on the per unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following settings have native units of Volts, and the rated data associated with them is Battery Volts
(on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• High Battery Voltage
• Low Battery Voltage
• Weak Battery Voltage

VRM Comms Failure

VRM-2020 communication failure pre-alarm settings consist of a single enable/disable setting. If enabled,
a VRM-2020 Communication Failure pre-alarm is annunciated when communication between an optional
VRM-2020 and DGC-2020HD is lost.

Alarm Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 16-7

Figure 16-2. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Pre-Alarms

Horn Configuration
BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Horn Configuration
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Alarm Configuration > Horn Configuration
To configure the audible horn using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Horn Configuration screen (Figure 16-3).
An output contact is configured through programmable logic to energize an audible horn when an alarm
or pre-alarm condition exists. The horn settings consist of an enable/disable setting and a Not in Auto
enable/disable setting. If enabled, the contact output is closed when an alarm condition exists. The
contact output is toggled between open and closed when a pre-alarm condition exists. If the Not in Auto
setting is enabled, the horn is disabled when the DGC-2020HD is not operating in Auto mode.

Figure 16-3. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Horn Configuration

Sender Fail Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Sender Fail
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Alarm Configuration > Sender Fail

DGC-2020HD Alarm Configuration

16-8 9469300995

To configure sender failure alarms using BESTCOMSPlus, open the Sender Fail screen (Figure 16-4).
Coolant temperature, oil pressure, fuel level, and voltage sensing sender failure settings consist of an
alarm configuration setting and an activation delay.
The alarm configuration setting allows selection of the type of alarm to be annunciated when a sender fail
condition exists. Selectable alarm configurations are described under the Annunciation heading, above.
The selected alarm type is triggered when a sender failure exists for the duration of the activation time
delay.

Figure 16-4. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, Sender Fail

The speed sender fail alarm is always enabled. A user-adjustable time delay is provided for each
sender/sensing alarm/pre-alarm.
Alarm and pre-alarm annunciations for loss of engine speed signals is not user-programmable and
operates as follows. If the MPU (magnetic pickup) or generator frequency is programmed as the sole
engine speed source and that signal source fails, an alarm (and shutdown) is triggered. If the engine
speed source is configured as MPU and generator frequency and a loss of one of the signal sources
occurs, a pre-alarm is annunciated. An alarm (and shutdown) is triggered if both speed signals are lost.

User Programmable Alarms

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, User Programmable Alarms
Front Panel Navigation Path: Not available through front panel
Sixteen user programmable alarms are available. BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic is used to set up
alarm logic. User alarm labels are programmed on the User Programmable Alarms screen (Figure 16-5)
under Alarm Configuration. When active, the label of a user alarm is displayed on the Alarms screen on
the front-panel display and in the sequence of events report.

Alarm Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 16-9

Figure 16-5. Settings Explorer, Alarm Configuration, User Programmable Alarms

DGC-2020HD Alarm Configuration

16-10 9469300995

Alarm Configuration DGC-2020HD

9469300995 17-1

17 • Protection
Three tiers of protection are offered. DGC-2020HD controllers with style number xxSxxxxxx offer standard
protection consisting of undervoltage (27), overvoltage (59), overfrequency (81O), underfrequency (81U),
power (32), and loss of excitation (40Q) elements. Controllers with style number xxExxxxxx offer
enhanced protection, which consists of the standard protection elements plus phase current imbalance
(46), phase voltage imbalance (47), time overcurrent (51), vector shift (78), and frequency rate-of-change
(ROC) elements. Controllers with style number xxDxxxxEx offer enhanced protection elements plus
phase current differential (87G), and neutral current differential (87N). When a VRM-2020 is enabled,
three field protection elements are provided: Field Overvoltage, Loss of Sensing, and Exciter Diode
Monitor (optional).
Four setting groups enable independent protection coordination which is selectable in BESTlogic™Plus.
Setting groups are described at the end of this chapter.

Undervoltage (27)
Six undervoltage protection (27) elements monitor the sensing voltage applied to the DGC-2020HD. An
element can be configured to protect against undervoltage when the phase voltage decreases below a
defined level.
The six, identical undervoltage protection elements are designated 27-1, 27-2, 27-3, 27-4, 27-5, and 27-6.
Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus® and element
operational settings are configured on the Undervoltage settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage, Undervoltage (27)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Voltage Protection > Undervoltage (27P)

Element Operation
Undervoltage protection can be used to prevent equipment damage when an undervoltage condition
exists.
Two sets of undervoltage settings are provided for each element: one for three-phase generator
connections and one for single-phase generator connections. The Pickup setting entered is based on the
PT secondary side (DGC-2020HD). When a single-phase override contact input is received, the DGC-
2020HD automatically switches from the three-phase undervoltage settings to the single-phase
undervoltage settings.

Source
The Source setting configures an undervoltage element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals
or the bus sensing input terminals.

Pickup and Trip

When the average of the three-phase voltage (three-phase mode) or the line-to-line voltage (single-phase
mode) decreases below the threshold established by the Pickup setting, a timer begins timing towards a
trip.
The duration of the timer is established by the Activation Delay. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the
27 element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If an undervoltage pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Activation Delay setting, the
element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of undervoltage.
A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the undervoltage protection (27) element.
DGC-2020HD Protection
17-2 9469300995

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting functions as an undervoltage dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.

Per Unit
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of voltage or in per unit
values. When a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based
on the native unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen)
associated with it. Conversely, when a per unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically
recalculates the native value based on the per unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with
it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following settings have native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with them is
Rated Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Undervoltage 27-x Three-Phase Pickup
• Undervoltage 27-x Single-Phase Pickup

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
An undervoltage trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Inhibit Frequency
Inhibit Frequency impedes undervoltage element operation during undervoltage conditions that may
occur during equipment startup.
A setting of zero (0) disables the inhibit function.

Logic Connections
Undervoltage element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
undervoltage element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-1. When the Block input is true, the 27 element
is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 27 element is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-1. Undervoltage Element Logic Block

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-3

Operational Settings
Undervoltage element operational settings are configured on the Undervoltage settings screen (Figure
17-2) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the Installation
manual.

Figure 17-2. Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage, Undervoltage

Overvoltage (59)
Six overvoltage protection (59) elements monitor the sensing voltage applied to the DGC-2020HD. An
element can be configured to protect against overvoltage when the phase voltage increases above a
defined level.
The six, identical overvoltage protection elements are designated 59-1, 59-2, 59-3, 59-4, 59-5, and 59-6.
Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus® and element
operational settings are configured on the Overvoltage settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage, Overvoltage (59)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Voltage Protection > Overvoltage (59P)

Element Operation
Overvoltage protection can be used to prevent equipment damage when an overvoltage condition exists.
Two sets of overvoltage settings are provided for each element: one for three-phase generator
connections and one for single-phase generator connections. The Pickup setting entered is based on the
PT secondary side (DGC-2020HD). When a single-phase override contact input is received, the DGC-
2020HD automatically switches from the three-phase overvoltage settings to the single-phase
overvoltage settings.

Source
The Source setting configures an overvoltage element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or
the bus sensing input terminals.
DGC-2020HD Protection
17-4 9469300995

Pickup and Trip

When the average of the three-phase voltage (three-phase mode) or the line-to-line voltage (single-phase
mode) increases above the threshold established by the Pickup setting, a timer begins timing towards a
trip.
The duration of the timer is established by the Activation Delay. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the
59 element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If an overvoltage pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Activation Delay setting, the
element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of overvoltage.
A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the overvoltage protection (59) element.

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting functions as an overvoltage dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.

Per Unit
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of voltage or in per unit
values. When a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based
on the native unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen)
associated with it. Conversely, when a per-unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically
recalculates the native value based on the per-unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with
it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following settings have native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with them is
Rated Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Overvoltage 59-x Three-Phase Pickup
• Overvoltage 59-x Single-Phase Pickup

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
An overvoltage trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm configuration
setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Logic Connections
Overvoltage element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
overvoltage element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-3. When the Block input is true, the 59 element
is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 59 element is in a trip condition.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-5

Figure 17-3. Overvoltage Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Overvoltage element operational settings are configured on the Overvoltage settings screen
(Figure 17-4) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the
Installation manual.

Figure 17-4. Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage, Overvoltage

Phase Voltage Imbalance (47)

Six phase voltage imbalance protection (47) elements monitor the sensing voltage applied to the DGC-
2020HD. An element can be configured to protect against voltage imbalances between any of the three
phases. This element is available only in styles xxExxxxxx of the DGC-2020HD.
The six, identical phase voltage imbalance protection elements are designated 47-1, 47-2, 47-3, 47-4,
47-5, and 47-6. Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus®
and element operational settings are configured on the Phase Voltage Imbalance settings screen in
BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage, Phase Imbalance (47)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Voltage Protection > Phase Volt Imbalance (47)

Element Operation
Phase voltage imbalance elements provide negative phase-sequence (V2) protection in a three-phase
system. The V2 measurement increases as voltage becomes unbalanced or the phase sequence is
reversed.
The Pickup setting entered is based on the PT secondary side (DGC-2020HD).

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-6 9469300995

Source
A Source setting configures the phase voltage imbalance element to monitor the generator sensing input
terminals or the bus sensing input terminals.

Pickup and Trip

When the difference between any of the three phases of generator voltage increases above the threshold
established by the Pickup setting, a timer begins timing towards a trip.
Timer duration is established by the Activation Delay. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the 47
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If a phase voltage imbalance pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Activation Delay
setting, the element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to
other logic elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of phase voltage
imbalance.
A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the phase voltage imbalance protection (47) element.

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting functions as a phase voltage imbalance dropout by preventing rapid switching of
the pickup output.

Per Unit
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of voltage or in per unit
values. When a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based
on the native unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen)
associated with it. Conversely, when a per unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically
recalculates the native value based on the per unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with
it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following setting has native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with it is Rated
Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Phase Imbalance 47-x Pickup

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
A phase voltage imbalance trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-7

Logic Connections
Phase voltage imbalance element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in
BESTCOMSPlus. The phase voltage imbalance element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-5. When
the Block input is true, the 47 element is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 47 element is in a trip
condition.

Figure 17-5. Phase Voltage Imbalance Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Phase voltage imbalance element operational settings are configured on the Phase Voltage Imbalance
settings screen (Figure 17-6) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter
in the Installation manual.

Figure 17-6. Settings Explorer, Protection, Voltage, Phase Imbalance

Vector Shift (78)

Two vector shift protection (78) elements protect the generator by disconnecting it from the grid when a
loss of mains or mains failure occurs. This prevents the generator from remaining tied to the mains if the
mains returns due to an external reclose device. Vector Shift elements are available only in styles
xxExxxxxx of the DGC-2020HD.
The two, identical vector shift protection elements are designated 78-1 and 78-2. Element logic
connections are made on the BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus® and element operational
settings are configured on the Vector Shift settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Loss of Mains Protection, Vector Shift
(78)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Loss of Mains Protection > Vector Shift (78)

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-8 9469300995

Element Operation
When a loss of mains occurs, it is likely that the generator load will shift abruptly since the generator is
driving everything between the generator output and the utility breaker that removed mains power. Such a
load shift is likely to cause a speed shift, which may result in the generator being out of phase with the
mains when a reclose occurs. If the generator is out of phase and connection with the mains is
established, damage could occur.
The vector shift element trips the breaker when it detects a phase shift in the generator voltage. A sudden
change in generator phase angle often occurs when the grid is lost. This change of phase angle results in
an earlier zero crossing of the generator voltage if the generator load decreases. It results in a later zero
crossing if the generator load increases. This shift of the zero crossing (vector shift) is expressed in
degrees.
Loss of mains protection is only active when the generator is paralleled to the mains as indicated when
the Parallel to Mains logic element is true in BESTlogicPlus. Protection is inhibited for five seconds after
the Parallel to Mains logic element first becomes true so that transients from closing onto the mains will
not cause false trips.
Vector shift trips are latched. They are cleared by pressing the Reset button on the front panel or by
putting the DGC-2020HD into Off mode.

Source
A Source setting configures the vector shift element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or
the bus sensing input terminals.

Pickup and Trip

When the vector shift increases above the threshold established by the Pickup setting, the element Trip
output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic elements or a
physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.

Alarm Configuration
A vector shift trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm configuration
setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Open Mains Breaker, Group Breaker, or Gen Breaker on Trip

When Open Mains Breaker on Trip is enabled, the DGC-2020HD will request the mains breaker to open
when a 78 trip is annunciated. When Open Gen Breaker on Trip is enabled, the DGC-2020HD will
request the generator breaker to open when a 78 trip is annunciated.

Logic Connections
Vector shift element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
vector shift element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-7. When the Block input is true, the 78 element
is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 78 element is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-7. Vector Shift Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Vector shift element operational settings are configured on the Vector Shift settings screen (Figure 17-8)
in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the Installation manual.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-9

Figure 17-8. Settings Explorer, Protection, Loss of Mains Protection, Vector Shift

Frequency (81)
Eight frequency protection (81) elements monitor the frequency of the sensing voltage applied to the
DGC-2020HD. An element can be configured to protect against underfrequency, overfrequency, or the
rate of frequency change. Rate of frequency change mode is available only in styles xxExxxxxx of the
DGC-2020HD.
The eight, identical frequency protection elements are designated 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4, 81-5, 81-6, 81-
7, and 81-8. Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus®
and element operational settings are configured on the Frequency settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Frequency, Frequency (81)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Frequency Protection > Frequency (81)

Frequency Measurement
For all sensing connections, the frequency is measured through the DGC-2020HD A- and B-phase
sensing voltage connections.
To measure frequency, the voltage sensed by the DGC-2020HD must be greater than 10 Vac. The
measured frequency is the average of two cycles of voltage measurement.

Underfrequency and Overfrequency

Underfrequency and overfrequency protection can be useful for detecting load shedding or islanding. For
example, when a genset is suddenly separated or isolated from the electric utility, the frequency will
change quickly from the nominal values (except for the improbable case of a perfect load-to-generation
match). This makes frequency measurement an excellent method for detecting an island condition.
Any of the eight 81 elements can be configured for underfrequency or overfrequency protection.

Mode
Underfrequency or overfrequency protection is selected through the Mode setting. A setting of Under
selects underfrequency and a setting of Over selects overfrequency protection.

Source
A Source setting configures the frequency element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or the
bus sensing input terminals.
DGC-2020HD Protection
17-10 9469300995

Pickup and Trip

When the measured frequency decreases below (underfrequency protection) or increases above
(overfrequency protection) the frequency threshold established by the Pickup setting for three
consecutive sensing voltage cycles, a timer begins timing towards a trip.
Timer duration is established by the Activation Delay. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the 81
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If an underfrequency or overfrequency pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Activation
Delay setting, the element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected
to other logic elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of underfrequency or
overfrequency.
A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the frequency protection (81) element.

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting functions as an overfrequency/underfrequency dropout by preventing rapid
switching of the pickup output.

Per Unit
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of hertz or in per unit
values. Per unit settings are available for Pickup (81O/81U) and Inhibit Voltage (81U). When a native unit
is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based on the native unit setting
and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen) associated with it.
Conversely, when a per unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the native value
based on the per unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following setting has native units of Frequency in Hz, and the rated data associated with it is Rated
Frequency (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Frequency 81-x Pickup
The following setting has native units of Secondary Volts, and the rated data associated with it is Rated
Secondary Volts (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Frequency 81-x Inhibit Voltage

Alternate Frequency Scale Factor

An alternate frequency scale factor setting is used for automatic adjustment of the frequency pickup
settings in applications that might utilize more than one operating frequency. For example, a machine that
is configurable between 50 or 60 Hz operation. The scale factor setting is implemented when the DGC-
2020HD senses a closure at a contact input that is connected to the Alternate Frequency Override logic
element in BESTlogicPlus programmable logic. When the Alternate Frequency Override is true, the scale
factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if a scale factor contact input is
received by the DGC-2020HD and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be doubled
(2.000 x PU).

Alarm Configuration
An underfrequency or overfrequency trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on
the alarm configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Inhibit Voltage
Inhibit Voltage settings impede underfrequency element operation during undervoltage conditions that
may occur during equipment startup.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-11

Frequency Rate-of-Change
When a loss of mains occurs, it is likely that the generator load will shift abruptly because the generator is
driving everything between the generator output and the utility breaker that removed mains power. Such a
load shift is likely to cause a speed shift, which may result in the generator being out of phase with the
mains when a reclose occurs. If the generator is out of phase and connection with the mains is
established, damage could occur. The frequency rate-of-change (ROC) element trips the breaker when a
change in frequency results from a sudden change in load.
Positive ROCOF and Negative ROCOF mode settings are provided for use in load shedding policy.
Frequency ROC protection is only active when the generator is paralleled to the mains as indicated when
the Parallel to Mains logic element is true in BESTlogicPlus. Protection is inhibited for five seconds after
the Parallel to Mains logic element first becomes true so that transients from closing onto the mains will
not cause false trips.
Frequency ROC trips are latched. They are cleared by pressing the Reset button on the front panel or by
putting the DGC-2020HD into Off mode.
Any of the eight 81 elements can be configured for frequency ROC protection.

Enable
This setting allows ROCOF protection to be enabled always or only when paralleled to mains.

Source
A Source setting configures the frequency element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or the
bus sensing input terminals.

Pickup and Trip

When the rate of frequency change (expressed in hertz per second) exceeds the threshold established by
the Pickup setting for three consecutive sensing voltage cycles, a timer begins timing towards a trip.
Pickup detection time varies according to the value of the fault frequency. When the frequency greatly
exceeds the pickup setting, pickup detection occurs very quickly. More precise and slower pickup
detection occurs when the fault frequency is much closer to the Pickup setting. Pickup detection times are
summarized as follows:
• Faults exceeding the pickup setting by 0.57 Hz/s are detected in 2 cycles
• Faults exceeding the pickup setting by 0.24 Hz/s are detected in 4 cycles
• Faults exceeding the pickup setting by 0.08 Hz/s are detected in 8 cycles
• No pickup detection time will be greater than 16 cycles
Timer duration is established by the Activation Delay. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the 81
element instantaneous (with the exception of the pickup detection time).
If a frequency ROC pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Activation Delay setting, the
element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of a frequency ROC
fault.

Alarm Configuration
A frequency rate-of-change trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Open Mains Breaker, Group Breaker, or Gen Breaker on Trip

When Open Mains Breaker on Trip is enabled, the DGC-2020HD will request the mains breaker to open
when an 81 trip is annunciated. When Open Gen Breaker on Trip is enabled, the DGC-2020HD will
request the generator breaker to open when an 81 trip is annunciated.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-12 9469300995

Inhibit Voltage
Inhibit Voltage settings impede frequency rate-of-change element operation during undervoltage
conditions that may occur during system startup.
A setting of zero (0) disables the inhibit function.

Logic Connections
Frequency element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
frequency element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-9. When the Block input is true, the 81 element is
disabled. The Trip output is true when the 81 element is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-9. Frequency Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Frequency element operational settings are configured on the Frequency settings screen (Figure 17-10)
in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the Installation manual.

Figure 17-10. Settings Explorer, Protection, Frequency

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-13

Current Imbalance (46)

Six current imbalance protection (46) elements monitor the difference of phase current levels by
calculating negative sequence current (I2) in three phase mode or calculating neutral current (I0) in single
phase mode.
Ground relays can be set more sensitively than phase relays because a balanced load has no ground
(3I0) current component. When using negative-sequence mode, the 46 element can provide similar
increased sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults because a balanced load has no negative-sequence (I2)
current component.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Current, Current Imbalance (46)
HMI Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection, Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) > Current
Protection > Current Imbalance 46

Element Operation
A typical setting when using negative-sequence mode for the 46 element is one-half the phase pickup
setting in order to achieve equal sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults as three-phase faults. This number
comes from the fact that the magnitude of the current for a phase-to-phase fault is √3/2 (87%) of the
three-phase fault at the same location. This is illustrated in Figure 17-11.

Figure 17-11. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude

A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the current imbalance protection (46) element.
The phase-to-phase fault is made up of both positive and negative-sequence components as shown in
Figure 17-12. The magnitude of the negative-sequence component is 1/√3 (58%) of the magnitude of the
total phase current. When these two factors (√3/2 and 1/√3) are combined, the √3 factors cancel which
leaves the one-half factor.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-14 9469300995

Figure 17-12. Sequence Components for an A-B Fault

Coordination Settings
The 46-x negative-sequence settings should be checked for coordination with phase-only sensing
devices such as downstream fuses, reclosers, and/or ground relays. To plot the negative-sequence time
current characteristics on the same plot for the phase devices, you need to multiply the negative-
sequence element pickup value by the correct multiplier. The multiplier is the ratio of phase current to
negative-sequence current for the fault type for which you are interested. To plot the negative-sequence
time current characteristics on the same plot for the ground devices, you need to multiply the pickup value
by the multiplier for phase-to-ground faults (see Table 17-1).
Table 17-1. Fault Type Multipliers
Fault Type Multiplier
Ph-Ph m = 1.732
Ph-Ph-G m > 1.732
Ph-G m=3
three-phase m = infinity
For example, a downstream phase 46-x element has a pickup of 150 amperes. The upstream 46-x
negative-sequence element has a pickup of 200 amperes. To check the coordination between these two
elements for a phase-to-phase fault, the phase overcurrent element would be plotted normally with pickup
at 150 amperes. The 46-x negative-sequence element would be shifted to the right by the appropriate
factor m. Thus, the characteristic would be plotted on the coordination graph with pickup at: (200
amperes) ∗ 1.732 = 346 amperes.
Generally, for coordination with downstream phase overcurrent devices, phase-to-phase faults are the
most critical to consider. All other fault types result in an equal or greater shift of the time current
characteristic curve to the right on the plot.

Logic Connections
Current Imbalance element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in
BESTCOMSPlus. The Current Imbalance element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-13. When the
Block input is true, the 46 element is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 46 element is in a trip
condition.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-15

Figure 17-13. Current Imbalance Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Current Imbalance element operational settings are configured on the Current Imbalance settings screen
(Figure 17-14) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter.

Figure 17-14. Settings Explorer, Protection, Current, Current Imbalance

Overcurrent (51)
Six overcurrent protection (51) elements monitor the current applied to the DGC-2020HD. An element can
be configured to protect against overcurrent by monitoring a single- or three-phase system, neutral
current, positive-sequence current, negative-sequence current, or ground current. This element is
available only in styles xxExxxxxx of the DGC-2020HD.
The six, identical overcurrent elements are designated 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 51-5, and 51-6. Element
logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus and element operational
settings are configured on the Overcurrent settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Current, Overcurrent (51)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Current Protection > Overcurrent (51)

Element Operation
Overcurrent protection can be used to protect equipment from damage caused by phase failure or
forward/reverse phase sequence.
Two sets of overcurrent settings are provided for each element: one for three-phase generator
connections and one for single-phase generator connections. The Pickup setting is entered based on the
CT secondary side (DGC-2020HD). When a single-phase override contact input is received, the DGC-
DGC-2020HD Protection
17-16 9469300995

2020HD automatically switches from the three-phase overcurrent settings to the single-phase overcurrent
settings.

Modes of Protection
Eight modes of protection are available: IA, IB, IC, Imax, 3I0, I1, I2, and IG. Descriptions of the protection
modes in three-phase and single-phase systems are provided in Table 17-2.
Table 17-2. Modes of Protection
Mode Three-Phase Single-Phase
IA, IB, IC Overcurrent protection elements include Overcurrent protection elements include
three independent comparators and three independent comparators and
timers, one for each phase. Mode timers, one for each phase. Mode
selection determines which phase pickup selection determines which phase pickup
is required to activate protection. is required to activate protection.
Imax Imax mode provides overcurrent Imax mode provides overcurrent
protection in a three-phase system when protection in a single-phase system when
any one phase increases above the any one phase increases above the
Pickup setting. Pickup setting.
3I0 3I0 mode provides neutral overcurrent 3I0 mode is an invalid selection for a
protection in a three-phase system. single-phase system.
I1 I1 mode provides positive-sequence I1 mode is an invalid selection for a single-
overcurrent protection in a three-phase phase system.
system.
I2 I2 mode provides negative-sequence I2 mode is an invalid selection for a single-
overcurrent protection in a three-phase phase system.
system.
IG IG mode provides ground fault protection IG mode provides ground fault protection
in a three-phase system. in a single-phase system.

Source
A Source setting configures an overcurrent element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or
the bus sensing input terminals.

Pickup and Trip

When the measured current increases above the current threshold established by the Pickup setting, a
timer begins timing towards a trip.
Timer duration is established by the Time Dial and Curve settings. A Time Dial of zero (0) makes the 51
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.

Caution
For 1 A current sensing, current shall not exceed 3 amperes for 30
seconds or 4 amperes for 1 second. For 5 A current sensing, current
shall not exceed 15 amperes for 30 seconds or 20 amperes for 1
second. Exceeding the above limits may result in equipment damage.

If an overcurrent pickup condition persists for the duration of the calculated time, the element Trip output
becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic elements or a physical
relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the calculated time expires, the timer is reset, no corrective action
is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of overcurrent.
A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the overcurrent protection (51) element.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-17

Per Unit
Settings which are related to machine ratings can be set in either actual units of current or in per unit
values. When a native unit is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically recalculates the per unit value based
on the native unit setting and the rated data parameter (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen)
associated with it. Conversely, when a per-unit value is edited, BESTCOMSPlus automatically
recalculates the native value based on the per-unit setting and the rated data parameter associated with
it.
Once all per unit values are assigned, if the rated data parameters are changed, BESTCOMSPlus
automatically recalculates all native unit settings based on the modified rated data parameters.
The following settings have native units of Secondary Amps, and the rated data associated with it is
Rated Secondary Phase Amps (on the System Parameters, Rated Data screen).
• Overcurrent 51-x Three-Phase Pickup
• Overcurrent 51-x Single-Phase Pickup

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
An overcurrent trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm configuration
setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Programmable Curves
Each 51 overcurrent element has a Curve setting. See the Time Curve Characteristics chapter for details
on each of the curves available. The user can select integrating reset timing to make the protective
element use integrated reset and emulate an electromechanical induction disk reset characteristic. An
available programmable curve can be used to create a custom curve by selecting coefficients in the
inverse time characteristic equation.
Inverse overcurrent characteristics for trip and reset programmable curves are defined by Equation 17-1
and Equation 17-2. These equations comply with IEEE Std C37.112-1996, IEEE Standard Inverse-Time
Characteristics Equations for Overcurrent Relays. The curve-specific coefficients are defined for the
standard curves as listed in the Time Curve Characteristics chapter. When inverse time overcurrent
characteristic curve P is selected, the coefficients used in the equation are those defined by the user.
Definitions for these equations are provided in Table 17-3.
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = + 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 + 𝐾𝐾 𝑇𝑇𝑅𝑅 =
(𝑀𝑀𝑁𝑁 − 𝐶𝐶)𝑄𝑄 |𝑀𝑀2 − 1|
Equation 17-1. Time OC Characteristics for Trip Equation 17-2. Time OC Characteristics for Reset

Table 17-3. Definitions for Equation 17-1 and Equation 17-2

Parameter Description Explanation
TT Time to trip Time that the 51-x function will take to time out and trip.
D Time dial setting Time dial setting for the 51-x function.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-18 9469300995

Parameter Description Explanation

Measured current in multiples of pickup. The timing algorithm
M Multiple of pickup
has a dynamic range of 0 to 40 times pickup.
Coefficient specific to
A Affects the effective range of the time dial.
selected curve
Coefficient specific to Affects a constant term in the timing equation. Has greatest
B
selected curve effect on curve shape at high multiples of tap.
Affects the multiple of PU where the curve would approach
Coefficient specific to
C infinity if allowed to continue below pickup. Has greatest
selected curve
effect on curve shape near pickup.
Exponent specific to Affects how inverse the characteristics are. Has greatest
N
selected curve effect on curve shape at low to medium multiples of tap.
K Constant Characteristic minimum delay term.
TR Time to reset Relevant if 51-x function is set for integrating reset.
Coefficient specific to
R Affects the speed of reset when integrating reset is selected.
selected curve
Denominator exponent Affects how inverse the characteristics are. Has greater
Q
specific to selected curve affect as Q is increased.
Curve coefficients are entered on the Inverse Overcurrent settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
Programmable curve coefficients can be entered only when the P curve is chosen for the protection
element from the Curve drop-down menu.

Table Curves
BESTCOMSPlus is used to set the 51 element Table Curves (T1, T2, T3, and T4). Using the Settings
Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus, open the Protection, Current, Table Curve (1, 2, 3, or 4) tree branch and
select the table curve to be modified. Refer to Figure 17-15. A minimum of 2 and maximum of 40 points
can be entered for any one T curve. When you are satisfied with the values chosen, select Save Curve.
Use the Settings Explorer to browse to the 51-x element you wish to program and use the drop-down
menu under Curve to select T1, T2, T3, or T4.
Table curves can be entered regardless of the curve chosen for the protection element. However, the
table curve will not be enabled until T1, T2, T3, or T4 is selected as the curve for the protective element.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-19

Figure 17-15. Inverse Overcurrent Table Curve

46 Curve
A 46 Curve is a special curve designed to emulate the I2t withstand ratings of generators using what is
frequently referred to as the generator’s K factor. Do not confuse the 46 curve with the I2 mode. The 46
curve was designed for use with the I2 mode. However, in actuality, the 46 curve can be selected for use
with any mode of the inverse overcurrent element as well.
To use the 46 curve, the user should determine the K factor of the generator and the continuous (I2)2t
rating of the generator (supplied by the manufacturer) and use this to set the time dial and pickup for the
46 curve by the process described in the Time Curve Characteristics chapter. The K factor is the time the
generator can withstand 1 per unit I2 where 1 pu is the relay setting for nominal current.

Voltage Restraint Mode

When a 51 element is set for 3 Phase, IA, IB, or IC mode, the 51 element can be set for voltage control or
voltage restraint mode of operation. This feature is used to allow increased phase overcurrent sensitivity
while providing security from operation due to load current. This feature is also often used for generator
backup protection to ensure delayed tripping during a short-circuit where the fault current contribution
from the generator falls to a value close to the full-load rating of the generator.
A Voltage Restraint threshold of zero (0) disables voltage restraint/control and allows the 51 element to
operate normally.
Source
A Source setting configures an overcurrent element to monitor the voltage at the generator sensing input
terminals or the bus sensing input terminals when voltage restraint is enabled.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-20 9469300995

Control Mode
When set for Control mode of operation, the 51 element is disabled until the measured voltage drops
below the Voltage Restraint threshold. Thus, as long as the voltage on the appropriate phase is above the
Voltage Restraint threshold, the 51 element will be blocked. When set for this mode of operation, the 51
Pickup setting is typically set near or below load current levels.
Restraint Mode
When set for Restraint mode of operation, the pickup of the 51 element is adjusted based upon the
magnitude of the measured voltage. Figure 17-16 shows how the 51 Pickup setting is adjusted in
response to the measured voltage level. Equation 17-3 determines the pickup level for the 51 element
when the measured voltage is between 25% and 100% of the Voltage Restraint threshold. Below 25%,
the pickup level stays at 25%. Above 100%, the pickup level stays at 100%. For example, if the Voltage
Restraint threshold is set for 120 V and the measured voltage on the appropriate phase is 100 V (83% of
the Voltage Restraint threshold), the phase overcurrent pickup level will be reduced to 83% of its setting.
When set for this mode of operation, the 51 element Pickup setting is typically set above worst case, load
current levels.

Figure 17-16. 51 Phase Pickup Level Compensation

𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿

𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = × 51 𝑃𝑃ℎ𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
Equation 17-3. Restraint Pickup Level
Phase VT Configuration
The 51/27R function monitors Vpp. Table 17-4 shows which voltage measurements are used by each 51
element for each possible phase VT connection.
Table 17-4. Phase VT Connection Cross Reference
Phase VT Connection 51A 51B 51C
4W Vab Vbc Vca
3W Vab Vbc Vca
AB Vab n/a n/a
BC n/a Vbc n/a
CA n/a n/a Vca

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-21

Logic Connections
Overcurrent element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
overcurrent element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-17. When the Block input is true, the 51 element
is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 51 element is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-17. Overcurrent Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Overcurrent element operational settings are configured on the Overcurrent settings screen (Figure
17-18) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the Installation
manual.

Figure 17-18. Settings Explorer, Protection, Current, Overcurrent

Phase Current Differential (87G)

The phase-current differential (87G) element monitors the differential current of the protected zone and
provides primary protection for generators. This element is available only in style xxDxxxxEx.
Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus® and element
operational settings are configured on the Phase Current Differential (87G) settings screen in
BESTCOMSPlus.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-22 9469300995

BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Current, Phase Differential (87G)
HMI Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection, Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) > Current
Protection > Differential 87G

Element Operation
The phase-current differential element compares the currents entering and leaving the zone of protection.
In some applications, the zone of protection may include only the generator. In other applications, a
power transformer may be included in the generator zone of protection. If a fault is detected, the
DGC-2020HD initiates a trip signal to isolate the protected zone. This action limits equipment damage
and minimizes impact on the power system.

Functional Description
Figure 17-24 shows a detailed functional diagram of one phase of the phase-current differential protection
function. These functions and comparators are duplicated for each phase.
The measured currents are phase, zero-sequence, and tap compensated. The restraint current function
uses the compensated current to calculate the restraint current magnitude (in multiples of tap).
Depending on the setting, it calculates the maximum or average restraint current. The Operating Current
function determines the magnitude of the fundamental, second, and fifth harmonic differential current as
the phasor sum of those components of the compensated currents.
Figure 17-25 shows the characteristic of the phase current differential protection element. This
comparator has two slope settings and a minimum pickup setting. The slope settings are the ratios of
delta operating current to delta restraint current. The slope settings should be set above the maximum
mismatch caused by excitation losses, tap mismatch, and load tap changers. The minimum pickup setting
determines the minimum sensitivity of the restrained element.
A Minimum Restrained Pickup setting of zero (0) disables the phase current differential (87G) element.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-23

Figure 17-19. 87G Phase Differential Protection Functional Block Diagram

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-24 9469300995

Figure 17-20. Percentage Restrained Differential Characteristic

Trip
The Trip output becomes true when a restrained pickup condition persists for the duration of the element
Time Delay setting. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic elements and to a
physical relay output to annunciate the condition and to initiate corrective action.

Transient Monitor
A transient monitor detects the effects of CT saturation during a through fault. The 87G element monitors
the change in restraint current versus the change in operate current. For an internal fault, the restraint
current and operate current will experience a step increase at the same time. For an external fault, there
should be no operate current. If CT saturation occurs during a through fault, the operate current will
increase at some time after the restraint current increases.
The restrained or unrestrained differential must be picked up for the transient monitor to detect a
transient. The Transient Operate Time setting defines how long the transient remains detected after the
restrained or unrestrained differential drops out. The Transient Delay setting affects only the restrained
Trip output.

Harmonics
The second and fifth harmonic functions check the ratio of the second and fifth harmonic operate currents
to the fundamental operate current. Traditional harmonic restraint protection operates on the ratio of
harmonic current to total operate current. This contrasts with the DGC-2020HD method of operating on
the ratio of total harmonic current to only the fundamental operate current. For this reason, the DGC-
2020HD provides greater security for inrush and overexcitation with the same harmonic inhibit ratio
settings used with traditional differential relays. When either of these two comparators is above the
threshold, the percentage-restrained output is blocked from setting the Restrained Trip logic output. If the
second or fifth harmonic inhibit comparators are picked up for any of the three phases, the Second
Harmonic Inhibit and Fifth Harmonic Inhibit logic outputs respectively are also set.
In many cases, the second harmonic content of the inrush current may show up primarily in only one or
two phases, which can cause one or two phases to not be inhibited. The DGC-2020HD allows the second
harmonic currents to be shared between the three phases. When second harmonic sharing is enabled,
the magnitude of the second harmonic operating current is summed from all three phases and this
magnitude is used by the second harmonic comparator for each phase instead of the second harmonic
operate current for only that phase. This is superior to other methods of cross blocking since each phase
element operates independently in its comparison of operating current to harmonic current. Thus, security

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-25

is enhanced without sacrificing dependability because a faulted phase will not be restrained by inrush on
unfaulted phases as is the case with cross blocking schemes.
A 2nd Harmonic setting of zero (0) disables the 2nd Harmonic Restraint. A 5th Harmonic setting of zero (0)
disables the 5th Harmonic Restraint.

Unrestrained Tripping
The 87G element provides high-speed tripping for high-grade faults inside the zone of protection. If the
operate current is above the Unrestrained Tripping threshold for any of the three phases, the
Unrestrained Trip logic output becomes true. The transient monitor function also enhances security for
this function by doubling the pickup threshold when CT saturation is detected. The minimum setting for
the Unrestrained Tripping threshold should be the maximum inrush current with a small margin.
An Unrestrained Tripping Pickup setting of zero (0) disables the unrestrained trip.

Alarm Configuration
A phase current differential trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.
An Alarm Slope setting of zero (0) disables the alarm.

Logic Connections
Phase-current, differential-element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in
BESTCOMSPlus. The phase-current, differential-element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-21. Logic
inputs and outputs are summarized in Table 17-5.

Figure 17-21. Phase Current Differential Element Logic Block

Table 17-5. Logic Inputs and Outputs

Name Function Purpose
Block Input Disables the 87G function when true
Trip Output True when the 87G element is in a trip condition
Pickup Output True when the 87G element is in a pickup condition
Unrestrained Trip Output True when the 87G element is in an unrestrained trip
condition
2nd Harmonic Output True when the 87G is inhibited by 2nd harmonic ratio
Inhibit
5th Harmonic Inhibit Output True when the 87G is inhibited by 5th harmonic ratio

Tap Compensation Settings

The measured currents must be tap adjusted to eliminate magnitude mismatch prior to being used by the
Phase Current Differential Protection (87G) element. The tap adjust factors can be manually calculated
per Equation 17-4. Or, the user can enter the MVA and kV base parameters (Equation 17-5) and the

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-26 9469300995

DGC-2020HD will calculate the tap-adjust factors using the CT Ratio (CTR) and Compensation Factor
(COMP) parameters from the current measurement input function settings. For a transformer application,
the mismatch will be at a minimum if the actual transformer voltage ratings are used.

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 1000 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶

𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 =
√3 × 𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
Equation 17-4. Calculate Tap Adjust Factors

Table 17-6. MVA and kVn Base Parameters

Parameter Description Explanation
TAPn Restraint winding The DGC-2020HD has two restraint windings (two taps).
MVA MVA base Full load MVA or top rating of the protected equipment.
kVn kV base for CT input n L-L Voltage in kV for each CT input circuit.
CTRn CT ratio for CT input n Actual ratio not effective ratio.
COMPn Phase compensation √3 if CTs are connected in Delta (CTcon = DAB or DAC).
adjustment factor for 1 in all other cases.
CT input n
The input currents can be tap adjusted up to a spread ratio of 10:1. If the ratio between TAP1 and TAP2
is greater than 10, it will be necessary to adjust the CT ratios to bring the tap factors closer together.
When the auto-tap calculation feature is used, the DGC-2020HD will give an error message if the spread
ratio is greater than 10.
If one of the calculated taps is outside the acceptable range (2 to 20 for 5 ampere units or 0.4 to 4 for 1
ampere units), the auto-tap calculation feature will select the nearest acceptable tap and calculate the
other tap (two at a time) so that the correct spread ratio is maintained. If the user is manually calculating
the taps, the same adjustment should be made.
BESTCOMSPlus is used to provide the auto tap calculation by filling in the appropriate fields on the
Differential Transformers Setup screen and pressing the Calculate Taps button. Alternatively, tap values
can be entered manually.

Operational Settings
The settings for restrained minimum pickup and unrestrained trip are set in multiples of tap. If the ideal
taps calculated by Equation 17-4 fall within the acceptable range, the sensitivity settings will be in Per
Unit on the MVA Base used in the equation. For example, a 100 MVA, 115 kV transformer has a full load
(1 per unit) current of 500 amperes. A pickup setting of 10 times tap for the unrestrained output pickup
(URO) element is equivalent to 5,000 primary amperes of differential current.
If the taps need to be adjusted upwards or downwards to fit within the acceptable range, the sensitivity
settings for these protective elements should be adjusted as well. Equation 17-5 gives the adjustment
factor. The definitions for the variables in Equation 17-5 are the same as those for Equation 17-4. For
example, the ideal taps (TAPnI) were calculated using Equation 17-5 and Equation 17-6 and found to be
1.6 and 5.0. They needed to be adjusted upwards so that the actual taps (TAPnA) are 2.0 and 6.25. Per
Equation 17-5, X = 0.8. It is desired that the minimum pickup of the restrained element be 0.35 per unit on
the circuit base. The actual setting should be 0.35 ∗ 0.8 = 0.28 to achieve the same sensitivity.
The pickup settings in Times Tap can be related to primary amperes by Equation 17-6. Mpu is the
minimum pickup setting in Times Tap. The definitions for the remaining variables in Equation 17-6 are the
same as those for Equation 17-4.
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑙𝑙 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 1000 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝑋𝑋 = = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 =
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝐴𝐴 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝐴𝐴 × √3 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
Equation 17-5. Tap Adjustment Equation Equation 17-6. Calculate Primary Amps

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-27

% of Maximum - The maximum of the compensated input currents is used. For example, the restraint
current for phase A would be IRA = max (IAXCOMPS) where x = 2 for two current inputs.
% of Average - The average of the compensated input currents is used. For example, the restraint
current for phase A would be given by Equation 17-7.

𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐼𝐼𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴

𝐼𝐼𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 =
𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼

Equation 17-7. Calculate Restraint Current for Phase A, % of Average

Phase current differential element operational settings are configured on the Phase Current Differential
(87G) settings screen (Figure 17-22) in BESTCOMSPlus. A legend for the chart (Figure 17-23) is shown
by clicking the Help button on this screen. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the
Installation manual.

Figure 17-22. Settings Explorer, Protection, Current

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-28 9469300995

Figure 17-23. Phase Current Differential Operation Chart

Neutral Current Differential (87N)

The neutral current differential (87N) element provides sensitive differential protection from phase-to-
ground faults in the wye-connected winding. On impedance grounded systems, ground fault levels may
be reduced below the sensitivity of the phase differential protection. The result is that ground faults within
the protected zone have to be cleared by time delayed backup overcurrent protection if sensitive
differential protection is not available. This element is available only in style xxDxxxxEx.
Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogic™Plus screen in BESTCOMSPlus® and element
operational settings are configured on the Neutral Current Differential (87N) settings screen in
BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Current, Neutral Differential (87N)
HMI Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection, Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) > Current
Protection > Neutral Differential 87N

Element Operation
The 87N element detects an imbalance between the neutral current (3I0) and ground current (IG).

CT Flip
For a legacy CT with an auxiliary CT installed, the CT Flip setting will correct the polarity of the 3I0.
Setting the CT Flip to true will introduce a 180° phase shift internally in the 3I0 calculation.

Source
The Source setting configures the neutral current differential element to monitor the ground CT and Gen,
Bus 1, or Bus 2 CTs.
For Protection, set one Aux CT up for ground current. For Bus 1 or Bus 2 protection, set one Aux CT for
Bus x Phase A, one for Bus x Phase B, one for Bus x Phase C, and the last one for ground current.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-29

To set up Aux CTs see the Configuration chapter. For Aux CT terminals, refer to the Terminals and
Connectors chapter in the Installation manual.

Overcorrection Coefficient
The 87N element is directionally supervised by making a comparison of two vectors, the calculated IOP
vector and the current present on the IG input terminals. First, the magnitude of the vector (IopMag) is
checked by the equation IopMag = 3I0 + IG to determine if it is above the user defined pickup setting.
Second, the IG quantity, as seen at the terminals, is used as the polarizing quantity to determine
directionality (IopDir) by the equation IopDir = IG + (OVCR * 3I0). The overcorrection coefficient (OVCR)
is used to add security to the directional element in the previous equation. For the IopDir check, OVCR is
used to offset the 3I0 measurement by the quantity determined in the Overcorrection Coefficient setting,
which at low levels of 3I0 and IG, will provide greater confidence that the directional criterion is met. The
decision to trip will be made only when IopMag is above the user defined pickup setting and IopDir is
within ±90° of the current present on the IG terminals.

Transient Delay
A user-defined transient delay time provides security from misoperation on false residual caused by CT
saturation during a through fault. If the transient monitor function from the phase current differential (87)
function detects CT saturation, the 87N Trip logic output is routed through a timer. The timer should be
set longer than the normal clearing time for a fault just outside the zone of protection to allow it to ride-
through until the external fault is cleared.

Pickup Calculations
The differential value is calculated as shown in Equation 17-1 and Equation 17-9 and displayed in
BESTCOMSPlus metering and on the front-panel display.
Phase CT Ratio
If CT Flip Setting = Yes, then Iop = I sec −� × 3I0sec �
round CT Ratio
Equation 17-8. Iop Calculation when CT Flip Setting = Yes

Phase CT Ratio
If CT Flip Setting = No, then Iop = I sec +� × 3I0sec �
round CT Ratio
Equation 17-9. Iop Calculation when CT Flip Setting = No

Pickup and Trip

When the calculated Iop increases above the threshold established by the Iop Minimum setting, a timer
begins timing towards a trip.
Timer duration is established by the Time Delay. A Time Delay of zero (0) makes the 87N element
instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If a neutral current differential pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Time Delay setting,
the element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element time delay expires, the timer is reset, no corrective
action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of neutral current differential.
An Iop Minimum setting of zero (0) disables the neutral current differential (87N) element.

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-30 9469300995

The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
A neutral current differential trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Logic Connections
Neutral current differential element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in
BESTCOMSPlus. The neutral current differential element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-24. When
the Block input is true, the 87N element is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 87N element is in a
trip condition.

Figure 17-24. Neutral Current Differential Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Neutral current differential element operational settings are configured on the neutral current differential
settings screen (Figure 17-25) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications
chapter in the Installation manual.

Figure 17-25. Settings Explorer, Protection, Current

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-31

Power (32)
Six power protection (32) elements monitor three-phase or single-phase real power (watts). An element
can be configured to protect against overpower or underpower conditions.
The six, identical power protection elements are designated 32-1, 32-2, 32-3, 32-4, 32-5, and 32-6.
Element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus and element
operational settings are configured on the Power settings screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Power, Power (32)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Power Protection > Power (32)

Element Operation
Power protection can be used in applications where excessive power flow in the tripping direction is
undesired.
Two sets of over/under power settings are provided for each element: one for three-phase generator
connections and one for single-phase generator connections. The Pickup setting entered is based on the
CT secondary side (DGC-2020HD). When a single-phase override contact input is received, the DGC-
2020HD automatically switches from the three-phase power settings to the single-phase power settings.
A 32 element monitors three-phase real power when three-phase sensing is active or single-phase real
power if single-phase sensing is active.

Source
Source settings configure a power element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or the bus
sensing input terminals.

Direction of Power Flow

In addition to exceeding the threshold established by the Pickup setting, direction of power flow (forward
or reverse) must match the Direction setting for the 32 element to operate. In the DGC-2020HD, the
forward and reverse directions are defined by the polarity voltage and current connections to the
controller as shown in Figure 17-26. Based on IEEE polarity convention, forward power is defined as bus
to line and reverse power is defined as line to bus.

Figure 17-26. Direction of Power Flow Defined by the Polarity of Voltage and Current Connections

Over and Under Mode

An Over Under setting configures a power element to trip for an overpower or underpower condition.

Pickup and Trip

When the calculated real power increases above or decreases below the threshold established by the
Pickup setting, a timer begins timing towards a trip.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-32 9469300995

Timer duration is established by the Activation Delay. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the 32
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If power pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Activation Delay setting, the element
Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic elements or
a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of over/under power.
A pickup setting of zero (0) disables the power protection (32) element.

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting functions as a power dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup output.

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
An over/under power trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Logic Connections
Power element logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The power
element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-27. When the Block input is true, the 32 element is disabled.
The Trip output is true when the 32 element is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-27. Power Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Power element operational settings are configured on the Power settings screen (Figure 17-28) in
BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the Installation manual.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-33

Figure 17-28. Settings Explorer, Protection, Power

Loss of Excitation (40Q)

Two loss of excitation protection (40Q) elements monitor three-phase or single-phase reactive power
(vars).
The two, identical loss of excitation protection elements are designated 40Q-1 and 40Q-2. Element logic
connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus and element operational settings
are configured on the Loss of Excitation screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Power, Loss of Excitation (40Q)
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Settings Group x (where x = 0 to 3) >
Power Protection > Loss of Excitation (40Q)

Element Operation
Two sets of loss of excitation settings are provided: one for three-phase generator connections and one
for single-phase generator connections. The Pickup setting entered is based on the percentage of the
machine Rated kvar on the Rated Data screen. When a single-phase override contact input is received,
the DGC-2020HD automatically switches from the three-phase loss of excitation settings to the single-
phase loss of excitation settings. A 40Q element monitors three-phase reactive power when three-phase
sensing is active or single-phase reactive power if single-phase sensing is active.

Source
Source settings configure a loss of excitation element to monitor the generator sensing input terminals or
the bus sensing input terminals.

Pickup and Trip

When a generator’s excitation power is lost, the generator acts as a large inductor as it begins to absorb
large quantities of vars. The 40Q element acts on the principal that if a generator begins to absorb vars
outside of its steady-state capability curve, it has likely lost its normal excitation supply. It compares the
DGC-2020HD Protection
17-34 9469300995

reactive power to the 40Q response curve defined by the Pickup setting. When the reactive power is
within the 40Q tripping region, a timer begins timing towards a trip. Refer to Figure 17-29.
Timer duration is established by the Activation Delay. Activation delays are recommended for tripping.
Adding a small delay will help assure that false alarms do not occur for transient fault conditions or swings
in the power system. An Activation Delay of zero (0) makes the 40Q element with no intentional time
delay.
If a loss of excitation condition persists for the duration of the element Activation Delay setting, the
element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of loss of excitation.

Figure 17-29. Generator Capability Curve vs. 40Q Response

Hysteresis
The hysteresis setting functions as a loss of excitation dropout by preventing rapid switching of the pickup
output.

Low-Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
A loss of excitation trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-35

Logic Connections
Loss of excitation logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The loss
of excitation element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-30. When the Block input is true, the 40Q
element is disabled. The Trip output is true when the 40Q element is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-30. Loss of Excitation Element Logic Block

Operational Settings
Loss of Excitation element operational settings are configured on the Loss of Excitation settings screen
(Figure 17-31) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the
Installation manual.

Figure 17-31. Settings Explorer, Protection, Power, Loss of Excitation

Field Overvoltage
One field overvoltage protection element is available when a VRM-2020 is enabled.
A field overvoltage condition occurs when the field voltage exceeds the pickup level for the duration of the
Time Delay. Field overvoltage protection can be enabled and disabled without altering the Pickup and
Time Delay settings. Field overvoltage pickup and trip elements in BESTlogic™Plus can be used in a
logic scheme to initiate corrective action in response to the condition. Protection is inhibited when the
regulator is not started.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Field Protection, Field Overvoltage
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Field Protection > Field Overvoltage

Element Operation
Field Overvoltage protection can be used to prevent equipment damage when a field overvoltage
condition exists.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-36 9469300995

Pickup and Trip

When the field voltage increases above the threshold established by the Pickup setting, a timer begins
timing towards a trip.
The duration of the timer is established by the Time Delay setting. A setting of zero (0) makes the field
overvoltage element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
If a field overvoltage pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Time Delay setting, the
element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of field overvoltage.

Alarm Configuration
A field overvoltage trip can be user-selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Logic Connections
Field overvoltage logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The field
overvoltage element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-32. When the Block input is true, the field
overvoltage element is disabled. The Trip output is true when the field overvoltage element is in a trip
condition.

Figure 17-32. Field Overvoltage Logic Block

Operational Settings
Field overvoltage element operational settings are configured on the Field Overvoltage settings screen
(Figure 17-33) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the
Installation manual.

Figure 17-33. Settings Explorer, Protection, Field Protection, Field Overvoltage

Loss of Sensing
One loss of sensing (LOS) protection element is available when a VRM-2020 is enabled.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Field Protection, Loss of Sensing
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Field Protection > Loss of Sensing

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-37

Element Operation
LOS protection can be used to prevent equipment damage when an LOS condition exists.
Two sets of LOS settings are provided: one for three-phase generator connections and one for single-
phase generator connections. Loss of sensing pickup is configured by voltage balance, voltage
unbalance (three-phase only), and fault current levels. When a single-phase override contact input is
received, the DGC-2020HD automatically switches from the three-phase LOS settings to the single-phase
LOS settings. Protection is inhibited when the regulator is not started.

Pickup and Trip

The generator voltage is monitored for an LOS condition. For three-phase configurations, an LOS event is
calculated using sequence components. An LOS event occurs when the positive-sequence voltage drops
below the Voltage Balanced Level setting of the AVR setpoint, or when the negative-sequence voltage
increases above the Voltage Unbalanced Level setting of the positive-sequence voltage. For single-phase
configurations, an LOS event occurs when either measured L-N voltage (A-N or B-N for single-phase A-B,
or C-N for single-phase CA) drops below the Voltage Level Setting of the AVR setpoint.
A time delay is started when the event occurs, delaying the alarm by a predetermined time. If the pickup
condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no corrective action is
taken, and the element is rearmed for any other occurrences of field overvoltage.
LOS protection is automatically disabled when a short circuit exists. A short circuit is detected when the
measured current is greater than the configured fault current setting for a single-phase CT connection
and when the positive-sequence current is greater than the configured fault current setting for a three-
phase CT connection.

Transfer to Manual
An LOS condition can be used to initiate transfer to manual (FCR) control mode. It also can be configured
in BESTlogic™Plus to initiate other actions. Protection can be enabled and disabled without altering the
individual LOS settings.

Low Line Scale Factor

A low-line scale factor setting is used to automatically adjust the undervoltage pickup settings in
applications that might utilize more than one type of genset connection. The scale factor setting is
implemented when the DGC-2020HD is determined to be in a low-line configuration. The value of the
scale factor setting serves as a multiplier for the pickup settings. For example, if the DGC-2020HD is
determined to be in a low-line configuration and the scale factor setting is 2.000, the pickup setting will be
doubled (2.000 x PU).
The low-line configuration can be determined through the Auto Configuration Detection feature or the
state of a contact input if the Low-Line Override function is assigned to a contact input via the
Programmable Functions screen. If either method indicates a low-line configuration is in effect, then the
DGC-2020HD is configured for low-line operation.

Alarm Configuration
An LOS trip can be user selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm configuration
setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Logic Connections
LOS logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The LOS element
logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-34. When the Block input is true, the LOS element is disabled. The
Trip output is true when the LOS element is in a trip condition.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-38 9469300995

Figure 17-34. Loss of Sensing Logic Block

Operational Settings
LOS element operational settings are configured on the Loss of Sensing settings screen (Figure 17-35) in
BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the Installation manual.

Figure 17-35. Settings Explorer, Protection, Field Protection, Loss of Sensing

Exciter Diode Monitor

The exciter diode monitor (EDM) monitors the condition of a brushless exciter’s power semiconductors by
monitoring the exciter field current. The EDM detects both open and shorted rotating diodes in the exciter
bridge. Exciter diode monitoring is available when a VRM-2020, with optional exciter diode monitoring, is
enabled.
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Protection, Field Protection, Exciter Diode Monitor
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings Explorer > Protection > Field Protection > EDM

Element Operation
Exciter diode monitor protection can be used to prevent equipment damage when an exciter diode fault
occurs. Protection is inhibited when the regulator is not started.

Pickup and Trip

When the RMS ripple of the exciter field current increases above the threshold established by the Pickup
setting, a timer begins timing towards a trip.
The duration of the timer is established by the Time Delay setting. A setting of zero (0) makes the exciter
diode monitor element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 17-39

If an exciter diode monitor pickup condition persists for the duration of the element Time Delay setting,
the element Trip output becomes true. In BESTlogicPlus, the Trip output can be connected to other logic
elements or a physical relay output to annunciate the condition and initiate corrective action.
If the pickup condition subsides before the element activation delay expires, the timer is reset, no
corrective action is taken, and the element is rearmed for any other exciter diode faults.

Alarm Configuration
An exciter diode monitor trip can be user selected to trigger a different action depending on the alarm
configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Logic Connections
Exciter diode monitor logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
exciter diode monitor element logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-36. When the Block input is true, the
exciter diode monitor element is disabled. The Trip output is true when the exciter diode monitor element
is in a trip condition.

Figure 17-36. Exciter Diode Monitor Logic Block

Operational Settings
Exciter Diode Monitor element operational settings are configured on the Exciter Diode Monitor settings
screen (Figure 17-35) in BESTCOMSPlus. Setting ranges are defined in the Specifications chapter in the
Installation manual.

Figure 17-37. Settings Explorer, Protection, Field Protection, Exciter Diode Monitor

Setting Groups
Four setting groups allow for adapting the coordination settings to optimize them for a predictable
situation.
These four setting groups are designated Setting Group 0, Setting Group 1, Setting Group 2, and Setting
Group 3. Setting group logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus.

Setting Group Functions

The group of settings that is active at any point in time is controlled by setting group selection logic. This
function logic allows for manual (logic) selection.

DGC-2020HD Protection
17-40 9469300995

Logic Inputs
This function monitors logic inputs D0 through D3 and changes the active setting group according to the
status of these three inputs. These inputs can be connected to logic expressions such as contact sensing
outputs.

Logic Outputs
Setting group function logic has four logic variable outputs, SG0 through SG3. The appropriate variable is
asserted when each setting group is active. These logic variables can be used in programmable logic to
modify the logic based upon which setting group is active.

Changing Setting Groups

When the DGC-2020HD switches to a new setting group, all functions are reset and initialized with the
new operating parameters. The settings change occurs instantaneously so at no time is the DGC-
2020HD off line.

Setting Group Selection

There is a direct correlation between each logic input and the setting group that will be selected. That is,
asserting input D0 selects SG0 and asserting input D1 selects SG1, etc. The active setting group latches-
in after the input is read so they can be pulsed. It is not necessary that the input be maintained. If one or
more inputs are asserted at the same time, the numerically higher setting group will be activated. A pulse
must be present for approximately one second for the setting group change to occur.

Logic Connections
Setting Group logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The setting
group logic block is illustrated in Figure 17-38.

Figure 17-38. Setting Group Logic Block

Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 18-1

18 • Time Curve Characteristics

The inverse time overcurrent characteristic curves provided by the DGC-2020HD (style xxExxxxxx only)
closely emulate most of the common electromechanical, induction-disk, overcurrent relays sold in North
America. To further improve proper relay coordination, a selection of integrated reset or instantaneous
reset characteristics are also provided.

Curve Specifications
Timing Accuracy ............................... Within ±500 milliseconds of indicated operating point.
Sixteen inverse time functions, one fixed time function, one 46 time function, and one programmable time
function can be selected. Characteristic curves for the inverse and definite time functions are defined by
the following equations and comply with IEEE Std C37.112 - IEEE Standard Inverse-Time Characteristic
Equations for Overcurrent Relays.

𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = + 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 + 𝐾𝐾
(𝑀𝑀𝑁𝑁 − 𝐶𝐶)𝑄𝑄
Equation 18-1

𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝑇𝑇𝑅𝑅 =
|𝑀𝑀2 − 1|

Equation 18-2

TT = Time to trip when M ≥ 1

TR = Time to reset if relay is set for integrating reset when M < 1. Otherwise, reset is 50
milliseconds or less
D = Time Dial setting (0.0 to 9.9) ∗
M = Multiple of Pickup setting (0 to 40)
A, B, C, N, K = Constants for the particular curve
R = Constant defining the reset time
Q = Denominator exponent
∗ Timing range is 0.0 to 7,200 seconds when the F (fixed) curve is selected.
Table 18-1 lists time characteristic curve constants. See the figures after the tables for graphs of the
characteristics.

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-2 9469300995

Table 18-1. 51 Time Characteristic Curve Constants

Reset
Curve Trip Characteristic Constants
Curve Name †
Selection
A B C N K Q R
S1 Short Inverse 0.2663 0.03393 1 1.2969 0.028 1 0.5
S2 Short Inverse 0.0286 0.0208 1 0.9844 0.028 1 0.094
L1 Long Inverse 5.6143 2.18592 1 1 0.028 1 15.75
L2 Long Inverse 2.3955 0 1 0.3125 0.028 1 7.8001
D Definite Time 0.4797 0.21359 1 1.5625 0.028 1 0.875
M Moderately Inverse 0.3022 0.1284 1 0.5 0.028 1 1.75
I1 Inverse Time 8.9341 0.17966 1 2.0938 0.028 1 9
I2 Inverse Time 0.2747 0.10426 1 0.4375 0.028 1 0.8868
V1 Very Inverse 5.4678 0.10814 1 2.0469 0.028 1 5.5
V2 Very Inverse 4.4309 0.0991 1 1.9531 0.028 1 5.8231
E1 Extremely Inverse 7.7624 0.02758 1 2.0938 0.028 1 7.75
E2 Extremely Inverse 4.9883 0.0129 1 2.0469 0.028 1 4.7742
A Standard Inverse 0.01414 0 1 0.02 0.028 1 2
B Very Inverse (I2t) 1.4636 0 1 1.0469 0.028 1 3.25
C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 8.2506 0 1 2.0469 0.028 1 8
G Long Time Inverse (I2t) 12.1212 0 1 1 0.028 1 29
F Fixed Time ∗ 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
Negative-Sequence 1
46 ‡ 0 0 2 0.028 100
Overcurrent
0 to 0.5 to 0.1 to
P User Programmable § 0 to 600 0 to 25 0.028 0 to 30
1 2.5 10

∗ Curve F has a fixed delay of one second times the Time Dial setting.
† Instantaneous or integrating reset is selected on the Overcurrent setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus®.
‡ Constant A is variable for the 46 curve and is determined, as necessary, based on system full-load
current setting, minimum pickup, and K factor settings.
§ The programmable curve allows for four significant digits after the decimal place for every variable.

Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curve Graphs

The figures after the tables illustrate the characteristic curves of the DGC-2020HD. Table 18-2 cross-
references each curve to existing electromechanical relay characteristics. Equivalent time dial settings
were calculated at a value of five times pickup.

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-3

Table 18-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference

Curve Curve Name Similar To
S1 Short Inverse ABB CO-2
S2 Short Inverse GE IAC-55
L1 Long Inverse ABB CO-5
L2 Long Inverse GE IAC-66
D Definite Time ABB CO-6
M Moderately Inverse ABB CO-7
I1 Inverse Time ABB CO-8
I2 Inverse Time GE IAC-51
V1 Very Inverse ABB CO-9
V2 Very Inverse GE IAC-53
E1 Extremely Inverse ABB CO-11
E2 Extremely Inverse GE IAC-77
A Standard Inverse Refer to BS 142
B Very Inverse (I2t) Refer to BS 142
2
C Extremely Inverse (I t) Refer to BS 142
G Long Time Inverse (I2t) Refer to BS 142
F Fixed Time n/a
46 K Factor n/a
P User Programmable n/a

Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference

While the time characteristic curve shapes have been optimized for each relay, time dial settings of Basler
Electric relays are not identical to the settings of electromechanical induction disk overcurrent relays.
Table 18-3 helps you convert the time dial settings of induction disk relays to the equivalent setting for
Basler Electric relays. Enter time dial settings using BESTCOMSPlus. For more information, refer to the
Protection chapter.

Using Table 18-3

Cross-reference table values were obtained by inspection of published electromechanical time current
characteristic curves. The time delay for a current of five times tap was entered into the time dial
calculator function for each time dial setting. The equivalent Basler Electric time dial setting was then
entered into the cross-reference table.
If your electromechanical relay time dial setting is between the values provided in the table, it will be
necessary to estimate the correct intermediate value between the electromechanical setting and the
Basler Electric setting.
The DGC-2020 has a maximum time dial setting of 9.9. When the F (fixed) curve is selected, the
maximum timing range is 7,200 seconds. The Basler Electric equivalent time dial setting for the
electromechanical maximum setting is provided in the cross-reference table even if it exceeds 9.9. This
allows interpolation as noted above.
Basler Electric time current characteristics are determined by a linear mathematical equation. The
induction disk of an electromechanical relay has a certain degree of nonlinearity due to inertial and friction
effects. For this reason, even though every effort has been made to provide characteristic curves with
minimum deviation from the published electromechanical curves, slight deviations can exist between
them.

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-4 9469300995

In applications where the time coordination between curves is extremely close, we recommend that you
choose the optimal time dial setting by inspection of the coordination study. In applications where
coordination is tight, it is recommended that you retrofit your circuits with Basler Electric electronic relays
to ensure high timing accuracy.
Table 18-3. Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference
Electromechanical Relay Time Dial Setting
Equivalent
Curve 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0
To
Basler Electric Equivalent Time Dial Setting
S1 ABB CO-2 0.3 0.8 1.7 2.4 3.4 4.2 5.0 5.8 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.7
L1 ABB CO-5 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.3 3.3 4.2 5.0 6.0 7.0 7.8 8.8 9.9
D ABB CO-6 0.5 1.1 2.0 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.0 5.9 7.2 8.0 8.9 n/a
M ABB CO-7 0.4 0.8 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.3 5.3 6.1 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.8
I1 ABB CO-8 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.3 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.8 6.8 7.6 8.7 n/a
V1 ABB CO-9 0.3 0.7 1.4 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.8 5.7 6.7 7.8 8.7 9.6
E1 ABB CO-11 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.0 5.7 6.6 7.8 8.5 n/a
I2 GE IAC-51 0.6 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.7 4.8 5.7 6.8 8.0 9.3 n/a n/a
V2 GE IAC-53 0.4 0.8 1.6 2.4 3.4 4.3 5.1 6.3 7.2 8.4 9.6 n/a
S2 GE IAC-55 0.2 1.0 2.0 3.1 4.0 4.9 6.1 7.2 8.1 8.9 9.8 n/a
L2 GE IAC-66 0.4 0.9 1.8 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.3 7.2 8.5 9.7 n/a n/a
E2 GE IAC-77 0.5 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.5 4.3 5.2 6.2 7.4 8.2 9.9 n/a

The 46 Curve
The 46 curve (Figure 18-17) is a special curve designed to emulate the (I2)2t withstand ratings of
generators using what is frequently referred to as the generator K factor.

The 46 Curve Characteristics

46 Pickup Current
Generators have a maximum continuous rating for negative sequence current. This is typically expressed
as a percent of stator rating. When using the 46 curve, the user should convert the continuous I2 rating
data to actual secondary current at the relay. This value (plus some margin, if appropriate) should be
entered as the pickup setting. For example, if a generator’s rated full-load current is 5 amperes, a pu
setting of 0.5 A would allow 10% continuous I2.
46 Time Dial (= Generator K factor)
The amount of time that a generator can withstand a given level of unbalance is defined by Equation
18-3.
𝐾𝐾
𝑡𝑡 =
(𝐼𝐼2 )2
Equation 18-3
The K factor gives the time that a generator can withstand 1 per unit negative sequence current. For
example, with a K factor of 20, since (I2)2 becomes 1 at 1 per unit of current, the generator can withstand
the condition for 20 seconds. Typical values for generator K factors are in the 2 to 40 range. The relay
uses the “nominal current” setting of the relay to determine what corresponds to 1 per unit current in the
generator.
When curve 46 is selected, the relay changes the range of the allowed time dial to 1 to 99 (instead of the
time dial range of 0.1 to 9.9 for all the other curves). The user should enter the “K” factor of the generator
into the time dial field.

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-5

Relay Equation
When the 46 function is used, the relay uses the K factor (i.e., 46 time dial setting), 46 minimum pickup
setting, and generator full-load current to create a constant Z (see Equation 18-4).
2
𝐼𝐼𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑍𝑍 = 46 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 � �
46 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
Equation 18-4

The time to trip equation used in the relay is:

𝑍𝑍
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = + 0.028 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑀𝑀2
Equation 18-5

where:
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐼𝐼2
𝑀𝑀 =
46 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
Equation 18-6

which, when M > 1, reduces to:

𝐼𝐼𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 46 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 � �
𝐼𝐼2 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
Equation 18-7

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-6 9469300995

Figure 18-1. Time Characteristic Curve S1, Short Inverse (Similar to ABB CO-2)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-7

Figure 18-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse (Similar To GE IAC-55)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-8 9469300995

Figure 18-3. Time Characteristic Curve L1, Long Inverse (Similar to ABB CO-5)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-9

Figure 18-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse (Similar To GE IAC-66)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-10 9469300995

Figure 18-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time (Similar To ABB CO-6)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-11

Figure 18-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse (Similar to ABB CO-7)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-12 9469300995

Figure 18-7. Time Characteristic Curve I1, Inverse Time (Similar to ABB CO-8)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-13

Figure 18-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time (Similar to GE IAC-51)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-14 9469300995

Figure 18-9. Time Characteristic Curve V1, Very Inverse (Similar to ABB CO-9)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-15

Figure 18-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse (Similar to GE IAC-53)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-16 9469300995

Figure 18-11. Time Characteristic Curve E1, Extremely Inverse (Similar to ABB CO-11)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-17

Figure 18-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse (Similar to GE IAC-77)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-18 9469300995

Figure 18-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse (BS 142)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-19

Figure 18-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse (BS 142)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-20 9469300995

Figure 18-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse (BS 142)

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 18-21

Figure 18-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Time Inverse (BS 142)

DGC-2020HD Time Curve Characteristics

18-22 9469300995

Figure 18-17. 46 Time Characteristic Curve

Note
Curves are shown extending further to the left than they will in
practice. Curves stop at pickup level. For example, if the user selects
5A FLC with a pickup setting of 0.5 A, the per-unit pickup is 0.1 A. The
relay will not pick up at less than 0.1 pu I2 for these settings.

Time Curve Characteristics DGC-2020HD

9469300995 19-1

19 • Configurable Protection
Configurable protection can be used when the standard protection available with the DGC-2020HD does
not meet the needs of the application. Thirty-two configurable protection elements are provided.

Element Setup
Parameter Selection
The following parameters can be selected:
• Oil Pressure • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** IA
• Temperature • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** IB
• Battery Voltage • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** IC
• RPM • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** I Avg
• Fuel Level • IG
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** Hz • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kW A
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** VAB • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kW B
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** VBC • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kW C
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** VCA • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kW Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** V Avg (L-L) • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kW A
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** VAN • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kW B
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** VBN • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kW C
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** VCN • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kW Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** V Avg (L-N) • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kW A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** Hz • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kW B
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** VAB • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kW C
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** VBC • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kW Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** VCA • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kVA A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** V Avg (L-L) • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kVA B
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** VAN • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kVA C
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** VBN • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kVA Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** VCN • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kVA A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** V Avg (L-N) • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kVA B
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** Hz • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kVA C
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** VAB • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kVA Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** VBC • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kVA A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** VCA • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kVA B
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** V Avg (L-L) • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kVA C
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** VAN • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kVA Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** VBN • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kvar A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** VCN • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kvar B
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** V Avg (L-N) • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kvar C
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** PF • **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** kvar Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** PF • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kvar A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** PF • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kvar B
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** Positive kWH • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kvar C
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** Negative kWH • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** kvar Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** Positive kWH • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kvar A
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** Negative kWH • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kvar B
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** Positive kWH • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kvar C
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** Negative kWH • **ProgMenuLabels.Bus2Name** kvar Total
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** IA • Fuel Pressure
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** IB • Injector metering rail pressure
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** IC • Total fuel used
• **ProgMenuLabels.GenName** I Avg • Fuel temperature
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** IA • Engine oil temperature
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** IB • Engine intercooler temperature
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** IC • Coolant pressure
• **ProgMenuLabels.Bus1Name** I Avg • Fuel rate

DGC-2020HD Configurable Protection

19-2 9469300995

• Boost pressure • kW error

• Intake manifold temperature • kvar error
• Charge air temperature • Power Factor Setpoint
• Engine Percent Load • System Online kvar Capacity
• **AI1Label.Label** • Number of units in active segment
• **AI2Label.Label** • Reserve available
• **AI3Label.Label** • Adjusted Reserve available
• **AI4Label.Label** • Mains Baseload
• kW Load Percent • Total System kW Load
• Number of units online • Sync Slip Angle
• System Online kW Capacity • Sync Slip Frequency
• System Generated kW • Sync Volt Difference
• System Generated kvar • Load share input
• Number of Units • Load anticipation washout output
• Diesel Exhaust Fuel Tank Level 1 • Load anticipation lead-lag output
• Diesel Exhaust Fuel Tank Level 2 • Load anticipation output
• 87G Iop Phase A • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel1**
• 87G Ir Phase A • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel2**
• 87G Iop 2nd Phase A • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel3**
• 87G Iop 5th Phase A • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel4**
• 87G Iop Phase B • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel5**
• 87G Ir Phase B • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel6**
• 87G Iop 2nd Phase B • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel7**
• 87G Iop 5th Phase B • **AEM1_Labels.AnalogInputLabel8**
• 87G Iop Phase C • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel1**
• 87G Ir Phase C • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel2**
• 87G Iop 2nd Phase C • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel3**
• 87G Iop 5th Phase C • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel4**
• 87N Iop • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel5**
• System Total kW Capacity • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel6**
• System Generated kW Percent • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel7**
• DPF Outlet Gas Temperature • **AEM1_Labels.RTDInputLabel8**
• System Group Bus Frequency • **AEM1_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel1**
• System Group Bus V Avg L-L • **AEM1_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel2**
• System Group Bus I Avg • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel1**
• System Group Bus Total Watts • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel2**
• System Group Bus Total var • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel3**
• System Group Total PF • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel4**
• System Load Bus Frequency • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel5**
• System Load Bus V Avg L-L • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel6**
• System Load Bus I Avg • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel7**
• System Load Bus Total Watts • **AEM2_Labels.AnalogInputLabel8**
• System Load Bus Total var • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel1**
• System Load Total PF • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel2**
• System Mains Bus Frequency • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel3**
• System Mains Bus V Avg L-L • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel4**
• System Mains Bus I Avg • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel5**
• System Mains Bus Total Watts • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel6**
• System Mains Bus Total var • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel7**
• System Mains Total PF • **AEM2_Labels.RTDInputLabel8**
• Voltage Bias Output • **AEM2_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel1**
• Speed Bias Output • **AEM2_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel2**
• Speed PID • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel1**
• Volt PID • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel2**
• kW PID • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel3**
• kvar PID • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel4**
• Ramped Watt Demand per unit • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel5**
• Watt Demand per unit • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel6**
• Ramped var Demand per unit • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel7**
• var Demand per unit • **AEM3_Labels.AnalogInputLabel8**
• Speed error • **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel1**
• Volt error • **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel2**
Configurable Protection DGC-2020HD
9469300995 19-3

• **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel3** • Configurable Protection Output 12

• **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel4** • Configurable Protection Output 13
• **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel5** • Configurable Protection Output 14
• **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel6** • Configurable Protection Output 15
• **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel7** • Configurable Protection Output 16
• **AEM3_Labels.RTDInputLabel8** • Configurable Protection Output 17
• **AEM3_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel1** • Configurable Protection Output 18
• **AEM3_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel2** • Configurable Protection Output 19
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel1** • Configurable Protection Output 20
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel2** • Configurable Protection Output 21
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel3** • Configurable Protection Output 22
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel4** • Configurable Protection Output 23
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel5** • Configurable Protection Output 24
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel6** • Configurable Protection Output 25
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel7** • Configurable Protection Output 26
• **AEM4_Labels.AnalogInputLabel8** • Configurable Protection Output 27
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel1** • Configurable Protection Output 28
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel2** • Configurable Protection Output 29
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel3** • Configurable Protection Output 30
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel4** • Configurable Protection Output 31
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel5** • Configurable Protection Output 32
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel6** • Exciter Field Current
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel7** • Exciter Field Voltage
• **AEM4_Labels.RTDInputLabel8** • VRM Control Output
• **AEM4_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel1** • VRM Tracking Error
• **AEM4_Labels.ThermalCoupleLabel2** • VRM AVR Setpoint
• AVR Output • VRM AVR Final Reference
• GOV Output • VRM AVR Error
• LS Output • VRM FCR Setpoint
• Logic Input 1 • VRM FCR Final Reference
• Logic Input 2 • VRM FCR Error
• Logic Input 3 • VRM OEL Reference
• Logic Input 4 • VRM OEL Takeover Error
• Logic Input 5 • VRM OEL Summing Error
• Logic Input 6 • VRM OEL Summing Bias
• Breaker Power Sum 1 kW • VRM UEL Reference
• Breaker Power Sum 1 kvar • VRM UEL Error
• Breaker Power Sum 2 kW • VRM UEL Bias
• Breaker Power Sum 2 kvar • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel1**
• Breaker Power Sum 3 kW • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel2**
• Breaker Power Sum 3 kvar • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel3**
• Breaker Power Sum 4 kW • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel4**
• Breaker Power Sum 4 kvar • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel5**
• Breaker Power Sum 5 kW • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel6**
• Breaker Power Sum 5 kvar • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel7**
• Breaker Power Sum 6 kW • **VRM1.RTDInputLabel8**
• Breaker Power Sum 6 kvar • Configurable Log Parameter 1
• Breaker Power Sum 7 kW • Configurable Log Parameter 2
• Breaker Power Sum 7 kvar • Configurable Log Parameter 3
• Breaker Power Sum 8 kW • Configurable Log Parameter 4
• Breaker Power Sum 8 kvar • Configurable Log Parameter 5
• Configurable Protection Output 1 • Configurable Log Parameter 6
• Configurable Protection Output 2 • Battery Charger 1 Voltage
• Configurable Protection Output 3 • Battery Charger 1 Current
• Configurable Protection Output 4 • Battery Charger 2 Voltage
• Configurable Protection Output 5 • Battery Charger 2 Current
• Configurable Protection Output 6 • Battery 1 Temperature
• Configurable Protection Output 7 • Battery 2 Temperature
• Configurable Protection Output 8 • Crankcase Pressure
• Configurable Protection Output 9 • Fuel Filter Differential Pressure
• Configurable Protection Output 10 • Oil Filter Differential Pressure
• Configurable Protection Output 11
DGC-2020HD Configurable Protection
19-4 9469300995

** Custom user label.

Label Text
In order to make identification of the items easier, each of the items can be given a user-assigned label.
The label is an alphanumeric string with a maximum of 16 characters.

Parameter 1 and 2
Two parameters may be selected for use in simple mathematical equations. The result of the equation is
compared to the configurable protection thresholds. Scale factors and offsets are also provided for each
parameter.

Operator
The Operator is used in the mathematical equation between parameters 1 and 2. If None is selected, no
mathematical equation is performed.

Arming Delay
A user-adjustable arming delay disables configurable protection during engine startup. If the arming delay
is set to zero (0), the configurable protection is active at all times, including when the engine is not
running. If the arming delay is set to a non-zero value, the configurable protection is inactive when the
engine is not running, and does not become active until after the engine is started and the arming delay
has elapsed.

Hysteresis
This setting provides a level of hysteresis between a threshold detection tripping and dropping out. For
instance, if the hysteresis is set for 5% and the threshold is set as an over threshold, once the threshold
detection picks up, the measured parameter must drop to 95% of the threshold before the threshold
detection drops out. This hysteresis helps prevent rapid or repeated transitions between trip and dropout
in cases where the measured parameter is nearly equal to a level equal to the threshold.
If the threshold is set as an under threshold with 5% hysteresis, once the threshold detection trips, the
measured value must rise to 105% of the threshold before the threshold detection will drop out.

Scale Factors
Alternate Frequency Scale Factor
Alternate frequency scale factor is used when any Generator, Bus 1, or Bus 2 frequency-based
parameter is selected as the parameter for configurable protection.

Voltage Low-Line Scale Factor

Voltage low line scale factor is used when the parameter selection for configurable protection is set for
any Generator, Bus 1, or Bus 2 line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltage parameter.

Current Low-Line Scale Factor

Current low line scale factor is used when the parameter selection for configurable protection is set for
any Generator, Bus 1, or Bus 2 current parameter.

Thresholds
There are four programmable thresholds for each configurable protection element. Each threshold has a
mode setting, threshold setting, activation delay setting, and an alarm configuration setting.

Configurable Protection DGC-2020HD

9469300995 19-5

Mode
The mode can be set for Over or Under. If Over mode is selected, an alarm is annunciated when the
metered parameter increases above the Threshold setting for the duration of the Activation Delay. If
Under mode is selected, an alarm is annunciated when the metered parameter decreases below the
Threshold setting for the duration of the Activation Delay.

Threshold
When the selected parameter rises above or falls below this setting, depending on the Mode setting,
(picks up) the activation delay timer begins counting.

Activation Delay
After the threshold has been exceeded for the duration of the activation delay, the selected alarm
configuration action is performed. If the threshold detection drops out before the activation delay expires,
the activation delay timer is reset.

Alarm Configuration
Each configurable protection threshold item can be independently configured to perform a different action
depending on the alarm configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm
Configuration chapter.

Note
The Arming Delay should not be set to zero if Oil Pressure or Battery
Volts is selected for configurable protection and the threshold is set to
monitor for conditions lower than the threshold and the alarm
configuration is set to Alarm. Setting the arming delay to zero will
cause an immediate alarm on the oil pressure, and engine cranking
could cause a temporary low battery voltage condition which could
cause an alarm. In either case, the spurious alarm would prevent the
engine from starting.

Logic Connections
Configurable protection logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
The Configurable Protection 1, Threshold 1 logic block is illustrated in Figure 19-1. Block output is true
during a trip condition. Alarm and pre-alarm logic blocks are similar.

Figure 19-1. Configurable Protection Logic Block

Operational Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Configurable Protection, Configurable Protection #
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Protection > Configurable Protection > Configurable
Protection #
Configurable protection operational settings are configured on the Configurable Protection settings screen
(Figure 19-2) in BESTCOMSPlus or through the front panel.

DGC-2020HD Configurable Protection

19-6 9469300995

Figure 19-2. Settings Explorer, Configurable Protection, Configurable Protection #1

Configurable Protection DGC-2020HD

9469300995 20-1

20 • Configurable J1939 Diagnostic

Trouble Code (DTC) Detection
Configurable DTC detection can be used for handling of proprietary DTCs that may not be stored in the
DGC-2020HD. Sixteen configurable DTC detection elements are provided.

Element Setup and Operation

Each configurable DTC has an alarm configuration, contact recognition type, and an activation delay. The
detection is active when the chosen SPN and FMI in the configurable DTC object match with one of the
received DTCs. After the activation delay has expired, the Status Input logic block becomes true.

Alarm Configuration
Each configurable DTC item can be independently configured to perform a different action depending on
the alarm configuration setting. Alarm configurations are described in the Alarm Configuration chapter.

Contact Recognition
Select whether the DTC should be recognized always, or only while the engine is running. A selection of
While Engine Running Only prevents spurious annunciation when the engine is not running.

Label Text
If the SPN and FMI of a configurable DTC match those of a received DTC, the label associated with the
configurable DTC appears. The user-programmed label text overrides other labels based on the stored
DTC descriptions. The label is an alphanumeric string with a maximum of 64 characters.

Logic Connections
Configurable DTC logic connections are made on the BESTlogicPlus screen in BESTCOMSPlus. The
Configurable DTC 1 logic block is illustrated in Figure 20-1. The block output is true when a Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) with Suspect Parameter Number (SPN) and Failure Mode Indicator (FMI) has been
received that match the SPN and FMI settings in the Configurable DTC and the Alarm Configuration is set
for Status Only. Alarm and pre-alarm logic blocks are similar.

Figure 20-1. Configurable DTC Detection Logic Block

Operational Settings
BESTCOMSPlus Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, Communications, Configurable DTC Detection
Setup
Front Panel Navigation Path: Settings > Communication > CAN Bus 2 Setup > ECU Setup >
Configurable DTC Setup
Configurable DTC operational settings are configured on the Configurable DTC settings screen (Figure
20-2) in BESTCOMSPlus or through the front panel. Settings are listed in Table 20-1.

DGC-2020HD Configurable J1939 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detection

20-2 9469300995

Figure 20-2. Settings Explorer, Communication, Configurable DTC Detection Setup

Table 20-1. Settings for Configurable DTC Detection

Locator Setting Range Increment Unit
A Label Text Up to 64 n/a n/a
alphanumeric
characters
B Contact Recognition Always or While n/a n/a
Engine Running Only
C Alarm Configuration Status Only, Pre- n/a n/a
Alarm, Alarm, Alarm
with Unload, Alarm
with Cool Down, or
Alarm with Unload
then Cool Down
D Activation Delay 0 to 300 1 seconds
E Suspect Parameter Number 0 to 524,287 1 n/a
F Failure Mode Indicator 0 to 31 1 n/a

Configurable J1939 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detection DGC-2020HD

9469300995 21-1

21 • BESTlogic™Plus
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic is a programming method used for managing the input, output,
protection, control, monitoring, and reporting capabilities of Basler Electric's DGC-2020HD Digital Genset
Controller. Each DGC-2020HD has multiple, self-contained logic blocks that have all of the inputs and
outputs of its discrete component counterpart. Each independent logic block interacts with control inputs
and hardware outputs based on logic variables defined in equation form with BESTlogicPlus.
BESTlogicPlus equations entered and saved in the DGC-2020HD system's nonvolatile memory integrate
(electronically wire) the selected or enabled protection and control blocks with control inputs and
hardware outputs. A group of logic equations defining the logic of the DGC-2020HD is called a logic
scheme.
One default active logic scheme is preloaded into the DGC-2020HD. This scheme is configured for a
typical protection and control application and virtually eliminates the need for "start-from-scratch"
programming. BESTCOMSPlus® can be used to open a logic scheme that was previously saved as a file
and upload it to the DGC-2020HD. The default logic scheme can also be customized to suit your
application. Detailed information about logic schemes is provided later in this chapter.
BESTlogicPlus is not used to define the operating settings (modes, pickup thresholds, and time delays) of
the individual protection and control functions. Operating settings and logic settings are interdependent
but separately programmed functions. Changing logic settings is similar to rewiring a panel and is
separate and distinct from making the operating settings that control the pickup thresholds and time
delays of a DGC-2020HD. Detailed information about operating settings is provided in the
BESTCOMSPlus chapter.

Caution
This product contains one or more nonvolatile memory devices.
Nonvolatile memory is used to store information (such as settings) that
needs to be preserved when the product is power-cycled or otherwise
restarted. Established nonvolatile memory technologies have a
physical limit on the number of times they can be erased and written.
In this product, the limit is 100,000 erase/write cycles. During product
application, consideration should be given to communications, logic,
and other factors that may cause frequent/repeated writes of settings
or other information that is retained by the product. Applications that
result in such frequent/repeated writes may reduce the useable
product life and result in loss of information and/or product
inoperability.

Overview of BESTlogic™Plus
BESTlogicPlus settings are made through BESTCOMSPlus. Use the Settings Explorer to open the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic tree branch as shown in Figure 21-1.
The BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic screen contains a logic library for opening and saving logic files,
tools for creating and editing logic documents, and protection settings.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-2 9469300995

Figure 21-1. Settings Explorer, BESTlogic™Plus Programmable Logic Screen

BESTlogic™Plus Composition
There are three main groups of objects used for programming BESTlogicPlus. These groups are I/O,
Components, and Elements. For details on how these objects are used to program BESTlogicPlus, see
the paragraphs on Programming BESTlogicPlus later in this chapter.

I/O
This group contains Input Objects, Output Objects, Status Inputs, Alarms, Pre-Alarms, Senders, Logic
Control Relays, and Off-Page Objects. The following tables list the names and descriptions of the objects
in the I/O group.
Table 21-1. I/O Group, Input Objects
Name/Description Element
Logic 0
Always false (Low).
Logic 1
Always true (High).
Input x
True when Contact Input x is active, the Alarm Configuration is set to
Status Only, and the activation delay has expired.
Input x
True when Remote Contact Input x is active, the Alarm Configuration is set
to Status Only, and the activation delay has expired.
Input x
True when Virtual Input x is active.

Input x
True when Modbus Switch x is active.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-3

Table 21-2. I/O Group, Output Objects

Name/Description Element
Output x
Closes the corresponding contact output on the DGC-2020HD when true
(high).
Output x
Closes the corresponding remote contact output on an optional CEM-2020
when true (high).

Table 21-3. I/O Group, Status Inputs

Name/Description Symbol
Alarm Silence Active
True when the Alarm Silence logic element is true or the Alarm
Silence button is pressed on the front panel.
Alternate Frequency Override
True when the Alternate Frequency Override logic element is
true.
ATS Input
True when the ATS (Auto Transfer Switch) input is true or the
ATS logic element is true.
Audible Horn
True when the Audible Horn is active.

Auto Mode
True when the DGC-2020HD is in Auto Mode or the Auto Mode
logic element is true.
Auto Restart
True when the Automatic Restart function is active.

AVR Output Out of Range

True when the AVR Output Limit settings have been exceeded.

Base load Mode Active

True when the DGC-2020HD is in base load mode.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, AC Off

True when the ac power to the battery charger is off.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Battery Failure

True when the battery charger has detected that the battery has
failed.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Charger Failure
True when the battery charger has failed.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Comms Failure

True when the battery charger has detected a J1939
communications failure.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, High DC Volts
True when the battery charger output voltage is too high.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Invalid Settings

True when the battery charger has detected settings that are not
valid.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Low Cranking Volts
True when the battery charger has detected that the voltage
while the engine is cranking has dipped too low.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-4 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Low DC Volts
True when the battery charger output voltage is too low.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Single Unit Failure

True when the battery charger has detected one or more
charging output stages in a charger with multiple charging output
stages has failed.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Thermal Limit
True when the battery charger temperature is beyond the
thermal limit.
Battery Charger Fail
True when the Battery Charger Fail input is true, the Alarm Type
is set to Status Only, and the activation delay has expired.
Battle Override
True when the Battle Override input is true.

Breaker Control Granted

One breaker may be controlled by multiple DGC-2020HDs,
however only one unit is granted control over the breaker at a
time.
This input is true on the DGC-2020HD which is currently granted
control over the breaker.
Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, State
True when the local generator breaker is closed.

Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, OK to Close

True when the local generator breaker is OK to close.

Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, Open Setpoint Reached

True when the local generator breaker open setpoint has been
reached.
Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, Fail to Close
True when the local generator breaker has failed to close.

Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, Fail to Open

True when the local generator breaker has failed to open.

Breaker Status, Group Breaker, State

True when the group breaker is closed.

Breaker Status, Group Breaker, OK to Close

True when the local group breaker is OK to close.

Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Open Setpoint Reached

True when the local group breaker open setpoint has been
reached.
Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Fail to Close
True when the local group breaker has failed to close.

Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Fail to Open

True when the local group breaker has failed to open.

Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, State

True when the mains breaker is closed.

Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, OK to Close

True when the local mains breaker is OK to close.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-5

Name/Description Symbol
Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Open Setpoint Reached
True when the local mains breaker open setpoint has been
reached.
Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Fail to Close
True when the local mains breaker has failed to close.

Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Fail to Open

True when the local mains breaker has failed to open.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, State

True when the first tie breaker is closed.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, OK to Close

True when the first tie breaker is OK to close.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, Open Setpoint Reached

True when the first tie breaker open setpoint has been reached.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, Fail to Close

True when the first tie breaker has failed to close.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, Fail to Open

True when the first tie breaker has failed to open.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, State

True when the second tie breaker is closed.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, OK to Close

True when the second tie breaker is OK to close.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, Open Setpoint Reached

True when the second tie breaker open setpoint has been
reached.
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, Fail to Close
True when the second tie breaker has failed to close.

Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, Fail to Open

True when the second tie breaker has failed to open.

Bus Status, Bus x, Dead

True when Bus x voltage is below the dead bus threshold.

Bus Status, Bus x, Fail

True when Bus x is outside the appropriate stable bus
conditions.
Bus Status, Bus x, Forward Rotation
True when the bus rotation matches the Phase Rotation setting.

Bus Status, Bus x, Reverse Rotation

True when the bus rotation is opposite of the Phase Rotation
setting.
Bus Status, Bus x, Stable
True when Bus x is within the appropriate stable bus conditions.

Bus Status, Gen, Dead

True when the Gen voltage is below the dead gen threshold.

Bus Status, Gen, Fail

True when the Gen is outside the appropriate stable gen
conditions.
DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-6 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Bus Status, Gen, Forward Rotation
True when the generator rotation matches the Phase Rotation
setting.
Bus Status, Gen, Reverse Rotation
True when the generator rotation is opposite of the Phase
Rotation setting.
Bus Status, Gen, Stable
True when the Gen is within the appropriate stable gen
conditions.
CAN Bus Error Passive
True when a passive error is annunciated by the CAN Bus.

CAN Bus Off

True when the CAN Bus is off.

Communications, Analog Expansion Modules, AEM x

Connected
True when an optional AEM-2020 is connected to the DGC-
2020HD.
Communications, Contact Expansion Modules, CEM x
Connected
True when an optional CEM-2020 is connected to the DGC-
2020HD.
Configurable DTCs, Configurable DTC #x
True when a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) with Suspect
Parameter Number (SPN) and Failure Mode Indicator (FMI) has
been received that match the SPN and FMI settings in the
Configurable DTC and the Alarm Configuration is set for Status
Only.
Configurable Protection, Configurable Protection #x,
Threshold x Trip
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Status Only and the
threshold has been exceeded.
Cool Down Timer Active
True when the Cool Down Timer is timing out. The Cool Down
Timer is true under two circumstances:
1. The unit is in Auto mode and ATS is removed, causing the
DGC-2020HD to go into a cool down state.
2. The engine is running (in Run or Auto mode with ATS
applied) and the load has been removed (i.e. the
EPSSUPLOAD status input is false due to small load). If the
load is reapplied, the Cool Down Timer stops and resets,
and it will restart when the load is removed the next time.
DPF Lamp Command
True when DPF lamp is lit. This status input mimics the state of
the DPF lamp. It remains true when the DPF lamp is constantly
lit and toggles true and false at a rate of 1 Hz when DPF lamp is
blinking.
Emergency Stop
True when the Emergency Stop button has been pressed.

Engine Running
True while the engine is running.

EPS Supplying Load

True when the EPS threshold has been exceeded and the EPS
is supplying load.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-7

Name/Description Symbol
Front Panel Buttons, Auto
True while the Auto front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Down

True while the Down front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Edit

True while the Edit front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Lamp

True while the Lamp front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Left

True while the Left front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Off

True while the Off front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Reset

True while the Reset front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Right

True while the Right front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Run

True while the Run front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Silence

True while the Silence front panel button is pressed.

Front Panel Buttons, Up

True while the Up front panel button is pressed.

Fuel Leak Detect

True when the Fuel Leak Detect input is true, the Alarm Type is
set to Status Only, and the activation delay has expired.
Generator Protection, Current, Current Imbalance Trip
(46-x 1P)
True when the 46-x single-phase element is tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Current Imbalance Trip
(46-x 3P)
True when the 46-x three-phase element is tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Overcurrent Trip (51-x)
True when the 51-x element is tripped.

Generator Protection, Current, Neutral Differential Trip

(87N-1)
True when the 87N-1 element is tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Phase Differential Trip (87-1)
True when the 87-1 element is tripped.

Generator Protection, Frequency, Frequency Trip (81-x)

True when the 81-x element is tripped.

Generator Protection, Loss of MAINS Protection, Vector

Shift Trip (78-x)
True when the 78-x element is tripped.
Generator Protection, Power, Loss of Excitation Trip (40Q-x)
True when the 40Q-x element is tripped.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-8 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Generator Protection, Power, Power Trip (32-x)
True when the 32-x element is tripped.

Generator Protection, Voltage, Phase Trip Imbalance (47-x)

True when the 47-x element is tripped.

Generator Protection, Voltage, Overvoltage Trip (59-x)

True when the 59-x element is tripped.

Generator Protection, Voltage, Undervoltage Trip (27-x)

True when the 27-x element is tripped.

Generator States, In Alarm State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the alarm state.

Generator States, In Connecting State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the connecting state.

Generator States, In Cooling State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the cooling state.

Generator States, In Cranking State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the cranking state.

Generator States, In Disconnect State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the disconnect state.

Generator States, In Prestart State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the pre-start state.

Generator States, In Pulsing State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the pulsing state.

Generator States, In Ready State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the ready state.

Generator States, In Resting State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the resting state.

Generator States, In Running State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the running state.

Generator States, In Unloading State

True when the DGC-2020HD is in the unloading state.

Generator Test
True when the Exercise Timer has started the generator.

Generator Test Loaded

True when the Exercise Timer has started the generator and
Run with Load is selected.
GOV Output Out of Range
True when the GOV Output Limit settings have been exceeded.

Grounded Delta Override

True when the Grounded Delta Override input is true.

Idle Request
True when the Idle Request logic element is true.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-9

Name/Description Symbol
Import/Export Mode Active
True when the DGC-2020HD is in Import/Export mode.

Lamp Test
True when the Lamp Test logic element is true or the Lamp Test
button is pressed on the front panel.
Load Shedding, Load Add Demand Start
True when the currently generated reserve capacity is too low to
add the next highest priority load, but sufficient offline generation
capacity could be started to accommodate the load. In other
words, this attempts to start more generators to pick up the load
as long as enough generators exist in the system to meet the
demand.
Load Shedding, Priority x Load Enabled
True when a load is enabled.

Load Take Over

True when the Load Take Over logic element is true.

Low Coolant Level

True when the Low Coolant Level function is configured as an
alarm or pre-alarm and the activation delay has expired. In
addition, true when CAN bus is enabled and the Low Coolant
Level Alarm or Pre-Alarm threshold has been exceeded.
Low Line Override
True when the Low Line Override logic element is true.

LS Output Out of Range

True when the LS Output Limit settings have been exceeded.

Mains Fail Test

True when the Mains Fail Test logic element is true.

Mains Fail Transfer, Complete

True when the DGC-2020HD is configured for mains fail
transfers and has successfully transferred to the generator from
the utility. It remains true until the utility power is deemed good
and the DGC-2020HD transfers the load back to utility power.
Mains Fail Transfer, Disabled
True when the DGC-2020HD is operating in the OFF or RUN
modes or in the alarm state.
Mains Fail Transfer, Timer Active
True when the mains fail transfer delay timer is actively counting.

Mains Fail Transfer, Transferring to Gens

True when mains fail transfer is transferring load to the generator
bus.

Mains Fail Transfer, Power from Gens

True when mains fail transfer function detects the load is
powered from the generator bus.
Mains Fail Transfer, Return Timer Active
True when mains fail transfer return delay timer is actively
counting.
Mains Fail Transfer, Transferring to Mains
True when mains fail transfer is transferring load to the mains
bus.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-10 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Mains Fail Transfer, Power from Mains
True when mains fail transfer function detects the load is
powered from the mains bus.
Off Mode
True when the DGC-2020HD is in Off Mode or the Off Mode
logic element is true.
Off Mode Cool Down
True when the DGC-2020HD is in Off Mode and cooling down.

Online Capacity Greater Than Block Load

True when online generator capacity is greater than the active
block load level.
Online Capacity Greater Than System Load
True when online generator capacity is greater than the system
load.
Open Transition Delay Active
True when the open transition delay is actively counting.

Parallel to Mains
True when the Parallel to Mains logic element is true, indicating
that the generator is operating in parallel with the utility.
Parallel to Mains Detected
True when the generator is parallel to mains based on known
closed breakers in system. This status can be connected directly
to the PARTOMAINS logic element or combined with additional
logic to determine unit is parallel to mains.
Peak Shave Mode Active
True when Peak Shave control mode is active.

Peak Shave In Progress

True when peak shaving is in progress.

PF Mode Active
True when PF mode is active.

Pre Start Relay Status

True when the DGC-2020HD is indicating that the Pre Start relay
should be closed.
Predefined Prestart State
True when the DGC-2020HD commands the Prestart relay to
close under default (predefined) operation. Predefined Start is
true any time the Start Relay would be closed if “Predefined”
were selected for the Start relay under Relay Control.
Predefined Run State
True when the DGC-2020HD commands the Run relay to close
under default (predefined) operation. Predefined Run is true any
time the Run Relay would be closed if “Predefined” were
selected for the Run relay under Relay Control.
Predefined Start State
True when the DGC-2020HD commands the Start relay to close
under default (predefined) operation. Predefined Prestart is true
any time the Prestart Relay would be closed if “Predefined” were
selected for the Prestart relay under Relay Control.
Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input #x, Threshold x
True when the threshold has been exceeded.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-11

Name/Description Symbol
Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input #x, Out of Range
True when the analog input connection is open.

Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs, AEM x, Input

#x, Threshold x Trip
True when the threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs, AEM x, Input
#x, Out of Range
True when the remote analog input connection is open.
Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs, AEM x, RTD
Input #x, Threshold x Trip
True when the threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs, AEM x, RTD
Input #x, Out of Range
True when the remote RTD input connection is open.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Thermocouple Inputs, AEM
x, Thermocouple Input #x, Threshold x Trip
True when the threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements, Element x
True when the Configurable Element x logic element is true.

Programmable Outputs, Remote Analog Outputs, AEM x,

Output #x, Out of Range
True when the remote analog output connection is open.
Reset Active
True when the Reset logic element is true or when the Reset key
on the front panel is pressed.
Restart Delay Active
True when the Restart Delay timer is timing out.

Run Mode
True when the DGC-2020HD is in Run Mode or the Run Mode
logic element is true.
Run Relay Status
True when the DGC-2020HD is indicating that the Run relay
should be closed.
Seven Day Timer, Sunday through Saturday, Timer x
True while timer x is active.

Single Phase AC Sensing Override

True when the Single Phase AC Override input is true.

Single Phase Connection Override

True when the Single-Phase Connection Override input is true.

Start Relay Status

True when the DGC-2020HD is indicating that the Start relay
should be closed to start the engine.
Switch not in Auto
True when the DGC-2020HD is not in Auto Mode.

Sync Active
True when the auto synchronizer is active to align the generator
input and bus input voltages and phases.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-12 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Sync Breaker Close OK
True when the auto synchronizer is running and determines that
the voltage difference between bus and generator voltages, slip
frequency, and phase angle are within specified limits so that it is
okay to issue a breaker close command.
Sync Phase Angle OK
True when the auto synchronizer is running and the phase angle
between the bus voltage input and the generator voltage input
are within the limits indicated by the phase angle setting for
phase lock synchronization, or the calculated advance angle for
anticipatory synchronization.
Sync Slip Frequency OK
True when the auto synchronizer is running and the slip
frequency between the bus voltage input and the generator
voltage input are within the limits indicated by the slip frequency
setting.
Sync Voltage OK
True when the auto synchronizer is running and the voltage
difference between the bus voltage input and the generator
voltage input are within the limits indicated by the voltage
window setting.
System Breaker Status, Gen Breaker, System Gen Breaker
Closed
True when any generator breaker in the segmented system is
closed.
System Breaker Status, Group Breaker, State
True when the group breaker of the segmented system is
closed.
System Breaker Status, Group Breaker, OK to Close
True when the group breaker of the segmented system is OK to
close.
System Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Fail to Close
True when the group breaker of the segmented system fails to
close.
System Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Fail to Open
True when the group breaker of the segmented system fails to
open.
System Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, State
True when the mains breaker of the segmented system is
closed.
System Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, OK to Close
True when the mains breaker of the segmented system is OK to
close.
System Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Fail to Close
True when the mains breaker of the segmented system fails to
close.
System Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Fail to Open
True when the mains breaker of the segmented system fails to
open.
System Bus Status, Group Bus, Dead
True when the group bus voltage of the segmented system is
below the dead bus threshold.
System Bus Status, Group Bus, Fail
True when the group bus of the segmented system is outside the
appropriate stable bus conditions.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-13

Name/Description Symbol
System Bus Status, Group Bus, Forward Rotation
True when the group bus rotation of the segmented system
matches the Phase Rotation setting.
System Bus Status, Group Bus, Reverse Rotation
True when the group bus rotation of the segmented system is
opposite of the Phase Rotation setting.
System Bus Status, Group Bus, Stable
True when the group bus of the segmented system is within the
appropriate stable bus conditions.
System Bus Status, Load Bus, Dead
True when the load bus voltage of the segmented system is
below the dead bus threshold.
System Bus Status, Load Bus, Fail
True when the load bus of the segmented system is outside the
appropriate stable bus conditions.
System Bus Status, Load Bus, Forward Rotation
True when the load bus rotation of the segmented system
matches the Phase Rotation setting.
System Bus Status, Load Bus, Reverse Rotation
True when the load bus rotation of the segmented system is
opposite of the Phase Rotation setting.
System Bus Status, Load Bus, Stable
True when the load bus of the segmented system is within the
appropriate stable bus conditions.
System Bus Status, Mains Bus, Dead
True when the mains bus voltage of the segmented system is
below the dead bus threshold.
System Bus Status, Mains Bus, Fail
True when the mains bus of the segmented system is outside
the appropriate stable bus conditions.
System Bus Status, Mains Bus, Forward Rotation
True when the mains bus rotation of the segmented system
matches the Phase Rotation setting.
System Bus Status, Mains Bus, Reverse Rotation
True when the mains bus rotation of the segmented system is
opposite of the Phase Rotation setting.
System Bus Status, Mains Bus, Stable
True when the mains bus of the segmented system is within the
appropriate stable bus conditions.
Torque Limit
True while the engine is running in a reduced torque mode due
to exhaust system issues such as Low DEF, Purge Required,
Exhaust System Error, etc. This reflects the status of the exhaust
system Torque Limit lamp, which is communicated from the
Engine ECU to the DGC via J1939 CAN Bus communications.

Torque Limit Severe

True while the engine is running in a severely reduced torque
mode due to exhaust system issues such as Low DEF, Purge
Required, Exhaust System Error, etc. This reflects the status of
the exhaust system Torque Limit lamp, which is communicated
from the Engine ECU to the DGC via J1939 CAN Bus
communications.
Using Trim Voltage Setting
True when voltage trim is active.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-14 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
var Mode Active
True when var mode is active.

VRM, Connected
True when an optional VRM-2020 is connected to the DGC-
2020HD.
VRM, EDM Pickup
True when the optional VRM-2020 Exciter Diode Monitor has
picked up.
VRM, Field Overvoltage Pickup
True when the Field Overvoltage element has picked up.

VRM, Loss of Sensing Pickup

True when the Loss of Sensing element has picked up.

VRM, AVR Active

True when AVR operating mode is active.

VRM, FCR Active

True when FCR operating mode is active.

VRM, OEL Active

True when the overexcitation limiter is active.

VRM, UEL Active

True when the underexcitation limiter is active.

VRM, Underfrequency Active

True when the underfrequency limiter is active.

VRM, Setpoint Upper Limit

True when the active operating mode setpoint has reached the
upper limit.
VRM, Setpoint Lower Limit
True when the active operating mode setpoint has reached the
lower limit.
VRM, Pre-position X Active
True when pre-position X is enabled for the active operating
mode.
VRM, Soft Start Active
True when the soft start function is active.

VRM, Regulator Started

True when the DGC-2020HD is regulating with the VRM-2020.

VRM, Gen Below 10 Hz

True when the measured generator frequency is less than 10
Hz.
VRM, Null Balance
True when the setpoint of the inactive operating modes match
the setpoint of the active mode.
VRM, RTDs, RTD Input X, Threshold X Trip
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Status Only and the
threshold has been exceeded for the duration of the activation
delay.
VRM, RTDs, RTD Input X, Out of Range

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-15

Table 21-4. I/O Group, Alarms

Name/Description Symbol
Auto Restart Fail
True after the Automatic Restart function fails to restart the
generator.
AVR Output Out of Range
True when AVR Output is the selected parameter, Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Alarm, and the threshold has been exceeded.
Battery Charger Fail
True when the Battery Charger Fail function is configured as an
alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Configurable DTCs, Configurable DTC #x
This alarm annunciates when a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) with
Suspect Parameter Number (SPN) and Failure Mode Indicator (FMI)
has been received that match the SPN and FMI settings in the
Configurable DTC and the Alarm Configuration has been set for
Alarm, Alarm with Unload, or Alarm with Unload then Cool Down.
Configurable Protection, Configurable Protection #x, Threshold
x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Alarm and the threshold
has been exceeded.
DEF Low Severe
This alarm annunciates when the DEF Inducement Level is greater
than or equal to 3, the Isuzu Refill DEF lamp is on, and the Isuzu No
Power lamp is on. The DEF Low Severe alarm appears in
conjunction with a DEF Severe Inducement alarm to indicate why
the machine has entered the severe inducement state due to low
DEF levels.
DEF Severe Inducement
This alarm indicates the highest level of inducement not to operate
the engine due to low or poor quality Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), or
a malfunction in the Exhaust After Treatment System (EATS). The
engine may operate in a reduced power mode, or for a limited time,
or may be prevented from starting by the ECU until the problem is
corrected. A service tool may be required to restart the engine.
Diagnostic Trouble Alarm
This alarm is annunciated when Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
have been received by the DGC-2020HD, the ECU Red Lamp
Status in the DTC is active, and the engine has stopped running.
ECU Comm Loss
True when communication to the ECU has been lost.

ECU Shutdown
True when the ECU has shut down the engine.

Emergency Stop
True when the Emergency Stop button has been pressed.

Exhaust System Error

This alarm annunciates when the DEF Inducement Level is greater
than or equal to 3, the Isuzu Exhaust System lamp is on, and the
Isuzu No Power lamp is on. The Exhaust System Error alarm
appears in conjunction with a DEF Severe Inducement alarm to
indicate why the machine has entered the severe inducement state
due to SCR system malfunction.
Fuel Leak Detect
True when the Fuel Leak Detect function is configured as an alarm
and the activation delay has expired.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-16 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Generator Protection, Voltage, Undervoltage (27-x)
True when the 27-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Voltage, Overvoltage (59-x)
True when the 59-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Voltage, Phase Imbalance (47-x)
True when the 47-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Frequency, Frequency (81-x)
True when the 81-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Current Imbalance (46-x_1P)
True when the 46-x single-phase element is configured as an alarm
and has tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Current Imbalance (46-x_3P)
True when the 46-x three-phase element is configured as an alarm
and has tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Overcurrent Trip (51-x)
True when the 51-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Phase Differential Trip (87-1)
True when the 87-1 element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Neutral Differential Trip (87N-1)
True when the 87N-1 element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Power, Power (32-x)
True when the 32-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Power, Loss of Excitation (40Q-x)
True when the 40Q-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Loss of MAINS Protection, Vector Shift
(78-x)
True when the 78-x element is configured as an alarm and has
tripped.
Global Alarm
True when one or more alarms are set.

Global Sender Fail

True when one or more of the Sender Fails are configured as
alarms and are true.
Global Soft Alarm
True when one or more soft alarms are set.

GOV Output Out of Range

True when GOV Output is the selected parameter, Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Alarm, and the threshold has been exceeded.
High Coolant Temp
True when the High Coolant Temp Alarm settings have been
exceeded.
Isuzu DEF Low Refill DEF
True when an Isuzu Engine ECU has communicated the DEF Low
status and the No Power status to the DGC-2020HD.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-17

Name/Description Symbol
Low Coolant Level
True when the Low Coolant Level function is configured as an alarm
and the activation delay has expired. In addition, true when CAN
bus is enabled and the Low Coolant Level Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.
Low Fuel Level
True when the Low Fuel Level Alarm settings have been exceeded.

Low Oil Pressure

True when the Low Oil Pressure Alarm settings have been
exceeded.
LS Output Out of Range
True when LS Output is the selected parameter, Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Alarm, and the threshold has been exceeded.
Mains Fail Transfer Failed
True when a mains fail transfer fail alarm occurs. The alarm occurs
when the DGC-2020HD is configured for mains fail transfers, but
has not transferred to the generator from the utility before the Mains
Fail Max Transfer Time has expired. It remains true until the alarm is
cleared by pressing the Reset button on the front panel.
Overcrank
True when an Overcrank condition exists.

Overspeed
True when the Overspeed Alarm settings have been exceeded.

Programmable Inputs, Contact Inputs, Input x

True when Contact Input x is active, the Alarm Configuration is set
to Alarm, and the activation delay has expired.
Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input #x, Threshold x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Alarm and the threshold
has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input #x, Out of Range
True when the analog input connection is open and the Out of
Range Alarm Type is set to Alarm.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs, CEM x, Input x
True when Remote Contact Input x is active, the Alarm
Configuration is set to Alarm, and the activation delay has expired.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs, AEM x, Input #x,
Threshold #x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Alarm and the threshold
has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs, AEM x, Input #x,
Out of Range
True when the remote analog input connection is open and the Out
of Range Alarm Type is set to Alarm.
Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs, AEM x, RTD Input
#x, Threshold x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Alarm and the threshold
has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs, AEM x, RTD Input
#x, Out of Range
True when the remote RTD input connection is open and the Out of
Range Alarm Type is set to Alarm.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-18 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Programmable Inputs, Remote Thermocouple Inputs, AEM x,
Thermocouple Input #x, Threshold x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Alarm and the threshold
has been exceeded.
Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements, Element x
True when the Configurable Element x logic element is true, Alarm
Configuration is set to Alarm, and the Activation Delay has expired.
Programmable Outputs, Remote Analog Outputs, AEM x,
Output #x, Out of Range
True when the remote analog output connection is open and the Out
of Range Alarm Type is set to Alarm.
Sender Fail, Coolant Level Sender Fail
True when a low coolant level error status code is received from the
ECU. CAN Bus must be enabled.
Sender Fail, Coolant Temp Sender Fail
True when the Coolant Temp Sender Fail is configured as an alarm
and the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Oil Pressure Sender Fail
True when the Oil Pressure Sender Fail is configured as an alarm
and the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Fuel Level Sender Fail
True when the Fuel Level Sender Fail is configured as an alarm and
the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Voltage Sensing Fail
True when the Voltage Sensing Fail is configured as an alarm and
the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Speed Sender Fail
True when the Speed Sender Fail activation delay has expired.

Unexpected Shutdown
True when the metered engine speed (RPM) unexpectedly drops to
zero (0) while the engine is running.
User Programmable Alarms, Programmable Alarm x
True when the User Programmable Alarm x logic element is true
and the Activation Delay has expired.
VRM, Crowbar Activated
True when the crowbar circuit has activated.

VRM, EDM Alarm

True when the Exciter Diode Monitor is configured as an alarm and
has tripped.
VRM, Field Overvoltage Alarm
True when the Field Overvoltage element is configured as an alarm
and has tripped.
VRM, Field Short Circuit Status
True when the field current exceeds approximately 10.8 A and the
VRM-2020 stops regulation.
VRM, Loss of Sensing Alarm
True when the Loss of Sensing element is configured as an alarm
and has tripped.
VRM, OEL Alarm
True when the overexcitation limiter is configured as an alarm and
has activated.
VRM, UEL Alarm
True when the underexcitation limiter is configured as an alarm and
has activated.
BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-19

Name/Description Symbol
VRM, V/Hz Alarm
True when the underfrequency limiter is configured as an alarm and
has activated.
VRM, RTDs, RTD Input #X, Threshold X
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Alarm and the threshold
has been exceeded for the duration of the activation delay.
VRM, RTDs, RTD Input X, Out of Range
True when the RTD input connection is open and the Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Alarm.

Table 21-5. I/O Group, Pre-Alarms

Name/Description Symbol
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Ping Fail
True when at least one device is not reachable from either Ethernet
link. See Redundant Ethernet settings in the Communication
chapter for more information.
AVR Output Out of Range
True when AVR Output is the selected parameter, Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm, and the threshold has been
exceeded.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, AC Off
Pre-alarm indicating the ac power to the battery charger is off.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Battery Failure

Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger has detected that the
battery has failed.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Charger Failure
Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger has failed.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Comms Failure

Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger has detected a J1939
communications failure.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, High DC Volts
Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger output voltage is too high.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Invalid Settings

Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger has detected invalid
settings.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Low Cranking Volts
Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger has detected that the
voltage while the engine is cranking has dipped too low.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Low DC Volts
Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger output voltage is too low.

Battery Charger 1 and 2, Single Unit Failure

Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger has detected one or more
charging output stages in a charger with multiple charging output
stages has failed.
Battery Charger 1 and 2, Thermal Limit
Pre-alarm indicating the battery charger temperature is beyond the
thermal limit.
Battery Charger Fail
True when the Battery Charger Fail function is configured as a pre-
alarm and the activation delay has expired.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-20 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Battle Override
True when battle override is configured as a pre-alarm and the
assigned contact input is true.
Breaker Control Grant Fail
True when no DGC-2020HDs are granted control over a breaker
after a fixed five second delay.
Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, Close Failure
True when a generator breaker close fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a generator
breaker close output but does not receive a generator breaker
status input that indicates the breaker has closed before the
breaker fail wait time has expired.

Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, Open Failure

True when a generator breaker open fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a generator
breaker open output but does not receive a generator breaker
status input that indicates the breaker has opened before the
breaker fail wait time has expired.
Breaker Status, Generator Breaker, Sync Failure
True when a generator breaker sync fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the synchronizer is running and attempting to
close the generator breaker but the sync fail activation delay
expires prior to achieving breaker closure.
Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Close Failure
True when a group breaker close fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a group breaker
close output but does not receive a group breaker status input that
indicates the breaker has closed before the breaker fail wait time
has expired.
Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Open Failure
True when a group breaker open fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a group breaker
open output but does not receive a group breaker status input that
indicates the breaker has opened before the breaker fail wait time
has expired.
Breaker Status, Group Breaker, Sync Failure
True when a group breaker sync fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the synchronizer is running and attempting to
close the group breaker but the sync fail activation delay expires
prior to achieving breaker closure.
Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Close Failure
True when a mains breaker close fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a mains breaker
close output but does not receive a mains breaker status input that
indicates the breaker has closed before the breaker fail wait time
has expired.
Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Open Failure
True when a mains breaker open fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a mains breaker
open output but does not receive a mains breaker status input that
indicates the breaker has opened before the breaker fail wait time
has expired.
Breaker Status, Mains Breaker, Sync Failure
True when a mains breaker sync fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the synchronizer is running and attempting to
close the mains breaker but the sync fail activation delay expires
prior to achieving breaker closure.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-21

Name/Description Symbol
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, Close Failure
True when a tie breaker close fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-alarm
occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a tie breaker close
output but does not receive a tie breaker status input that indicates
the first tie breaker has closed before the breaker fail wait time has
expired.
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, Open Failure
True when a tie breaker open fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-alarm
occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a tie breaker open
output but does not receive a tie breaker status input that indicates
the first tie breaker has opened before the breaker fail wait time has
expired.
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker, Sync Failure
True when a tie breaker sync fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-alarm
occurs when the synchronizer is running and attempting to close
the first tie breaker but the sync fail activation delay expires prior to
achieving breaker closure.
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, Close Failure
True when a Tie Breaker 2 close fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a tie breaker close
output but does not receive a Tie Breaker 2 status input that
indicates the breaker has closed before the breaker fail wait time
has expired.
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, Open Failure
True when a Tie Breaker 2 open fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the DGC-2020HD has issued a tie breaker open
output but does not receive a Tie Breaker 2 status input that
indicates the breaker has opened before the breaker fail wait time
has expired.
Breaker Status, Tie Breaker 2, Sync Failure
True when a Tie Breaker 2 sync fail pre-alarm occurs. The pre-
alarm occurs when the synchronizer is running and attempting to
close Tie Breaker 2 but the sync fail activation delay expires prior to
achieving breaker closure.
Bus Status, Bus x, Reverse Rotation
True when the Bus x rotation is opposite of the Phase Rotation
setting.
Bus Status, Gen, Reverse Rotation
True when the generator bus rotation is opposite of the Phase
Rotation setting.
Communications, Analog Expansion Modules, AEM
Unsupported Number
True when more AEM-2020s are connected than are configured on
the System Parameters, Remote Module Setup screen in
BESTCOMSPlus.
Communications, Analog Expansion Modules, AEM x Comm
Fail
True when communication from the AEM-2020 to the DGC-2020HD
has been lost.
Communications, Analog Expansion Modules, AEM x Not
Configured
True when the expected serial number on the System Parameters,
Remote Module Setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus does not match
the serial number detected on the General Settings, Device Info
screen.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-22 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Communications, Contact Expansion Modules, CEM
Unsupported Number
True when more CEM-2020s are connected than are configured on
the System Parameters, Remote Module Setup screen in
BESTCOMSPlus.
Communications, Contact Expansion Modules, CEM x Comm
Fail
True when communication from the CEM-2020 to the DGC-2020HD
has been lost.
Communications, Contact Expansion Modules, CEM x
Hardware Mismatch
True when the connected CEM-2020 does not have the same
number of outputs as defined on the System Parameters, Remote
Module Setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
Communications, Contact Expansion Modules, CEM x Not
Configured
True when the expected serial number on the System Parameters,
Remote Module Setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus does not match
the serial number detected on the General Settings, Device Info
screen.
Communications, Ethernet Link 1 Loss
True when Ethernet Link 1 connection is lost or ARP Ping
redundant Ethernet mode is configured and Ping IP target is not
reachable from Ethernet 1.
Communications, Ethernet Link 2 Loss
True when Ethernet Link 2 connection is lost or ARP Ping
redundant Ethernet mode is configured and Ping IP target is not
reachable from Ethernet 2.
Communications, VRM Comm Fail
True when communication from the VRM-2020 to the DGC-2020HD
has been lost.
Configurable DTCs, Configurable DTC #x
Pre-alarm indication that a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) with
Suspect Parameter Number (SPN) and Failure Mode Indicator
(FMI) has been received that match the SPN and FMI settings in
the Configurable DTC and the Alarm Configuration is set for Pre-
alarm.
Configurable Protection, Configurable Protection #x,
Threshold x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm and the
threshold has been exceeded.
Critical Breakers Missing
True when expected critical breakers are not detected on the
network.
Dead Bus Control Grant Fail
True when the DGC-2020HD is denied permission to close a
breaker onto a dead bus after a fixed 10-second delay. The dead
bus breaker close request is then canceled for this unit.
DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid) Consumption Error
True when the engine ECU reports via CAN bus that a DEF
Consumption Error has occurred.
DEF Fluid Low
True when the engine ECU reports via CAN bus that the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is at a level between 8 and 23%.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-23

Name/Description Symbol
DEF Inducement
This pre-alarm indicates the lowest level of inducement not to
operate the engine when DEF is low or of poor quality or there is a
problem with the Exhaust After Treatment System (EATS). The
engine is operating in a reduced power mode. Eventually the level
of inducement will be increased unless the problem with the DEF or
malfunction in the EATS is corrected.
DEF Low Severe
True when the engine ECU reports via CAN bus that Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is at a level below 8%.
DEF Pre-Severe Inducement
This pre-alarm indicates a high level of inducement not to operate
the engine due to low or poor quality Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), or
a malfunction in the Exhaust After Treatment System (EATS). The
engine may operate in a reduced power mode, or for a limited time,
after which it will enter a state of severe inducement unless the
problem with the DEF or malfunction in the EATS is corrected.
DEF Quality Poor
True when the engine ECU reports “DEF Quality Poor” via CAN
bus.
DEF Severe Inducement
This pre-alarm indicates the highest level of inducement not to
operate the engine due to low or poor quality Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF), or a malfunction in the Exhaust After Treatment System
(EATS). The engine may operate in a reduced power mode, or for a
limited time, or may be prevented from starting by the ECU until the
problem is corrected. A service tool may be required to restart the
engine.
DEF Tampering
True when the engine ECU reports “DEF Tampering” via CAN Bus.

DEF Warning
This pre-alarm indicates the first level of warning when EATS is not
functioning properly or DEF quality or level is not sufficient for
proper operation.
DEF Warning Level 2
This pre-alarm indicates the second level of warning when EATS is
not functioning properly or DEF quality or level is not sufficient for
proper operation.
Diag Trouble Code
True when a Diagnostic Trouble Code exists.

DPF Regenerate Disabled

True when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp status broadcast
over CAN Bus indicates that DPF regeneration is inhibited.
DPF Regenerate Required
True when the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp status broadcast
over CAN Bus indicates that DPF regeneration is required.
DPF Soot Level High
True when the engine ECU reports via CAN Bus that Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF) soot level is high.
DPF Soot Level Moderately High
True when Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp status (yellow
warning) broadcast over CAN Bus indicates that the soot level is
moderately high.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-24 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
DPF Soot Level Severely High
True when Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp status (red warning)
broadcast over CAN Bus indicates that the soot level is severely
high.
ECU Comm Loss
True when communication to the ECU has been lost.

Exhaust System Error

Pre-alarm indicating an Exhaust System Error has been detected.
A number of conditions cause this; examples include DEF Tank
Low indication, Purge in Progress, Exhaust System Error, Exhaust
System Inducement Indications, etc. This is derived based on ECU
Lamp conditions communicated from the Engine ECU to the
DGC-2020HD via J1939 CAN Bus communications.
Exhaust System Escape Mode
This pre-alarm indicates a temporary override of inducement not to
operate the engine. This is set by the ECU and is not a user setting.
Fuel Leak Detect
True when the Fuel Leak Detect function is configured as a pre-
alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Generator Protection, Frequency, Frequency (81-x)
True when the 81-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Power, Loss of Excitation (40Q-x)
True when the 40Q-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Current Imbalance (46-x_1P)
True when the 46-x single-phase element is configured as a pre-
alarm and has tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Current Imbalance (46-x_3P)
True when the 46-x three-phase element is configured as a pre-
alarm and has tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Overcurrent (51-x)
True when the 51-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Phase Differential (87-1)
True when the 87-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Current, Neutral Differential (87N-1)
True when the 87N-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Voltage, Overvoltage (59-x)
True when the 59-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Voltage, Phase Imbalance (47-x)
True when the 47-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Power, Power (32-x)
True when the 32-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Generator Protection, Voltage, Undervoltage (27-x)
True when the 27-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-25

Name/Description Symbol
Generator Protection, Loss of MAINS Protection, Vector Shift
(78-x)
True when the 78-x element is configured as a pre-alarm and has
tripped.
Global Pre-Alarm
True when one or more pre-alarms are set.

GOV Output Out of Range

True when GOV Output is the selected parameter, Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm, and the threshold has been
exceeded.
Group Capacity Fail
True when enough generation is not online before the time delay
expires. At this time the group breaker close request is aborted. The
group breaker will not close even if enough generation is brought
online.
Group Capacity not Reached
True when enough generation is not online before the time delay
expires. The Group Capacity Not Reached status may be used in
logic to shed loads in the system for example. If enough generation
is brought online or the demand reduces during this time, the group
breaker will still close.
High Battery Voltage
True when the Battery Overvoltage Pre-Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.

High Coolant Temp

True when the High Coolant Temp Pre-Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.
High Exhaust Temperature
True when Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) lamp status broadcast
over CAN bus indicates high exhaust temperature.
High Fuel Level
True when the High Fuel Level Pre-Alarm settings have been
exceeded.
Intergenerator Comm Fail
True when the DGC-2020HD detects that an individual generator
previously connected to a generator network has lost connection.
IRIG Sync Lost
True when the IRIG signal is lost. The pre-alarm monitors for IRIG
signal loss once a valid signal is detected at the IRIG port.
Low Battery Voltage
True when the Low Battery Voltage Pre-Alarm settings have been
exceeded.
Low Coolant Level
True when the Low Coolant Level function is configured as a pre-
alarm and the activation delay has expired. In addition, true when
CAN bus is enabled and the Low Coolant Level Alarm threshold
has been exceeded.
Low Coolant Temp
True when the Low Coolant Temp Pre-Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.
Low Fuel Level
True when the Low Fuel Level Pre-Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-26 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Low Oil Pressure
True when the Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.

LS Output Out of Range

True when LS Output is the selected parameter, Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm, and the threshold has been
exceeded.
Mains Controller Missing
True when the Mains Controller Missing pre-alarm is active.

Mains Fail Transfer Fail

True when the Mains Fail Transfer pre-alarm is active.

Maintenance Interval
True when the Maintenance Interval Pre-Alarm threshold has been
exceeded.
Missing System Components
True when the expected number of tie breaker controllers is
incorrect.
MPU Fail
True when the MPU has failed.

Network ID Missing Error

True if an expected sequence ID is not detected on the network.
Expected sequence IDs are entered on the Network Configuration
screen.
Network ID Repeat Error
True if two or more DGC-2020HDs report the same expected
sequence ID. Expected sequence IDs are entered on the Network
Configuration screen.
NTP Sync Lost
True when the NTP (Network Time Protocol) signal is lost. The
alarm monitors for NTP signal loss once the real-time clock is
synchronized to the network.
Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input #x, Out of Range
True when the analog input connection is open and the Out of
Range Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm.
Programmable Inputs, Analog Inputs, Input #x, Threshold x
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm and the
threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Contacts Inputs, Input x
True when Contact Input x is active, the Alarm Configuration is set
to Pre-Alarm, and the activation delay has expired.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs, AEM x, Input #x,
Out of Range
True when the remote analog input connection is open and the Out
of Range Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Analog Inputs, AEM x, Input #x,
Threshold
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm and the
threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs, CEM1, Input x
True when Remote Contact Input x is active, the Alarm
Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm, and the activation delay has
expired.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-27

Name/Description Symbol
Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs, AEM x, RTD Input
#x, Out of Range
True when the remote RTD input connection is open and the Out of
Range Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm.
Programmable Inputs, Remote RTD Inputs, AEM x, RTD Input
#x, Threshold
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm and the
threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Inputs, Remote Thermocouple Inputs, AEM x,
Thermocouple Input #x, Threshold
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm and the
threshold has been exceeded.
Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements, Element x
True when the Configurable Element x logic element is true, Alarm
Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm, and the Activation Delay has
expired.
Programmable Outputs, Remote Analog Outputs, AEM x,
Output #x, Out of Range
True when the remote analog output connection is open and the
Out of Range Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm.
Sender Fail, Coolant Temp Sender Fail
True when the Coolant Temp Sender Fail is configured as a pre-
alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Fuel Level Sender Fail
True when the Fuel Level Sender Fail is configured as a pre-alarm
and the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Oil Pressure Sender Fail
True when the Oil Pressure Sender Fail is configured as a pre-
alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Sender Fail, Voltage Sensing Fail
True when the Voltage Sensing Fail is configured as a pre-alarm
and the activation delay has expired.
System Segments Unreachable
True when the DGC-2020HD has detected all bus segments are not
reachable by the DGC-2020HD making the annunciation via the
available statuses from other tie breaker controllers in the system.
This indicates that the system segmentation may not be properly
configured, that a tie breaker controller in the system is not
communicating its status (it may be OFF or a cable has fallen out),
or that the inter-communications network is not functioning properly.
VRM, EDM Pre-Alarm
True when the Exciter Diode Monitor is configured as a pre-alarm
and has tripped.
VRM, Field Overvoltage Pre-Alarm
True when the Field Overvoltage element is configured as a pre-
alarm and has tripped.
VRM, Loss of Sensing Pre-Alarm
True when the Loss of Sensing element is configured as a pre-
alarm and has tripped.
VRM, OEL Pre-Alarm
True when the overexcitation limiter is configured as a pre-alarm
and has activated.
VRM, UEL Pre-Alarm
True when the underexcitation limiter is configured as a pre-alarm
and has activated.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-28 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
VRM, V/Hz Pre-Alarm
True when the underfrequency limiter is configured as a pre-alarm
and has activated.
VRM, Gen Below 10 Hz Pre-Alarm
True when the Gen Below 10 Hz pre-alarm is enabled and the
generator frequency is below 10 Hz.
VRM, RTDs, RTD Input X, Threshold X
True when the Alarm Configuration is set to Pre-Alarm and the
threshold has been exceeded for the duration of the activation
delay.
VRM, RTDs, RTD Input X, Out of Range
True when the RTD input connection is open and the Out of Range
Alarm Type is set to Pre-Alarm.
Weak Battery Voltage
True when the battery voltage while cranking has dipped to a level
below that configured in the Weak Battery Pre-Alarm settings.

Table 21-6. I/O Group, Senders

Name/Description Symbol
Coolant Temp Sender Fail
True when the Coolant Temp Sender Fail is configured as either a pre-alarm or
alarm and the activation delay has expired.
Fuel Level Sender Fail
True when the Fuel Level Sender Fail is configured as either a pre-alarm or alarm
and the activation delay has expired.
Oil Pressure Sender Fail
True when the Oil Pressure Sender Fail is configured as either a pre-alarm or alarm
and the activation delay has expired.
Speed Sender Fail
True when the Speed Sender Fail activation delay has expired.

Voltage Sensing Fail

True when the Voltage Sensing Fail is configured as either a pre-alarm or alarm and
the activation delay has expired.

Table 21-7. I/O Group, Logic Control Relays

Name/Description Symbol
Input 1-64
The logic control relays (LCR) consist of LCR outputs and LCR inputs. The output
can be used to terminate the “output” end of a logic network, and then use the
corresponding input as an input to logic elsewhere in the logic scheme. When a
given LCR output is true the corresponding LCR input is true. In other words,
when LCR Output N (N being a number from 1 to 64) becomes true, then LCR
Input N is true also.
If you get a “too many logic levels” error while building a logic network, LCR
outputs and inputs can be used as a solution to this problem. Place an LCR output
on the end of the partial logic network and then use the corresponding LCR input
to build more logic than was previously possible.
Output 1-64
See description above.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-29

Table 21-8. I/O Group, Off-Page Objects

Name/Description Description Symbol
Off-Page Output When the input is true, the corresponding input of
the same name becomes true.
When placing an Off-Page Output into the logic
diagram, the user is prompted to name the output.
Then, the corresponding input becomes available
in the Input List.
Off-Page Input True when the corresponding Off-Page Output of
the same name is true.

Components
This group contains Comment Blocks, Latches, Logic Counters, Logic Gates, Logic Gates, and Pickup
and Dropout Timers. Table 21-9 lists the names and descriptions of the objects in the Components group.
Table 21-9. Components Group, Names and Descriptions
Name/Description Symbol
Comment Blocks
Comment Block
The logic comment block is used to place notes on the logic.

Counters
Counter
A logic counter produces a true Alarm output when the elapsed count is greater
than or equal to the Trigger Count setting after a false to true transition occurs on
the Count Up input from the connected logic. A positive going edge on the Reset
input will reset the counter. The count will be reduced by 1 each time a false to true
transition occurs on the Count Down input. Double-click or right-click on the logic
counter to select from counters 1 through 16.

Latches
Reset Priority Latch
The latch is set when the Set input is true and the Reset input is false. The latch is
cleared when the Reset input is true.

Set Priority Latch

The latch is set when the Set input is true. The latch is cleared when the Set input is
false and the Reset input is true.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-30 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Toggle Latch
The latch is set when the Set input is true. The latch is cleared when the Set input is
false and the Reset input is true. The latch is toggled when the Set and Reset
inputs are false and the Toggle input is true.

Logic Gates ANSI* IEC*

AND
Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
NAND
Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
OR
Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
NOR
Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
XOR
Input Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0

When an XOR gate has more than 2 inputs, the output is true whenever an odd
number of inputs are true.
XNOR
Input Output
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

When an XNOR gate has more than 2 inputs, the output is true whenever an even
number of inputs are true. The output is also true if no inputs are true.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-31

Name/Description Symbol
NOT (INVERTER)
Input Output
0 1
1 0
Timers
Drop Out Timer
A drop out timer produces a true output when the elapsed time is greater than or
equal to the Dropout Time setting after a true to false transition occurs on the
Initiate input from the connected logic. Whenever the Initiate input transitions to
true, the output transitions to false immediately. Refer to Pickup and Dropout
Timers. Double-click or right-click on the logic timer to select from timers 1 through
32.
Pickup Timer
A pickup timer produces a true output when the elapsed time is greater than or
equal to the Pickup Time setting after a false to true transition occurs on the Initiate
input from the connected logic. Whenever the Initiate input status transitions to
false, the output transitions to FALSE immediately. Refer to Pickup and Dropout
Timers. Double-click or right-click on the logic timer to select from timers 1 through
32.
Triggers
Falling Edge
The output of a falling edge trigger pulses true when the input goes from logic 1 to
logic 0. Double-click or right-click on the logic trigger to change the type.
Rising Edge
The output of a rising edge trigger pulses true when the input goes from logic 0 to
logic 1. Double-click or right-click on the logic trigger to change the type.

* To select the symbol type for logic gates, click the Options buttons on the BESTlogicPlus toolbar.

Programming Pickup and Dropout Timers

To program logic timer settings, use the Settings Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic/Logic Timers tree branch. Enter a Name label that you want to
appear on the timer logic block. The Time Delay value range is 0 to 250 hours in 1 hour increments, 0 to
250 minutes in 1 minute increments, or 0 to 1,800 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Next, open the Components tab inside the BESTlogicPlus window and drag a timer onto the program
grid. Right click on the timer to select the timer you want to use that was previously set on the Logic
Timers tree branch. The Logic Timer Properties Dialog Box will appear. Select the timer you want to use.
Pickup and dropout logic timer logic blocks are shown in Figure 21-2. Timing accuracy is ±15
milliseconds.

Initiate
Initiate Pickup Output
Timer Pickup Time

Output

P0048-03

Initiate
Initiate Dropout Output
Timer Dropout Time

Output

Figure 21-2. Pickup and Dropout Timer Logic Blocks

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-32 9469300995

Elements
This group contains protection and control elements.
Table 21-10 lists the names and descriptions of the elements in the Elements group.
Table 21-10. Elements Group, Names and Descriptions
Name/Description Symbol
27-x
When the Block input is true, the 27-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 27-x undervoltage element is in a trip condition. Connect to
another logic block input.

32-x
When the Block input is true, the 32-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 32-x power element is in a trip condition. Connect to another logic
block input.

40Q-x
When the Block input is true, the 40Q-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 40Q-x loss of excitation element is in a trip condition. Connect to
another logic block input.

46-x_1P
When the Block input is true, the 46-x_1P element is disabled. The Trip output
is true when the 46-x_1P single-phase current imbalance element is in a trip
condition. Connect to another logic block input.
46-x_3P
When the Block input is true, the 46-x_3P element is disabled. The Trip output
is true when the 46-x_3P three-phase current imbalance element is in a trip
condition. Connect to another logic block input.
47-x
When the Block input is true, the 47-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 47-x phase imbalance element is in a trip condition. Connect to
another logic block input.
51-x
When the Block input is true, the 51-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 51-x overcurrent element is in a trip condition. Connect to another
logic block input.
59-x
When the Block input is true, the 59-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 59-x overvoltage element is in a trip condition. Connect to another
logic block input.

78-x
When the Block input is true, the 78-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 78-x vector shift element is in a trip condition. Connect to another
logic block input.

81-x
When the Block input is true, the 81-x element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 81-x frequency element is in a trip condition. Connect to another
logic block input.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-33

Name/Description Symbol
87-1
When the Block input is true, the 87-1 element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 87-1 phase differential element is tripped in the restrained area or
unrestrained is disabled.
The Unrestrained Trip output is true when the 87-1 element is tripped above the
unrestrained level.
The 2nd Harmonic Inhibit output is true when 2nd harmonic is blocking trip.
The 5th Harmonic Inhibit output is true when 5th harmonic is blocking trip.
Connect the outputs to other logic block inputs.
87N-1
When the Block input is true, the 87N-1 element is disabled. The Trip output is
true when the 87N-1 neutral differential element is in a trip condition. Connect to
another logic block input.
Alarm Silence
The alarm will be silenced when the Set input is true. The alarm can also be
silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence button on the front panel of the DGC-
2020HD.

Alternate Frequency Override

When the Set input is true, protection and bus condition detection is forced to
operate at the Alternate Frequency instead of the Rated Frequency.

Alternate Voltage Override

When the Set input is true, the alternate voltage value associated with this
element becomes the active voltage trim value.

Analog Load Share Override

When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD utilizes analog load share lines,
rather than Ethernet, for load sharing.

ATS
When the ATS input is true, and the DGC-2020HD is in AUTO mode, the
generator will run. This can be used in place of the ATS programmable function
if it is desired to generate the ATS signal as a combination of programmable
logic rather than a simple contact input. If either the ATS logic element is true or
the contact mapped to the ATS programmable function is true, and the DGC-
2020HD is in AUTO mode, the generator will run. If both the ATS logic element
and the ATS programmable function are false, and the DGC-2020HD is in
AUTO mode, the generator will cool down and stop.
Automatic Breaker Operation Inhibit
Automatic breaker operation is inhibited when the Set input is true.

Auto Mode
When the Set input is true, and the DGC-2020HD is in OFF mode, the DGC-
2020HD will switch to AUTO mode. This is a pulsed input. It does not need to be
held after the desired mode switch has occurred.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-34 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
AVR
Can be connected to inputs of other logic blocks. When the AVR is being raised,
the Raise output is true. When being lowered, the Lower output is true.

AVR Enable (VRM-2020)

When true, this element sets the unit to AVR mode.

AVR Lower Limit

(VRM-2020)
When true, the integration of negative error into the voltage trim and var/PF
controllers is prevented. Positive error integration is allowed. This is especially
useful when the UEL is active.
AVR Setpoint Adjust
(VRM-2020)
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the operating setpoint.
Pre-position X Enable: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the
active AVR setpoint.

AVR Upper Limit

(VRM-2020)
When true, the integration of positive error into the voltage trim and var/PF
controllers is prevented. Negative error integration is allowed. This is especially
useful when the OEL is active.
Base Load Setpoint
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the operating setpoint.
Pre-position x: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the active base
load setpoint.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-35

Name/Description Symbol
Broadcast Logic x
Status input is driven individually by each controller. Status input of every
element of each controller is broadcast over communications.
And provides logical AND output of all status inputs from every controller. This
output is true when the Status input of all controllers is true.
Or provides logical OR output of all status inputs from every controller. This
output is true when the Status input of any controllers is true.
Exactly One provides logical XOR output of all status inputs from every
controller. This output is true when the Status input of only one controller is true.
Breaker Control Inhibit
One breaker may be controlled by multiple DGC-2020HDs, however only one
unit is granted control over the breaker at a time.
When true, this element prevents the DGC-2020HD from being granted control
of a breaker.
Block Load Level x Offset
When true, the value associated with this offset is added to the currently active
block load level. Multiple active block load level offsets can be active at one time
and are cumulative.

Block Load Level x Override

When true, the value associated with this level override becomes the active
block load level. Only one block load level override is active at one time, even if
multiple elements are true.

Cross Current Disable

(VRM-2020)
When true, cross-current compensation is disabled.

Closed Transition Override

All mains fail transfers are forced to be closed transitions, even if Mains Fail
Transfer Type is set to Open, when the Set input is true.

Configurable Element x
Configurable elements 1 through 8 are connected to the logic scheme as
outputs. These elements are configurable in BESTCOMSPlus under
Programmable Outputs, Configurable Elements. The user can assign a string of
up to 16 characters, configure whether the element should generate an alarm or
pre-alarm. If used for alarm or pre-alarm, the user's text is what will appear in
the alarm or pre-alarm annunciation and in the DGC-2020HD event log.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-36 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Cool Down and Stop Request
RUN Mode
If the unit is in RUN mode when the Cool Stop Request is received, the unit will
unload, open its breaker, and go into a cooldown cycle. While in the cooldown
cycle, the unit will display “COOL & STOP REQ” in addition to displaying the
cooldown timer. After the cooldown timer expires, the unit will go to OFF mode.
The Cool Stop Request must be removed before the unit can be run again.
If the Cool Stop Request is removed during the cooldown process, the unit will
remain running. Furthermore, if a condition occurs that normally causes the unit
to close its breaker in RUN mode, the unit will close its breaker and reload.
AUTO Mode
If the unit is in AUTO mode when the Cool Stop Request is received, all
conditions that would normally cause the unit to run in AUTO mode are cleared.
Since all conditions that cause the unit to run have been removed, the unit goes
into a cooldown cycle. While in the cooldown cycle, the unit will display “COOL
& STOP REQ” in addition to displaying the cooldown timer. After the cooldown
timer expires, the unit will shut down, remaining in AUTO. The Cool Stop
Request must be removed before the unit can be run again.
If the Cool Stop Request is removed during the cooldown process and some
condition that would normally cause the unit to run in AUTO mode is true, the
unit will remain running. Furthermore, if a condition occurs that normally causes
the unit to close its breaker, the unit will close its breaker and reload.
Cool Down Request
RUN Mode
If the unit is in RUN mode when the Cool Down Request is received, the unit is
forced to unload and open its breaker and then go into a cooldown cycle. While
in the cool down cycle, the unit will display “COOLDOWN REQ” in addition to
displaying the cooldown timer. After the cooldown timer expires, the unit will
remain running in RUN mode. The Cool Down Request must be removed before
the breaker can be closed again; this element blocks breaker closures.
If the Cool Down Request is removed during the cool down process, the unit will
remain running in RUN mode. Furthermore, if a condition occurs that normally
causes the unit to close its breaker in RUN mode, the unit will close its breaker
and reload.
AUTO Mode
If the unit is in AUTO mode and the Cool Down Request is received, the unit is
forced to unload and open its breaker and go into a cooldown cycle. While in the
cooldown cycle, the unit will display “COOLDOWN REQ” in addition to
displaying the cooldown timer. After the cool down timer expires, the unit will
remain running in AUTO mode, unless there are no conditions that cause the
unit to run in AUTO mode, in which case it will shut down and remain in AUTO
mode. The Cool Down Request must be removed before the breaker can be
closed again; this element blocks breaker closures.
If the Cool Down Request is removed during the cool down process and some
condition that would normally cause the unit to run in AUTO mode is true, the
unit will remain running in AUTO mode. Furthermore, if a condition occurs that
normally causes the unit to close its breaker, the unit will close its breaker and
reload.
Cylinder Cutout Enable Override
When true, cylinder cutout is enabled. When false, Cylinder Cutout is disabled
when any of the following are true:
• Synchronization is in progress
• The machine is operating with the generator breaker closed
• The Cylinder Cutout Disable setting is true
• The Cylinder Cutout Disable logic element is true

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-37

Name/Description Symbol
Data Log Trigger
A data log is triggered when the Trigger input is pulsed true.

Dead Bus Close Inhibit

When true, the DGC-2020HD is prevented from closing a breaker onto a dead
bus.

Differential Report Trigger

A differential report is triggered when the Trigger input is pulsed true.

DPF Manual Regeneration

Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration is forced manually when the Set input is
true.

DPF Regeneration Inhibit

Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration is inhibited when the Set input is true.

Droop Disable
(VRM-2020)
When true, droop compensation is disabled in the VRM-2020.

Droop Override
When the droop override logic element is true, the speed and voltage trim
functions are disabled. The machine operates in speed droop and voltage droop
to accomplish kW and kvar sharing. This is useful when it is desired to operate a
system in droop rather than isochronous load sharing.
ECU Connect Override
When true, a Key On signal is applied to the engine ECU which enables
updating of CAN Bus data at any time except during Disconnecting State.

EDM (Exciter Diode Monitor)

When the Block input is true, the EDM element is disabled.
The Trip output is true when the EDM element is in a trip condition. Connect to
another logic block input.

Email Trigger
When true, an email, containing user-specified parameters, is sent to recipients.
The recipients and parameters may be specified on the Email Setup screen.

Emergency Stop
When the Set input is true, an Emergency Shutdown alarm is annunciated and
the Emergency Stop LED on the RDP-110 is illuminated.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-38 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Engine Run
The Start input starts the generator. No load is applied. The breaker remains
open. The Stop input stops the generator. The DGC-2020HD only responds to
this logic element when in AUTO mode.

EPS Supplying Load

When true, the Set input forces a supplying load indication. This is useful when
it is necessary for the supplying load indication to be true during test runs, but
the system load is not enough to light the supplying load indication.
A supplying load indication is true when the supplying load logic element is true
and the generator is stable (voltage and frequency are within the limits
programmed on the Gen Condition Detection screen under Breaker
Management, Bus Condition Detection in the BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Explorer). This is OR’ed with the traditional supplying load criteria that supplying
load is true when the generator current is above a percentage of CT primary
current (typically 3% minimum).
When the supplying load indication has been driven from logic or from generator
current levels, the DGC-2020HD will go through a cool down cycle when it is in
AUTO mode and the ATS contact has been removed.
External Start Delay
If the Set input is true while the DGC-2020HD is in the Pre Start state, the DGC-
2020HD will remain in the Pre Start state until the Set input is false.

FCR Enable
(VRM-2020)
When true, this element switches the unit to manual (FCR) mode.

FCR Setpoint Adjust

(VRM-2020)
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the operating setpoint.
Pre-position X Enable: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the
active FCR setpoint.

Field Overvoltage
(VRM-2020)
When the Block input is true, the Field Overvoltage element is disabled. The
Trip output is true when the field overvoltage element is in a trip condition.
Connect to another logic block input.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-39

Name/Description Symbol
Forced System Start
When the Start input is true, this element starts the next unit in a multiple unit
system based on the sequencing criterion (demand start/stop). In addition, it
blocks any demand based stop requests. If all units are running and FORCED
SYSTEM START is enabled, all machines remain running and do not shut down
for demand-based stops, effectively inhibiting Generator Sequencing.
Generator Breaker
This element is used to connect the breaker open and close output signals from the DGC-
2020HD to physical output contacts to open and close the generator breaker, and map
breaker status feedback to a contact input. In addition, contact inputs can be mapped to
allow switches to be implemented to manually initiate breaker open and close requests.
This element is available only when it is included in the selected System Breaker
Configuration setting.
Inputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that will provide breaker status
feedback to the DGC-2020HD. When the contact input is closed, the breaker is indicated
to be closed. When the contact input is open, the breaker is indicated to be open.
Open: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to initiate a manual
breaker open request. When this input is pulsed closed while the DGC-2020HD is in RUN
or AUTO mode, the breaker will open.
Close: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to initiate a
manual breaker close request. When this input is pulsed and the DGC-2020HD is in
AUTO or RUN mode, and the generator is stable, a close request will be initiated. If the
Dead Bus Close Enable parameter is true, and the bus is dead, the breaker will close. If
the bus is stable, the DGC-2020HD will synchronize the generator to the bus, and then
close the breaker.
Outputs
The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of the DGC-2020HD that will be used
to drive the breaker.
Open: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to) when the
DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to open. It will be a pulse if the Breaker
Output Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Breaker Hardware screen under Breaker
Management in the Settings Explorer, and the length is determined by the Open Pulse
Time. It will be a constant output if the Generator Breaker Hardware Contact Type is set to
continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough for the breaker to actually open
before the pulse is removed.
Close: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to) when the
DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to close. It will be a pulse if the Breaker
Output Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Breaker Hardware screen under Breaker
Management in the Settings Explorer, and the length is determined by the Open Pulse
Time. It will be a constant output if the Generator Breaker Hardware Contact Type is set to
continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough for the breaker to actually close
before the pulse is removed.

Notes
When using the DGC-2020HD synchronizer, it is
recommended that local DGC-2020HD relay outputs be
used for breaker closing commands to minimize the
possibility of closures outside of desired breaker closing
angles.
If remote (CEM-2020) outputs are to be used for breaker
close commands, it is recommended that the anticipatory
synchronizer type be used, and the breaker fail wait time
be adjusted to account for possible CEM-2020 output
delays (typically 50 ms) to achieve desired breaker
closing angles.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-40 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Governor
Can be connected to inputs of other logic blocks. When the governor is being
raised, the Raise output is true. When being lowered, the Lower output is true.

Group Breaker
This element is used to connect the breaker open and close output signals from the DGC-
2020HD to physical output contacts to open and close the group breaker, and map
breaker status feedback to a contact input. In addition, contact inputs can be mapped to
allow switches to be implemented to manually initiate breaker open and close requests.
This element is available only when it is included in the selected System Breaker
Configuration setting.
Inputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that will provide breaker status
feedback to the DGC-2020HD. When the contact input is closed, the breaker is indicated
to be closed. When the contact input is open, the breaker is indicated to be open.
Open: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to initiate a manual
breaker open request. When this input is pulsed closed while the DGC-2020HD is in RUN
or AUTO mode, the breaker will open.
Close: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to initiate a
manual breaker close request. When this input is pulsed and the DGC-2020HD is in
AUTO or RUN mode, and the group bus is stable, a close request will be initiated. If the
Dead Group Close Enable parameter is true, and the destination bus is dead, the breaker
will close. If the destination bus is stable, the DGC-2020HD will synchronize the
generators to the bus, and then close the breaker.
Outputs
The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of the DGC-2020HD that will be used
to drive the breaker.
Open: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to) when the
DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to open. It will be a pulse if the Breaker
Output Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Group Breaker screen, and the length is
determined by the Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the Contact Type is set
to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough for the breaker to actually
open before the pulse is removed.
Close: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to) when the
DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to close. It will be a pulse if the Contact
Type is set to Pulse on the Group Breaker screen, and the length is determined by the
Close Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the Contact Type is set to continuous.
Note the pulse time must be set long enough for the breaker to actually close before the
pulse is removed.

Notes
When using the DGC-2020HD synchronizer, it is
recommended that local DGC-2020HD relay outputs be
used for breaker closing commands to minimize the
possibility of closures outside of desired breaker closing
angles.
If remote (CEM-2020) outputs are to be used for breaker
close commands, it is recommended that the anticipatory
synchronizer type be used, and the breaker fail wait time
be adjusted to account for possible CEM-2020 output
delays (typically 50 ms) to achieve desired breaker
closing angles.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-41

Name/Description Symbol
Group Stop
When the stop input is true, any group start requests, which originated in logic,
are cleared and the generators in the group are shut down.

Note

In order for a generator to respond to Group Stop

requests, the DGC-2020HD must be in AUTO
mode and generator must have been started by a
Demand Start or a Group Start request. The Group
Stop logic element will not stop a generator that
was started by a Run with Load Start or an ATS
contact input.
Idle Request
When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD sends an idle request to the ECU
on J1939 engines that are equipped to receive such a request. The request
consists of an enable bit command and an idle RPM setting. At this time, only
Volvo and Cummins are implemented. ECUs that accept the idle RPM setting
set the engine to the requested RPM. ECUs that accept only the enable bit
command, set the engine to their internal idle speed setting, ignoring the
requested idle RPM from the DGC-2020HD.
Import/Export Setpoint
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the operating setpoint.
Pre-position x: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the active
import/export setpoint.

Internal Tracking Disable

(VRM-2020)
When true, internal automatic setpoint tracking is disabled.

Islanded Automatic Override

When true, islanded kW control is set to automatic.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-42 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Islanded Group Request
Start One: When true, the highest priority generator for this operating mode is
started.
Start All: When true, all generators enabled for sequencing for this operating
mode are started.
Start Demand: When true, a subset of generators is started, based on expected
demand level and sequencing priority. Expected demand level is established
using Block Load Level settings. Refer to the Multiple Generator Management
chapter for more information.
Start with Group Breaker Close: Set this true simultaneously with one of the
above starting modes. The group breaker closes when the user-selected group
breaker closure conditions are met and group capacity is sufficient.

Note

In order for a generator to respond to Group Start

requests, the DGC-2020HD must be in AUTO
mode, the System Type must be configured as
Segmented Bus System, and Sequencing and
Demand Start/Stop must both be enabled.
Islanded Manual Override
When true, islanded kW control is set to manual.

Kvar Control Inhibit

When true, the kvar control PID Controller that affects voltage bias is disabled.

Kvar Setpoint Adjust

Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the operating setpoint.
Pre-position X Enable: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the
active kvar setpoint.

KWatt Control Inhibit

When true, the kW control PID Controller that affects speed bias is disabled.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-43

Name/Description Symbol
KW Mains Parallel Setpoint Adjust
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the KW Mains Parallel
setpoint.
Pre-position X Enable: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the
active KW Mains Parallel setpoint.

KW Islanded Setpoint Adjust

Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the KW Islanded
setpoint.
Pre-position X Enable: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the
active KW Islanded setpoint.

Lamp Test
The lamp test will be performed when the Set input is true. The lamp test can
also be accomplished by simultaneously pressing the Up and Down buttons on
the front panel of the DGC-2020HD.

Line Drop Disable

(VRM-2020)
When true, line drop compensation is disabled.

Live Bus Close Inhibit

When true, the DGC-2020HD is prevented from closing a breaker onto a live
bus.

Load Anticipation Inhibit

When true, the load anticipation function is disabled.

Load Shed Bias Enable X

When true, the corresponding Add Reserve Bias value is added to the
calculation for determining when to add a load. If multiple Load Shed Bias
Enable elements are true simultaneously, the sum of all Add Reserve Bias
values is added to the calculation.
Load Shed Priority X Add
Force add of a particular load. If this input is held true, the load will not be shed
any time the Shed Load or Shed Load Fast inputs are true. If this particular load
were to be the next priority to shed, but the Load Add input is true, the next
lowest priority will be shed instead. The Trip All input has priority over the Load
Add inputs. The loads will always be tripped with the Trip All input even if the
Load Add input is true.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-44 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Load Shed Priority X Trip
Force trip of a particular load. If this input is held true, the load will not be
considered for addition back into the system regardless of the system reserve
capacity. If this particular load were to be the next priority to add, but the Load
Trip input is true, the next highest priority will be added instead. The Load Trip
input has priority over the Add All input. The load will not be enabled if the Load
Trip and Add All inputs are simultaneously true.
Load Take Over
When the Set input is true, the generator is forced to start and either an open or
closed transition is executed depending on the Mains Fail Transfer Type setting.
Refer to the Breaker Management chapter for more information.

Load Shed
Shed Load: Begins shedding loads from the system starting with the lowest
priority enabled loads. On the rising edge of the Shed Load input going true, the
lowest priority load is immediately shed. Subsequent loads will be shed after
each load’s programmed Shed Delay setting if the Shed Load input continues to
be held true. The first load is shed with no delay to provide immediate load
relief.
Shed Load Fast: This input is the same as the Shed Load input, but uses the
programmed Shed Fast Delay settings during timing. On the rising edge of the
Shed Load Fast input going true, the lowest priority load is immediately shed.
This is done regardless of the state of the Shed Load input.
Load Add Inhibit: This input prevents load from being added to the system. This
can be used in cases where the system must operate at reduced generator
capacity to prevent overloading the available machines.
Trip All: This input forces an immediate trip of all loads without time delay. If the
Load Add Inhibit element is not held true, loads can begin sequencing back on
from the highest priority load when this is removed. Note that loads with priority
of 0 are disabled, and are not tripped when Trip All is true.
Add All: This enables all loads without time delay. The Shed Load, Shed Load
Fast, and Trip All inputs have priority over this input to allow the load shed
function to operate. Note that loads with priority of 0 are disabled, thus they are
not enabled when Add All is true.
Logic Alarm
When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD goes into an alarm condition.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-45

Name/Description Symbol
Logic Input Counter X
The Logic Input Counter element continuously counts the number of true inputs.
As long as the number of true inputs meets or exceeds a user-defined
threshold, the output for that threshold is held true.
Two thresholds are provided for each Logic Input Counter.
This element is active only when the Enable input is held true.
See Logic Input Counter Threshold Settings, below, for more information on
threshold settings.

Logic Pre-Alarm
When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD goes into a Pre-alarm condition.

Loss of Sensing
(VRM-2020)
When the Block input is true, the Loss of Sensing element is disabled. The Trip
output is true when the Loss of Sensing element is in a trip condition. Connect
to another logic block input.
Loss of Sensing Transfer Disable
(VRM-2020)
When true, a Loss of Sensing trip will not trigger a transfer to manual mode.

Low Fuel Pre-Alarm

When the Set input is true, a Low Fuel Pre-Alarm is annunciated and the Low
Fuel Level LED on the RDP-110 is illuminated.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-46 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Low Line Override
When the Set input is true the 27, 59, 47, 51, 32, and 40Q settings and the
configurable element settings and are scaled by the low-line scale factor setting.

Mains Breaker
This element is used to connect the breaker open and close output signals from
the DGC-2020HD to physical output contacts to open and close the mains
breaker and map breaker status feedback to a contact input. In addition, contact
inputs can be mapped to allow switches to be implemented to manually initiate
breaker open and close requests.
This element is available only when it is included in the selected System
Breaker Configuration setting.
Inputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that will provide breaker
status feedback to the DGC-2020HD. When the contact input is closed, the
breaker is indicated to be closed. When the contact input is open, the breaker is
indicated to be open.
Open: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to initiate
a manual breaker open request. When this input is pulsed closed while the
DGC-2020HD is in RUN or AUTO mode, the breaker will open.
Close: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to
initiate a manual breaker close request. When this input is pulsed, a close
request will be initiated.
Outputs
The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of the DGC-2020HD that
will be used to drive the breaker.
Open: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to)
when the DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to open. It will be a
pulse if the Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Mains Breaker screen, and the
length is determined by the Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the
Contact Type is set to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough
for the breaker to actually open before the pulse is removed.
Close: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to)
when the DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to close. It will be a
pulse if the Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Mains Breaker screen, and the
length is determined by the Close Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the
Contact Type is set to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough
for the breaker to actually close before the pulse is removed.

Notes
When using the DGC-2020HD synchronizer, it is
recommended that local DGC-2020HD relay
outputs be used for breaker closing commands to
minimize the possibility of closures outside of
desired breaker closing angles.
If remote (CEM-2020) outputs are to be used for
breaker close commands, it is recommended that
the anticipatory synchronizer type be used, and the
breaker fail wait time be adjusted to account for
possible CEM-2020 output delays (typically 50 ms)
to achieve desired breaker closing angles.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-47

Name/Description Symbol
Mains Fail Test
When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD will exercise its mains fail transfer
function exactly as it would if the mains were to fail on a mains fail
machine. This can be used as a test of the mains fail transfer capability of the
unit without having to cause a true mains failure.

Mains Fail Transfer Inhibit

The mains fail transfer function is inhibited when the Set input is true.

Mains Parallel Automatic Override

When true, mains parallel kW control is set to automatic.

Mains Parallel Group Request

Start One: When true, the highest priority generator for this operating mode is
started.
Start All: When true, all generators enabled for sequencing for this operating
mode are started.
Start Demand: When true, a subset of generators is started, based on expected
demand level and sequencing priority. Expected demand level is established
using Block Load Level settings. Refer to the Multiple Generator Management
chapter for more information.
Start with Group Breaker Close: Set this true simultaneously with one of the
above starting modes. The group breaker closes when the user-selected group
breaker closure conditions are met and group capacity is sufficient.

Note

In order for a generator to respond to Group Start

requests, the DGC-2020HD must be in AUTO
mode, the System Type must be configured as
Segmented Bus System, and Sequencing and
Demand Start/Stop must both be enabled.
Mains Parallel Manual Override
When true, mains parallel kW control is set to manual.

Mains Power Control

When an input is true, the associated mode becomes the active control mode.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-48 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Maintenance Mode
The maintenance mode logic element allows for a unit to be taken offline for
maintenance through normal generator sequencing measures. When this
element is set true, the unit will be placed as the lowest priority unit in the
sequencing table.
Once a running unit is in maintenance mode, the sequence algorithm will
eventually cause the unit to shut down by starting the next highest priority
generator(s) if the remaining generators can drive the demand below the start
levels. If the remaining generators cannot drive the demand below the start
levels, then the generator in maintenance mode will not be shut down.
The logic element must be held true until the generator is manually placed in
OFF mode. Once the element goes false and the unit is placed back in AUTO,
the unit’s priority will be determined by the current sequencing mode.
If multiple units are put in maintenance mode, then they will be sorted amongst
themselves by the current sequencing mode.
Modem Control
Connect the Dialout input to the output of another logic block. When true, the
modem will dial out.

MTU Cylinder Cutout Disable

When the Set input is true, Cylinder Cutout Disable 1 and Cylinder Cutout
Disable 2 are both sent to the engine ECU with true status. When this logic
element is false, Cylinder Cutout Disable 1 and Cylinder Cutout Disable 2 are
sent to the engine ECU with states set by the values programmed for the
Cylinder Cutout Disable 1 and Cylinder Cutout Disable 2 DGC-2020HD settings
which are configured on the ECU Setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
MTU Speed Demand Switch
When an input is true, the associated switch becomes the active speed demand
switch.

OEL Disable
(VRM-2020)
When true, the overexcitation limiter is disabled.

OEL Disabled in Manual Mode

(VRM-2020)
When true, the overexcitation limiter is disabled when manual (FCR) mode is
active.
OEL Online
(VRM-2020)
When true, this element enables the use of OEL when the unit is considered to
be online.

Off Mode
When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD will switch to OFF mode. This is a
pulsed input. It does not need to be held after the desired mode switch has
occurred.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-49

Name/Description Symbol
Paralleled to Mains
Setting the Paralleled input to true indicates to the DGC-2020HD that it is
paralleled to a utility.
When paralleled to the utility, the kW controller will regulate the machine’s kW
output at the Base Load Level (%) that is set on the Governor Bias Control
Settings screen, where the Base Load Level is in percent of the machine’s rated
kW. Otherwise, the kW controller will implement kW load sharing when part of a
load sharing system. If a load sharing system is not implemented, the speed
controller can be set up to implement speed droop.
When paralleled to the utility, the var/PF controller will regulate the machine’s
reactive power output according to the control mode setting. If the control mode
is var Controller, the output will be regulated to the kvar Setpoint (%) that is set
on the AVR Bias Control Settings screen, where the kvar Setpoint (%) is in
percentage of the machines rated kvar. If the control mode is PF Control, the
reactive power output is regulated to a level that maintains the machines power
factor at the value specified by the PF setting on the AVR Bias Control Settings
screen. When var/PF control is not active or not enabled, the voltage controller
can be set up to implement voltage droop.
Peak Shave Setpoint
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the operating setpoint.
Pre-position x: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the active peak
shave setpoint.

Power Factor Setpoint Adjust

Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the Power Factor
setpoint.
Pre-position x: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the active
Power Factor setpoint.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-50 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Prestart Output
This element is used to drive the prestart output relay from logic when the
Prestart Output Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”. When the Prestart
Output Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”, the prestart relay will not
close unless logic is used to drive this element. When the Prestart Output Relay
configuration is set to “Predefined”, the prestart relay is closed according to the
predefined prestart functionality of the DGC-2020HD. When the “Predefined”
functionality is selected, the relay will not respond to this element.
Programmable LED x
When the Set input is true, this element illuminates Programmable LED x on the
front panel.

RDP Programmable Alarm x

When the Set input is true, this element illuminates the Fuel Leak/Sender
Failure LED on the Remote Display Panel RDP-110. When this element is
connected in logic, it overrides all other commands to the LED. Otherwise, the
LED operates as normal.

RDP Programmable Pre-Alarm x

When the Set input is true, this element illuminates the Battery Overvoltage LED
on the Remote Display Panel RDP-110. When this element is connected in
logic, it overrides all other commands to the LED. Otherwise, the LED operates
as normal.

Reset
When the Set input is true, generator protection elements 78 and 81 are reset
as well as all protection elements associated with Bus 1 and Bus 2. Reset can
also be accomplished by pressing the Reset button on the front panel of the
DGC-2020HD.

Reset Bus 1
When the Set input is true, all protection associated only with Bus 1 is reset.

Reset Bus 2
When the Set input is true, all protection associated only with Bus 2 is reset.

RTM Input
The states of Input 1 through Input 6 are capable of being monitored in the
analysis tool. See the Metering chapter for details.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-51

Name/Description Symbol
Run Inhibit
When the Inhibit input is true, the DGC-2020HD is prevented from starting and
running the generator, regardless of any condition that would normally cause
the generator to run. If this element is false and there is any condition in effect
which will cause the generator to run, the DGC-2020HD will start and run the
generator.
Run Mode
When the Set input is true, and the DGC-2020HD is in OFF mode, the DGC-
2020HD will switch to RUN mode. This is a pulsed input. It does not need to be
held after the desired mode switch has occurred.

Run Output
This element is used to drive the run output relay from logic when the Run
Output Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”. When the Run Output
Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”, the run relay will not close unless
logic is used to drive this element. When the Run Output Relay configuration is
set to “Predefined”, the run relay is closed according to the predefined run
functionality of the DGC-2020HD. When the “Predefined” functionality is
selected, the relay will not respond to this element.
Run with Load
The Start input starts the generator and closes the Gen breaker. The Stop input
stops the generator and opens the Gen breaker. The DGC-2020HD only
responds to this logic element when in AUTO mode.
In order for Run With Load and Sequencing to operate reliably, it is
recommended that the inputs to the Run with Load logic element be pulsed
rather than held constant. For example, if a unit was started by sequencing, a
pulse on the Run with Load Stop will shut down the unit. However, if the Run
with Load Stop is held constant, sequencing could never start a unit because
the sequencing starts would be immediately negated by Run with Load stop
requests. Similarly, if a Run with Load Start is applied and held constant,
sequencing cannot shut down the unit. Any stop requests generated by
sequencing would immediately be negated by the Run with Load start request.
Sequenced System Startup
When the Start input is true, this element starts a sequence system when no
machines are running. This starts the first unit in a multiple unit system based
on the sequencing criterion.

Setting Group
There is a direct correlation between each logic input and the setting group that
will be selected. That is, asserting input D0 selects SG0 (Setting Group 0) and
asserting input D1 selects SG1 (Setting Group 1), etc. The active setting group
latches-in after the input is read so they can be pulsed. It is not necessary that
the input be maintained. If one or more inputs are asserted at the same time,
the numerically higher setting group will be activated. A pulse must be present
for approximately one second for the setting group change to occur.

Single-Phase Override
When the Set input is true, the DGC-2020HD switches to single-phase sensing
configuration and uses the Single Phase Override Sensing setting (A-B or A-C).

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-52 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
Soft Unload Request
When true, generators connected through a breaker onto mains connection are
unloaded.
The unload operation depends on connected segment types on System A and
System B after the breaker is opened. Gen segment types are driven only by
generators. Mains segment types are driven by mains feeds optionally
paralleled with generators. Load segment types are not driven (become dead
upon open). This is useful for unloading generators to reduce current through
the group breaker before opening.
Speed Lower
This element lowers the speed setting of the DGC-2020HD by up to 2 rpm per
second. After the speed has not been lowered for 30 seconds, the modified
speed is saved to nonvolatile memory.
If the Remember Speed Adjustments Setting is set to Yes, the adjusted speed is
saved to nonvolatile memory after the speed has not been raised or lowered for
30 seconds. Otherwise, the adjusted speed is retained for the duration of the
current run session, but reverts to the configured Engine RPM setting when a
new run session is started.
The Remember Speed Adjustments setting is found under Communications >
CAN Bus > Speed Setup on the front panel and in BESTCOMSPlus.
Speed Raise
This element raises the speed setting of the DGC-2020HD by up to 2 rpm per
second. After the speed has not been raised for 30 seconds, the modified speed
is saved to nonvolatile memory.
If the Remember Speed Adjustments Setting is set to Yes, the adjusted speed is
saved to nonvolatile memory after the speed has not been raised or lowered for
30 seconds. Otherwise, the adjusted speed is retained for the duration of the
current run session, but reverts to the configured Engine RPM setting when a
new run session is started.
The Remember Speed Adjustments setting is found under Communications >
CAN Bus > Speed Setup on the front panel and in BESTCOMSPlus.
Speed Trim Droop Enable
When true, this element enables droop mode for the speed trim function. The
calculated setpoint for the speed trim controller is reduced by the Droop
Percentage and Droop Offset settings. See the Bias Control chapter for details
on these settings and the calculated setpoint equation. The kW controller is
disabled because the system is operating in Trimmed Speed Droop mode to
accomplish kW control.
Speed Trim Inhibit
When true, this element inhibits operation of the DGC-2020HD speed trim PID
controller. For example, speed trim is not desired in multiple generator systems
during start up synchronization until the generators are stable.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-53

Name/Description Symbol
Speed Trim Setpoint Adjust
Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the Speed Trim
setpoint.
Pre-position x: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the active
Speed Trim setpoint.

Start Delay Bypass

This element allows the Pre Start state to be skipped based on logic. For
example, a start delay may not be necessary when the engine is warm. This
also allows an external device, such as an ECU, to control the pre start interval.

Start Output
This element is used to drive the start output relay from logic when the Start
Output Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”. When the Start Output
Relay configuration is set to “Programmable”, the start relay will not close unless
logic is used to drive this element. When the Start Output Relay configuration is
set to “Predefined”, the start relay is closed according to the predefined start
functionality of the DGC-2020HD. When the “Predefined” functionality is
selected, the relay will not respond to this element.
Regulator Start Stop (VRM-2020)
Start: When the Start input is true, the DGC-2020HD starts regulation with the
VRM-2020.
Stop: When the Stop input is true, the DGC-2020HD stops regulation with the
VRM-2020.
If the Start and Stop inputs are true simultaneously, the Stop input has priority.
For reliable operation, it is recommended that the inputs to the Reg_Start_Stop
logic element be pulsed rather than held constant. For example, if regulation
was started, a pulse on the Stop input will shut down the regulation. However, if
the Reg_Start_Stop Stop input is held constant, regulation could never start
because the Start input would be immediately negated by the Stop input.
Stop kvar Ramp
When the Set input is true, any kvar ramping in progress will be stopped at the
current value. When the input is removed, ramping will resume.

Stop kW Ramp
When the Set input is true, any kW ramping in progress will be stopped at the
current value. When the input is removed, ramping will resume.

Sync Mode
When an input is true, the associated mode becomes the active sync mode.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-54 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
System Group Breaker
When an input is true, the associated group breaker command is requested for
the remotely controlled group breaker in the segmented system.

System Mains Breaker

When an input is true, the associated mains breaker command is requested for
the remotely controlled mains breaker in the segmented system.

Test Inhibit
When this logic element is true, the generator exercise timer cannot start the
generator. If the TESTINHIBIT logic function is false during an exercise period,
or transitions from true to false at any time during an exercise period, the DGC-
2020HD will start and run the generator for the duration of the exercise period.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-55

Name/Description Symbol
Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker 2
This element is used to connect the breaker open and close output signals from
the DGC-2020HD to physical output contacts to open and close the tie breaker
and map breaker status feedback to a contact input. In addition, contact inputs
can be mapped to allow switches to be implemented to manually initiate breaker
open and close requests.
This element is available only when it is included in the selected System
Breaker Configuration setting.
Inputs
Status: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that will provide breaker
status feedback to the DGC-2020HD. When the contact input is closed, the
breaker is indicated to be closed. When the contact input is open, the breaker is
indicated to be open.
Open: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to initiate
a manual breaker open request. When this input is pulsed closed while the
DGC-2020HD is in RUN or AUTO mode, the breaker will open.
Close: This input allows a contact input to be mapped that can be used to
initiate a manual breaker close request. When this input is pulsed, a close
request will be initiated.
Outputs
The outputs must be mapped to the contact outputs of the DGC-2020HD that
will be used to drive the breaker.
Open: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to)
when the DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to open. It will be a
pulse if the Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Mains Breaker screen, and the
length is determined by the Open Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the
Contact Type is set to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough
for the breaker to actually open before the pulse is removed.
Close: This output is pulsed true (closes the output contact it is mapped to)
when the DGC-2020HD is providing a signal to the breaker to close. It will be a
pulse if the Contact Type is set to Pulse on the Mains Breaker screen, and the
length is determined by the Close Pulse Time. It will be a constant output if the
Contact Type is set to continuous. Note the pulse time must be set long enough
for the breaker to actually close before the pulse is removed.

Notes
When using the DGC-2020HD synchronizer, it is
recommended that local DGC-2020HD relay
outputs be used for breaker closing commands to
minimize the possibility of closures outside of
desired breaker closing angles.
If remote (CEM-2020) outputs are to be used for
breaker close commands, it is recommended that
the anticipatory synchronizer type be used, and the
breaker fail wait time be adjusted to account for
possible CEM-2020 output delays (typically 50 ms)
to achieve desired breaker closing angles.
The TIEBRK2 element is used by the Generator
and Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker
system breaker configurations.
UEL Disable
(VRM-2020)
When true, the underexcitation limiter is disabled.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-56 9469300995

Name/Description Symbol
UEL Disabled in Manual Mode
(VRM-2020)
When true, the underexcitation limiter is disabled when manual (FCR) mode is
active.
Underfrequency V/Hz Disable
(VRM-2020)
When true, the underfrequency limiter is disabled.

User Programmable Alarm x

When the Trigger input is true, the label of a user alarm is displayed on the
Alarms screen on the front-panel display and in sequence of events report after
the activation delay expires.

Voltage Droop Override

When true, this element causes the DGC-2020HD to switch from kvar sharing
over Ethernet to voltage droop mode.

Voltage Trim Droop Enable

When true, this element enables droop mode for the voltage trim function. The
calculated setpoint for the voltage trim controller is reduced by the Droop
Percentage and Droop Offset settings. See the Bias Control chapter for details
on these settings and the calculated setpoint equation. The kvar controller is
disabled because the system is operating in Trimmed Voltage Droop mode to
accomplish kvar control.
Voltage Trim Inhibit
When true, this element inhibits operation of the DGC-2020HD voltage trim PID
controller. For example, voltage trim is not desired in multiple generator systems
during start up synchronization until the generators are stable.

Voltage Trim Setpoint Adjust

Raise/lower: When true, the raise and lower inputs adjust the Voltage Trim
setpoint.
Pre-position x: When true, the associated pre-position becomes the active
Voltage Trim setpoint.

Zero Power Request

This element is available only to DGC-2020HDs configured as tie breaker
controllers.
When true, system generators adjust power output until there is zero power flow
through the first tie breaker tying them to mains power, which is then opened.
Zero Power Request 2
This element is available only to DGC-2020HDs configured as Generator and
Tie Breaker or Tie Breaker and Tie Breaker controllers.
When true, system generators adjust power output until there is zero power flow
through the second tie breaker tying them to mains power, which is then
opened.
BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-57

Logic Input Counter Threshold Settings

BESTCOMSPlus® Navigation Path: Settings Explorer, BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic, Logic Input
Counters
The Logic Input Counters screen provides settings for each Logic Input Counter. These settings consist of
a label, two operations, and two thresholds. The Label setting accepts up to 64 alphanumeric characters
and appears above the element in the logic diagram. An Operation setting allows the user to establish the
type of comparison that is performed on the number of true inputs and the threshold. These operations
include Equals (=), Less Than (<), Less Than or Equal (<=), Greater Than (>), and Greater Than or Equal
(>=). The Threshold accepts a value from 0 to 32 in increments of 1.
When the Logic Input Counter is enabled, the number of true inputs are continuously counted and as long
as that number meets or exceeds a user-defined threshold, the output for that threshold is held true. For
example, Operation 1 is set to Less Than (<), Threshold 1 is set to 3, Operation 2 is set to Greater Than
or Equal (>=), and Threshold 2 is also set to 3. With no true inputs, Threshold 1 is met because the
number of true inputs is less than 3 and Output 1 is held true. With four true inputs Threshold 1 is not met
and Threshold 2 is met. This results in Output 1 being false and Output 2 being true.

Figure 21-3. Settings Explorer, BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic, Logic Input Counters

Logic Schemes
A logic scheme is a group of logic variables written in equation form that defines the operation of a
DGC-2020HD Digital Genset Controller. Each logic scheme is given a unique name. This gives you the
ability to select a specific scheme and be confident that the selected scheme is in operation. The default
active logic scheme is configured for typical control applications. Only one logic scheme can be active at
a time.
In most applications, preprogrammed logic schemes eliminate the need for custom programming.
Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide more inputs, outputs, or features than are needed for a
particular application. This is because a preprogrammed scheme is designed for a large number of
applications with no special programming required. Unneeded logic block outputs may be left open to
disable a function or a function block can be disabled through operating settings.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time may be reduced by modifying the default
logic scheme.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-58 9469300995

The Active Logic Scheme

Digital Genset Controllers must have an active logic scheme in order to function. All Basler Electric
DGC-2020HD units are delivered with a default, active logic scheme pre-loaded in memory. If the function
block configuration and output logic of the default logic scheme meets the requirements of your
application, then only the operating settings (power system parameters and threshold settings) need to be
adjusted before placing the DGC-2020HD in service.

Sending a Logic Scheme to the DGC-2020HD

To send logic to the DGC-2020HD, it must be connected to a computer through a communications port.
Once the necessary connections are made, logic can be uploaded to the DGC-2020HD by selecting
Upload Settings and Logic to Device or Upload Logic to Device on the Communication pull-down menu.

Caution
Always remove the DGC-2020HD from service prior to changing or
modifying the active logic scheme. Attempting to modify a logic
scheme while the DGC-2020HD is in service could generate
unexpected or unwanted outputs.
Modifying a logic scheme in BESTCOMSPlus does not automatically
make that scheme active in the DGC-2020HD. The modified scheme
must be uploaded into the DGC-2020HD.
Operational settings are not included in the default logic scheme. Each
element, function, alarm, etc. will have to be enabled and programmed
separately using the Settings Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus.

Retrieving a Logic Scheme from the DGC-2020HD

To retrieve logic from the DGC-2020HD, it must be connected to a computer through a communications
port. Once the necessary connections are made, logic can be downloaded from the DGC-2020HD by
selecting Download Settings and Logic from Device on the Communication pull-down menu.

Programming BESTlogic™Plus
Use BESTCOMSPlus to program BESTlogicPlus. Using BESTCOMSPlus is analogous to physically
attaching wire between discrete DGC-2020HD terminals. To program BESTlogicPlus, use the Settings
Explorer within BESTCOMSPlus to open the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic tree branch as shown
in Figure 21-1.
The drag and drop method is used to connect a variable or series of variables to the logic inputs, outputs,
components, and elements. To draw a wire/link from port to port (triangles), click the left mouse button on
a port, pull the wire onto another port, and release the left mouse button. A red port indicates that a
connection to the port is required or missing. A black port indicates that a connection to the port is not
required. Drawing wires/links from input to input or output to output is not allowed. Only one wire/link can
be connected to any one output. If the proximity of the endpoint of the wire/link is not exact, it may attach
to an unintended port.
If an object or element is disabled, it will have a yellow X on it. To enable the element, navigate to the
settings page for that element. A red X indicates that an object or element is not available per the style
number of the DGC-2020HD.
The view of Logic Page 1 through 4, Physical Outputs, Remote Outputs, and LCR Outputs can be
automatically arranged by clicking the right mouse button on the window and selecting Auto-Layout.
The following must be met before BESTCOMSPlus will allow logic to be uploaded to the DGC-2020HD:
• A minimum of two inputs and a maximum of 32 inputs on any multi-port (AND, OR, NAND, NOR,
XOR, and XNOR) gate.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-59

• A maximum of 32 logic levels for any particular path. A path being an input block or an output
side of an element block through gates to an output block or an input side of an element block.
This is to include any OR gates on the Physical Output or Remote Output tab/pages, but not the
matched pairs of Physical Output blocks or Remote Output blocks.
• A maximum of 1,024 gates per logic level with a maximum of 1024 gates allowed per diagram
(firmware version 2.04.00 and above). All output blocks and input sides of element blocks are at
the maximum logic level of the diagram. All gates are pushed forward/upwards in logic levels and
buffered to reach the final output block or element block if needed.
Three status indicators are located in the lower right corner of the BESTlogicPlus window. These
indicators show the Logic Save Status, Logic Diagram Status, and Logic Layer Status. Table 21-11
defines the colors for each indicator.
Table 21-11. Status Indicators

Indicator Color Definition

Logic Save Status Amber Logic has changed since last save.
(Left Indicator)
Green Logic has NOT changed since last save.

Logic Diagram Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.

(Center Indicator)
Green Requirements met as listed above.

Logic Layer Status Red Requirements NOT met as listed above.

(Right Indicator)
Green Requirements met as listed above.

Offline Logic Simulator

The offline logic simulator allows you to change the state of various logic elements to illustrate how that
state travels through the system. Before running the logic simulator, you must click the Save button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar to save the logic to memory. Changes to the logic (other than changing the
state) are disabled when the simulator is enabled. Colors are selected by clicking the Options button on
the BESTlogicPlus toolbar. By default, Logic 0 is red and Logic 1 is green. Using your mouse, double-
click on a logic element to change its state.
An example of the offline logic simulator is shown in Figure 21-4. Output 1 is Logic 0 (red) when Virtual
Switch 1 is Logic 0 (red) and Fixed 1 is Logic 1 (green).

Figure 21-4. Offline Logic Simulator Example

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-60 9469300995

BESTlogic™Plus File Management

To manage BESTlogicPlus files, use the Settings Explorer to open the BESTlogicPlus Programmable
Logic tree branch. Use the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar to manage BESTlogicPlus files.
Refer to Figure 21-5. For information on Settings Files management, refer to the BESTCOMSPlus
chapter.

Figure 21-5. BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic Toolbar

Saving a BESTlogicPlus File

After programming BESTlogicPlus settings, click on the Save button to save the settings to memory.
Before the new BESTlogicPlus settings can be uploaded to the DGC-2020HD, you must select Save from
the File pull-down menu located at the top of the BESTCOMSPlus main shell. This step will save both the
BESTlogicPlus settings and the operating settings to a file.
The user also has the option to save the BESTlogicPlus settings to a unique file that contains only
BESTlogicPlus settings. Click on the Logic Library drop-down button and select Save Logic Library File.
Use normal Windows® techniques to browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a
filename.

Opening a BESTlogicPlus File

To open a saved BESTlogicPlus file, click on the Logic Library drop-down button on the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic toolbar and select Open Logic Library File. Use normal Windows techniques to
browse to the folder where the file is located.

Protecting a BESTlogicPlus File

Objects in a logic diagram can be locked so that when the logic document is protected these objects
cannot be changed. Locking and protecting is useful when sending logic files to other personnel to be
modified. The locked object(s) cannot be changed. To view the lock status of the object(s), select Show
Lock Status from the Protection drop-down menu. To lock object(s), use the mouse to select object(s) to
be locked. Right click on the selected object(s) and select Lock Object(s). The gold colored padlock next
to the object(s) will change from an open to a locked state. To protect a logic document, select Protect
Logic Document from the Protection drop-down button. A password is optional.

Uploading a BESTlogicPlus File

To upload a BESTlogicPlus file to the DGC-2020HD, you must first open the file through BESTCOMSPlus
or create the file using BESTCOMSPlus. Then pull down the Communication menu and select Upload
Logic to Device.

Downloading a BESTlogicPlus File

To download a BESTlogicPlus file from the DGC-2020HD, you must pull down the Communication menu
and select Download Settings and Logic from Device. If the logic in your BESTCOMSPlus has changed, a
dialog box will open asking you if want to save the current logic changes. You may choose Yes or No.
After you have taken the required action to save or not save the current logic, the downloading is
executed.

Printing a BESTlogicPlus File

To view a preview of the printout, click on the Print Preview icon located on the BESTlogicPlus
Programmable Logic toolbar. If you wish to print to a printer, select the printer icon in the upper left corner
of the Print Preview screen.

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 21-61

You may skip the print preview and go directly to print by clicking on the Printer icon on the
BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar. A dialog box, Select Views to Print opens allowing you to
check which views you would like to print. Next, the Print dialog box opens with the typical Windows
choice to setup the properties of printer. Execute this command, as necessary, and then select Print.
A Page Setup icon is also provided on the BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic toolbar allowing you to
select Paper Size, Paper Source, Orientation, and Margins.

Clearing the On-Screen Logic Diagram

Click the Clear button to clear the on-screen logic diagram and start over.

BESTlogic™Plus Examples
Example 1 - GENBRK Logic Block Connections
Figure 21-6 illustrates the GENBRK logic block, three input logic blocks, and two output logic blocks.
Output 3 is active while the GENBRK is sending an “open breaker” command and Output 4 is active while
the GENBRK is sending the “close breaker” command.

Figure 21-6. Example 1 – GENBRK Logic Block Connections

Example 2 - AND Gate Connections

Figure 21-7 illustrates a typical AND gate connection. In this example, Output 11 will become active when
the Low Fuel alarm AND the Low Oil Pressure alarm are true.

Figure 21-7. Example 2 – AND Gate Connections

Example 3 - Multiple Logic Connections

In this example, there are two comment boxes, which may be placed on the logic diagram. Double-click a
comment box to modify the inside text. Output 3 becomes true when the 27TRIP is true. Output 1
becomes true when the High Coolant Temp is true. Output 2 becomes true when the DGC-2020HD is in
RUN mode (RUN Mode true). Refer to Figure 21-8.

DGC-2020HD BESTlogic™Plus
21-62 9469300995

Figure 21-8. Example 3 – Multiple Logic Connections

BESTlogic™Plus DGC-2020HD
9469300995 22-1

22 • Tuning PID Settings

Introduction
The DGC-2020HD utilizes four controllers to accomplish synchronization, load sharing, and speed trim
functions. These consist of a voltage controller, a var/PF controller, a speed controller, and a kW load
controller.

Voltage and Speed Controllers

The voltage and speed controllers are in effect when the DGC-2020HD is synchronizing the generator to
a bus. When synchronizing, these controllers adjust the speed and voltage output of the generator to
match that of the bus.

KW Load Controller
After the generator is paralleled to a bus, the kW load controller controls the kW output of the machine to
share equally on a percentage basis with the other generators on the bus. All generators participating in
load sharing are connected together with load share lines which are used to communicate load share
information between the machines. When the generator is paralleled to the utility, the kW load controller
causes the unit to produce wattage at a level equal to the base load setpoint.

Var/PF Controller
When the generator is not paralleled to the utility, the var/PF controller operates in voltage droop mode
for var/PF sharing between the machines. The var/PF controller can operate in either var or PF control
mode when the generator is paralleled to the utility.
When operating in var control mode, the machine produces reactive power at a level equal to the kvar
Setpoint setting. When in PF control mode, the var/PF controller regulates the reactive power output of
the machine to maintain the power factor specified by the PF Setpoint setting.

Speed Trim Function

When the generator is paralleled to the bus and load sharing is enabled, the speed trim function, if
enabled in all machines on the bus, ensures that the bus frequency is maintained at the frequency set by
the speed trim setting. Speed trim is in effect only in the situation where the generator breaker is closed
and load control is enabled. Speed trim is not in effect when the breaker is open, since the default mode
when the breaker is open is droop, and speed trim would counteract droop.
When load control is enabled, it is possible that load control could cause the system frequency to drift,
and speed trim can be employed to counteract the drift. The drift can occur due to inaccuracies in
measured kW vs. desired kW, since kW measurement accuracy is around 3%.

Tuning Parameters
The DGC-2020HD load share function utilizes PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control to
accomplish load sharing, speed control, and voltage control. A brief description of the three main tuning
parameters, and their effects on system behavior, is presented below.
• Kp - Proportional Gain - The proportional term makes a change to the output that is proportional
to the current error value. The proportional response can be adjusted by multiplying the error by a
constant Kp, called the proportional gain. Larger Kp typically means faster response since the
larger the error, the larger the feedback to compensate. An excessively large proportional gain
will lead to process instability.
DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings
22-2 9469300995

• Ki - Integral Gain - The contribution from the integral term is proportional to both the magnitude of
the error and the duration of the error. Some integral gain is required in order for the system to
achieve zero steady-state error. The integral term (when added to the proportional term)
accelerates the movement of the process towards setpoint and eliminates the residual steady-
state error that occurs with a proportional only controller. Larger Ki implies steady state errors are
eliminated quicker. The trade-off is larger overshoot: any negative error integrated during
transient response must be integrated away by positive error before reaching steady state.
• Kd - Derivative Gain - The derivative term slows the rate of change of the controller output and is
used to reduce the magnitude of the overshoot produced by the integral component and improve
the combined controller-process stability. However, differentiation of a signal amplifies noise in
the signal and thus this term in the controller may be sensitive to noise in the error term, and can
cause a process to become unstable if the noise and the derivative gain are sufficiently large.
Larger Kd decreases overshoot, but slows down transient response and may lead to instability.
Table 22-1 shows the effects of increasing parameters.
Table 22-1. Effects of Increasing Parameters
Parameter Rise Time Overshoot Setting Time Steady State Error
Kp Decrease Increase Small Change Decrease
Ki Decrease Increase Increase Eliminate
Kd Small Change Decrease Decrease None

Tuning Procedures
Prior to performing any controller tuning, it is strongly recommended that Generator Protection, in
particular Reverse Power protection and Loss of Excitation protection, be configured to protect the
machine in case any reverse power or reverse var situations occur during the tuning process.

Voltage Controller Tuning Procedure

The voltage controller is tuned prior to the speed controller. Set all Kp, Ki, and Kd gains in the voltage
controller, speed controller, kW load controller and var/PF controller to 0. Set the Kg values to 0.1.
The voltage controller is active during synchronization when the DGC-2020HD is trying to close the
generator breaker, and also when the generator breaker is closed and the generator is not paralleled to
utility power and the voltage trim function is enabled. In order to tune the voltage controller, the unit is
operated with the generator breaker closed and voltage trim enabled. We can then change the rated
voltage of the machine to change the voltage controller set point and observe the response. Set the
Voltage Trim function and the var/PF controller to enabled, and verify in logic that when the generator
breaker is closed, the Parallel to mains logic element is not true. When the engine is running and the
generator breaker is closed, the voltage controller should be operating to accomplish voltage trim, driving
the system voltage to the level set by the Rated Voltage setting in the system ratings.

Kp - Proportional Gain
Each time Kp is set, we will modify the rated voltage setting in the Rated Data and observe how the
generator output voltage responds to the change.
Set an initial value of 1 for Kp. Start the generator and close the generator breaker to the dead bus.
Verify that the generator’s output approaches the Rated Voltage in a stable manner. Since Ki is zero at
this point, there may be a difference between the generator’s output and the Rated Voltage set point. The
important thing is that the generator’s output behaves in a stable manner. If it is not stable, lower the
value of Kp and repeat.
Next, modify the Rated Voltage setting to a level that is 3% to 5% higher than the initial setting. Verify that
the generator’s output approaches the new value in a stable manner. Set the Rated Voltage Setting back
to its original value and observe the generator’s output. Next, modify the Rated Voltage setting to a level
that is 3% to 5% lower than the initial setting observe the generator output voltage. Finally, set the Rated

Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD

9469300995 22-3

Voltage back to its initial value, and observe the generator output voltage to verify it operates in a stable
manner.
Repeat this procedure, raising Kp until the system begins to operate in an unstable manner, and then
lower it back to the highest value where stable operation was achieved. Note that if the generator output
is not coming very close to the set point value, it is often an indication that the value of Kp is too low.
If it is not possible to obtain stable voltage operation, it may be necessary to reduce the control gains in
the voltage regulator which has its analog bias input driven by the DGC-2020HD.

Ki - Integral Gain
Set the initial value of Ki to be a tenth of the value set for Kp. Start the generator and close the generator
breaker to the dead bus.
Next, modify the Rated Voltage setting to a level that is 3% to 5% higher than the initial setting. Verify that
the generator’s output approaches the new value in a stable manner. Set the Rated Voltage Setting back
to its original value and observe the generator’s output. Next, modify the Rated Voltage setting to a level
that is 3% to 5% lower than the initial setting observe the generator output voltage. Finally, set the Rated
Voltage back to its initial value, and observe the generator output voltage to verify it operates in a stable
manner. If stable operation is not achievable, it may be necessary to lower the value for Ki. Repeat this
procedure, raising Ki until the system is unstable, and then lower it to the highest value that achieved
stable operation.

Kd - Derivative Gain
If the performance with Kp and Ki alone is satisfactory, it is recommended Kd be left at a value of zero. Kd
can amplify noise in a system so it should be used with great care. Otherwise Kd, the derivative controller
gain, can be used in conjunction with Td, the noise filter constant, to reduce overshoot obtained with PI
control. Setting Kd and Td is an iterative process.
Tuning of Kd can be achieved through the following steps. Set an initial value of Kd that is 1/10th the value
of Kp or 1/10th the value of Ki, whichever is smaller. Start the generator and close the generator breaker to
the dead bus.
Modify the Rated Voltage setting to a level that is 3% to 5% higher than the initial setting. Verify that the
generator’s output approaches the new value in a stable manner. Set the Rated Voltage Setting back to
its original value and observe the generator’s output. Next, modify the Rated Voltage setting to a level
that is 3% to 5% lower than the initial setting observe the generator output voltage. Finally, set the Rated
Voltage back to its initial value, and observe the generator output voltage to verify it operates in a stable
manner. Repeat with higher values of Kd until the system begins to be unstable, then enter half this value
as the Kd gain.
If high frequency noise seems to be entering the system, Td is the constant of the low pass filter which
filters the controller input to reduce the effects of such interference when derivative control is employed.
Td ranges from 0 to 1 with an increment of 0.001. Td=0 is no filtering, Td=1 is heaviest filtering. If Td
adjustment is necessary, set Td to 0.001 and see if the noise induced behavior is reduced. Raise Td until
desired reduction of noise behavior is achieved. Once Td has been set, tune Kd again. If noise again
appears to be a problem, adjust Td until desired behavior is achieved, then retune Kd.

Speed Controller Tuning Procedure

The speed controller is tuned prior to the kW load controller. Set Load Control to enabled, and speed trim
to enabled. Set all Kp, Ki, and Kd gains in both speed controller and kW load controller to 0. Set the Kg
values to 0.1.

Kp - Proportional Gain
Set an initial value of 1 for Kp. Start the generator and close the breaker to the dead bus.
Each time Kp is set, execute step responses in the following manner to observe the machine’s response
to the change in the Speed Trim set point.
Next, modify the Speed Trim set point to a level that is one or two hertz higher than the initial setting.
Verify that the generator’s output frequency approaches the new value in a stable manner. Set the Speed
DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings
22-4 9469300995

Trim set point back to its original value and observe the generator’s output frequency. Next, modify the
Speed Trim set point to a level that is one or two hertz lower than the initial setting observe the generator
output frequency. Finally, set the Speed Trim set point back to its initial value, and observe the generator
frequency to verify it operates in a stable manner.
Since Ki is zero at this point, there may be some difference between the generator’s output and the speed
it is trying to reach. The important thing is that the generator’s output behaves in a stable manner. If the
system is unstable, lower Kp and repeat.
Repeat this procedure, raising Kp until the system begins to operate in an unstable manner, and then
lower it back to the highest value where stable operation is attained. Note that if the generator output is
not coming very close to the set point value, it is often an indication that the value of Kp is too low.
If it is not possible to obtain stable speed operation, it may be necessary to reduce the control gains in the
governor which has its analog bias input driven by the DGC-2020HD.

Ki - Integral Gain
Set the initial value of Ki to be a tenth of the value set for Kp. Start the generator and close the breaker to
the dead bus.
Next, modify the Speed Trim set point to a level that is one or two hertz higher than the initial setting.
Verify that the generator’s output frequency approaches the new value in a stable manner. Set the Speed
Trim set point back to its original value and observe the generator’s output frequency. Next, modify the
Speed Trim set point to a level that is one or two hertz lower than the initial setting observe the generator
output frequency. Finally, set the Speed Trim set point back to its initial value, and observe the generator
output frequency to verify it operates in a stable manner. If stable operation is not achievable it may be
necessary to lower the value for Ki. Repeat this procedure, raising Ki until the system is unstable, and
then lower it to the highest value that achieved stable operation.

Kd - Derivative Gain
If the performance with Kp and Ki alone is satisfactory, it is recommended you leave Kd at a value of zero.
Kd can amplify noise in a system so it should be used with great care. Otherwise Kd, the derivative
controller gain, can be used in conjunction with Td, the noise filter constant, to reduce overshoot obtained
with Pi control. Setting Kd and Td is an iterative process which can be accomplished by performing the
following steps.
Set an initial value of Kd that is 1/10th the value of Kp or 1/10th the value of Ki, whichever is smaller.
Modify the Speed Trim set point to a level that is one or two hertz higher than the initial setting. Verify that
the generator’s output approaches the new value in a stable manner. Set the Speed Trim set point back
to its original value and observe the generator’s output frequency. Next, modify the Speed Trim set point
to a level that is one or two hertz lower than the initial setting observe the generator output frequency.
Finally, set the Speed Trim set point back to its initial value, and observe the generator output frequency
to verify it operates in a stable manner. Repeat with higher values of Kd until the system begins to be
unstable, and then enter half this value as the Kd gain.
If high frequency noise seems to be entering the system, Td is the constant of the low pass filter which
filters the controller input to reduce the effects of such interference when derivative control is employed.
Td ranges from 0 to 1 with an increment of 0.001. Td=0 is no filtering, Td=1 is heaviest filtering. If Td
adjustment is necessary, set Td to 0.001 and see if the noise induced behavior is reduced. Raise Td until
desired reduction of noise behavior is achieved. Once Td has been set, tune Kd again. If noise again
appears to be a problem, adjust Td until desired behavior is achieved, then retune Kd.

var/PF Controller Tuning Procedure

Once desired voltage controller performance is obtained, the var/PF controller can be tuned. Two tuning
methods are presented, one where the machine is paralleled to the utility to tune systems that are used
for utility parallel operation and a second method where machines are paralleled together to tune systems
employing island parallel operation.

Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD

9469300995 22-5

var/PF Controller Tuning Procedure Using Parallel to Mains Operation

In Parallel to Mains operation the var/PF controller regulates the kvar output of the machine at a level
specified by the kvar Setpoint % setting when the control mode is kvar control, or it regulates the kvar
output to maintain the power factor specified by the PF Setpoint setting when the control mode is set to
PF control.
Set the Kp, Ki, and Kd gains in the var/PF controller to 0. Set the Kg value to 0.1. Enable the var/PF
controller, and set the control mode to Var Control. The generator must be paralleled to the utility (as
indicated by the Parallel to Mains element in logic) in any of the tuning steps where the system is being
tested for stable operation.

Kp - Proportional Gain
Set an initial value of Kp = 1 in the var/PF Controller. Enable the var/PF controller, and set the control
mode to Var Control.
Set Kp on var/PF controller. Synchronize the generator to the utility so that var control becomes active.
Verify that stable var control occurs. If the var control seems unstable, lower Kp and try again. Assuming
operation appears stable, change the var setpoint in 10% steps and check for stable operation. Since Ki is
zero at this point, there may be some error. Most importantly, verify that stable var control is achieved.
Raise Kp and repeat the test until unstable operation occurs. Then lower Kp to the highest value where
stable operation was attained.
If it is not possible to obtain stable var controller operation, it may be necessary to reduce the control
gains in the voltage regulator which has its bias input driven by the DGC-2020HD.

Ki - Integral Gain
Set the initial value of Ki to be a tenth of the value set for Kp.
Each time Ki is set, synchronize the generator to the utility so that var control becomes active. Check that
operation appears stable. Change the var setpoint in 10% steps and check for stable operation. If the
system is not stable, lower Ki and repeat the test.
Repeat this procedure, raising Ki until the system is unstable, and then lower it to the highest value for
which stable operation is achieved.

Kd - Derivative Gain
If the performance with Kp and Ki alone is satisfactory, it is recommended Kd be left at a value of zero. Kd
can amplify noise in a system so it should be used with great care. Otherwise Kd, the derivative controller
gain, can be used in conjunction with Td, the noise filter constant, to reduce overshoot obtained with PI
control. Setting Kd and Td is an iterative process. Start with small values of Kd such as 1/10th the value of
Kp or 1/10th the value of Ki, whichever is smaller.
Tuning of Kd can be achieved through the following steps. Set an initial value of Kd, then synchronize the
generator to the utility so that var control becomes active, and check for stability. Change the var setpoint
in 10% steps and check for stable operation. Raise Kd, repeating the tests until the system is unstable,
and then lower it to half the value where instability is first attained.
If high frequency noise seems to be entering the system, Td is the constant of the low pass filter which
filters the controller input to reduce the effects of such interference when derivative control is employed.
Td ranges from 0 to 1 with an increment of .001. Td=0 is no filtering, Td=1 is heaviest filtering. If Td
adjustment is necessary, set Td to 0.001 and see if the noise induced behavior is reduced. Raise Td until
desired reduction of noise behavior is achieved. Once Td has been set, tune Kd again. If noise again
appears to be a problem, adjust Td until desired behavior is achieved, then retune Kd.

var/PF Controller Tuning Procedure Using Multiple Machines in Island Parallel operation
In Island Parallel operation the var/PF controller regulates the kvar output of the machine to a level
determined from inter-genset communications to accomplish kvar sharing with the other machines in the
system. When properly tuned, the var/PF controller regulates the kvar output of the machine to a level

DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings

22-6 9469300995

equal to the average system kvar load, on a percentage of capacity basis. Thus, each machine will share
kvar equally on a percentage of capacity basis.
The procedure below is written for the case where you have two machines that need to be tuned. Thus,
any time a PID gain change is made, the change should be replicated in both machines before any
testing for stability.
If a machine is available that is already tuned, but another one needs tuned against it, the following
procedure still applies, except that PID values in the machine that have already been tuned should not be
changed.

Kp - Proportional Gain
On both machines set the Kp, Ki, and Kd gains in var/PF controller to 0. Set the Kg value to 0.1. Set an
initial value of 1 for Kp.
Close the breaker of the first machine onto a load. Parallel the second generator and check for stable
kvar sharing between the two machines. Then, open the generator breaker on the second generator and
check that both units are still stable. Since Ki is zero at this point, there may be some error in the kvar
sharing. The important thing is to verify stable sharing is achieved. Repeat for various levels of kvar load
if a means of varying kvar load is available.
Raise Kp in both machines and repeat the test until unstable operation occurs. Lower Kp to the highest
value yielding stable operation. If one machine becomes unstable before the other as gains are raised, it
may be necessary to do any further gain increases in only one machine. If the machines are not similar,
you may end up with different gains in each machine. If it is not possible to obtain stable kvar sharing, it
may be necessary to reduce the control gains in the AVR which has its analog bias input driven by the
DGC-2020HD.

Ki - Integral Gain
Set the initial value of Ki to be a tenth of the value set for Kp in both machines.
Each time Ki is set in both machines, parallel the machines and check for stable kvar sharing. Then, open
the generator breaker on the second generator and check that both units are still stable. If the system is
not stable, lower Ki and repeat the test.
Repeat this procedure, raising Ki in both machines until the system is unstable, and then lower it to the
highest value yielding stable operation.
Repeat for various levels of kvar load if a means of varying kvar load is available.

Kd-Derivative Gain
If the performance with Kp and Ki alone is satisfactory, it is recommended Kd be left at a value of zero. Kd
can amplify noise in a system so it should be used with great care. Otherwise Kd, the derivative controller
gain, can be used in conjunction with Td, the noise filter constant, to reduce overshoot obtained with PI
control. Setting Kd and Td is an iterative process.
In both machines start with mall values of Kd that are 1/10th Kp or 1/10th Ki, whichever is smaller. Tuning of
Kd can be achieved through the following steps. Set kvar control Kd in both machines, parallel them
together, and check for stability. Then, drop the second generator and check that both units are still
stable. Raise Kd in both machines until the system is unstable, and then lower it to half the value where
instability is first attained. Test at various levels of kvar load if a means of varying kvar load is available.
If high frequency noise seems to be entering the system, Td is the constant of the low pass filter which
filters the controller input to reduce the effects of such interference when derivative control is employed.
Td ranges from 0 to 1 with an increment of 0.001. Td=0 is no filtering, Td=1 is heaviest filtering. If Td
adjustment is necessary, set Td to 0.001 and see if the noise induced behavior is reduced. Raise Td until
desired reduction of noise behavior is achieved. Once Td has been set, tune Kd again. If noise again
appears to be a problem, adjust Td until desired behavior is achieved, then retune Kd.

kW Load Controller Tuning Procedure

Once desired voltage and speed controller performance is obtained, the kW load controller can be tuned.

Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD

9469300995 22-7

Two tuning methods are presented, one where the machine is paralleled to the utility to tune systems that
are used for utility parallel operation and a second method where machines are paralleled together to
tune systems employing island parallel operation.

kW Load Controller Tuning Procedure Using Parallel to Mains Operation

In Parallel to Mains operation the kW Load Controller regulates the kW output of the machine to the level
of kW indicated by the Base Load Level setting.
Set the Kp, Ki, and Kd gains in the kW Load Controller to 0. Set the Kg value to 0.1. Enable the kW Load
Controller. The generator must be paralleled to the utility (as indicated by the Parallel to Mains element in
logic) in any of the tuning steps where the system is being tested for stable operation.

Kp - Proportional Gain
Set an initial value of Kp = 1 in the kW Load Controller.
Set Kp on kW Load Controller. Synchronize the generator to the utility so that kW control becomes active.
Verify that stable kW control occurs. If the kW control seems unstable, lower Kp and try again. Assuming
operation appears stable, change the base load setpoint in 10% steps and check for stable operation.
Since Ki is zero at this point, there may be some error. Most importantly, verify stable kW control is
achieved.
Raise Kp and repeat the test until unstable operation occurs. Then lower Kp to the highest value where
stable operation was attained.
If it is not possible to obtain stable kW controller operation, it may be necessary to reduce the control
gains in the engine governor which has its bias input driven by the DGC-2020HD.

Ki - Integral Gain
Set the initial value of Ki to be a tenth of the value set for Kp.
Each time Ki is set, synchronize the generator to the utility so that kW control becomes active. Check that
operation appears stable. Change the base load setpoint in 10% steps and check for stable operation. If
the system is not stable, lower Ki and repeat the test.
Repeat this procedure, raising Ki until the system is unstable, and then lower it to the highest value
yielding stable operation.

Kd - Derivative Gain
If the performance with Kp and Ki alone is satisfactory, it is recommended Kd be left at a value of zero. Kd
can amplify noise in a system so it should be used with great care. Otherwise Kd, the derivative controller
gain, can be used in conjunction with Td, the noise filter constant, to reduce overshoot obtained with Pi
control. Setting Kd and Td is an iterative process. Start with small values of Kd such as 1/10th the value of
Kp or 1/10th the value of Ki, whichever is smaller.
Tuning of Kd can be achieved through the following steps. Set an initial value of Kd, then synchronize the
generator to the utility so that kW control becomes active, and check for stability. Change the base load
setpoint in 10% steps and check for stable operation. Raise Kd, repeating the tests until the system is
unstable, and then lower it to half the value where instability is first attained.
If high frequency noise seems to be entering the system, Td is the constant of the low pass filter which
filters the controller input to reduce the effects of such interference when derivative control is employed.
Td ranges from 0 to 1 with an increment of 0.001. Td=0 is no filtering, Td=1 is heaviest filtering. If Td
adjustment is necessary, set Td to 0.001 and see if the noise induced behavior is reduced. Raise Td until
desired reduction of noise behavior is achieved. Once Td has been set, tune Kd again. If noise again
appears to be a problem, adjust Td until desired behavior is achieved, then retune Kd.

kW Load Controller Tuning Procedure Using Multiple Machines in Island Parallel

Operation
In Island Parallel operation the kW Load Controller regulates the kW output of the machine to a level
determined from the analog load share line or inter-genset communications to accomplish kW sharing

DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings

22-8 9469300995

with the other machines in the system. When properly tuned, the kW controller regulates the kW output of
the machine to a level equal to the average system kW load, on a percentage of capacity basis. Thus,
each machine will share kW equally on a percentage of capacity basis.
The procedure below is written for the case where two machines need to be tuned. Thus, any time a PID
gain change is made, the change should be replicated in both machines before any testing for stability.
If a machine is available that is already tuned, but you need to tune another one against it, the following
procedure still applies, except that PID values in the machine that has already been tuned should not be
changed.

Kp - Proportional Gain
Disable the Speed Trim function in all machines when tuning the kW load controller gains.
On both machines set the Kp, Ki, and Kd gains in kW load controller to 0. Set the Kg value to 0.1. Set an
initial value of 1 for Kp.
Close the breaker of the first machine onto a load. Parallel the second generator and check for stable
load sharing between the two machines. Then open the generator breaker on the second generator and
check that both units are still stable. Since Ki is zero at this point, there may be error in the load sharing.
The important thing is to verify stable load sharing is achieved.
Raise Kp in both machines and repeat the test until unstable operation occurs. Lower Kp to the highest
value yielding stable operation. If one machine becomes unstable before the other as gains are raised, it
may be necessary to do any further gain increases in only one machine. If the machines are not similar,
you may end up with different gains in each machine. If it is not possible to obtain stable kW operation, it
may be necessary to reduce the control gains in the governor which has its analog bias input driven by
the DGC-2020HD. Test at various levels of kW load if a means of varying kW load is available.

Ki - Integral Gain
Set the initial value of Ki to be a tenth of the value set for Kp in both machines.
Each time Ki is set in both machines, parallel the machines and check for stable load sharing then open
the generator breaker on the second generator and check that both units are still stable. If the system is
not stable, lower Ki and repeat the test. Test at various levels of kW load if a means of varying kW load is
available. Repeat this procedure, raising Ki in both machines until the system is unstable, and then lower
it to the highest value yielding stable operation.

Kd-Derivative Gain
If the performance with Kp and Ki alone is satisfactory, it is recommended Kd be left at a value of zero. Kd
can amplify noise in a system so it should be used with great care. Otherwise Kd, the derivative controller
gain, can be used in conjunction with Td, the noise filter constant, to reduce overshoot obtained with PI
control. Setting Kd and Td is an iterative process. In both machines start with small values of Kd that are
1/10th Kp or 1/10th Ki, whichever is smaller.
Tuning of Kd can be achieved through the following steps. Set load control Kd in both machines, parallel
them together, and check for stability. Then, drop the second generator and check that both units are still
stable. Raise Kd in both machines until the system is unstable, and then lower it to half the value where
instability is first attained. Test at various levels of kW load if a means of varying kW load is available.
If high frequency noise seems to be entering the system, Td is the constant of the low pass filter which
filters the controller input to reduce the effects of such interference when derivative control is employed.
Td ranges from 0 to 1 with an increment of 0.001. Td=0 is no filtering, Td=1 is heaviest filtering. If Td
adjustment is necessary, set Td to 0.001 and see if the noise induced behavior is reduced. Raise Td until
desired reduction of noise behavior is achieved. Once Td has been set, tune Kd again. If noise again
appears to be a problem, adjust Td until desired behavior is achieved, then retune Kd.

Generic Gains for Multiple Machine Types

The following method is suggested for determining generic gains for multiple machine types.
1. Decide what levels of reverse power and reverse var (loss of excitation) protection are needed.
Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD
9469300995 22-9

2. Once the criteria of step 1 have been established, tune a unit so that one machine can be
paralleled to another unit at no load and not cause any trips.
3. Parallel two machines onto a load, and verify that acceptable load sharing occurs.
4. Add and drop loads with machines paralleled to verify acceptable load sharing occurs, and no
trips occur.
5. Once the settings are deemed “good”, save them as initial settings for a given machine
configuration for all future jobs. The settings shouldn’t need changed unless there is tripping or
load sharing characteristics need to be changed.
6. Test the units paralleled under no load and verify that no trips occur.
7. Parallel two machines onto a load, and verify that acceptable load sharing occurs.
8. Add and drop loads with machines paralleled to verify acceptable load sharing occurs and no
trips occur.
9. If the settings for a particular machine type need to be modified, keep those settings to be used
as initial settings for all future machines of that type.
10. Test every machine with steps 6, 7, and 8.
It is not expected that one set of numbers works for all machines, but it is probable to have 6 to 12 sets of
settings that cover a wide range of machine sizes and engine manufacturers. However, once a set of
gains has been determined for a particular machine type, the same gains should work in all identical
machines.

Load Anticipation Tuning Procedure

When properly tuned, the load anticipation function improves speed recovery of a diesel genset during
load application. The DGC-2020HD senses real power change in load well before the engine speed is
affected. A feed-forward signal, proportional to the real power change, is sent to the speed governor to
make throttle adjustments in advance.
The BESTCOMSPlus® Analysis screen, found in the Metering Explorer, is used to plot DGC-2020HD
control signals. Using a load bank for load application and rejection during the procedure is required.
The following parameters will be monitored in the Analysis screen during the tuning procedure:
• Gen Hz – Generator Frequency (caption depends on programmable bus label)
• GOV Output – Governor control analog output signal. Scaled version of Speed Bias Output. This is
scaled based on the range configured for “Governor Output” settings. This output is also trimmed to
valid output ranges.
• Load Anticipation Washout Output – Output of load anticipation washout block.
• Load Anticipation Output – Output of load anticipation function, after Kla gain and power deadband
have been factored in.
• Load Anticipation lead-lag Output – Output of load anticipation lead-lag block.
• Gen kW Total – Generator kW (caption depends on programmable bus label)
• Speed Bias Output – Per unit speed output signal. Output is not limited.

1. In BESTCOMSPlus, navigate to Settings Explorer > Bias Control Settings > Governor Bias Control
Settings. Configure the following settings:
• Speed Trim Enable = Disabled
• Control, Kg Loop Gain = 0
• Load Anticipation, Enable = Disabled
• Tla Washout Filter Constant = 0
• Tld Lead Filter Constant = 0
• Tlg Lag Filter Constant = 0
DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings
22-10 9469300995

• Power Deadband = 0
• Kla Gain = 0
• Max Limit = +1
• Min Limit = –1
Set the Analysis screen to plot Gen Hz, GOV Output, Gen kW Total, and Speed Bias Output.
Apply load to the machine.
Figure 22-1 illustrates the plot of the load application response as seen on the analysis screen. All
plots are based on a simulation of a PID-style governor. User results may vary.

Figure 22-1. Load Application Response – No DGC Influence - ~3Hz Drop

2. Measure the time from load application to first local minimum of speed signal. Set the Tla Washout
Filter Constant to roughly half of this value. The example plot in Figure 22-2 shows the local speed
minimum being reached 750 ms after load application. Thus, the Tla Washout Filter Constant should
be set to 0.375, half of the measured time.

Figure 22-2. 750 ms time to local speed minimum – Initial Tla 0.375

3. Enable Load Anticipation.

Set the Analysis screen to plot Gen Hz and Load Anticipation Washout Output.
Apply load.
See Figure 22-3. Verify washout output has mostly decayed before the speed first returns to nominal
value. Load anticipation assists the governor during the first portion of the transient before the speed
dip is measured. After this, normal governor action compensates for changes.

Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD

9469300995 22-11

Figure 22-3. Washout Only Active During First Portion of Transient

4. Set the Analysis screen to plot Gen Hz, Load Anticipation Output, and GOV Output.
Apply load and measure output frequency response.
Increase Kla Gain, apply load, and measure output frequency response again. Repeat until output
frequency response improves upon load application. If frequency overshoots on recovery, reduce Kla
Gain. If GOV Output begins clipping, do not increase Kla Gain much further. If Load Anticipation
Output begins clipping, but GOV Output is not clipping, increase Min/Max limit.
Figure 22-4 illustrates the plot with a Kla Gain that is too low. Frequency recovery has improved, but it
still has approximately 2 Hz deviation. Figure 22-5 illustrates the plot with a Kla Gain that is too high
which causes the GOV Output signal to clip and frequency overshoot to be too high. Figure 22-6
illustrates the plot with a clipped Load Anticipation Output signal. Increase Max and Min Limits. Figure
22-7 illustrates the plot with a good response with less than 0.5 Hz deviation on load application with
minimum overshoot.

Figure 22-4. Kla Too Low – Frequency Recovery Improved with ~2 Hz Deviation

DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings

22-12 9469300995

Figure 22-5. Kla Gain Too High, GOV Output Saturated, Frequency Overshoots on Recovery.

Figure 22-6. Load Anticipation Output Clipped.

Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD

9469300995 22-13

Figure 22-7. Good Response. < 0.5Hz Deviation on Load Application with Minimal Overshoot.

5. Set the Analysis screen to plot Load Anticipation Lead-Lag Output.

Achieve steady state operation.
Set the Power Deadband to the highest magnitude seen on the lead-lag output during steady state
operation. Increase the Power Deadband to prevent Load anticipation from responding to small load
applications if desired.

If load anticipation does not seem to operate properly, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter.

DGC-2020HD Tuning PID Settings

22-14 9469300995

Tuning PID Settings DGC-2020HD

9469300995 23-1

23 • Exhaust Treatment
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
In order to meet Tier 4 emission requirements, some engine manufacturers are applying Diesel
Particulate Filters (DPF) to the exhaust system of the engine. A Diesel Particulate Filter traps particulate
matter contained in diesel exhaust and prevents it from distributing into the air. The particulate matter is
later burned off during a regeneration process.
The DGC-2020HD communicates DPF control and status information to and from the engine ECU via
J1939 communications in the form of various Parameter Group Numbers (PGN) and Suspect Parameter
Numbers (SPN). These are summarized in the following paragraphs.

Regeneration
Regeneration is accomplished by operating the engine at elevated exhaust temperatures where the
accumulated particulate is burned off. If, in normal operation, the engine can be loaded to a high enough
level to achieve the elevated exhaust temperature, then regeneration can occur as a part of normal
operation. This is known as passive regeneration.
High exhaust temperatures can also be accomplished by methods such as providing dampers in the
exhaust stream or heating the exhaust through the burning of fuel. This is known as active regeneration
since it is outside of normal engine operation.
Heavily loaded engines will seldom require active regeneration. A lightly loaded engine will likely undergo
active regeneration when regeneration is required.

DPF Control
DPF control information is sent from the DGC-2020HD to the Engine ECU through PGN Number 57244
(0xE000). A manual regeneration request is sent using SPN 3696, Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration
Force Switch. Regeneration can be inhibited by SPN 3695, Diesel Particulate Filter Regeneration Inhibit
Switch.

Manual Regeneration
The operator can force a regeneration cycle by turning on the Manual Regeneration setting found on the
front panel under Settings > Communication > CANbus Setup > ECU Setup > DPF Regenerate Setup.
The parameter will remain on for a few seconds then go off. The ECU will respond to the momentary
setting by logging the request to force a manual regeneration. A continuous request is not used because
this can be problematic for some engine ECUs.
Manual regeneration can also be initiated by clicking the Manual Regeneration button on the ECU Setup
screen in BESTCOMSPlus®. BESTlogic™Plus programmable logic can also be used to initiate manual
regeneration by setting the DPF Manual Regeneration (DPFMANREGEN) logic element true.

Regeneration Inhibit
The operator can inhibit regeneration by turning on the DPF Regeneration Disable setting found on the
ECU Setup screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
Regeneration can also be disabled by turning on the Disable Regeneration setting on the ECU Setup
screen in BESTCOMSPlus.
BESTlogicPlus programmable logic can also be used to inhibit regeneration by setting the DPF
Regeneration Inhibit (DPFREGENINHIBIT) logic element true.

DGC-2020HD Exhaust Treatment

23-2 9469300995

DPF Status and Pre-Alarms

The DGC-2020HD receives DPF status information which is broadcast from the engine ECU in various
Parameter Group Numbers (PGN) and Suspect Parameter Numbers (SPN). This information is displayed
on the front panel and in BESTCOMSPlus, via DPF related pre-alarms. The J1939 parameters and the
resulting DGC-2020HD pre-alarms are summarized in the following paragraphs.
• PGN 64892 (0xFD7C) Diesel Particulate Filter Control 1
o SPN 3697, Diesel Particulate Filter Lamp Command
REGEN REQUIRED Pre-Alarm: When SPN 3697 has a value of 1
or 4 indicating the DPF lamp is on, the DGC-2020HD will
annunciate a pre-alarm with text of REGEN REQUIRED. The
symbol, shown to the right, will accompany the text when the pre-
alarm appears on the DGC-2020HD front panel.
o SPN 3698, Exhaust System High Temperature Lamp Command
HIGH EXHAUST TEMP Pre-Alarm: When SPN 3698 has a value
of 1 indicating the high exhaust temperature lamp is on, the DGC-
2020HD will annunciate a pre-alarm with text of HIGH EXHAUST
TEMP. The high exhaust temperature symbol, shown to the right,
will accompany the text when the pre-alarm appears on the DGC-
2020HD front panel.
o SPN 3703 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Inhibit Switch
REGEN INHIBITED Pre-Alarm: When SPN 3703 has a value of 1
indicating that regeneration is inhibited due to the inhibit switch
being set, the DGC-2020HD annunciates a pre-alarm with text of
REGEN INHBTD. The regeneration inhibited symbol, shown to the
right, will accompany the text when the pre-alarm appears on the
DGC-2020HD front panel.
o SPN 3703 Diesel Particulate Filter Status
SPN 3703 indicates that regeneration is required at the lowest level, moderate level, or most
severe level. The DGC-2020HD uses this parameter for Soot Level Pre-alarms which are
described in the following paragraphs.
• Soot Level Annunciation
The DGC-2020HD annunciates Soot Level pre-alarms which are described in the following
paragraphs.
o SOOT LEVEL HIGH Pre-Alarm
This pre-alarm is annunciated when one of the following occurs:
 A DTC is received with SPN 3719 (Diesel Particulate Filter
Soot Load Percent) with
FMI = 15 (Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range Least Severe Level)
 SPN 3703 (Diesel Particulate Filter Status) is received with a value of 001
(regeneration is needed – lowest level)
The pre-alarm text is SOOT LVL HI.
The symbol, shown to the right, accompanies the text when the pre-alarm appears on the
DGC-2020HD front panel.
o SOOT LEVEL MODERATELY HIGH Pre-Alarm
This pre-alarm is annunciated when one of the following occurs:

Exhaust Treatment DGC-2020HD

9469300995 23-3

 A DTC is received with SPN 3719 (Diesel Particulate Filter Soot Load Percent) with
FMI = 16 (Data Valid But Above Normal Operating Range Moderately Severe Level)
 SPN 3703 (Diesel Particulate Filter Status) is received with a value of 010
(regeneration is needed – moderate level)
The pre-alarm text is SOOT LVL MOD HI.
The warning symbol, shown to the right, accompanies the text when the pre-alarm appears
on the DGC-2020HD front panel.
o SOOT LEVEL EXTREMELY HIGH Pre-Alarm
This pre-alarm is annunciated when one of the following occurs:
 A DTC is received with SPN 3719 (Diesel Particulate Filter
Soot Load Percent) with FMI = 0 (Data Valid But Above
Normal Operating Range Most Severe Level)
 SPN 3703 (Diesel Particulate Filter Status) is received with
a value of 011 (regeneration is needed – highest level)
The pre-alarm text is SOOT LVL EXT HI.
The stop symbol, shown to the right, accompanies the text when the pre-alarm appears on
the DGC-2020HD front panel. If the soot level reaches the most severe level, the engine ECU
may shut the engine down, preventing it from running, or allow it to run, but at a reduced
power level. The DGC-2020HD only indicates a pre-alarm, it does not prevent the engine
from running or cause operation at a reduced power level. However, the operator should be
aware that the engine ECU or after treatment system may cause such behavior.

Exhaust After-Treatment Systems (EATS)

In order to meet Tier 4 emission requirements, some engine manufacturers are adding Exhaust After
Treatment Systems (EATS) which treat the engine exhaust within the exhaust system to reduce
particulate matter and harmful contaminants prior to releasing the exhaust into the atmosphere. One such
system uses urea-based Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) catalyst which is combined with the exhaust gasses
in the EATS to bring the emissions to acceptable levels.
The DGC-2020HD meters EATS information from the engine ECU via J1939 CAN Bus
and displays the DEF level within the DEF tank(s), and also displays several pre-alarms
related to the EATS system. Any DEF related pre-alarms annunciated on the front panel
display the symbol used for DEF functions which is shown to the right.
Most systems will contain one DEF tank, while some may contain two tanks. The DGC-
2020HD front panel displays the level of DEF in each tank under Metering>Alarms-Status>J1939
Status>DEF Tank1 LVL% and Metering > Alarms-Status > J1939 Status > DEF Tank2 LVL%. The tank 1
level is sent from the ECU via SPN 1761 in J1939 PGN 65110 - After Treatment 1 Reagent Tank 1
Information. The tank 2 level is sent from the ECU via SPN 4367 in J1939 PGN 64829 - After Treatment 1
Reagent Tank 2 Information. Tank levels are in units of percent.

Pre-Alarms
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level diagnostics are sent to the DGC-2020HD from the ECU as SPNs 5245 and
5246 in PGN 65110 (the AT1TI PGN). Suspect Parameter Number 5245 communicates DEF level
diagnostics, whereas SPN 5246 communicates DEF Inducement Level status.
There are several alarms related to the EATS which annunciate DEF Level Diagnostics and DEF
Inducement Level status. They are always enabled and will annunciate when received from the engine
ECU. Each of them contains the symbol for DEF functions when annunciated on the front panel; however
it will not be displayed in BESTCOMSPlus. The pre-alarms are summarized in the following paragraphs.
• DEF FLUID LOW: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5245 has a value of 1 indicating that the DEF
tank level is low. A DEF level of 8% to 23% causes this annunciation.

DGC-2020HD Exhaust Treatment

23-4 9469300995

• DEF LOW SEVERE: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5245 has a value of 4 indicating that the
DEF tank level is low. The low condition is announced when the tank level is below 8%. When this
occurs and is not remedied, the engine ECU may enter a mode of inducement not to operate the
engine where some of the conditions in the pre-alarms descriptions below may occur.
• DEF WARNING: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 1. This is the lowest level of
warning which indicates the EATS is not functioning properly or DEF quality or level is insufficient for
proper operation.
• DEF WARNING LVL2: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 2. This is a higher
level of warning which indicates the EATS is not functioning properly or DEF quality or level is
insufficient for proper operation. If the problem causing this warning is not corrected, the system will
eventually enter the DEF inducement states. In these states, the engine power or operating speed
may be derated depending on the engine manufacturer and engine application.
• DEF INDUCEMENT: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 3, indicating the Engine
Derate level of inducement. This indicates that the engine is going into a reduced power mode
indicating the lowest level of inducement not to operate the engine when the EATS is not functioning
properly or out of DEF.
• DEF PRESEVERE INDUCEMENT: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 4,
indicating the Pre-Severe Inducement level of inducement. This indicates that the engine has entered
the second highest level of inducement not to operate the engine when the EATS is not functioning
properly or the DEF level is low. The ECU will allow the engine to run for a maximum of 3 hours in
this condition. After expiration of the 3 hours, the engine will enter the severe inducement state and
cannot be restarted until the DEF level is raised above 14%.
• DEF SEVERE INDUCEMENT: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 5, indicating
the Severe Inducement level of inducement. This indicates that the engine has entered the highest
level of inducement not to operate the engine when the EATS is not functioning properly or DEF level
is low. The ECU will allow the engine to run for a maximum of 3 hours in this condition. After
expiration of the 3 hours, the engine will enter the severe inducement state and cannot be restarted
until the DEF level is raised above 14%.
• DEF INDUCEMENT OVERRIDE: This pre-alarm displays when SPN 5246 has a value of 6, indicating
temporary override of inducement. This indicates DEF inducement is temporarily overridden. The
engine may operate with reduced power, or for a limited time, after which time it may re-enter the
SEVERE INDUCEMENT state.

Exit Conditions for DEF Severe Inducement

• First Restart: Return to 0% torque reduction in exit condition, until proper DEF level and quality
evaluation. If low level or poor DEF quality is detected during the next monitoring cycle, the severe
inducement will be active after the next restart. After the second restart, a service tool is required to
exit the severe inducement.
• With Service Tool Clearing: Invoke 0% torque reduction with service tool clearing until proper DEF
level and quality evaluation. If low level or poor DEF quality is detected during the next monitoring
cycle, the severe inducement will be active after the next restart.

Exhaust Treatment DGC-2020HD

9469300995 24-1

24 • Troubleshooting
If you do not get the results that you expect from the DGC-2020HD, first check the programmable settings
for the appropriate function. Use the following troubleshooting procedures when difficulties are
encountered in the operation of your genset control system.

Communications
Ethernet Communication Does Not Work Properly
Step 1. Verify that the proper port of your computer is being used. For more information, refer to the
Communication chapter.
Step 2. Verify the network configuration of the DGC-2020HD is set up properly. For more information,
refer to the Communication chapter.
Step 3. Verify that all Ethernet devices comply with IEC 61000-4 series of specifications for Industrial
Ethernet Devices. Commercial devices are not recommended and may result in erratic network
communications.

USB Communication Does Not Work Properly

Step 1. Verify that the proper port of your computer is being used. For more information, refer to the
Communication chapter.

USB Driver Did Not Install Properly on Windows® 7, 8, or 10

Step 1. If the message in Figure 24-1 is shown, close all programs and restart the computer.

Figure 24-1. Driver Software Installation

Step 2. Open the Windows®Device Manger as shown in Figure 24-2. Right-click on DGC-2020HD (or
Unknown Device) under Other Devices and select Properties.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-2 9469300995

Figure 24-2. Device Manager

Step 3. In the Properties windows, select the Driver tab and click Update Driver. See Figure 24-3.

Figure 24-3. DGC-2020HD Properties

Step 4. Select Browse My Computer for Driver Software as shown in Figure 24-4.

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-3

Figure 24-4. Update Driver Software - DGC-2020HD

Step 5. Click Browse and navigate to C:\Program Files\Basler Electric\USB Device Drivers\USBIO.
Click Next. See Figure 24-5.

Figure 24-5. Update Driver Software - DGC-2020HD

Step 6. If a Windows Security window (Figure 24-6) appears, click Install.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-4 9469300995

Figure 24-6. Windows Security

Step 7. The window in Figure 24-7 appears if driver installation was successful.

Figure 24-7. Driver Software Update Successful

CAN Communication Does Not Work Properly

Step 1: Verify that there is a 120-ohm termination resistor on each end of the bus section of the wiring,
and that there are not any termination resistors at any node connections that are on stubs from
the main bus.
Step 2: Check all CAN wiring for loose connections and verify that the CAN H and CAN L wires have
not gotten switched somewhere on the network.
Step 3: Verify that the cable length of the bus section of the wiring does not exceed 40 meters (131
feet), and verify that any stubs from the main bus do not exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet) in length.
Step 4: If the engine is equipped with a Volvo or MTU ECU, verify that the ECU Configuration setting is
set to match the actual ECU configuration.

RPM Control over CAN Bus Does Not Function

Step 1: Check that Engine Parameter Transmit under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU) settings is enabled.
Step 2: Check that CAN Bus RPM Request under Speed Setup is set to enabled.
Step 3: Check to determine if there are multiple ECUs on the engine. If so, consult the engine
manufacturer’s documentation to determine the CAN Bus 2 address of the ECU that will
respond to rpm requests. Set the Engine ECU Address setting under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU)
Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-5

settings to that value. The Engine ECU Address setting under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU) settings
should be set to the address the Engine ECU claims on the J1939 network.
Step 4: Consult the engine manufacturer’s documentation and connect to the ECU with a service tool
to determine if the ECU will respond only to communications from a particular CAN Bus
Address. Set the CAN Bus address under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU) settings to that value. The
CAN Bus address under the CAN Bus 2 (ECU) settings is the Address the DGC claims on the
J1939 network.

Inputs and Outputs

Programmable Inputs Do Not Operate as Expected
Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Confirm that the inputs are programmed properly.
Step 3. Ensure that the input at the DGC-2020HD is actually connected to the BATT– terminal (P4-49).

Programmable Outputs Do Not Operate as Expected

Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Confirm that the outputs are programmed properly.

Metering/Display
Incorrect Display of Battery Voltage, Coolant Temperature, Oil Pressure, or Fuel Level
Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Confirm that the sender negative terminals are connected to the negative battery terminal and
the engine-block side of the senders. Current from other devices sharing this connection can
cause erroneous readings.
Step 3. If the displayed battery voltage is incorrect, ensure that the proper voltage is present between
the BATT+ terminal (P4-48) and the sender negative terminals.
Step 4. Verify that the correct senders are being used.
Step 5. Use a voltmeter connected between the BATT– terminal (P4-49) and the sender negative
terminals on the DGC-2020HD to verify that there is no voltage difference at any time. Any
voltage differences may manifest themselves as erratic sender readings. Wiring should be
corrected so that no differences exist.
Step 6: Check the sender wiring and isolate sender wiring from any of the ac wiring in the system. The
sender wiring should be located away from any power ac wiring from the generator and any
ignition wiring. Separate conduits should be used for sender wiring and any ac wiring.

Incorrect Display of Generator Voltage

Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Ensure that the proper voltage is present at the DGC-2020HD voltage sensing inputs (P8-86,
P8-88, P8-90, and P8-91).
Step 3. Verify that the voltage transformer ratio and sensing configuration is correct.
Step 4. Confirm that the voltage sensing transformers are correct and properly installed.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-6 9469300995

Incorrect Measurement or Display of Generator Current

Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Ensure that the proper current is present at the DGC-2020HD current sensing inputs 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, and 6.
Step 3. Verify that the current sensing transformer ratios are correct.
Step 4. Confirm that the current sensing transformers are correct and properly installed.

Incorrect Display of Engine RPM

Step 1. Verify that all wiring is properly connected. Refer to the Typical Applications chapter in the
Installation manual.
Step 2. Verify that the Flywheel Teeth setting is correct.
Step 3. Verify that the prime mover governor is operating properly.
Step 4. Verify that the measured frequency of the voltage at the MPU input (P9-106 and P9-107) is
correct.
Step 5. If the MPU is shared with the governor, verify that the polarity of the MPU input to the governor
matches the polarity of the MPU input to the DGC-2020HD.

DGC-2020HD Indicates Incorrect Power Factor

Check the rotation of the machine and the labeling of the A-B-C terminals. The machine must be rotating
in the same phase sequence as dictated by the generator phase rotation setting for correct power factor
metering. A power factor indication of 0.5 with resistive load present is a symptom of incorrect phase
rotation.

Ground Faults Detected in Ungrounded System Applications

Step 1: Verify that there is no connection from the neutral connection of the generator to the system
ground.
Step 2: Perform insulation resistance tests on the system wiring to check for insulation integrity in the
overall system.
Step 3: If ground faults are detected on a DGC-2020HD in an ungrounded system application, it is
recommended that potential transformers be employed on the voltage sensing inputs to provide
full isolation between the DGC-2020HD and monitored voltage phases.
Step 4: If potential transformers are in place, remove the connectors from the DGC-2020HD one at a
time. If removal of a connector removes the ground fault, check the system wiring to that
connector and out into the system to verify that connections are secure and all wiring insulation
is in good condition.

Generator Breaker and Mains Breaker

Generator Breaker Will Not Close to a Dead Bus
Step 1: Review the description of how the generator breaker logic element functions contained in the
GENBRK logic element description in the BESTlogic™Plus chapter.
Step 2: Review the section on breaker close requests in the Breaker Management chapter.
Step 3: Navigate to the Settings, Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware, Gen Breaker screen and
set Dead Bus Closure to Enable.
Step 4: Verify that the Generator status is stable. The breaker will not close if the generator status is
not stable. Check status by using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus and verify that

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-7

when the generator is running, the Generator Stable status LED is lit. If necessary, modify the
settings on the Settings, Breaker Management, Bus Condition screen.
Step 5: Verify the bus status is Dead. Check status by using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus
and verify that when the generator is running, the Bus Dead status LED is lit. If necessary,
modify the settings on the Settings, Breaker Management, Bus Condition screen.
Step 6: Verify the connections in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic to the generator breaker logic
element. The Status input must be driven by an “A” or normally open contact from the
generator breaker. The Open and Close command inputs on the left side of the logic block are
inputs for open and close commands. These can be wired to physical inputs if it is desired to
have open and close command switches. If they are wired, they must either be pulsed inputs,
or some logic must be employed so that the open and close command inputs are never driven
at the same time. If these are both driven at the same time, the breaker is receiving open and
close commands simultaneously. The breaker will not change state if it is being commanded to
open and close at the same time.
Step 7: Verify the breaker is receiving a close command. Breaker close command sources are:
• The DGC-2020HD itself when the automatic mains fail transfer (ATS) feature is enabled.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when the Run with Load logic element receives a Start pulse in the
programmable logic.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when started from the Exercise Timer and the Run with Load box
is checked in the Generator Exerciser settings.
• Manual Breaker Close Input Contacts applied to the Open and Close inputs on the left side
of the Generator Breaker logic element in the programmable logic.
Step 8: Verify the wiring to the breaker from the DGC-2020HD. If it appears correct, you can manually
close and open by modifying the programmable logic. Map some unused outputs to the Open
and Close outputs from the Gen Breaker Block in the programmable logic. Map a virtual switch
to the logic output that would normally be the breaker open output. Map another virtual switch
to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Connect with
BESTCOMSPlus, and exercise the virtual switches using the Control panel located in the
Metering Explorer. Never turn open and close on at the same time. This could damage the
breaker and/or motor operator. If everything is working as expected, restore the logic to its
original diagram.

Generator Breaker Does Not Open When It Should

Step 1: Review the description of how the generator breaker logic element functions contained in the
GENBRK logic element description in the BESTlogicPlus chapter.
Step 2: Review the section on breaker operation requests in the Breaker Management chapter.
Step 3: Verify the connections in BESTlogicPlus Programmable Logic to the generator breaker logic
element. The Status input must be driven by an “A” or normally open contact from the generator
breaker. The Open and Close command inputs on the left side of the logic block are inputs for
open and close commands. These can be wired to physical inputs if it is desired to have open
and close command switches. If they are wired, they must either be pulsed inputs, or some
logic must be employed so that the open and close command inputs are never driven at the
same time. If these are both driven at the same time, the breaker is receiving open and close
commands simultaneously. The breaker will not change state if it is being commanded to open
and close at the same time.
Step 4: Verify the breaker is receiving an open command. Breaker open command sources are:
• The DGC-2020HD itself when the automatic transfer (ATS) feature is enabled.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when the Run with Load logic element receives a Stop pulse in the
programmable logic.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when shutting down the engine due to an active alarm.
• The DGC-2020HD itself when ending a run session from the Exercise Timer and the Run
with Load box is checked in the Generator Exerciser settings.
DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-8 9469300995

• Manual Breaker Open Input Contacts applied to the Open and Close inputs on the left side
of the Generator Breaker logic element in the programmable logic.
Step 5: Verify the wiring to the breaker from the DGC-2020HD. If it appears correct, you can manually
close and open by modifying the programmable logic. Map some unused outputs to the Open
and Close outputs from the Gen Breaker Block in the programmable logic. Map a virtual switch
to the logic output that would normally be the breaker open output. Map another virtual switch
to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Connect with
BESTCOMSPlus, and exercise the virtual switches using the Control panel located in the
Metering Explorer. Never turn open and close on at the same time. This could damage the
breaker and/or motor operator. If everything is working as expected, restore the logic to its
original diagram.

Mains Breaker Does Not Open When Mains Fails

Step 1: Verify that a Mains Breaker has been configured by examining the settings on the Settings,
Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware screen.
Step 2: Verify the mains breaker has been correctly included in the programmable logic.
Step 3: Verify that the Mains Fail Transfer parameter is set to Enabled on the Settings, Breaker
Management, Breaker Hardware screen.
Step 4: Verify that a failure of the mains is detected by the DGC-2020HD. Check status using the
Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus and verify that the Mains Failed status LED is lit when
the power on the DGC-2020HD bus voltage input is either out of voltage or frequency range. If
necessary, modify the settings on the Settings, Breaker Management, Bus Condition screen to
achieve correct detection.
Step 5: Verify the wiring to the breaker from the DGC-2020HD. If it appears correct, you can do a
manual close and open by modifying the programmable logic. Map some unused outputs to the
Open and Close outputs from the Gen Breaker Block in the programmable logic. Map a virtual
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Map another virtual
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Connect with
BESTCOMSPlus, and exercise the virtual switches using the Control panel located in the
Metering Explorer. Never turn open and close on at the same time. This could damage the
breaker and/or motor operator. If everything is working as expected, restore the logic to its
original diagram.

Mains Breaker Does Not Close After Mains Returns

Step 1: Verify that a Mains Breaker has been configured by examining the settings on the Settings,
Breaker Management, Breaker Hardware screen.
Step 2: Verify the mains breaker has been correctly included in the programmable logic.
Step 3: Verify that the Mains Fail Transfer parameter is set to Enabled on the Settings, Breaker
Management, Breaker Hardware screen.
Step 4: Verify that stable mains power is detected by the DGC-2020HD. Check status using the
Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus and verify that the Mains Stable status LED is lit when
the power on the DGC-2020HD bus voltage input is good. If necessary, modify the settings on
the Settings, Breaker Management, Bus Condition screen to achieve correct detection.
Step 5: Verify the wiring to the breaker from the DGC-2020HD. If it appears correct, you can do a
manual close and open by modifying the programmable logic. Map some unused outputs to the
Open and Close outputs from the Gen Breaker Block in the programmable logic. Map a virtual
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker open output. Map another virtual
switch to the logic output that would normally be the breaker close output. Connect with
BESTCOMSPlus, and exercise the virtual switches using the Control panel located in the
Metering Explorer. Never turn open and close on at the same time. This could damage the
breaker and/or motor operator. If everything is working as expected, restore the logic to its
original diagram.

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-9

Synchronizer
Determining if the Synchronizer is Active
Step 1: Disable the speed trim function.
Step 2: Initiate a breaker close request by one of the methods listed in the Breaker Management
chapter.
Step 3: Check for raise and/or lower pulses coming from the DGC-2020HD if the governor or AVR bias
control output type is contact.
Step 4: Check the governor and/or AVR bias analog outputs on the DGC-2020HD with a volt meter if
the governor or AVR bias control output type is analog.
Step 5: The voltages or raise/lower pulses should be changing when the synchronizer is active. If there
are no raise/lower pulses, or if the analog bias voltages do not change, the synchronizer is not
active.

Synchronizer Not Active

Step 1: Check style number to verify that the DGC-2020HD has the synchronizer option. If the
synchronizer option does not exist in the style number, you may contact Basler Electric and
request a style number change.
Step 2: Check status using the Metering Explorer in BESTCOMSPlus® and verify that when the
generator is running, the Generator Stable status LED is lit and the Bus Stable LED is lit. Adjust
the Bus Condition Detection settings accordingly. The synchronizer will never activate if the Bus
is Dead or Failed (i.e. not stable).
Step 3: Check that the DGC-2020HD is trying to initiate a breaker closure. To determine the sources of
breaker close requests, refer to the Breaker Management chapter.

Synchronizer Active for a Short Time, Then Stops

Step 1: Check if a Sync Fail pre-alarm or a Breaker Close Fail pre-alarm is occurring or has occurred.
The synchronizer stops acting when such a pre-alarm occurs. Press the Off button or the Reset
button on the DGC-2020HD front panel to clear these pre-alarms.
Step 2: Verify that the Sync Fail Activation delay is sufficiently long to allow the synchronizer to
complete the synchronization process.
Step 3: Verify that the Breaker Close Wait time is not too short causing a pre-alarm to occur before the
breaker closes when a breaker close is initiated by the DGC-2020HD.

Synchronizer Does Not Lower Engine Speed Allowing Alignment of Bus and Generator
Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, GOV Output screen and set
Speed Response to Decreasing.

Synchronizer Does Not Raise Engine Speed Allowing Alignment of Bus and Generator
Using the front panel HMI, navigate to the Settings > Programmable Outputs > Analog Output Settings >
GOV Output screen and change the Speed Response setting from Increasing to Decreasing.

Synchronizer Does Not Lower the Generator Voltage to Achieve Matching of Bus and
Generator Voltages
Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, AVR Output screen and set
Voltage Response to Decreasing.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-10 9469300995

Synchronizer Does Not Raise Generator Voltage to Achieve Matching of Bus and
Generator Voltages
Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, AVR Output screen and
change the Voltage Response setting from Increasing to Decreasing.

Speed Bias
Engine Speed Does Not Change When Speed Bias Voltage Changes
Verify that the engine speed will change when the speed bias changes. As a test, you can force a voltage
on the speed bias output by setting the Min Output Voltage and Max Output Voltage to the same value by
navigating to Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, GOV Output. If the bias is current
based, you can force a fixed current by setting the Governor Output Voltage Minimum and Maximum to
the same value by navigating to Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, GOV Output.
If the speed still does not change when varying the bias:
• Verify that the governor or ECU is equipped and configured to accept bias inputs.
• Check connections to verify the wiring to the governor bias is correct.
• If you have an engine with an ECU, check ECU programming to verify it is set up to accept a
speed bias input.

Engine Speed Decreases When Speed Bias is Increased

Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, GOV Output screen and set
Speed Response to Decreasing.

Engine Speed Increases When Speed Bias is Decreased

Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, GOV Output screen and set
Speed Response to Decreasing.

Load Anticipation
Large Frequency Overshoot on Recovery
Kla Gain may be too high and GOV output may be saturated. See Figure 24-8. Navigate to Settings, Bias
Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings and decrease Load Anticipation, Kla Gain.

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-11

Figure 24-8. Kla Gain Too High, GOV Output Saturated, Frequency Overshoots on Recovery
Tla Washout Filter Constant may be too high. Load anticipation output bias is held too long and has
significant magnitude after frequency reached nominal. See Figure 24-9. Navigate to Settings, Bias
Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings and decrease Load Anticipation, Tla Washout Filter
Constant.

Figure 24-9. Tla Too High Causing Recovery Overshoot

Poor Recovery
Kla Gain may be too low. See Figure 24-10. Navigate to Settings, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias
Control Settings and increase Load Anticipation, Kla Gain.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-12 9469300995

Figure 24-10. Kla Too Low – Frequency Recovery Improved with ~2 Hz Deviation
Tla Washout Filter Constant may be too low. GOV output decays rapidly before speed dip has finished.
See Figure 24-11. Navigate to Settings, Bias Control Settings, Governor Bias Control Settings and
increase Load Anticipation, Tla Washout Filter Constant.

Figure 24-11. Tla Too Low Causing Poor Recovery

Voltage Bias
Generator Voltage Does Not Change When Voltage Bias Changes
As a test, you can force a fixed voltage on the AVR bias output by setting the Min Output Voltage and
Max Output Voltage to the same value by navigating to Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-13

Settings, AVR Output. If the bias is current based, you can force a fixed current by setting the Min Output
Current and Max Output Current to the same value by navigating to Settings, Programmable Outputs,
Analog Output Settings, AVR Output.
If the voltage still does not change when varying the bias:
• Verify that the AVR is equipped and configured to accept bias inputs.
• Check connections to verify the wiring to the AVR bias is correct.
• If you have a digital voltage regulator, verify it is set up and programmed to accept a voltage bias
input.

Generator Voltage Decreases When AVR Speed Bias is Increased

Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, AVR Output screen and set
Voltage Response to Decreasing.

Generator Voltage Increases When AVR Bias is Decreased

Navigate to the Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output Settings, AVR Output screen and set
Voltage Response to Decreasing.

Load Sharing
Generator Breaker Status is not being received by the DGC-2020HD
Step 1: Close the generator breaker. Verify that the DGC-2020HD sees the status indicating the
generator breaker is closed. This is found on the front panel or in BESTCOMSPlus® under
Metering, Status, Bus Condition, Gen.
Step 2: If the status is not correct, check the digital input status on the DGC-2020HD through which the
breaker status is fed. Examine the input with BESTCOMSPlus® under Metering, Inputs, Contact
Inputs or Metering, Inputs, Remote Contact Inputs.
Step 3: If the input status is correct, but the Gen Breaker status under Metering, Status, Bus Condition,
Gen is not, check the PLC logic, and verify that the Gen Breaker fed into the DGC-2020HD is
tied in logic to the Status input on the Gen Breaker logic element.
Step 4: Make any corrections and re-check that the status is received correctly.

Generator Runs at Incorrect Speed when Generator Breaker is Closed

Step 1: Verify generator breaker status is being correctly received as described in Generator Breaker
Status is not being received by the DGC-2020HD. If the status is correct, proceed to the steps
below.
Step 2: Check the range set for the DGC-2020HD Governor Bias output by examining the Min. and
Max. Output voltage or current settings under Settings, Programmable Outputs, Analog Output
Settings, GOV Output. Verify that this range is valid for the governor or engine specified.
Step 3: Perform the tests in Speed Bias, above, to verify that setting the output to different values
within its range causes engine speed to vary in the desired manner.
Step 4: Measure the voltage or current on the governor analog bias signal from theDGC-2020HD. This
signal is found on terminals P6-67 (GOV–) and P6-66 (GOV+). If the output is at the midpoint of
its range, the generator should run at rated speed.
Step 5: Check the LS Input parameter on the Load Share Line screen found on the front panel at
Metering > Diagnostics > Load Share Line. Check if the normalized value from the Load Share
Line screen corresponds to the value measured at DGC-2020HD terminals P6-67 (GOV–) and
P6-66 (GOV+). If the normalized value is 0.00, the output should be in the midpoint of its range.
If the normalized value is 1.00, the output should be in the maximum point of its range. If the
normalized value is –1.00, the output should be in the minimum point of its range. Any other
values are scaled within the range. If the normalized value and the measured output do not

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-14 9469300995

match up, either there are wiring errors, or some external device is driving the governor bias
signal at the same time as theDGC-2020HD. Correct this conflicting situation if it exists.
Step 6: Check that the signal being measured at the DGC-2020HD terminals P6-67 (GOV–) and P6-66
(GOV+) is carried to the actual governor bias inputs on the engine governor. Measurements
should be the same as they were on theDGC-2020HD. If not, correct the wiring errors.
Step 7: Check if there are any relay contacts in the path between the DGC-2020HD governor bias
outputs and the engine governor’s bias input. Any relay contacts that are used to switch load
share lines, governor analog speed bias signals, or voltage regulator analog voltage bias
signals must use a relay intended for low voltage, low current applications to preserve signal
integrity. Signal relays, not power relays, must be used for this application. Verify the relay
contacts are not affecting the signal.
Step 8: If speed trim is enabled, verify that the speed trim set point is at the correct value for desired
operation.

Generators Do Not Share Load Equally

Step 1: Verify that load sharing is enabled in Settings, Bias Control, GOV Bias Control, kW Control.
Step 2: Verify generator breaker status is being correctly received as described in Generator Breaker
Status is not being received by the DGC-2020HD. If the status is correct, proceed to Step 3.
Step 3: Check the Load Share Line operating voltage range by examining the Min. and Max. Voltage
parameters found in BESTCOMSPlus® under Settings, Multigen Management, Load Share
Output. The range must be the same for all machines in the load share system.
Step 4: Measure the Load Share line voltage at terminals P6-70 (LS–) and P6-69 (LS+) on theDGC-
2020HD. The same voltage should be present on each DGC-2020HD. If not, correct any
issues.
Step 5: Examine the LS Input on the front panel of the DGC-2020HD under Metering > Diagnostics >
Load Share Line. This is the voltage read from the load share lines by the DGC-2020. Verify
this voltage matches the voltage read with a voltmeter across DGC-2020HD terminals P6-70
(LS–) and P6-69 (LS+). Verify the same LS Input is present on all the machines in the load
share system. If they are not equal, examine the load share line wiring and correct any issues.
Step 6: Check if there are any contacts in the load share line path between theDGC-2020HDs. Any
relay contacts that are used to switch load share lines, governor analog bias signals, or voltage
regulator analog voltage bias signals must use a relay intended for low voltage, low current
applications to preserve signal integrity. Signal relays, not power relays, must be used for this
application. Verify the relay contacts are not affecting the signal.
Step 7: If there are still issues, disconnect the load share line from the DGC-2020HD. Run a single
machine with load, and verify that it loads and unloads correctly, and runs at the correct speed.
Repeat for each machine.
Step 8: Re-attach load share lines to all DGC-2020HDs that are part of the load sharing system. Run
the Single machine with load, and verify that it loads and unloads correctly, and runs at the
correct speed. If the machine slows down when the generator breaker is closed, check the load
share line voltage. It should be equal, on a normalized basis, to the normalized kW produced
by the generator. As an example, if the generator is loaded to 50% capacity, the Load Share
Line voltage should be at the midpoint of the range. If it is not, something is driving the load
share line that should not be. The single unit should be the only device driving the load share
lines.
Step 9: Disconnect the load share lines from each non-running machine and see if the speed of the
running machine is correct. If a particular DGC-2020HD on a non-running machine seems to
affect the performance of the running machine, that DGC-2020HD may be damaged such that
the Load Share Line contacts are sticking, causing the DGC-2020HD to drive the load share
line even though the generator breaker is open. Tap the relays to see if the problem clears up.
If so, a faulty DGC-2020HD relay is indicated. Replace the DGC-2020HD, or wire in external

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-15

contacts to remove the DGC-2020HD from the load share system when the generator breaker
is closed.
Step 10: If it appears that something is driving the load share line but it is not the DGC-2020HD on one
of the non-running units, search for an external device that is driving or loading down the load
share lines.
Step 11: Repeat the preceding 3 steps for each machine.

Load Sharing Works Correctly, but a Single Unit Slows Down

With all units running, load sharing works correctly, but a single unit slows down after the generator
breaker is closed.
Step 1: Disconnect the load share line from the DGC-2020HD. Run the single machine with load, and
verify that it loads and unloads correctly, and runs at the correct speed. Repeat for each
machine.
Step 2: Re-attach load share lines to all DGC-2020HDs that are part of the load sharing system. Run
the Single machine with load, and verify that it loads and unloads correctly, and runs at the
correct speed. If the machine slows down when the generator breaker is closed, check the load
share line voltage. It should be equal, on a normalized basis, to the normalized kW produced
by the generator. As an example, if the generator is loaded to 50% capacity, the Load Share
Line voltage should be at the midpoint of the range. If it is not, something is driving the load
share line that should not be. The single unit should be the only device driving the load share
lines.
Step 3: Disconnect the load share lines from each non-running machine and see if the speed of the
running machine is correct. If a particular DGC-2020HD on a non-running machine seems to
affect the performance of the running machine, that DGC-2020HD may be damaged such that
the Load Share Line contacts are sticking, causing the DGC-2020HD to drive the load share
line even though the generator breaker is open. Tap the relays to see if the problem clears up.
If so, a faulty DGC-2020HD relay is indicated. Replace the DGC-2020HD, or wire in external
contacts to remove the DGC-2020HD from the load share system when the generator breaker
is closed.
Step 4: If it appears that something is driving the load share line but it is not the DGC-2020HD on one
of the non-running units, search for an external device that is driving or loading down the load
share lines.
Step 5: Repeat the preceding 3 steps for each machine.

Group Start and Group Stop Requests

Generator Does Not Start During an Island Group Start Request or Mains Parallel Group
Start Request
Step 1: Verify that a Group Start Request is active. In the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer, navigate
to DGC-2020HD > System Status > Breaker. Examine the Group Start Req column for nonzero
entries. Nonzero entries indicate active group start requests.
Step 2: Check that the generator to start is in the same Generator Group in the Group Segment
Settings as the breaker generating the Group Start Request. Only generators in the same
Generator Group as the Generator Group configured for the breaker issuing the Group Start
Request will respond.
Step 3: Verify that the generators to be started are in Auto mode, the System Type under the System
Settings is configured as Segmented Bus System, and Sequencing and Demand Start/Stop are
enabled.
Step 4: Verify that the generator to be started does not have an active Run with Load Stop as this will
supersede Group Start Requests and prevent the generator from starting.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-16 9469300995

Step 5: If a particular machine is expected to start but does not, check the sequencing status and verify
that the settings are properly configured. Group Start Requests for Start One or Start Demand
Based may not start all units because the unit in question may not have been within the set of
generators that should have started based on the sequencing criterion.

Generator Does Not Stop During a Group Stop Request

Step 1: Verify that a Group Stop Request is active. In the BESTCOMSPlus Metering Explorer, navigate
to DGC-2020HD > System Status > Breaker. Examine the Group Stop Req column for nonzero
entries. Nonzero entries indicate active group stop requests.
Step 2: Check that the generator to stop is in the same Generator Group in the Group Segment
Settings as the breaker generating the Group Stop Request. Only generators in the same
Generator Group as the Generator Group configured for the breaker issuing the Group Stop
Request will respond.
Step 3: Verify that the generators to be stopped are in Auto mode and Sequencing and Demand
Start/Stop are enabled.
Step 4: Verify that the generator to be stopped does not have an active Run with Load Start and is not
running due to an applied ATS contact. Either case will supersede Group Stop Requests and
prevent the generator from stopping.

DGC-2020HD Front Panel Diagnostics Screens

There are several diagnostic screens in the DGC-2020HD that can be useful for debugging load sharing
issues and I/O module related issues. The following debug screens are available: Load Share Line,
Control, AEM-2020, CEM-2020, VRM, Mains Power and VRM Control.

Load Share Line

This screen is useful for debugging load share related issues, and kW and var control related issues. It
gives visibility into the parameters metered and controlled by the DGC-2020HD.
The Load Share Line diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > Load
Share Line.
The following parameters are visible on the Load Share Line diagnostics screen:
• LS Input: Voltage the DGC-2020HD sees on its load share line input. Terminals P6-70 (LS–) and
P6-69 (LS+). This measurement is useful for debugging load share issues. Normally, all
machines that have their generator breakers closed should measure the same voltage for LS
Input. If this voltage differs, check for wiring errors, or problems with any relay contacts in the load
share line wiring. Any relay contacts that are used to switch load share lines, governor analog
speed bias signals, or voltage regulator analog bias signals must use a relay intended for low
voltage, low current applications to preserve signal integrity. Signal relays, not power relays, must
be used for this application.
• Speed Bias: This is the normalized value to which the DGC-2020HD drives the governor analog
bias output. If the value is –1.0, the output will be driven to the minimum value of the governor
bias output range. If the value is 1.0, the output will be driven to the maximum value of the
governor bias output range. If the value is 0.000, the output will be driven to the midpoint value
(i.e. half way between maximum and minimum values) of the governor bias output range. If the
generator breaker is open, or if the generator breaker is closed and speed trim and kW control
are disabled, the output from the DGC-2020HD will be the midpoint of the range, indicating the
generator should run at rated speed. Any relay contacts that are used to switch load share lines,
governor analog speed bias signals, or voltage regulator analog voltage bias signals must use a
relay intended for low voltage, low current applications to preserve signal integrity. Signal relays,
not power relays, must be used for this application.
• Voltage Bias: This is the normalized value to which the DGC-2020HD drives the voltage regulator
analog bias output. If the value is –1.0, the output will be driven to the minimum value of the

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-17

voltage regulator bias output range. If the value is 1.0, the output will be driven to the maximum
value of the voltage regulator bias output range. If the value is 0.00, the output will be driven to
the midpoint value (i.e. half way between maximum and minimum values) of the voltage regulator
bias output range. If the generator breaker is open, voltage trim and kvar control are disabled, so
the output from the DGC-2020HD will be the midpoint of the range, indicating the voltage
regulator should operate at rated voltage. Any relay contacts that are used to switch load share
lines, governor analog speed bias signal, or voltage regulator analog voltage bias signals must
use a relays intended for low voltage, low current applications to preserve signal integrity. Signal
relays, not power relays, must be used for this application.
• Watt Demand: This is the normalized kW demand requested by the DGC-2020HD. It is the
desired amount of power that the generator produces. It is normalized such that 1.0 indicates the
full kW capacity of the generator, 0.5 indicates 50% of the generator’s capacity, etc. When the
generator breaker is closed, and the kW controller is enabled, the Watt Demand indicates what
level of power should be generated. In an island load share system, this will correspond to the
value read on the load share lines. If the load share lines are at the 50% point of the load share
voltage range, the Watt Demand will be 0.50. If the generator breaker is closed, and the Parallel
To Mains logic element is true, the Watt Demand will be equal to the base load set point. When
the generator breaker is open or the kW controller is disabled, the Watt Demand will always be
equal to the value calculated from the voltage that the DGC-2020HD sees on its load share line.
• kW Total: This is the normalized kW being produced by the generator. A value of 1.0 represents
full machine capacity, 0.5 represents 50% of machine capacity, etc.
• Rated kW: This is the rated kW of the machine that should be equal to the Rated kW setting
under Settings, System Parameters, Rated Data.
• var Demand: This is the normalized var demand requested by the DGC-2020HD. It is the desired
about of var that the generator should produce. It is normalized such that 1.0 indicates the full var
capacity of the generator, 0.5 indicates 50% of the generator’s capacity, etc. When the generator
breaker is closed, and the var/PF controller is enabled, the var demand indicates what level of
reactive power should be generated. If the generator breaker is closed, and the Parallel To Mains
logic element is true, the var Demand will be equal to the kvar set point (%) if the controller is in
var control mode, or will equal the var value that will maintain the machine Power Factor at the
PF set point if the controller is in Power Factor mode. When the generator breaker is open or the
var/PF controller is disabled, the var Demand will always be 0.0. When running with the generator
breaker closed and the Parallel To Mains logic element is false (i.e. the generators are an
islanded system), the var Demand will be 0.0 as well. The DGC-2020HD runs in var Droop when
on an island system.
• kvar Total: This is the normalized kvar being produced by the generator. A value of 1.0
represents full machine capacity, 0.5 represents 50% of machine capacity, etc.
• Rated kvar: This is the calculated rated kvar of the machine, calculated from the rated kW of the
machine and the rated power factor of the machine according to var is equal to the square root of
(VA2 – Watt2).
• Load Share Active: This indicates when the load share line output contacts are closed.

Control
This screen is useful for debugging load share related issues, and kW and var control related issues. It
gives visibility into the states of the kW, kvar, Speed Trim, and Voltage controllers in the DGC-2020HD.
The Control diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > Control.
The following parameters are visible on the Control diagnostics screen:
• kW Ramp Status: This indicates the current kW ramp direction as None, Up, or Down.
• kW Ramp Demand: This is the normalized kW demand that is ramped from the initial kW loading
upon generator breaker closure to the desired kW set point. The rate at which the ramp occurs is
set by the Ramp Rate (%) in the Governor Bias Control settings. Note the rate is in terms of
percentage of machine capacity, it is not the time to ramp from zero up to the current desired kW
DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-18 9469300995

level. Thus, at low loading it may appear that the ramp is skipped. If the system is loaded to only
10% and a unit is brought on line with a ramp rate of 10% per second, it takes only one second to
reach 10% of capacity.
• kW Demand: This is the normalized requested kW demand on the generator. It is normalized
such that 1.0 indicates the full kW capacity of the generator, 0.5 indicates 50% of the generator’s
capacity, etc. When the generator breaker is closed, and the kW controller is enabled, the Watt
Demand indicates what level of power should be generated. In an island load share system, this
will correspond to the normalized value read on the load share lines. If the load share lines are at
the 50% point of the load share voltage range, the Watt Demand will be 0.5. If the generator
breaker is closed, and the Parallel To Mains logic element is true, the Watt Demand will be equal
to the base load set point. When the generator breaker is open or the kW controller is disabled,
the Watt Demand will always be equal to the value calculated from the voltage that the DGC-
2020HD sees on its load share line.
• Speed PID: This is the output value of the Speed PID controller. It will normally range
between -1.0 and 1.0, and will be zero any time the generator breaker is open, unless
synchronization is in progress. If the Speed Trim is enabled, the Speed PID will be nonzero when
the generator breaker is closed if there is any difference between the machine speed and the
Speed Trip Set Point parameter.
• kW PID: This is the output value of the kW PID controller. It will normally range between –1.0 and
1.0, and will be zero any time the generator breaker is open. If the kW Controller is enabled, the
kW PID will be nonzero when the generator breaker is closed if there is any difference between
the normalized kW generation and the Watt Demand value of the machine. If the kW controller is
disabled, the kW PID will always be zero.
• Speed Error: This is the normalized difference between the measured generator frequency and
the Speed Trip Set Point. A value of 1.0 means the difference is equal to the speed trip set point;
a value of –1.0 means the difference is equal to the negative of the speed trim set point. When
the generator breaker is open, or if Speed Trim is disabled, this will always be 0.000 unless
synchronization is in progress. When speed trip is enabled, and the generator breaker is closed,
this will typically be 0.000 or some relatively small number and move a small amount above and
below 0.000 as the speed trim controller corrects for any speed errors.
• kW Error: This is the normalized difference between the measured generator kW generation and
the Watt Demand described above. A value of 1.0 means the difference is equal to the Rated kW
of the machine; a value of –1.0 means the difference is equal to the negative of the Rated kW of
the machine. When the generator breaker is open, or if kW control is disabled, this will always be
0.000. When kW control is enabled, and the generator breaker is closed, this will typically be
0.000 or some relatively small number and move a small amount above and below 0.000 as the
kW controller corrects for kW errors. If a load is added or dropped from the system, the error will
be a non-zero value until the kW controller brings the kW generation to the desired level.
• Speed Bias: This is the normalized value to which the governor analog bias output of the DGC-
2020HD will be driven to accomplish desired kW and speed trim control. It is equal to the sum of
the kW PID and the Speed PID. If the value is –1.0, the speed bias output will be driven to the
minimum value of the governor bias output range. If the value is 1.0, the output will be driven to
the maximum value of the governor bias output range. If the value is 0.00, the output will be
driven to the midpoint value (i.e. half way between maximum and minimum values) of the
governor bias output range. If the generator breaker is open, or if the generator breaker is closed
and speed trim and kW control are disabled, the Speed Bias value will be 0.00, driving the bias
output to the midpoint of the governor bias output range indicating the generator should run at
rated speed.
• PF Setpoint: This is the power factor setpoint that will be used by the kvar controller when it is in
the Power Factor regulation mode.
• var Ramp Status: This indicates the current kvar ramp direction as None, Up, or Down.
• var Ramp Demand: This is the normalized var demand that is ramped from the initial var loading
upon generator breaker closure to the desired var output. The rate at which the ramp occurs is

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-19

set by the Ramp Rate (%) parameter in the AVR Bias Control settings. Note the rate is in terms of
percentage of machine capacity, it is not the time to ramp from zero up to the current desired var
level. Thus, at low var loading it may appear that the ramp is skipped. If the system is loaded to
only 10% and a unit is brought on line where the load rate is 10% per second, it takes only one
second to reach 10% of capacity.
• var Demand: This is the normalized requested kvar demand on the generator. It is normalized
such that 1.0 indicates the full kvar capacity of the generator, 0.5 indicates 50% of the generator’s
capacity, etc. When the generator breaker is closed, and the var/PF controller is enabled, the var
Demand indicates what level of reactive power should be generated. In an island load share
system, this will be determined by the droop characteristics set by the Droop Percentage and
Voltage Droop Gain parameters. If the generator breaker is closed, and the Parallel To Mains
logic element is true, the var Demand will be equal to the kvar set point if the var/PF controller is
in var mode or it will be calculated from the amount of kW being generated to maintain desired
machine Power Factor when the var/PF controller is in Power Factor control mode. When the
generator breaker is open, or the var/PF controller is disabled, the var Demand will be zero.
• Volt PID: This is the current output value of the Voltage PID controller. It will normally range
between –1.0 and 1.0, and will generally be zero at all times unless synchronization is in
progress.
• kvar PID: This is the current output value of the kvar PID controller. It will normally range between
–1.0 and 1.0, and will be zero any time the generator breaker is open. If the var/PF controller is
enabled, the kvar PID will be nonzero when the generator breaker is closed if there is any
difference between the normalized kvar generation and the var Demand value of the machine. If
the var/PF controller is disabled, the kvar PID will always be zero.
• Volt Error: This is the normalized difference between the measured generator voltage and the
voltage to which the DGC-2020HD is trying to synchronize. It will be 0.00 at all times except when
the DGC-2020HD is trying to synchronize its generator inputs to its bus input. When
synchronizing, this will typically be 0.000 or some relatively small number and move a small
amount above and below 0.000 as voltage controller corrects for any voltage errors.
• kvar Error: This is the normalized difference between the measured generator kvar generation
and the var Demand described above. A value of 1.0 means the difference is equal to the Rated
kvar of the machine; a value of –1.0 means the difference is equal to the negative of the Rated
kvar of the machine. When the generator breaker is open, or if var/PF controller is disabled, this
will always be 0.000. When var/PF control is enabled, and the generator breaker is closed, this
will typically be 0.000 or some relatively small number and move a small amount above and
below 0.000 as the var/PF controller corrects for var errors. If a reactive load is added or dropped
from the system, the error will be nonzero until the var/PF controller brings the var generation to
the desired level.
• Voltage Bias: This is the normalized value to which the voltage regulator analog bias output of the
DGC-2020HD will be driven to accomplish desired kvar and Voltage control. It is equal to the sum
of the Volt PID and the kvar PID. If the value is –1.0, the voltage bias output will be driven to the
minimum value of the voltage regulator analog bias output range. If the value is 1.0, the output
will be driven to the maximum value of the voltage regulator analog bias output range. If the value
is 0.000, the output will be driven to the midpoint value (i.e. half way between maximum and
minimum values) of the voltage regulator analog bias output range. If the generator breaker is
open, or if the generator breaker is closed and kvar control is disabled, the Volt Bias value will be
0.00, driving the bias output to the midpoint of the voltage regulator analog bias output range
indicating the voltage regulator should operate the generator at rated voltage.

AEM-2020
This screen shows the binary data that is being sent between the AEM-2020 (Analog Expansion Module)
and the DGC-2020HD.
The AEM diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > AEM.
The following parameters are visible on the AEM diagnostics screen:

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-20 9469300995

• DGC To AEM BP: DGC-2020HD to AEM-2020 Binary Points. This is a 32-bit, bit packed number
representing the binary points transmitted from the DGC-2020HD to the AEM-2020. Debug at this
level is not necessary.
• AEM To DGC BP: AEM-2020 to DGC-2020HD Binary Points. This is a 32-bit, bit packed number
representing the binary points transmitted from the AEM-2020 to the DGC-2020HD. Debug at this
level is not necessary.

CEM-2020
This screen shows the binary data that is being sent between the CEM-2020 (Contact Expansion Module)
and the DGC-2020HD.
The CEM diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > CEM.
The following parameters are visible on the CEM diagnostics screen:
• DGC To CEM BP: DGC-2020HD to CEM-2020 Binary Points. This is the status of the CEM-2020
output relays being transmitted from the DGC-2020HD to the CEM-2020. This is a 32-bit, bit packed
number representing the desired states of the CEM-2020 outputs. The left-most bit is the first output,
etc.
• CEM To DGC BP: CEM-2020 to DGC-2020HD Binary Points. This is the status of the CEM-2020
inputs being transmitted from the CEM-2020 to the DGC-2020HD. This is a 32-bit, bit packed number
representing the metered states of the CEM-2020 inputs. The left most bit is the first input, etc.

VRM
This screen shows the binary data that is being sent between the VRM-2020 (Voltage Regulator
Expansion Module) and the DGC-2020HD.
The VRM diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > VRM.
The following parameters are visible on the VRM diagnostics screen:
• DGC To VRM BP: DGC-2020HD to VRM-2020 Binary Points. This is a 32-bit, bit packed number
representing the binary points transmitted from the DGC-2020HD to the VRM-2020. Debug at this
level is not necessary.
• VRM To DGC BP: VRM-2020 to DGC-2020HD Binary Points. This is a 32-bit, bit packed number
representing the binary points transmitted from the VRM-2020 to the DGC-2020HD. Debug at this
level is not necessary.

Mains Power
This screen is useful for debugging mains power control mode related issues. It gives visibility into the
states of the mains power controller in the DGC-2020HD.
The Mains Power diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > Mains
Power.
The following parameters are visible on the Mains Power diagnostics screen:
• Total Mains kW: This displays the measured kW level of the mains.
• Error: This is the normalized difference between the measured system generated kW and the kW the
DGC-2020HD is trying to achieve.
• Baseload: This displays the commanded baseload to maintain import/export or peak shave level.
• Sys Gen kW: This displays the cumulative kW output of participating generators.
• Sys Rated kW: This displays the total kW capacity of participating generators.
• Total System kW: This displays the cumulative kW output of participating generators summed with
the total imported kW from mains.

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 24-21

• Baseload Setpt: This displays the active baseload setpoint.

• Peak Shv Setpt: This displays the active peak shave setpoint.
• Im/Ex Setpt: This displays the active import/export setpoint.

VRM Control
This screen is useful for debugging VRM-2020 control related issues. It gives visibility into the states of
the VRM-2020 regulation modes and limiters in the DGC-2020HD.
The VRM Control diagnostics screen is located on the front panel at Metering > Diagnostics > VRM
Control.
The following parameters are visible on the VRM Control diagnostics screen:
• VRM AVR Setpoint: This displays the AVR mode setpoint.
• VRM FCR Setpoint: This displays the FCR mode setpoint.
• VRM AVR Ref: This displays the final AVR setpoint (reference) after other factors such as raise/lower
biases or an active limiter.
• VRM FCR Ref: This displays the final FCR setpoint (reference) after other factors such as raise/lower
biases or an active limiter.
• VRM Control Output: This displays the VRM control output (PID) in per unit.
• VRM AVR Error: This displays the difference between the AVR reference and the measured voltage
in per unit.
• VRM FCR Error: This displays the difference between the FCR reference and the measured current
in per unit.
• VRM OEL Reference: This displays the calculated OEL reference in per unit of takeover OEL or
summing point OEL depending on configuration.
• VRM OEL Takeover Err: This displays the difference between the takeover OEL reference and the
measured field current in per unit.
• VRM OEL Summing Err: This displays the difference between the summing point OEL reference and
the measured field current in per unit.
• VRM OEL Summing Bias: This displays the OEL Summing control output (PID) in per unit.
• VRM UEL Reference: This displays the calculated UEL reference in per unit.
• VRM UEL Error: This displays the difference between the UEL reference and the measured field
current in per unit.
• VRM UEL Bias: This displays the UEL control output (PID) in per unit.
• VRM Tracking Error: This displays the difference of the inactive mode setpoint in relation to the active
mode setpoint in percent.
• EDM Ripple: The exciter diode ripple is reported by the exciter diode monitor (EDM) as the induced
ripple in the exciter field current.

DGC-2020HD Troubleshooting
24-22 9469300995

Troubleshooting DGC-2020HD
9469300995 25-1

25 • BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader

Tool
Introduction
The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is a software application, which allows the user to instantly
upload settings to Basler BESTCOMSPlus-compatible products by scanning a pre-registered bar code,
which promotes consistency, reduces potential errors, and saves time.

Setup
The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool software and a bar code reader (acquired separately) must be
installed on the same PC.

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool Installation

System Recommendations
The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is bundled with BESTCOMSPlus software. BESTCOMSPlus
software is built on the Microsoft® .NET Framework. The setup utility that installs BESTCOMSPlus on
your PC also installs the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool and the required version of .NET
Framework (if not already installed). BESTCOMSPlus operates with systems using Windows® XP 32-bit
SP3, Windows Vista 32-bit SP1, Windows 7 32-bit (all editions), Windows 7 64-bit (all editions), Windows
8, and Windows 10. Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later must be installed on your PC before installing
BESTCOMSPlus. System recommendations for the .NET Framework and BESTCOMSPlus are listed in
Table 25-1.
Table 25-1. System Recommendations for BESTCOMSPlus and the .NET Framework
System Type Component Recommendation
32/64 bit Processor 2.0 GHz
32/64 bit RAM 1 GB (minimum), 2 GB (recommended)
32 bit Hard Drive 100 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC)
950 MB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC)
64 bit Hard Drive 100 MB (if .NET Framework is already installed on PC)
2.1 GB (if .NET Framework is not already installed on PC)
To install and run BESTCOMSPlus, a Windows user must have Administrator rights.

Installation

Note
Do not connect a USB cable until setup completes successfully.
Connecting a USB cable before setup is complete may result in errors.

1. Insert the BESTCOMSPlus CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.

2. When the BESTCOMSPlus Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button for
the BESTCOMSPlus application. The setup utility installs BESTCOMSPlus, the .NET Framework (if
not already installed), the USB driver, and the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool on your PC.
When BESTCOMSPlus installation is complete, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows
programs menu. This folder is accessed by clicking the Windows Start button and then accessing the

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

25-2 9469300995

Basler Electric folder in the Programs menu. The Basler Electric folder contains an icon that starts the
BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.

Bar Code Reader and Bar Codes

The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool is compatible with bar code readers, which conform to
UnifiedPOS specifications. Bar code readers and bar code labels are not provided and must be acquired
separately. Refer to the bar code reader’s documentation for installation instructions.
Any bar code compatible with your bar code reader may be used.

BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool settings are found on two main screens, the Loader Grid and
Configuration screen. The Loader Grid contains management options for the product settings files and
their associated bar codes. The Configuration screen contains product-specific options for the default
behavior of the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool. These settings are described in the following
paragraphs.

Loader Grid
One entry, or row, in the Loader Grid contains all of the necessary data to associate a product settings file
with a bar code. New entries can be added. Existing entries can be edited, deleted, and uploaded to a
Basler product.

Figure 25-1. Loader Grid

Scanning Bar Codes

Place the cursor in the text field, found at the top of the Loader Grid screen, and scan a bar code. If
successful, the digits which comprise the bar code appear in the text field. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DGC-2020HD

9469300995 25-3

Loader Tool automatically searches for this bar code among the entries in the Loader Grid and displays
the matching entry. Click Clear to remove the digits from the text field.

Adding an Entry
Click Add to create an entry. The BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool: Add Device dialog box appears
(Figure 25-2).

Figure 25-2. Add Device Screen

Enter the name of the entry in the Name field. This appears in the first column of the Loader Grid.
Select the product type from the Type drop-down menu. This appears in the second column of the Loader
Grid.
Enter the bar code of the entry in the UPC Barcode field by placing the cursor in the UPC Barcode field
and scanning the bar code.
To select the product settings file for the entry, click the browse (…) button in the Location field. Use
standard Windows methods to navigate to the desired product settings file and click Open. Ensure that
the selected product type in the Type field matches that of the product settings file specified in the
Location field.
Click OK when finished.

Editing an Entry
To Edit an existing entry, select the entry in the Loader Grid and click Edit. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings
Loader Tool: Edit Device dialog box appears. The options are identical to those of the Add Device dialog.
When the desired changes have been made, click OK.

Deleting an Entry
To delete an entry from the Loader Grid, select the entry and click the Delete button. A prompt appears
providing the option to confirm or cancel the deletion.

Uploading an Entry
Select an entry and click Upload. A dialog appears which provides connection options for the appropriate
type of device. Refer to the Basler product instruction manual for detailed connection information. Once a
connection is established, the product settings associated with the entry are uploaded.

Configuration Settings
For configuration settings, click the Configure button in the bottom left of the Loader Grid. The product
tabs on the left represent the compatible Basler products. Each product tab contains tabs for Settings
Files and Connection Options. The options on these tabs are described below.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

25-4 9469300995

Setting Files Options

Use Saved Path: When enabled, the path specified in the Loader Grid entry is used when uploading the
settings file.
Single Folder: When enabled, this specifies a single folder, which contains all settings files for the
product. The Windows filename specified in the Location field of the Loader Grid entry is searched for in
the Single Folder location. For example, all settings files for a product are located in “C:\files”. The
Location field in the Loader Grid entry for a device contains “C:\documents\settings\DECS-250
Settings.bstx”. The BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool searches in “C:\files” for the file named
“DECS-250 Settings.bstx”.
Append Bar-Code to Location: When enabled, the bar code is appended to the specified location when
uploading the settings file. For example, an entry with the bar code “0002” is located in C:\files\0002 and
an entry with the bar code “0003” is located in C:\files\0003.
Logon: If User Name and Password are specified, you will not be prompted for credentials when
required.
Save After Upload: After uploading a settings file, the settings are downloaded from the connected
device and saved to the specified location, when enabled.
Upload Security: When enabled, the security settings stored in the settings file are uploaded to the
device. Credentials will be requested if not already specified.
Figure 25-3 illustrates the Setting Files tab.

Figure 25-3. Configuration, Settings Files Tab

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DGC-2020HD

9469300995 25-5

Connection Options
Connection options consist of the three selections described below. Refer to the Basler product
instruction manual for detailed connection information.
Always Prompt for Connection: When enabled, a dialog appears which provides connection options for
the appropriate type of device each time a connection attempt is made.
Ethernet Connection: When enabled, the BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool automatically attempts
to connect to the specified IP address before uploading settings.
USB Connection: When enabled, the BESTCOMSPlus® Settings Loader Tool automatically attempts to
connect to the device via USB port before uploading settings.
Figure 25-4 illustrates the Connection Options tab.

Figure 25-4. Configuration, Connection Options Tab

General Operation
The steps listed below are provided as a general guideline for how to operate the BESTCOMSPlus
Settings Loader Tool when the initial setup is complete and the settings files are associated with bar
codes.
1. Power on the device that will receive the new settings. Ensure proper communication connections
have been made between the device and the PC running BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
2. Run BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool.
3. Place cursor in search bar.

DGC-2020HD BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool

25-6 9469300995

4. Scan bar code.

5. Settings file is automatically highlighted and isolated in the grid.
6. Click Upload.
7. BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool automatically connects to device and uploads settings. Device
connection is automatic unless “Always prompt for connection” is enabled.

BESTCOMSPlus Settings Loader Tool DGC-2020HD

12570 Route 143 No. 59 Heshun Road Loufeng District (N) 111 North Bridge Road
Highland IL 62249-1074 USA Suzhou Industrial Park 15-06 Peninsula Plaza
Tel: +1 618.654.2341 215122 Suzhou Singapore 179098
Fax: +1 618.654.2351 P.R. CHINA Tel: +65 68.44.6445
email: [email protected] Tel: +86 512.8227.2888 Fax: +65 68.44.8902
Fax: +86 512.8227.2887 email: [email protected]
email: [email protected]